


^ v* v 




































































- ss 
















\ °- 












^ r t 




























o v 





























^, c* 






^ «■ 



\.o* 






a^> ^ 







- 






o x 

















- a* 



> ^ : *% ^ 



•3 



A NEW PRACTICAL 



HEBREW GRAMMAR 

WITH 

HEBREW-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-HEBREW 
EXERCISES 

AND 

A HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY 



SOLOMON DEUTSCH, A.M., Ph.D. 



SECOND EDITION, ENLARGED BY NEW VOCABULARIES 





NEW YORK 
HENRY HOLT & CO 

1872. 



^ 



.V" 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in trie year 1868, by 
Dr. Solomon Deutsch, 
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the U. S., for the District of Md. 



Printed by Detjtcsh a Golukrman' 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 



Although many and valuable Hebrew Grammars have appeared in 
this country, which in completeness and critical ability have left little to 
be desired, I yet venture to offer this work to the public,^ with the ex- 
pectation that this result of my labors will still be found useful to the 
Hebrew student. 

It has been my aim, divesting the Grammar of all extraneous detail, 
to present it full and complete in every necessary particular. I have 
especially had in view the wants of those instructing themselves, for 
whom, as well as for schools, I have endeavored to make this volume a 
practical introduction to the language of the Old Testament. 

I shall briefly recapitulate the distinctive features of this manual. 

1. To facilitate the commission of the rules to memory, they have 
been expressed with all the conciseness consistant with perspicuity. 

2. Believing that exceptions are more properly to be sought in the 
Lexicon and Critical Commentary, I have noted such irregularities only 
as, by their frequency, can claim to be held integral parts of the language. 

3. The illustration of the abstract by the concrete being necessary 
to the clear understanding of the former, the rules have been explained 
and confirmed by examples, and further elucidated by exercises. 

4. In elaborating these exercises, I have taken great care to select 
valuable sentences, containing either an interesting historical fact or a 
sententious moral. The internal character of the passage has been con- 
sidered as well as its external grammatical form. — The Syntactical part is 
without exercises, the rules being illustrated by examples only. Never- 
theless the student will become fully familiar with them by the constant 
reference made to them in the Etymological part. 

5. In the requisition of a language, the learner, in order to familiar- 
ize himself with the grammatical forms, should make frequent transla- 
tions into it from his mother-tongue. To this end English-Hebrew exer- 
cises have been prepared, particularly illustrating the rules which they 
immediately follow, anticipating nothing, but exactly keeping pace with 
the student's progress. I have intentionally made the construction of the 
English sentences conformable to the verbal arrangement of the Hebrew. 
Where the English construction admits of no change, I have endeavored 
to aid the students by help of numerals irregularly placed. 

6. The approved results of continental research have been concisely 
embodied in this volume. Gesenius, Ewald, Fuerst (Lexicon), S. D. 



IV 

Luzzatto (Grammaticadella Lingua Ebraica), Naegelsbach, being follow- 
ed in important points ; the latter's arrangement of the declensions has 
been preserved with slight alterations. 

7. In the Paradigms, presented, at the end of the Grammar, the 
groundforms are distinguished by asterisks. 

8. Although the words in the Exercises are translated as they oc- 
cur, Vocabularies are added ; first, to save the student's time and labor 
in seeking a forgotten word, secondly, that he' may refer to them, should 
he be in doubt as to the form of the word when uninfected* 

9. A Chrestomathy composed of various selections in prose and 
poetry from the Old Testament is given. 

10. The two vocabularies contain about two thousand different 
Hebrew words in general use. How large a proportion this is, one can easily 
perceive, when one considers ihat the whole number of radical words in 
the language does not exceed 1867. It is therefore expected that the 
diligent student in a few months, will be enabled by mastering the Heb- 
rew exercises and the Chrestomathy to read understandingly the less 
diflicult portions of the Old Testament. 

By this enumeration it will be readily seen, that the plan in some re- 
spects possesses the character of novelty, and it is hoped that this fruit of 
earnest and zealous exertion will be found acceptable and useful. 

Baltimore, July 15, 1868. 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



At the request of many prominent and experienced Professors of 
Hebrew, I have added two complete Vocabularies to all the Exercises 
and the Chrestomathy in my Grammar, and present the book in this 
improved form to the public as a second edition. 

Thanking the learned critics and the press for the courtesy extended 
to *my book on its first appearance and hoping that in its present more 
convenient form it may meet with continued favor, 

I subscribe myself 

Very respectfully 

THE AUTHOR. 

Baltimore, September 1872. 



PART I. 

OF THE ELEMENTS. 



CHAPTER L 

LETTEKS, SOUNDS AND SIGNS. 
§ L ALPHABET, 

1. Twenty-two consonants compose the Hebrew Alphabet. 

Form. Name. Power. 

a scarcely audible 
breathing 1 . 

bh, b 



Aleph tftX tfyfc ox) 

D (3) Beth JT3 (* jT| house) 

j Q) Grimel bm Sp| camel) 

1 (1) Daleth nS'l (- ft^/door) 



g in go 
d 



He 

Vav 

Zain 

Cheth 

Teth 



*H (the meaning doubtful) h in he 
*)*) (a nail, hook) w or v 

p? (a weapon) z 



Yod 

Finaf. 

D O) "] Caph 
7 Lamed 

ft D Mem 
3 J Nun 

D Samech 



j"Vt7 (a fence) 
JTtO (a basket) 
^V^Thand) 



ch in the German 
word nach 



y m ye 



£p (the hollow of the ch or k 

bent hand) 
1Q 1 ? (* 1^0 ox-goad) 1 

D*?? ( '- D*0 water) m 

JU (a fish) n 

T]DD (a prop) s in song 



2 Part I. Elements. 

Form. Name. Power. 

J* Ay in W (eye) not pronounced 

Final. 

fi (3) t] Pe Kg ( * n§ mouth) ph, p 

V J> Tsade H¥ (a fish hook) ts 

p Koph wllp (the eye of a needle or k 

the back of the head) 
n Eesh £»*"). ( * £>>n * ^K1 head) r 

% If ji^i***) f 

J") (il) Tav m (a cross mark) th t 

Note I. X and H may be respectively compared with the Greek 
spiritus lenis and asper; H is a deep guttural sound (the German 
ch) ; I? like ^ is commonly omitted in reading. The nasal (ng) pro- 
nunciation of ty is incorrect. In the Septuagint it is sometimes represen- 
ted by the spiritus asper or lenis, sometimes by the Greek Gamma = g. 
In the Arabic the corresponding letter is a deep rolling guttural 
(rg), probably the true pronunciation. 

Note IX. These characters are not the original forms, the pre- 
sent letters not having been adopted, until long after the Babylo- 
nian captivity or according to some a century befgre Christ, hence 
this alphabet has been termed, the Assyrian (properly Babylonian) 
square letter : **WJtf ^HD and tfT)D SfO • The coins struck 
at the time of the Maccabees and the Samaritan Pentateuch present 
the ancient Hebrew Characters which are similar to the Phoenician. 

Note III. The names of the letters have probably been selected 
for the sake of the initial sounds. In old Hebrew, Samaritan and 
Phoenician writing, the forms of the letters resembled the things ex- 
pressed by their names: this resemblance is still partly seen in the 
present alphabet: as ) a nail, j a weapon, £0 a basket, 3 the hol- 
low of the bent hand etc. 
2. Hebrew is read from the right hand to the left. 
Exercise 1 . 
Write the Roman characters corresponding to the fol- 
lowing Hebrew letters : 

,nro >id ,na m n: ,*a ,21 m ,pf ^n nib w ,nn >p 
•on ^-n >t ,on ,dd >nw .]& nfr* nh) >n >nm ,nm 
>np ny ,\u >^op &q ,n& ,rrM my nnx .my .ndd 
.arm. tfD nnpri -may .nSo ra .jmp vhp p hr\ 



§ 2. Division of Letters. 3 

Exercise 2. 

Write the Hebrew letters corresponding to the follow- 
ing Roman characters : 

1, ch, h, k, t, th, s, sh, r, d, p, y, w, g, f, z, tz, n, g, 
b, ch, lchn, km, rtz, zr, ytlim, clil, kl, shb, dbktra, 
hnshrm, bmdbr, gdl, ktn, zvcli, sw, shlwt, gy, tw, gbth, 
hzt, nthn. 

§ 2. DIVISION OF LETTERS. 

The letters are divided according to the organs with 
which they are pronounced into: 

Gutturals ^HHK 

Palatals pyy 

Linguals rU^E3"I 

Dentals or Sibilants, WXDl 

Labials fp*Q 

The letter *") partakes of both a guttural and dental cha- 
racter. 

Exercise 3. 
Give in the following words the names of the letters 
and the classes to which they belong : 

pitfy to bin iWm np-M toapb wy mr? nox rta 
lastfn Sn >pj dti iDDnn Sk un Sk h^Ski dw w 
np-tta ayo did ; rnh* m ^ipa ^jn 1 ? nanao : nrn mpaa 

jb^p aba an pnD 

§ 3. VOWEL - LETTERS AND VOWEL - SIGNS. 

1. The letters '1HK Ehevi (a word used to assist the me- 
mory) form a separate class, being called vowel letters, 
they sometimes representing not consonantal but vowel 
sounds. 

2. Besides these vowel -letters, which generally indicate 
long vowels, in the 6th century nine vowel signs (nij^fl 
or niTlp}), were introduced, points and strokes placed, 
with two exceptions, under the letter, after which they are 
to be pronounced. Of these nine signs, three represent long 
vowels, three short and three doubtful. 



Part I. Elements. 



Long Vowels. 

Name. Form. Power. 

Kfimets pp£ 
Tsere H¥ 



Cholem QTjn 



a in father 
e in there 
6 in note 



Short Vowels 

Name. Form. 

Patach nriQ 
Seghol SttD 

£S wife 



NAME. 



Doubtful Vowels, 

FORM. 



Power. 

a in sharp 

e in met 

6 in not 

or rather 

u in dull 



Chirek pyn 
Shurek rTW 



Kubbuts 



m. 



vh&) 



POWER. 

i in machine or i in pin 

u in rule 

u in rule or u in full. 



Note I. Cholem is a dot over the ^ as ) or the *) is omitted 
and the dot placed above on the left of the consonant : as jj * go, 
1 * do. Shurek is always placed in the bosom of ^ as } « The 
Chirek-point is placed under the letter : as 5 i if ? follows it is 
long, if not, doubtful : *J long 1, 3 either long or short i. 
3. The classification of the vowels, according to the three 
primary vowel sounds, from which they have originated, is 
also of importance. These are the vowels A (in father) I 
(in machine) U (in rule), for E and are properly diph- 
thongs : E arising from a + h from a -f- u. 

A. CLASS. I_ CLASS. 17. CLASS. 

— •= a in father * — or — = 1 in machine } = u in rule 

— = a in sharp — = i in pin — = u or u in full 

— = e in there ) or _ = o in note 

— ' ' ■= e in met — == u in dull. 



a in fate 



Note II. The above pronunciation is that of the exiled Portu- 
guese and Spanish Jews and their descendants (the Sefaradic); the 
German Jews pronounce (t ) like 6 in home and •_ or ) like 6 in 
home or ow in vow; the Polish pronounce (••) like i in bind, ()) 
almost like oi in spoil, } almost as the French u, the other vowels 
like their German brethren. The Sefaradic is considered the pro- 
nunciation most nearly correct. The proper names in the Septua- 
gint and Josephus and the Hebrew phrases occurring in the New Test- 
ament, are written in accordance with this mode, which is also con- 
firmed by the present usage of the Jews of Palestine and the anal- 
ogy of the Arabic. 



§ 3. Vowel Letters & Vowel Signs. & 

4. These three classes respectively correspond to the vow- 
el-letters IHtt which latter may he considered as their re- 
presentatives : K and H represent the A class, or as it is 
usually expressed, are homogeneous with this class, * is homo- 
geneous with the I class, i is homogeneous with the U 
class. 

5. The long vowels of the I and U class are most fre- 
quently accompanied hy their correspondent Vowel-letter s> 
At the end of a word the long vowel of the A class is 
usually written with N or H : as NVD, TObi in the middle 

T T T T . 

hut rarely with N : as *J1N¥D, and never with Jl ( /N"ntPJ? 
TT£ ITI? are compound words and Jl considered as quies- 
eing at the end of the first.) Therefore the *1J1X are vocal- 
ized, or to use the common expression rest (quiesce) in the 
following cases : 

• in * T , '—, >-: as k> ^#. 

1 in -1, \: as TJT0-, tpfr. 

The consonantal power of N and Jl is so feeble, that frt 
without the vowel-sign is mute after all the long vowels, 
and final jl without the vowel is mute after Kamets, 
Tsere, Cholem and Seghol: as 

♦hVji ,riSriK ,np^ ,n:m ;t& >xtii am >wn >m 

t: t I"- TT •• ■ T 

6. *) and ♦ when preceded hy a heterogeneous vowel-sign ,. 
or followed hy a vowel or Sh/va (§ 4) or when having a 
Dagesh (§ 7) retain their consonantal sound: as *H read vav, 
1JJ * gev, *|1 ^ chay, *ij| * goy. In the termination V— the 
1 is silent: as VJ33 read panav. 

Note 3. ) preceded by a vowel-sign or Sh'va [§ 4] or fol- 
lowed by a vowel must be read as v : as ?*)J? read avon, H1V5 reac ^ 
mitsvoth, Jli^ r ead love. 

Note 4. When the ^j-j£$ especially *) and * accompany their 
homogeneous vowels, the latter are said to be written fully (K70) ; 
without the quiescent letters they are said to be written defectively 

Cipro : nfapi pns > Sn? &ny \ rhp > 6ffi& > hy defectively. 



6 Part I. Elements. 

Note 5. The Cholem-point without 1 is omitted when & pre- 
ceeds: as in' #$& or when ^'follows: as in Ht^D • 

Exercise 4. 
Read the following syllables and words according to 
the pronunciation of the Portuguese Jews : 

h $ # >£i # >iy 'p o ,? h o .* 4? <H I >1 >vr >"! ^ >3 >s* 
,n n ,p a ,i ,' o o ii >r ,m J .a h .tsh &• # atf >i&>'vn 

■ I V -.XT - T 

.1 >r >n ,n h >» o ^p 4< >& k ^ .10 .ft >b> >?r >t? 

Exercise 5. 

in *n n >? 11 n ni in *n in n 1.1 *o i3 b ^ kk 

...... T .. T T 

ND >D >J JO \S iS iS kS ^ K3 V V » » ID *B ND 

T • • t •• T T ... .. -r 

1# f M? ri n ip 'p. *V itf NV to '3 N9 V W; 

.in >n an isr 

T 

Exercise 6. 

do Dp fp? T|3 jn am n^ ^ ma rr? na 3$ 

du dj d: pv fV W T 5 ^ tfg ^i$ pj p: jj did 
. nir 11 n m. ' pS rpn £]iy d.j di du 

Exercise 7. 

h rS u vS vS ^S nS <n <S *m ^ u «u »y vi 
...... T _ T T T 

rpft dSk :d# Wo rjgt? np# ng'b »r i< fb n 

2gtr p#n jgtr ncjty pety ntfp n#p n#fe> Sd^ 

,iW vS? >np no ^p nft cnn rpn 

Exercise 8. 

\y_ x^iDi aqio KiDi nsre «fa v i3K nn nip iSb; 
,dkS rv\y n>Sy iW iW ip jinan r> 

- T 7*V T V"t V T T |~ I T T T 

ntBSyi vnxpi i^ni iip ^ip »ip *ip rSj; pj; njS 
.ritr'Ki ir w nn iS^' dijoi nin nn nn m m 



§ 4. Sh'va. 7 

Exercise 9. 
Write the following syllables and words in Hebrew 
characters: ye, ya, bo, ki zu, wu, til, to, ra, raj bin, pi v, 
gav, bechi, gau, dodi, vav, zodu, bara, paninu, tuvecha. 
gorolenu, yagllu, yosher, moshel, bosem, shalosh, love, 
kol [defectively] kol [fully] shomer [fully] choshev [de- 
fectively] shi [fully] pe [defectively] nazid [fully]. 

• § 4. SH'VA. 

1. At the beginning or in the middle of a word the 
vowelless consonant also receives a sign, two dots (:) de- 
nominated:. Sh'va $)&* (for &*)&> emptiness) or JO&* (for 

&y& fissure, gap, i. e. bare of vowel): as 7t0p > fi^top • Final 
*J und two vowelless consonants at the end of a word re- 
ceive the Sh'va: as Th . tSttfpi hence also a letter with 
Dagesh-forte (§ 1) : as jlfU ♦ 

2. The Sh'va under the initial consonant of a word or 
syllable is called JT3 $0$ vocal Sh'va, because it indicates 

a slight vowel sound, like an obscure or halfe; as 7DP 
read K'tol. Sh'va under the final consonant of a sylable is 
silent and termed therefore n.3 H)& silent Sh'va. 

3. Sh'va is only given to a consonant and never to the 
^(IK when they represent vowels or quiesce: as Mp^!"*! 

Note I. Vocal Sh'va for the most part originating from the 
dropping of a vowel [§ 14, II. Rejection] retained in pronunciation 
an aftersound [Nachklang] of that original vowel, which was indi- 
cated by the addition of this vowel to the Sh'va : as D^'lp for 
D'BHp from trip ; ^HV} for ^HD from ^Ht ', thus always with 
gutturals: H^lEN from \i>2H > D'tSHH from Vln. Seethe next 
§ and Note. 

Note II. On the distinction of vocal and silent Sh'va see § 11. 

Exercise 10. 

injur rnirrr r\m rirn* j#:d yh$ iti\ rfjng tfip 
Snnnr \hpm «n^ rteW m^n'm pftirn dnptk 



8 Part I. Elements. 

*3D9 rijj*VR nj?St? dwd mpiip nS'13 nS>S-j 
jwtotf -H3R W^- ^j5tfj> 'Tin* n-prr jv^ ra?K 

§ 5. COMPOSITE SH'VA. 
When the vowelless initial consonant of a word or sylla- 
ble is one of the gutturals ^nUN (§ 2) a short vowe # l (-), 
{•••) or ( t ) is added to the Sh'va, to indicate a more dis- 
tinct sound, as a half a, e or o. This Sh'va is called 
composite SJi'va (compounded with a vowel) or fitpn Cha- 
teph (rapid) from its rapid utterance. 
These are: - Chateph-Pattach i-Qg. 
Chateph-Seghol -j.2K 
Chateph-Kamets Hfl 
Note. In a few instances the compound Sh'vas are also written 
under other consonants : as iHfl ♦ 

Exercise 11. 

rvffyt wtwqx npj;i ngN b>u# Sn# nbrj DiSrr 
^TSfp wnn tfifcf >¥0 ^Z. ^ n, ?"l^ n ^- PT5S 

iSj;§ wr?K nqiaii nSyrr nro? ^>s£t ^^3 '35** 
o^p"]p T ^1 n 1^3 !) W# n 0pi? J^!^ w. 

§ 6. PATACH FURTIVE. 

The Patach (-) under the gutturals ft V an d M [17 
with a dot called Mappik § 7] at the end of a word is 
not read after the letter as usual, but before it : as fTf! 
read ruach, f7H read reach, fliD-3 read gaboahh. This 
Patach does not belong to the form of the word, therefore 
it falls away when the word is lengthened: as (TH, TFffi. 
It is called Patach furtive PD^ HilS) > because its position 
and pronunciation are, as it were, illegitimate. 
Exercise 12. 

yh rta rrhSK 8779V ^*f?9 TO99 (7^9 tf 1 ^ rrv 



§ 7. Dagesh and Mappik. , 9 

niS?s? ma iro EM Din rrt? D& $ IP IP. IP. 

pin# rw n^z rh|>£ ring ijynp eipfrprifi WM! 

.mW lySpto itsjo oyn arij-j 

§ 7. DAGESH AND MAPPIK. 

1. The six letters DsDOI^Q CfiM'tpj as initial or me- 
dial letters after a consonant entirely vowelless, [a conso- 
nant with a silent Sh'va] represent the hard sound of each 
letter : b, g, d, k, p, t, which is indicated by a point 
within, called Dagesh Lene 7p $$1 Ct^H puncture, from 
the Chald. verbal to pierce with a point] as: jj, fiftt^'* 

2. If a vowel sound [a vowel with or without a quies- 
cent letter] or a vocal Sh'va precede them, their pronun- 
ciation is softened or aspirated, like bh or v, gh, dh, kh 
or the German ch, ph or f, th ; the Dagesh is then omitted : 
as >!} v-OT, tpY]$ tl?. 

3. When the word ending with a vowel is separated by- 
one of the distinctive accents (§ 9) from a following word, 
commencing with one of the fi£)!3*"TJQ ■> the vowel cannot 
aifect the pronunciation, so that the fifflDlJi retain their 
original hard sounds and have the Dagesh : as ^IttWO *JT1 > 

YV? njrn . 

The Dagesh also remains after a vowel sound, if the word 
ni»T precedes : as D.^^3 ffiiT or when two of the letters 
j12!)"l^ come together : as f "H *JD » 

4. A point in any medial letter except ^hilN that is im- 
mediately preceded by a vowel, indicates the doubling of this 
letter : as *£N = *DpK • This point is called Dagesh forte, 

cprn^rr)-' 

| TT • T 

Note. Dagesh forte in the n£3"U!3 at the same time doubles and 
hardens the letter : as 0*5*1 = rabbim. 

5. A point in final Jl serves to determine its consonant- 
al power and is called p'iDD Mappik, (i. e. causing to be 
pronounced) : as H 7 = lohh. 

6. H and the rest of •'IJlK never receive a Dagesh or 
Mappik, when quiescent. 2 



10 Part I. Exercises. 

Note. The dot in !) represents Dagesh, when the preceding con- 
sonant has a' vowel, otherwise the Shurek-point : as jTj¥ > DJp rea d : 
tsivva, kavvam. T)£> . *1^ read shur, gur. 

Note V. On Dagesh forte conjunctive see § 9, I. Note. 

Exercise 13. 
Distinguish Dagesh forte from Dagesh lene. 

-p? kdd rim rta *wn nm n#$ tsd ni*p 
-\W mi dW rtjai ayi Tj3f Jfi nta *]#3 n|9 
}i&3 tod ntev 3i*N tsn n% ^33 tfjg? ^j? 
fe 1 ?? |V"QN d*3"3 *W n?^ R3 Dittos pO|j? 
njp phi n'iii ma nrig D'pi-na dtis d^tjs dsh? 

t t - v: t : - 

Exercise 14. 
Place Dagesh lene in the JltD-UD where required. 

•ntta .nrj .tfty • rt '#P * n -0 »'33to3 ^3 •*£ ^# 
n^; .1*5 ^jS$ ^ .D?3p in .tf&j S#3 -ndrN ^3 
rrg 133 •»£> rtn .vs nngn .m#yi nnrn ij&j nrjn 
pjwV ♦^fJ^§rn^^3 .te33lB^3D^ .p^'S^orn 
rbyyi DntEnn nS^iS .tinfr din-Sid td .npnn ddhS 

• T :"%•: v : — : " : - tt t -: |t- t t ■ : 

t : I : vt : ■ t • v t : 

Note. The Sh'vas nnder the letters distinguished by asterisks 
are silent. 

§ 8. SYLLABLES. 

1. The number of syllables in a word is determined by 
the number of its vowels: as fWN^to = two Syllables, 
nEHNn = three S. 

T T-: T 

Note. Composite Sh'va is considered as a vocal Sh'va and not 
as a vowel. On vocal Sh'va with regard to Metheg see § 9, 7. 

2. Every syllable begins with one or two consonants, 
but in the latter case the first consonant must have vocal 
Sh'va: as 0^3 • 



§ 8. Syllables: 11 

Note. The single exception is ) = ii for ^ ,,cmd" (see § 12, 7, b.) : 

3. Syllables are either open, closed, double closed or 
sharpened. 

a. Open syllables end with a vowel : as )y& ♦ 

b. Closed syllables end with a consoant : as pHV! * . 

c. Double closed syllables end with two consonants: asfr^tOp ♦ 

d. Sharpened syllables end with a consonant, with which 
the following syllable begins: as T&p = kit-tel. 

4. The vowel of unaccented (§ 9) closed syllables is al- 

> 
ways short : as Dp*! read, wayyakom. 

The vowel of unaccented open syllables is always long : 
> 
as #12 read: bara. 

T T 

But both if accented may contain indifferently, long or 
short vowels : as D7ijf read : olain, T\ 76 ♦ 

The double closed and sharpened syllables have most 
frequently, even when accented, short vowels : as J17&P > )2$1> 

Note. The Pause (§ 9, 11.) forms an exception to this rule. 



Determine the different syllables in the following words 
and whether they require long or short vowels: 

nt&QN njMD nvti nm mh ronp riKfn vyn xrmr\ 

t ; |t ■ *t : • • : t t t x | : - "• t t 

♦rW? nrn xnb DJ ma viKtw run vSx no^i r?BB> kj 

.... .. _ T T - ) V T T T " ■ T " V ~ T T T 

Sow i& *2 ntib $&n ino mn Wx Tyn-nN »3srr 

t t •• t • ••_ - t : - • v -: w - t v • : t 

&WT\ ivy* yyn~ow xi\>]Tbv n^^\HTiv_ ^k%™&vh 
-hy.\ Dip bv_ y&nri mnn nnyV ns Sih pAn-Sj; aw 
onyn-nN* fjfiha own }p bin; n&o tf&j nn^ fti&g 

i t — : t - v : • t v •• : t •• : t • - i •* : •• t 

Note. The Sh'vas under the asterisked letters are vocal. — The 
sign > is used, to represent the position of the accent. 

§ 9. ACCENTS, METHEG, MAKKEF. 

1. Two or even more words having: between them a hor- 



12 Part 1. Exercises. 

izontal stroke : as Dit0"*5 > \5$ /]? are read in connection 
and considered as one word. The horizontal stroke is called 
vinp Makkef (conjunction). 

Note. Makkef, to connect words more closely, is wont to im- 
press a dagesh, called pTPT Condenser, on the word following after 

ri-^n— 'i>? as: 3i&Tl9 ^n^n^nr- Dagesk without Makkef 
after a word accented on the penult ending in !H , fi > H — or Jl — 

is called pill")/? HHX coming from afar : as T]7 Ht£ty • The 
modern grammarians call it Dagesh-forte conjunctive. 

2. Every word, except when connected with the following 
by Makkef, receives an accent, which marks the tone-syl- 
lable in the word: as DTiStf Nn3 JVBftTD. 

... TT . ... 

3. Most of the words have the accent on the last sylla- 
ble and are termed JH/P (from below) ; words with the 
accent on the one before the last (penult) are termed /*#79 
(from above.) 

4. The principal tone can only rest on one of the two 

last syllables, therefore, if the word is lengthened at the 

end, the tone is thrown forward according to the length 
> > 

of the addition: as *01, Wiyi ♦ 

T t • t : 

5. Besides the principal accent there is a secondary ac- 
cent, a small perpendicular stroke (i) on the left of a vowel, 
denominated JH? Metheg (bridle). The design of the Me- 
theg is embodied in its name : it is intended to restrain the 
voice, to prevent too hasty a passage over the vowel or its 
connection with the following vowelless consonant: as WW? 

° :|t 

read: sha-r'tsu. Hence Sh'va following Metheg is always 
vocal. 



6. Metheg regularly stands in the second open syllable 
before the tone, provided its vowel is original and not changed 
from a Sh'va, and again in the fourth, if the word have 
so many: as )}_ TO /Mi^OnnOI • A closed syllable or one 






§ 9. Accents, Metheg, Marker. 18 

with a vowel not original, is always without a Metheg : as 
#'3^ fttf&\ ) for I ef, § 12. 7, b. 

7. With regard to Metheg vocal Sh'va is considered as 
a vowel and forms a syllable, therefore rOJN 

8. The accents, [D*DJ7D tastes, i. e. criteria of the sense, 
or rTti*JU modulations, i. e. musical notes, from J^ to play 
on a stringed instrument, to sing] 26 in number, are a 
species of musical notes or signs for regulating a sort of 
cantillation with which the Jews, since the oldest times, 
were accustomed to accompany the public reading of the 
Law and Sections from the Prophets (Haphtaroth). 

This cantillation being strictly subordinate to the sense 
of the proposition and to its logical connection, the accents 
also serve to show the mutual relation of words and to in- 
dicate the connections and pauses to be made in reading, 
hence their general division into : D*D*pt35 Distinctives 
and DH-QfTtD Conjunctives. 

9. The distinctives are divided according to the longer 
or shorter pauses marked or governed by them into : Em- 
perors, Class I. Kings, Class II, Dukes, Class III Counts, 
Class IV. 

CLASS I. 
1) SillukpV?? or p1D5 t]1D end of the verse: as Jp^jK 
(J i) two perpendicular points between two verses and the 
sign of Metheg at the tonesyllable, 2) Athnach rtJilN : as 
D"JN • Athnach divides the verse into two parts either sen- 
tences or clauses* In the latter case the clauses respectively 
consist of those words, which are more intimately related: as 
JpNH m\ Q>D&n MN DTiStf *TD JTBftOa In the be- 
ginning God created the heaven and the earth : the heaven 
and the earth, as the object, being divided by Athnach from 
the antecedent, containing the subject and predicate. A 
simple sentence never takes A, Cf. Gen. 1, 3, 6, 8. 

CLASS II. 
3) Seghol VtiD : as 018 divides the first member of the 
sentence into two parts, standing between the first word 



14 Part 1. Exercise?. 

and the word with Athnach. Its position is always over the 
last letter. Of. Gen. I, 7. 

4) Zakeph Katon JiDfJ *]$ ) as DIN 

5) Zakeph Gadhol Sin| t)pf J as DIN 

form smaller divisions either before or after Athnach. Of. 
Gen. 1, 44. 

6) Tiphcha NH5P : as D1K possessing less separating 
power than the preceding: always placed under the last 
word before Silluk or Athnach or before the last but one. 
Cf. Gen. 1, 6. 

CLASS. III. 

7) K'bhia l?OTas: D"itf a point over the middle of a 
letter, distinguished by this position from Cholem over its 
end. K'bhia halves the semi-clause terminating in Seghol, 

Zakeph and Tiphcha: as y'ljjt >3 IDtft rTJIH? vj?N WW 
And Judah stepped near unto him, and said, Oh my Lord ! 

Gen. 44, 18, vSj/ D^fj Sb 1 ? p§«11i^ *\DV Sb^Sl And 
Joseph could not refrain himself before all them that stood 

by him. jk jrp jn£? Wfi-ns njparfitf iS-fflfi And he 

gave him (to wife) Asenath the daughter of Potiphera 
priest of On. Gen. 41, 45. 

8) Zarka ND^t as DIN ) both over the end of the last 

7 J t :- T T f 

a\ p ^^ vv/vjm'^ «o A-»v* C letter. The latter is hereby 

yj rasnta Nut^iD as DHN \ _. . . , ■ „ <_ _ ,/ 

T : T T J distinguished from Kadma the 

same in form. If the word is TJ^D two Pashtas are used : 
HDbn* Kadma is always placed on the tonesyllable. 

10) T'blr y^Q as D1K ) These two and Zarka and Pashta 

11) Geresh BhJ as D^ E divide the ^ ° r se ™- Cl * USe 

rT J terminating with any of the tour 

preceding accents: 

Zarka precedes Seghol: Qft'J^TIS ^PV tlftl 
And Joseph took them both. Gen. 48, 13. 

Pashta precedes Zakeph : ^'H Oi*3 jiapft 

And he rested on the seventh day. Gen. 2. 2. 



§ 9. Accents, Metiieg, Makkef. Jo 

T'blr precedes Tiphcha : ttjJHgftf D'S^&QI ***? 

He and the men that were with him. Gen. 24, 54. 
Geresh precedes K'bhla : FTTH? vS'tf 8#P1 

Then Judah stepped near unto him. Gen. 44, 18. 

12) Y'thlbhDTT as: D"Jtf stands a little before the first 
letter and is distinguishable by this position from Mahp- 
ach, the latter standing immediately beneath the letter to 
which it belongs. 

CLASS IV. 

13) T'lisha Gh'dhola hShJ N£"Sj1 as D"fK always over 
the first letter. The other distinctives, the separating power 
of which is of no perceivable consequence to the sense are : 

14) Shalsheleth HT^V" as BIN over tne tonesyllable. 
1.5) Paser *"tt|) as D"]N over the tonesyllable. 

16) Karne Phara PHd ^^p as D1X over the last letter. 

17) G'rashayim D^*JJ as D"W over the tonesyllable. 

18) P'slk ) pVS 

L'garmeh [ nr ™U aS ' D "!* * P er P endlcular st ™ ke 
& ^ or n^OnJ7 between two words. 

The Conjunctive accents are: 

19) Merka NJTJD 20) Munach TOID 21) Merka Kh'phula 

fl^fcS?? N?*)? 22) Mahpach TjgrtD 23) Darga N3T? 24) 
Kadma NDlj} 25) Yerach ben Yomo ipV"J3 rTT 26) T'lisha 
K'tanna n.3t0p N£'vfl over the end of the last letter. 

10. The distinctives of Class I. denote the longest pauses, 
which may be compared to our period and colon ; Class II. 
to Colon and Semicolon ; Class III. to Semicolon and 
Comma ; Class IV. to Comma and half Comma. 

11. The distinctives of Class I. and some of Class II. 
by their strong accentuation change short vowels into long and 
very frequently Sh'va into a vowel: as V"}^ earth — t>"lN 

^T thy hand-- ?|T 
A word so accented is said to stand in Pause. 



16 Part 1. Exercises. 

12. For the sake of completeness, we here give the rules 
for the position of the accent, though they will not yet be 
fully understood by the beginner and must therefore be 
passed over for the present. # 

I. Nouns have the tone on the last syllable : 

a. When ending with a long vowel both in open and closed 

> > > 

syllables: as ^D*!' ^^? coming, but HN3 she came. 

Note. The participle is in. this respect considered as a noun. 

b. When ending with a short vowel, that stands for a long 

one: as Jf\t\ for gjh- 

c. Feminine nouns, that change their long vowel in the 
st. const, into a short one : as tT\^t2 from tl1]?12 ♦ 

d. Nouns of which the two last syllables are closed : as /PD • 

e. Nouns which end with ft— preceded by a long vowel: 

as n|>D- 

f. Nouns with the following Suffixes : as 

.JH >Dil >p >D? >f- ,D- A >P1 T ;V >>- 

hnnyi >]p*}¥} &?*)¥} 'fjSfj »cn;pj ,hxy ,hyi : >h?1 



g. Verbs in the Pret. form with the afformatives DH > \T\ '• as 
h. Verbs in the Pret. form with Vav. Conv. : as FHDD "but 

^ t : - |t 

rhvp} > ?£??* but ftOBji ; 

Note. The verbs ^"7 and H"7 f° rm exceptions to h. : as 

T T T T ' ■ *T! 

II. The following have the tone on the penult : 
i. All the nouns, of which the last vowel is a helping 
Seghal or Patach (a class of words called Segholates) : 

as£nn< fpr\, iffa, T2f. 

> > ■ 

7*;. Words ending with Patach furtive: as fTD > J?3£ • 
J. Words ending with D.V (Dual form): as D?6#- 



§ 9. Accents, Metiie(J, Makkef. 17 

m. Verbs in the Fret, form with the affirmatives Jl, *fl, 5|J3 = 

T 

as mOB>'> WDB*. OTB#> 

t : - t • : - t : - t 

w. The regular verbs in Hif. and those of Y'J? and )}")) in 
Kal, Nif. and Hif. with the affirmatives ft— , !), *— : 

as n^b, em5> nSn^n- 

T _ ~ T . . . 

o. Verbs with the suff. H— VT *li *}, ?j.. 

p. Paragogic H— or Jl— attached to nouns, pronouns and 

adverbs: as TTfsk, ftm , fi^N , lljS- 

Note I. Paragogic ' — most frequently has the tone : as ijTJJQn* 

fester? 

g. Verbs with the Vav con v. of the future, provided the 
penult is an open syllable ; (cf. the following under r) 

as 1DK* but IDXh, SOp*l and not *Oj?*V 
r. When the tonesyllables of two words immediately follow : 
as in 17 TW)}> pT£ '£TT% the tone of the former recedes: 
as I 1 ? nfc# T , pn.V *{rfl ClidN* JiDJ •) Such a receding ac- 
cent being considered as a Metheg and having its posi- 
tion, cannot recede to a dosed syllable (cf. 6. of this §). 
In this and a few other cases it drops entirely, its word being 
connected by Makkef with the following: as r"H r N ta, )p*1 

for nb* fropn; rh^n^jr} for n^rrpn. 

Note II. Both the vowel-signs and accents were added to the 
Biblical Text between the 6th and 11th Centuries by eminent Jew- 
ish scholars. Critical and linguistic notes were also added, the most im- 
portant of which are called Hp and 3VO • DVID signifying written, 
that is the M. S. reading and V0 : read i. e. the expression con- 
sidered by the Jewish critics to be preferable* 

This body of notes is called the Masora (rniDO i- e. Tradition) 
and the compilers themselves the Masorites. (IVViDD vl^)- 
Exercise 16. 
Place Metheg where required ! Metheg cannot precede 
silent Sh'va or Dagesh. 



18 Part 1. Exercises. 

.nras D*fep onDpa .pnno Tjii^i »Dn?j?n -n^Ti 

nnajfti .v&iD .rraw .ioyS D^tonnn .?»♦ .p*rri 
•HJJH8 ^P*?!. »W •^t?NiO •^iDyn .^71** .n6g9 
•'ido ri#S .onihn .writ .nanm .pirvn .&#i 

Note. The Sh'vas under the letters marked with an asterisk 
are silent. 

Exercise 17. 
Give the names of the accents and the classes tp which 
they belong: 

n$rnh # ibm inspi y\x ifiy\ ifjj^Ss prep inpn 
*jit f?$M} nn^ bitf nrjs rjS Dip :'}#£? nmn ntr'tf 

THj ?|V-j£n :dv^ SnpS n»rn ^-n ^511 jjjw r0\ 

rtra rr^ iprTK* brer n W*i : Dmr^S d^Sn rntn^ 

tjv- I -a— I -:i - V ( t : • <- : •- |t t : - : v.- v: \ j- t v -.: 

: nan apjp dk npm tin vjnNrr Sarina-p pS-Sa o-w 

Exercise 18. 
Point out the tone-syllable in the following words : 

.rrrn .nxrn .:## .D*Tj» ..t?Wrr .oipM .n$pb .Sp#_ 

•djtutoi .jtw *jmnna .Drroo.W? .ninru .Stn 
•pjn -njs ^p*33 »nfi WPP 45^1 .npp-Dn^.nD-iN 

§ 10. Distinction op Kamets and Kamets-Chatuph. 

1. The sign (V) serves at once to represent the long a 
and the short o. 



S 10. DisxrxcTrox of Kametp axd Kamets-Chatuph. 19 

2. It is a: 

1) in an open syllable: as VOfotif , read shamarta: hence 

2) when Metheg stands on the left of it : as rnptP, read 
sham'ra. 

3) the (it) in final "\ : as rp, rea( * becha. 

4) in an accented syllable : as "IflX, read echad. 

3. It is o : 

> > 

a. in an unaccented closed syllable: as niEKjffii HPJ/' read 
chochma, omdi : hence 

b. in a closed syllable before Makkef: as ^KiT/D' read 
kol : and 

c. in the final closed syllable of a word beginning with Vav 

> 

conv. (§ 33) : as Dp"! read vay-ya-kom : 

d. before Chateph-Kamets : as TJJ^ read yo°raad. 

EXERCISE 19. 

♦php sh .rror .pn .db> .re&tf .6h .d$m .r#i 

i-:|t • t t:t I t : |t t t:|t )t • : t tt- 

.mitt .rfroa .oSiirpn /Bto *"-fpnp *'brSrN .Hiiro 

rvr •: t : t *^ \ t -::t | : I t • • - : . t :t 

♦ rrraD • nprri .rrpm A^rv \ n~\y . my . Dnrra . brr^hK 

tt; t • Jt:|t Jt:t •• t : t. : |t -*t:t --t:t t •• t: t 

•m .nSsx .hSdn .'Sna .np^ .Sain .tia-nrft .nony 

t t:|t t:t • t: t t J : - t tt- | - ■ t: t t :"t 

" t : •• t t : t w -r t • t : • t | t t •• J tt- 

.nSnK .fiJ'bfc i'ttri rbiri .onnyn .dujid .nn^ ,n^ 

|vt:t - : |t • t t t - •• : "t |t • - : t • : t • ; t 

•--It: t t t ) t : *[t 

§ 11. DISTINCTION OF VOCAL AND SILENT SH'VA. 

The Sh'va is vocal : 

1) at the beginning of a word : as ?bp = k'toL 

2) in the middle of a word after another Sh'va : as 
>7Eppn = tlk - t'H. 

3) after every unaccented long vowel : as i?£0p *** ka-t'hl, 
but iIVV2$> read sha-raar-tl, the vowel before the Sh'va 

• :^tt 

being accented. 

4) after a Metheg: as )$y = ye-r'u, but ^KT = yir-u. 

5) under a letter having Dagesh; as ^ED = kat-t'li. 



20 Part 1. Exercises. 

6) under the first of two similar letters: as y??n = ha-l'lfi. 

7) in most cases under a letter, which is followed by any 
one of the DWlIQ without Dagesh: as *5pLT=shi-ch'bhl. 

Exercise 20. 

.^oS .?pp -i^W) ?ifo ^ •♦jap .^jno^ ^^1 
.^TSW .n^ri .pjT.ino? ijrr -?jtoo? ,r P^ -^p 
» 9 JsM ♦nS:?K •11971 *^ n ?^': •io&to -W -onsen 
•P75«fj .jwp#» .-nsep .Dtnx^i .nwi 1 ? -ip^n 1 ? 
.nipp7i .yaW .rats* .Dnrnn .spaypi .oep]^ 
♦^W'n .m^p -.O^hb •^W -T^p& -D^iTfltDa 

♦ imp? .nSvijn .^3 •"3p?!7 

CHAPTER II* 

PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS & VOWELS. 
§ 12. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 

1. The formation and inflection of Hebrew words are ef- 
fected by changes, partly vocal, partly consonantal. 

2. Changes are also made for the sake of euphony, to 
prevent the concurrence of vowels or consonants of difficult 
pronunciation. 

3. The different changes of which consonants are sus- 
ceptible are : Assimilation, Transposition, Rejection, Com- . 
mutation. 

4. Assimilation. Vowelless J in the middle of a word, 
when the syllable is unaccented, is assimilated (made sim- 
ilar) to the following letter, J being dropped and the fol- 
lowing letter taking Dagesh. The Dagesh doubles it, thus 
indicating the assimilation: as JJO* = fcTJUT for V?&\- In 

an accented syllable, assimilation does not take place; AD5£*' 

> > 

with the exception of the verb Jj"0 to give: flfO for ftirU> 

* This chapter being placed here tor reference, will be passed over 
for the present, as many of the rules can only be understood by the more 
advanced student. 



§ 12. Changes of Consonants. 21 

If the following, letter be one of the ynHN> either 3 is not 
assimilated: as 7PO|> ^lJOfl > or the dropping of 3 is indi- 
cated by the lengthening of the preceding vowel : as HIT 

for nrqv 

The assimilation of other consonants occurs only in the 
following cases : 

7 in the verb Hp7 to take: as ftp* for rip/*-* 
il in the syllable fill of Hithpael before 1, tO and in a 
few instances before sibilants : as f7?p7n for nft7j7»7 > 7fl®n 

for 7nc?r»n , o?n for spijfif? > ooi&n for QpViin . 

7 in the relative , &>' for 7&ft* ♦ 

1 at the end of a few words before JT as jl7 for IT! 7 > 

rirrN for rnrnst • 

♦ in a few verbs *"£ before V : as p¥* for pV" ♦ 

5. Transposition. In grammar, transposition occurs only 
in the case of T\ in the syllable T\T\ of Hithpael before sibi- 
lants, it being easier to pronounce st than ts, thus : 7/!2f)&'n 
for 7£KVin ♦ Before ¥ it is even changed into b : as p7tDV3 
for pfwtf . 

6. Rejection. Rejection may take place at the beginning, 
in the middle or at the end of a word. 

The following are regularly rejected: 

A. At the beginning. 
Yowelless ♦, 3 (or 7 in the verb I7p7) in tlie Infinitive 
and Imperative of the verbs v t3 and J"£) : as 77 > rvfj from 
iV. p from JJU np_, DOp from npS . 

*' as a silent consonant after a vocalized '": as D^iJl for D"iJl 
from *ijh 

N is dropped in UfTj for -tftfJN, in .# from 7#K. 
i>. 7?i ^e middle. 

1. The first of two similar consonants, when vowelless, 
is not written, but represented by Dagesh forte : as 

•tiro for uiro s ms for nrro . 

-t :■•'.- t t-t t: -t 

2. In the verbs J*"J> the first of the two similar letters is 



•22 Part 1. Exercises. 

dropped, even when possessing a vowel, if a vowelless letter 
precedes : as DD for MD » *DD for 1DDD ♦ 

3. The weak letters ^HN (especially Jl) are dropped or 
quiesce, though having vowels, after a letter with Sh'va: as 

DW'3 for DW'it? . Dp for Dip ,m 6| for V^| , 'ififyg for 
T]nSxt?> 11^5 for | m?, 

tf often quiesces in the long vowel, resulting from the con- 
traction of its own vowel or half vowel (Composite Sh'va) 
with the preceding vowel : as DNVO for Htftfb> ""ON 1 ? for 

iDN*?, o\iW? for &tihxb> afti* for nrt^x .'"' 

(7. ^ fAe £W. 
At the end of a word j and D are rejected in a few ca- 
ses. The J of the verbal ending p and p— . This original 
7 has been very rarely retained : as pjTV> jH^J/ri ♦ D is regu^ 
larly 'dropped in the st. const. Plural: 

as nn f. onn, *ria f. o»na. 

" T * T '• T • T 

7. Commutation. Commutation comprises a) interchanges 
of consonants with other consonants ; b) Interchanges of 
consonants with vowels. 

a. n interchanges with D> see above § 12, 5. 

Initial 1 interchanges with *, especially in verbs s *£ .: as 

tV for nS)> jrr for ihv ^P' for ^ D j?V 

Medial 1 interchanges with * on account of homogeneous 
vowels preceding it : as D'D for Dip » D^fl for D1(l . 
Final 1 and » interchange with ft: as Hvil for *7> r H^£' 

, "-" T T - T T T 

for Y?Vf. When the word is lengthened, the original 
consonant reappears: as fVTJ-* w?^* 

b. 1) The conjunction 1 "and", preceding a vowelless letter 
or one of the labials (HM), is converted into its homo- 
geneous vowel J|: as v 'n3"p for nyn fT$M for ftg>D1, 

■qtm for wav 

t t - it - : 

In the same manner * following a vowelless letter is 
softened to T : as JTtllTal for pmrP3. 

t • t : : 

2) In the middle of a word *) and \ are often contracted 
into a diphthong or a long vowel: as T/i* for T/V 
(a + u), ytff* for ^D» (a + i) iSlH for l^H (b + u 



§ 13. Peculiarities of the Gutturals. 23 

contracted into ii). ) after Chirek becomes ) , the 1 resting 
in its homogeneous -vowel : as 3£H3 for 3£'13 » D^'iH 

for iNttyj • 

3. 1 and * final after a vowel less letter are softened to 
J) and >— : as Ifin for inn 5 HS for H3. *TTC for VT1. 

§ 13. PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTURALS. 

1. The gutturals instead of the usual (simple) Sh'va, 
receive the composite Sh'va, (see §5). 

2. They do not admit of Dagesh forte, i. e. they cannot 
be doubled, (see § 7. 4). The half-guttural n partakes of 
this peculiarity. The omission of Dagesh causes the length- 
ening of the preceding short vowel : as Dl^n for D~^*n > 

rjnjnfor ^ng, 

n and n> being harder gutturals, in most cases retain 
the preceding short vowel : as fc<ttnn > D^HH • 

3. The gutturals n> ]?> and n (with Mappik) when final, 
require the a sound before them. Therefore they .change 
mutable vowels ( § 14, 1 e) into Patach: as xh&\ for hW'; 
if the vowel be immutable, a helping Patach, called Patach 
furtive (§ 6), is written under them and pronounced before 
them. 

Note. On the gutturals see further Chapter: VIL § § 40, -41, 42. 

§ 14. VOWEL CHANGES. 
I. •The vowels are immutable or mutable. 
Immutable: 

a. Vowels regularly written with their homogeneous vowel- 
letters : as tf— , >— , >— , J|, i. 

T 

b. The long vowels defectively written, (§ 3. Note 4.) as 

S'p = Sip ■ on = D^n . 

c. Vowels after which a Dagesh forte has been omitted 
on account of a guttural : as BHJ7 for 5#nn> D^flN for 
PMTK, 

d. The short vowel in an unaccented closed syllable : as 

n^noSo. 

t - : - 

Mutable : 

e. All the long vowels, without vowel-letters and not in- 



24 Part I. Exercises. 

eluded in the cases specified under b) and c), both in 
open and closed syllables : as* } 7pp* from 7lDD* > H!J/T 
from "Dl ♦ 

T T 

/. All the short vowels in open and in accented closed 
syllables : as n7t0p x from /Op T « 

II. The changes which the mutable vowels can undergo, 
are : Lengthening, Shortening, Rejection and Rising of new 
voicels. 

Lengthening: The short vowels are made long: 
( — ) becomes (- — ) 

( — ) becomes ( — ) 

(— or — ) become (_) or 0). 

1. When a closed syllable is made an open one : as 
"bw for S'Op T > IDD for np? i DpjlH for DpH , properly Djjjtj . 

2. Hence when a required doubling of the following letter 
does not take place : as HiNJl for TiKiT, fHIT for DIPT; 

3. When one of the vowel-letters quiesces in the vowel : 
as MDj for HNQ) . 

4. When the final word of a sentence or clause has the 
pause accent : as fi?pP for JjVp?j2 ' Y^ ^ or f^ • 

Shortening : The long vowels are shortened : 

(— ) becomes (— -)• • 

(— ) becomes (— ) or with the strong shortening (— )• 
(_) becomes (— ) or stronger (— )■ 

This takes place: 

a. When an open syllable becomes a closed one : *£Hp 
for {Tip 5 

b. When a syllable with Dagesh or a sharpened syllable 
arises ; in this case the strong shortening is used : as 
D*pn from ph> V2$ from D#; 

c. When a closed syllable loses the tone ; as D*7N"D from 
J3> m T .T"T from T, ^N"S? from S") ♦ 



§ 14. Vowel Changes. 25 

Rejection: The vowel falls away entirely. It occurs, 
when the word is lengthened at the end, so that the ac- 
cent must be thrown forward. This is particularly the 
case : 

1. With pretonic Kamets and Tsere, (the latter gener- 
ally when followed by Kamets : as 2Dy). Kamets and 
Tsere in an open syllable preceding the tonesyllable, are 
called pretonic: i. e. they are pronounced only before the 
tone and are dropped upon its being moved forward : as 

S£p> rhhp but onStop, nrn but onm, ro# but >n^. 

- | t t : - | t V : - | : tt *t : t •• ■ t : 

2. With Tsere in a monosyllable: as Dt^> or in the last 
syllable of a polysyllable, when all the preceding vowels 
are immutable : as *Tj# thus *p#, DHyN ^5't^» DHD8P . 

3. With (-), (■•), (_) in the last syllable of verbs, when 
the word is lengthened by an addition commencing with a 
vowel: as nSc?£ from ht$\>> ^DjT from SbjT. 

The following rule regarding the rejection of vowels 
deserves attention : 

When the accent is thrown forward, in nouns , the 
vowel of the penult drops, in verbs, of the ultima. Com- 
pare: H!JH my word, from *"CH word, PHDp she has killed, 
from 7\Dp he has killed. 

Rising of new vowels: Instead of Sh'va a new short 
vowel arises : 

I. No word can commence with two vowelless consonants 
or with two Sh'vas, therefore the first Sh'va is changed in- 
to Chirek : 

A. When one of the prefixes 732 (§ 18. II, b,) or of the 
preformatives JJTK (§ 31, 1.) which regularly take Sh'va, 
is connected with a word beginning with Sh'va: as ^Wtij 

for St^'pS , Sbj? for Sbj? , S'DpJ^ for SbjpN \ 
Note. Respecting *| before a letter with Sh'va see § 12, 7, b. 

B. 7bpK for VtDpN can serve as a memorial word for the 
following rules : 



26 Part I. Exercises. 

a. When the first of two vowelless letters has comp. 
ShVa, the helping vowel is that of the comp. Sh'va : as 
>fi$N for >g>JN from DWN> WlPl for ^-]pj from DUSHrj. 

6. When the second of two vowelless letters has comp. 
Sh'va, the helping vowel under the first is again the 
vowel of comp. Sh'va: as 1#£3 for INfKS, ftlfT for 
RlTg , § 40, 6. 

II. With a pause accent When Sh'va is heightened in 
pronunciation by the tone^ either Seghol arises from it, or 
the correspondent long vowel of Comp. Sh'va, or the origi- 
nal vowel which has been dropped by the lengthening of 
the word : as »f|S from TlS; 'btl from hni Pf«So f. HN^D 
from tfSp; nbfc* f. np^ from iDfc* . 

Note. In all the cases given under II. the word is 7*J£ /D ♦ 

III. When one of two similar letters or of the weak 
letters ^JlK drops, (§12, 6 B. 3.) its vowel recedes and 
takes the place of the preceding Sh'va : as JV5Z for i"V3D? ' 

Scop> for Saprr , h* for vh), vshn for n&Snd, dd for aa&, 

••|t- •• |t • : t : t ■• : - •• : - : : 

DD> for d5p: • 

IV. The meeting of two vowelless final consonants is 
generally avoided : most commonly by the insertion of 
Seghol between the concurring consonants, Patach, if one 
of them is a guttural, Chirek, if one of them is a * 9 Shurek, 
if the last one is 1 : as Ifo for TQ > IT)?, for JT)t* V$t for 

Sn, iva for n?a. via for im. 



CHAPTER IIL 

§ 15. SERVILE LETTERS. 

1. Letters added to words for the purposes of formation 
or inflection (serving) are called Serviles, while those three 
letters which constitute most frequently the root or the 
radical idea of the word are termed Padicals. 

2. All the 22 letters of the alphabet can be used as 
radicals; the 11 following only as serviles: 

k, a n, i, ♦, a h, o. i v> n chy\ n^o.jir^). 



§ 15. Servile Letters. 27 

They are called prefixes (preformatives) when placed at 
the beginning of a word, suffixes (afforrnatives) when added 
at the end. 

Xote. When the letters added are used to convey the acci- 
dents of tense, gender, number, person (in the nominative case) and 
to form derivatives, they are respectively called according to po- 
sition preformatives and afforrnatives. 

§ 16. THE PREFIXES HtTO . 

1. as a prefix has Chirek and in the following letter 
Dagesh. It is the abbreviation of TO from, away from, out 
of by, of which the 3 is assimilated, as Dlirip from below, in- 
stead of jinn JO ♦ Before gutturals the (— ) is lengthened 
to (•) (§14, II. 2): as hyj2 from above, instead of: ^ }D, 

Before n the lengthening is sometimes omitted : as T^np 
from without ( § 13, 2.). & before ; becomes >p as D.'WlT? 
from Jerusalem, for D'Wn'P ( § 12, 7, b.) 

2. -tf as a prefix, see §23, 2. 

3. Jl as a prefix, an interrogative particle, see § 24, 5. 

4. H as a prefix, the article, see § 17. 

Exercise 21. 

7 nap 6 "vtop 5 iT2P 4 ni3jp 3 c\vp 2 niNp lta )T!p 
u n,snp 13 S^np 12 -vr-rp n *Qp 10 nn?p 9 Sn*p 8 nnnNp 
2 nbra 19 nbra l8 biro i7 bipto 16 chito i5 tfnra 
*fiVipp 25 inn>p ^oto 23 N-nrrp 22 tp 21 bap 

.^Si^rp 28 tr>np 27 nDSj;p 

way 1 enemy 9 fire 3 hero 4 house, within 5 pit 6 brother? love8 God 9 
covenant^ 8 man 1 ! generation, age^ palace* 3 they 14 n. p. of a city 15 
month 16 thread" sandis milk 19 clay20 dew^i hand22 n . p. m. 23 day 24 
n. p. of a city 25 a time unlimited, eternity 26 a maidenS? head, beginning's 
n. p. m. 29 

Exercise 22.* 
From a father 1 ) from Abrahams, from destructions, from 
a cistern 4 , from a lands, from bloods, out of a house 7, 

* The learner is advised to form for himself an English- Hebrew vocabu- 
lary, by which his memory may be assisted and a tedious search through 
the exercises avoided. 



28 Part I. Exercises. 

I 

from a mountains, from Edomfy from Hamanio, from life 11 ? 
from to-morrowi2, from a river 13 , from Jeberechjahui*, from 
Jedidja 15 ? from a Jew^, from a panther 1 f> from Nimrod 18 , 
from the Most High^, from a plant2o, from Eden2i,fromdust22. 

liD^n iojnn 9 din; sin vrrii 6dj sp» 4*1x3 sp'-o^ »Drn3K ox 
20 nn* 19 rrSy is-hdj mnj i6*wr lsrrrr Mirvmrr w-n'sr i2mno 

I : '• :• •• t • : t: •: t: vv: : tt:t 

§ 17. THE ARTICLE. 

1. The definite article is represented by the prefix f7 

with Patach and Dagesh in the following letter : as WfiW 

heaven, 0*5^*0 the heaven. Before the gutturals, especially 

*tyK the Patach is changed into Kamets (§13, 2.): as 

JilNn the master, 7^0.11 the foot, "D#0 the servant, Be- 

> 
fore the unaccented )} , fl, tl into Seghol : as D^DV H the 

> > 

clouds, DHffll the mountains, 03(1)1 the wise man, "but 

> 
DIM the cloud, lil!l the mountain, cf. 5. 

*T T ' T T 

Before H and (1 the Patach is commonly retained : as 
D^nn the life, SdJIJI the vanity. § 13, 2. 

2. A noun without the ♦His to he translated with the 
indefinite article, except the noun in the st. const. (§ 19, 5): 
as ]T3 a house, 

3. When the noun is preceded by the prefixes 7DD > the 
article is only represented by its appropriate vowel under 
the prefix and the Dagesh in the following letter (§12, 
6. B. 3.): as llTD in the* word = "mm, p^ to the 
land ==pKfi% 

4. The Dagesh after the article is often omitted in let- 
ters with Sh'va : as D*#*T)9VD the frogs, especially in 
nouns with initial * : as liNV"? the river, and in participles 
of Piel and Pual (§25, 7.): as IDlDJl the speaking man. 

5. Some words lengthen the accented vowel, when the 
article is prefixed, e. g. DJJfl from DJN PINil fromVlK, 

-inn from in, nNpn from nxn , 



§ 18. The Prefixes D^m 29 

Exercise 23. 
Prefix the article to the following words, 

8 n^|i 7 DipD «arjjj 5 d*d ma 3 ^n »p# 1 cyD^ 
le^inis^n 14 S3n 13 rrn ia jn?. ".^jja 10 D5n »a^g 

29 tin 28 w 27 m:in 26 Tin 25 rm 24Q^n 23 Sri 

I T *T T T T - • ~ V V 

.33 jinn 32 mn sinrin 3 °nTn 

It-. t t : v T ■ 

heaven* earth, land2 darkness3 Kght4 water5 evenings place? dry 
lands herb 9 wise 10 morning 11 seedi2 animal 13 cord, rope^ grass 15 new 16 
rich man 1 " fat 1 ® weary 19 pipe 20 star 21 ground, soil 2 2 foot 23 Hf e 24 spirit^ 
ornament 26 thought 27 cloud 28 majesty 29 riddle 30 joy 31 vision 32 intuition, 

vision 33 . j 

§ 18. THE PREFIXES T^ . 

I. 1 1 called the conjunctive Vav denotes: and, as Dm"? 
"bread DPm and bread. It is changed as follows: 

a. Into 1 before a consonant with simple Sh'va : 72/1 and 
to all, § 14, Rising I ; or before the labials 3 , D > £ > to 
avoid the recurrence of two sounds of the same organic 
class : as vy\ and between, 7D1 and from, *")£} and a bul- 
lock (§12, 7, b,). 

b. Into 1 before * becoming quiescent : as *JT1 and it may 
be (§12, 1, b!). 

c. Into 1, ), ) before comp. Sh'va, taking the correspon- 
ding short vowel : as ^N1 and I, 7bKl and eat, ^7(11 

° • -: - ' :: v ' • t: t 

and sickness (§14, Rising I, B. b.) 

d. Into ) before OWN: as DViWl and God (§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

Note. Before niiT into *) : as fTiiTl • This most sacred name 

t : - t |- 

of God was believed to be incommunicable and the word \3Htf 
my Lord substituted for it, according to which latter word the 
vowels of *) and the prefixes 0733 were adapted, as |TiiT3 » 
TWfo* Ti\tVb corresponding to >$!$&> tfltfS* IfltfD- When 

T |- t : |- T - T T ^ -: •• 

however, HiH^ is already preceded by ^1N , to avoid repetition, 
it was written with the vowels of DTi /N » s0 that HilT *$1Nl 
is to be read D^Stf VhN ♦ 

e. Into 1 immediately before the tone-syllable, especially 



30 Part 1. Exercises. . 

when the latter has a distinctive accent and short words 

are connected in pairs : as ^IPD"! ^rifi desolate and void, 

Dni "ip cold and heat, ^HH) T**p summer and winter. 

Note. )?iy\ shows that *) before C"p3 ( a ) * n case of (e) has 
— and is not ) » 

II. a. 3wO . 5 preposition of place and time: in, on, 
among: as JTL?k*Q in the beginning, ^PO on a mount- 
ain, 7iO£?^3 amongst Israel, or it has the force of the 
prepositions: with, by, through: as DN3 with a stone, 
*D*15 with or by a word. 
5 adv. and prep., generally expressing comparison and 
proportion answers to the words : as, lihe, so, about, nearly, 
almost: THN3 as a land, Hft'fcO about an ephah, Hfc^D 
D*Jt^' about ten years. As prep.: according to, after, 
when, (comparing the time of two actions) ^JTO^p after 
our likeness, w\7) ^PHHD when I lifted up my voice, 
T]7^n T3 according to the bounty of the king. 
I. Kings" 10, 13. 

7 prep., denoting motion or direction toward any ob- 
ject, to, unto, towards, for, hence it is the sign of the 
dative (§ 19, 2.): ptfS to a land, r|SpS to or for a king. 

b. D » b O always with Sh'va except in the following cases : 

1. With Chirek = 3' 7, 3> before a word which has 
Sh'va under the first letter : as "D"D by the word of, !3]7> 
"Q"D- (14. Rising I. a.) 

Before * the * becomes quiescent (§ 12. 7. b.): as ^3 
in the days of nTlir? to I. *Tj as the hands of. 

2. With (t), (7), (7) before composite Sh'va : as DOfcO 
in truth; 101^7 to stand, vH3 as a sickness; or when dis- 

1 ^-:- ' • t: t 

placing the article T\ (§19, 3.): as DWl=Di*n3 in the day, 
03(1^7 = DpnnS to the wise, ^JD = fJJTQ on the tree, but 

DV3 m a day, ri?3 on a * ree - 

3. With Kamets = a, often before the tonesyllable, 

> 
especially before monosyllabic particles: DfQ in them, Jlp 



§ 18. Prefixes rtol. 31 

.as this, V^djp to a soul, person. 7 before several forms of 
the pronouns and the infinitives of verbs : as fin to this, 
rPN 1 ? to these, rO? / to go. Before nouns with a distinct- 
ive accent, especially when short words are connected in pairs : 
as: 0*>bh DV*? |*3 between water and water, &)|S $2* p3 
between stroke and stroke. 

Exercise 24. 
Exactly translate the following words. 

o^7bjw6 >zhh > 2 oW? >nS^3 ^nS; 1 ?? ,d®3 .ow? 
££#no a^go ,paai fi^o > 3 nrra ,mpm ,DipD3 
,b^Si > 6 trW?i 4Tt»»i irrt^rio >rntra .ejwpi » 4 *flprro 
/roam nbsn > 8 n&E .nraVi nmS ,nr?$ ^lenta ,b*nd 

TT _ : TT- TT TT~: TT- TT; • T " ••■ 

♦ rjS?np .^pp ^91 ^Si .rj^igs ^93 j^jp npz^ 

nightl image 2 dry land 3 bird 4 Held 5 man 6 river? rain 8 king 9 - 

Exercise 25. 
Translate into Hebrew. 
And light, i and the light, and in the light, to the earth 
and to the heaven, and the fruit, 2 and fruit, and from the 
fruit, evening and morning, day and night, I and he, 3 
and Jacob's hands, 4 and to an animal, and in a land, and 
in the land, and a river, and Jonathan, 5 and Jerusalem, 
in Jerusalem, to a man, 6 to the man, from a tree, from 
the tree, from morning, from the morning, in a cloud,? in 
the cloud, as an image, as the image, to a bird, to the 
bird, from the bird, from a man. 

■ 7 $J 6D ™ 5 i™ irr . 4 -*p?.VT. 3x,n '^ 2, 1? lty ** 
Exercise 26. 

: 15 T]Siii 14 T]gt?3 13 ^pDli : Xl9 aro llf lP?3 10 ^i?P3 9 ^ 

* 8 was rich. In sentences with a noun^ pronoun or adjective in the 
predicate, the copula "7o 6e" must always be supplied. See §77, 1. 



32 Part I. Exercises. 

22 mini 21 mvD 20 ^ ;jn 19 *w 18 jno : 17 ny^ J6 nirra 

t : t: • w t tt ' -•■ *t t 

*Svj£ 28 -ion* : 27 Sk ^nnN dSij; 25 ^ 24 oSijrp : 23 ^in 
♦37^36^^ ^pn^3 34 dj : 33 ?]TJ3 32 Sn^' 81 prn *ng 
: 43 msD n«aa 42 :m- 41 nW' 40 pns : 39 d^d 38 rrn rhhz 

v t - • V v t : • | • T T T t : 

»Q££i •pesp »arjjg©o^ 47 nnrjgp : 46 niDi 45 Tra 44 W^' 

:rrirp b d# 5ll ?VnD 

t : •• t "•. : 

not 1 arose 2 prophets since 4 Moses 5 Israel* Abraham? rich^ very 9 
cattle 10 silver 11 gold^ fool 13 darkness 14 walks 15 § 18. I. Note 16 deliverance 17 
eviUS goes out 19 lamp 20 commandment 21 law 22 light23 eternity 24 to25 thou 
(art) 26 God 27 says 28 slothful one 29 lion 30 without 31 roarer 32 way 33 also, 
even 34 laughter 35 may ache 36 heart 37 he was 38 thief 39 abroad 40 destroys, 
makes childless 41 sword 42 death 43 n. p. m. 44 chosen 45 good, beautiful 46 east 47 
west 48 north 49 sea 50 (in general the Mediteranean Sea, lying west of Pales- 
tine, hence: the west, but sometimes the Dead Sea or as here the South 
Sea, therefore here: the South.) is praised 51 name of 52 . 

§ 19. CASES OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 

1. To express the relations between the different nouns 
and pronouns in a sentence, f repositions or the correspon- 
ding Prefixes D^D3 are chiefly used. 

2. The Dative is formed by the prep. 7N or its abbrevi- 
ation the prefix 7 (§ 18, II). 

3. The Ablative is formed by the prep. TO or its abbrevi- 
ation, the prefix D, £ or. by D and 3 (§ 16, 1. § 18, 11). 

4. The Accusative is denoted by the particle fitf or "T)K 
(i. e. before Makkef) when the noun is definite, i. e. defined- 
by the article, a possessive pronoun (Suf. § 21), a follow- 
ing genitive or by itself as a proper noun, otherwise it has 
no designation, being entirely similar to the nominative: 
as pNtn nfiTj DW'n DN the heaven and earth, »Jf TK« my 
son, TOXn"f3 J")K the son of the servant, DPnjN flN Abra- 
ham, but Gen. 2, 4: In the day that God made DW'l pK 
earth and heaven. 

5. The Genitive or possessive case remains entirely un- 
changed, with which the preceding noun, (which is limited 
and more nearly defined by the Gen.) is most closely con- 



§ 19. Cases of Nouns and Pronouns. 33 

nected. For this reason the latter is said to stand in the 
Construct State, or simply in the Construct. 

The "better to effect this connection the article of the Con- 
struct is thrown off and its mutahle vowels are shortened : as 
D1DH the horse, hut Tl^tpn D^D the horse of the king (not 
DID?); tylPP? the fowl, hut DV^'n^ the fowl of the heaven 

(not qiyn). T 

Regarding the shortening of the vowels and other 
changes, which the word in the st. const, undergoes, see § 59. 

6. The direction towards a place or the time is indicated 

by the unaccented syllable fi— appended to the noun, called 

> 
local Jl— I as D* sea, Up* towards the sea, ji£¥ the north, 

> > 

rUi5¥ northward, towards the north. D*D* year, HD*D* to 

T T ' • T * * T • T 

year, j7D*Q* D^D from year to year. 

Note I. Local H — is the remnant of an old accusative Q— , 

T T 

yet appearing in many adverbs : as DDi* by day, in the day time, 
DmriD to-morrow, (cf. § 85. 4, B, B.) 

T TT; T \ «J 

Note II. On the Segholates with local H — see § 66, Note I. 
Exercise 27". 

8 j-dn:i nw ^zh 4 *hn yn : 3 nmS 2 pH¥ l -or 
17 wn i)i ; 16 nH3 tfn& 15 nb: 14 hdS#3 nix 13 nby 

T T • t "t • : " • - T t : - - v * 

v •■ t •• v -r t ; -.:•-: t t I - *... 

onv? n»8 : 29 pinp k$j ^rgoi 27 Sd^ 26 n£ 25 ^kto 

41 p 401^5 ^fc^ tfjfljgg 38^^V 5 j HD^f H 37 flSjj K ? 

47 nionS "jna ^d^ 44 Di£> : 43 ti:d S^ddS ^rtwj-w^ 

_. _ ... ... _ T . . . „ T 

:d^P5 49 i^ *&%$} 

memory 1 just2 blessing 3 walked 4 before 5 truth 6 righteousness 7 offer 8 God 9 
thanksgiving 10 good 11 all 12 to wrap, to put on 13 garment 14 stretches 15 
curtain 16 was 17 shepherd 18 small cattle 19 came 20 bear 21 took 22 lamb 23 flock 24 
eater 25 came forth 26 food 27 strong 28 sweetness 29 moved on 30 desert 31 sitting 32 

5 



34 Part 1. Exercises. 

on, in, over33 throne 34 judgment 3 ^ who ? 36 ascended 37 " snow38 summer 3 ^ 
harvest 40 thus 41 becoming, suitable 4 ^ honor 43 a whip 44 horse 45 bridle 46 ass 47 
a stick 4 * the back 4 ^. 

Exercise 28. 
Translate into Hebrew: 
The evening (accus.), to the evening, to an evening, a 
man (nom.), a man (accus,), the man (accus.), from a 
man, from the man, the head* of the man, the head of a 
man, from the heaven, the grass of the earth, the land 
(accus.), the land (nom.), a land (accus.), a land (nom.), 
the light of the heaven, to the judge 2 , to the judge of the 
land, to a judge of the land, the fruit (accus.) of the tree 3 . 
God created* earth and heaven. God created the earth and 
the heaven, the voice 5 (accus.) of God, a voice (accus.) of 
God, a voice (nom.) of God, the sign^ (accus.), a sign 
(accus.), by a sin?, by the sin, towards the east^ towards 
the souths, to the mountain, towards Samaria 1 *). 

: io fhpfc 9DVVJ ernrp 7p^ eni'K 5 Sip 4*02 3p; 2&3# jfftfi 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PKONOUN. 
§ 20. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

I. The personal pronouns are either separate words or 
syllables, contractions of the first and appended to nouns, 
verbs or particles, thence receiving the name of Suffixes. 
The separate pronouns represent the nominative, (see ex- 
ception to this § 93, 2.). The suffixes appended to the verb 
stand for the accusative and for the dative in rare instances. 
The suffixes appended to the noun properly stand for the 
genitive or possessive cases and then serve the purpose of 
possessive pronouns : as ^O^D the horse of me = my horse. 
The suffixes appended to particles either represent the nomi- 
native or the accusative cases : as *}1D!D as I, VYIN me. 



§ 20. The Personal Pronoun. 35 

2. The separate personal pronouns are : 

Singular. Plural. 

p5iN , in pause >$$ j ['*%?%& ' ( ^ } | 

l.coni.<( 4*v* «^ I l.com. <( . HV4 we 



2. 



i w, * * ml 1 ^ com ^ we 
m. rtfiK, " " nm] fm. on^ 



iiN , (prop- V)it)m [ thou 2 - j f. fjiN , mrw > 

(m. K1fi he fm. DH> flSH 



ve 



3 * k wri she 3 - if. jn, mnj.<| 

3. Remarks, *3-K$ * s * ne ancient form and more used in 
the Pentateuch than *3K , while the latter occurs often in the 
later books. Hiltf* compounded of HrUX> as the kindred 
dialects have : Chald. Hf^X » J^N ' Arab. anta. 

The fern, form *fitt occurs only in k'thibh (7 times), 
but it is the foundation of some verbal inflections, (so the 
form ^/DP before suffixes, § 43, 1.) N1H is of common gen- 
der in the Pentateuch and also signifies she. But whenever 
$017 stands in the text for J^CI » it has the pointing JOH 
and must be read WT\* 

^POX is formed from the pronominal stem |K found in 
^N* i7f)N and ^n the harder form of ^N we; DflK and 
JJ1X are blunted forms ofDtflX* properly DlfOX (Chald. 
flftiX* Arab, an turn). Before verb. suff. this original form 
is retained (§ 43, 1.). D«7> JH from DV7; pil whence not 
seldom the 2. and 3. masc. plur. in p I as pj^3^!' P/TfT.' 
OIB^'* Is. 35, 1. JlDiT il^Jl have a demonstrative character. 

4. The separate pronouns, when connected with a noun 
as predicate of a sentence, always include the copula or 
the verb to be: as S"|pV \JN I am Joseph, £"NJ7 HilK thou 
ar£ the man. 

Exercise 29. 

t • t • ~: ..... | T T _ T . T _ | T 



3G Part 1. Exercises. 

I vt t t •• t •■ v v ■ • v: t : -"-: 

jm Dnojc? npci : jjtk wtja : u y&n ^ 7*0 nru* i( nsy T 
MB ffin* fitis* h^ma* i5 dttn 14 ^j; oy# j^nwN'Ji 

♦ sop 19 n ^ mrras *nyyx™ :wn l7 TirrK j^nVoi 

1 ■• x : |t • - t ~ : - : • -: t - : 

pan rrin? >±& *±ft jf^n - ^ nnisn d*j D'rtSsfn 
23 ^p >ix p^n-n^ a*^ :"ip#to 2l ny T S29 
26 IPX b*k : 25 D^nn lifiojei p*fifU nin; ;ni?v *d»b 

30 nrxini 29 Dnsx 28 nnD tfwn nnj;n rrtmo 27 *o 

blessed 1 boh' 2 woman 3 the first4 the lasts honest, upright (\3\ pi. m. D'p^ > 
pi. f. ni33 $ 58, l.) 6 idols? vanity, foolish 8 stranger 9 dust 10 thou shalt return 11 
D'Tfaa pl.fr. IfaJ cf> 12 the only child (girl) 13 twelve 14 brothers 1 ^ forgiving 1 ** 
my sister 17 younger 18 bare 19 son 20 beside me 21 Saviour 22 filling 23 declaration 2 * 
guilty 25 old 26 came 27 mountain 28 n. p. m. 29 dwelled 30 n. p. of a city 31 . 

Exercise 30. 

Ye are strangers! with me 2 - Lord, thon art a refuge 3 
to us from generation 4 to generation. From eternity 5 
to eternity thou art G-od. Not a G-od delighting6 (in) wicked- 
ness? thou art. I am dust and ashess. God is in heaven and 
we are on the earth. Just9 art thou Lord ! Thou art neario 
Lord ! Ye are a" seed of falsehood^. 
io3"hp 9 p'"tt 8 "*3x 7 y?h 6 ]'3n 5oSty 4 -in 3 jij?n 2 "ray itria 

(in pause!) 12*1 ptjr lijHf 

§ 21, NOMINAL SUFFIXES. 

1. The nominal suffixes appended to Nouns in the Singu- 
lar are : 

Sing. Plural. 

1. com. *-f-s 'DID my horse. M, ^— • ^DID our horse 

m . T\, (in pause *— ) ^!jp ^ Q^ , DDD1D ) 

2 'f. !J, ^ JjOW thyk £. —nw horse 



m. in. 1- ID^Dhish. DH. D— * DD1D ) (poetical) 

> ID— 

f. n.n-^n^nDiDherh. p, ?-, jdid S ^ JT u 

t . t v t I. I t It ) their horse 



§ 21. Nominal Suffixes. 37 

Appended to Nouns in Plural : 

Sing. Plur. 

1. com. *— , 'DID my horses Wt ' ^*D?lD our horses 
m. ?jm-, ^D-1D ) DD*-, Oy DID J 

2, <; ^-^Df yh0 ^ &♦-> f3^D5 yourllorses 

m. V— > VD1D his horses OfT— » DrppID ) (poetical) 

'' f. IT— uTMO her horses ?H>— , ttWMb Lj^t 

t .• t v i v •• i ... ■■ j their horses 

2. Remarks. The suffixes of the noun are divided into 
two classes : of Singular and of Plural nouns ; the forms 
of the latter are longer and may be recognized by the 
plural > ; as ^DID our horse, but ^D^D our horses. 

3. The suffixes DD> D> an d DH> jH* they invariably 
having the tone, the better to distinguish between the D 
and the?, are called grave, the others are light suffixes. 

4. VI— is a favorite longer suffix for ), particularly 
in monosyllabic words and in nouns with the ending Jl— : 
pP species, iyp and IJlTP his, its species ; iliOP appear- 
ance, ^ilNHp his appearance. 

5. The suffixes denote the genitive of the pronoun (§ 20, 1). 
The other cases are represented by attaching prepositions 
or prefixes and particles to the suffixes. The dative by 
^N or 7> the accusative by jlN (VT)N) j the ablative by ?p , 
5>bN (»flN) etc. See Paradigm A. 

6. The possessive pronoun is also represented by. 8?' 
(§23, 2.) followed by S with the suffix, thus: >W=== 
**? "lfj'tf which is (belongs) to me = my. See Paradigm A. 

Note. On the suffixes of the verb see § 42. 
Exercise 31. 

rb tvfotf m'& ishtf rte :>W 'did wrihs nirv oa* 

I: tv vt h v - -v v, | « v: t : • t 

»7 rrna :n$jrns nirr 5 &>iD? N7 : 4 rrroj 3 d# 2 j7inr 
dditi n pn:pN :d?S 10 DiS^" :onp 9 Di^p 8 n3N : 7 ^dS 
16 iB^pKn p "Tprnsg : 14 V^ m 13 nn?r »rrjj ??jira 
: 2l ^p D'D^nnf :D5to:? 19 :nS »S dj : 18 j\v 17 o-n$| 



38 Part 1; Exercises. 

27 nnK^r)ni miaam »nViiin rnrv aS :»njn a4 nono uS 

.•••-: t -. - : t \ : - t : J : w t v -; - t 

:frjo# re sttm fea 30 WiD una : 29 ninm 28 mum 

t . — |:t: - t~ - : _.. -. 

:r\b rt ifT3tf "dhid wijb** *n$g] 

vineyard 1 strength 2 with3 might 4 will forsake 5 people, nation 6 
safety, protection? perished, was lost8 refuge9 peace, welfare 16 intelli- 
gent 11 who digs 12 pitis shall fall 14 good man, pious 15 upright 16 man, 
here collect, men 1 ? there is none 18 heart, understanding 19 drink20 cistern 12 
also 22 rock 2 ^ shelter 24 strength 25 greatness 26 glory 2 ? victory 28 majesty 29 
ruling30 n ow3l thanking^ 2 , cf. to 32, 33, § 107, 3. 

Exercise 32. 
His light, our light, my tree, their tree, her tree, thy 
tree, thy trees, his day 1 , thy (fern.) day, my stars, our 
star, our stars, to the fruit of his tree, thy voice, my be- 
ginning, thy (fern.) beginning 2 ) your beginning, thy (ac- 
cus.) voice, the voice of God. lam givings from the fruit 
of your trees to the ruler 4 of the citys. The strengths of 
my armf. The light of our torches 8 , the sands of their 
shores 10 . 

.loeji'n 9 Sin 8T3S ?j;iiT 6rp syj? 4 b#n ajrij ajvcfin idv 

Exercise 33. 
God created him, us, me, them (fern.), her, I gave 1 thee 
from it, from them, I come 2 to thee (m) (f.), and she came 3 
to him, to them, to us, I (am) with thee, in it, by us, as 
we, as I. God took 4 him, thee, thee (in pause), thee (f.), 
I shall establish 5 my covenants with 7 you, with them, with 
him, with her, with thee (f.). 

.r crm) nit enna so'pst 4npS 3«3ni 2x3 iwu 

. . I - T |- T T - T • - T 

§ 22. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 

1. M. H?) 

." \ this 

f. nw ) (rarely n t ) 

Com. It (without distinction of gender or number.) 
Plur. H^X» (Stt rarely) these. 
Note. In Jit /H or apocopated t/il this, the demonst. has the 



§ 22. Demonstrative Pronoun. 39 

original article with 7: (7J7) before it; W/H f. occurs only 
once Ez. 36, 35. 

2. The demonstrative referring to a remoter object is repre- 
sented by Kinn, nth. nnn, jnrp as onn dw? 

in those days, while n^NJl D*P*3 in these days ; or they ex- 
press: the same: as KlJin t£^Nil the same man. 

3. The demonstratives are thus declined: 
Norn. fit, riW this, rhlt these. 

Dat. nh, r\iih to this, tfoxh to these. 

L " T 
Ace. iirtlX, DNrnK this, n7N-n^ these. 

I HD. JIND* DKD> iTMED 

I VT 

4. Syntactical rules. § 94.* 

Exercise 34. 

... .. . T . _ v .. .. T . T _. - • T V T ~ 

w -t t t : *- t • : - t m - v • •••••: 

9 S^5 nW ' 8 nin mm ovc? 7 nj; npto •rnqfj-n^ b*k 
jTjjrt rin^ rjTirr r\rxh : u ^Mii Sv? nW\ 10 nppnn 
3>4 : 15 N| nrj 14 i3i? nj 13 iiy injaa D^rtS^ 12 nn:> nS 
:w«n n*ft :e*Kn xin : 18 irb tf : 17 nSin M njn rir 

T • T • T T r T T 

2 W 21 Kr 20 ^ rtax i9 ntrW :**rtn raaftts mmn wan 
... .... T . . ~ T . T T . T 

;>S ^rronroy jpNrrfa *nafti rtaxoi a nan a om 

• : - T ( ^- I V T T T t : t ...... v T . T . 

27 on winn vfrtfa njj?j 26 iw' 21 di*n 21 {%-{hn5 njb gt>k 

:jno 29 ")Di own 28 nti w 

• t ■• t : • v: •• • t t : 

* The learner must refer to the respective paragraph before translating 
the exercise following, and in all cases when his attention is called to the 
Syntax. 



40 Part 1. Exercises. 

cityl words 2 I have redeemed 3 thou hast made, performed 4 knew 5 
sepulchre 6 unto? lo! behold! 8 shadow, shelter, 9 wisdom 10 money 1 ! 
chosen 12 while yet 13 (was) speaking 14 came 15 evil 16 sore 17 strength 18 
three 19 sons of 20 n. p. 21 was overspread22 I formed 23 chariot 24 we will re- 
member 25 his name 26 plain27 fearing 28 departing 29 . 

Exercise 35. 

This man 1 , that man, that woman 2 , this woman, these 
men 3 , these women 4 , those men, those women, this is the 
man, that is the woman, these are the men, that is the 
words, from that man, to this woman, this is my God, 
this boy 6, this is the law 17 , this pillar^ these are the 
names9 of the sons^, those "brothers 11 (ace.), these are thy 
uncles 12 . 
,ro'Dtff. snsxrof. fmift 6 ""un s-im 4o , #] sd-bun 2nsy'x i#>k 

T ..~ T -- TT . t .-r-. T . 

.12DHH HD'nX 10 0*03 9 m"Dtf the n ames of 

§ 23. THE RELATIVE. 

1. The relative pronoun for both genders and numbers 
is l&K ivho, which; often including the pers. pronoun : he 
who, she who, that which: HKF) ")£% he whom thou 
cursest. 

2. In the later biblical books and the modern Hebrew 
writers, the abbreviated ' form • $ ot ♦ VJ (with following 
Dag., omitted before gutt.) is most frequently used. 

3- *^K ( or *$) gives to every word to which it refers 
relative signification: as D^ there, QW *1?'N where, l&X 
Dt^D whence. 

4. It is declined as follows : 



Gen. 


(iDID his horse) 


iD^D IgW whose horse 


Dat. 


(fa to him) 


fa 1&X to whom 


Ace. 


(iniN him) 


inlK n^'N whom 


Abl. 


OilJpP from him) 


ti&Q TtflK from whom. 



5. Before participles the. article ,1 frequently represents 
the relative : as TlbiJin he who goes. 



§ 24. The Interrogative Proxoun. 41 

Exercise 36. 

na : 6 nnivp? 5 D\rn^ 4 D^n : 3 -ot 2 im u ht\ n^ 
11 2)0 10 :n 9 np ;po dto 8 ntrj; nin? 7 ^§n 10* 
15 ^£^p# t]S 14 w :i3 13 n?5 -x\vS mrr 12 f§¥ n^'K 
: 20 toS 19 *vid> nin> pi dins l8 ntorr nate -nan 17 nna : 16 ny: 

t t : I • t t t - : • v -: v v - t w -t 

♦owS 24 rnoNnn : 23 inD:)onin> ^Dbncr'N-on a ns?K 

• t.\t : t : |t t : • t : t v — : •• v - •• : 

rjgy 29 pSn 28 ^Snn^^ 27 7|Sn 26 ^Sn n0p# 25 nnion 
ayn hafc i^ 30 n:o£ # * oyrr nate :*rt?N n^bai W 

^T T " : - T T V *T T ":.*" T V: | - _ I" " w - 

:vriStf ninnr 

x v: t : |v 

spirit 1 with 2 may speak3 fishes 4 are taken 5 net 6 wishing - , desiring 7 he did 8 
how 9 great 10 goodness 11 has laid up 12 confide, trust 13 woe 14 the king 15 a boy, 
a youth 16 cursed 17 trustsis departs 19 37, C37) heart 20 hail! happy ! 21 makes 22 
trust 23 said 24 mother in law 25 thou goest 26 I will go 27 thou lodgest 2 ® I will 
lodge 29 thus30. 

Exercise 37. 

The field which Abraham bought i. The horse 2 upon 4 
which the king 5 rode 3 . Daniel 6 whose name 8 was called 7 
Belteshazzar9. Not goodio (is) the counsel 11 that he has 
given 12 . Nigh 13 is the Lord 14 to all 15 that call upon him 16 
in truth 17 . And 18 God^ saw 18 all that he had made 2 <>, and, 
behold 21 , (it was) very 22 good. 

(his name TO^) 8 Q# 7 >OpJ e^^jn 5 }7Q 4 rSv 3337 2 D-*D imp 
: •• ti:* •• • t ivv TT -t t|t 

h-jidk l6:^x-lp , 1^3 unin*' l3 3np i2v^»iiri3f» loroiB 912?k#bS3 

v.v: *•. Tl:* t : It I -t t'~ t --::•• 

.23ixp 22 3i'D 2l niHi 2on^j; m'd'iI-Sk ^ai*] 
§ 24 THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

1. The interrogative pronoun is *0 who? usually applying 
to persons, nO > nO> np what? applying to things. 

no before tf and 1 and always in pause: n7NTIO what 
(are) these, DJTJO nO what did you see? 

Commonly it is written no or ,nO (followed by Dag.): as 
iOt^'nO what is his name ? or with a small word, it is con- 
tracted into one word: as n?0 what is this? (§ 9. 1. Note.) 

nO before n> n> V' as *V'W HO what hast thou done? 

6 



42 Part I. Exercises. 

At the beginning of a sentence Jlp also frequently stands 
before letters not guttural : as Vip hp what voice ? 

2. The cases are indicated by the prefixes and the par- 
ticle n$: 

Dat. »D*7 to whom ? 

Ace. *p /"IK whom ? 

*PP from whom? 
Abl * pa with or through whom ? 

The Gen. by *!jV$ whose? but more frequently it is 
indicated by putting the interrogative immediately after the 
noun: as 'OTQ whose daughter? *p"Ta through whose 
hand? D<l7 Jlp-Jlpan Jer. 8, 9. the intelligence of what 
remains to them? 

3. HD is also used adverbially; as D'J^TilpI aiDTtO how 
good and how pleasant ! 

4. Interrogative particles: 'N or J1*N where? with suff. 
na*N where art thou? VN where is he? D^N where are 
they? 

With adverbs and pronouns, Jit *N which ? what ? 
where ? whither ? Hip *K whence ? from what ? jlNH *K 
on what account ? wherefore ? Jia*N how ? Jl£W where ? 

T 

5. Interrogative prefix: Jl (Jl with comp. Sh'va) fre- 
quently before non-gutturals : as 17 Di/t^H is he well ? Jl 
before a letter with Sh'va or a guttural : as n^"HN DfiIH*Jl 
know ye Laban ? TPNJl shall I go ? H before gutturals 

having Kamets : as *?iXJl have (or am) I ? JOJl ptnn is he 
strong ? 

In negative sentences this Jl is always connected with 
the negative particle: as TftfoW N7H hast thou not heard? 
Uaip? JliiT p#H is^not the Lord in our midst? 

Exercise 38. 

3 7]pb> *p :mr 2 hnb>j; ninn! 9 nVN-Sa? ^t-kS vj 
ay. ntp »n :*o5j?fj nr >p-f3 : ti wSy 5 to$kn 4 iij> t^K 1 ? 






§ 24. The Interrogative Pronoun. 43 

-no :niiTD'S*a MM) »fi : 9 unvS 8 dx nn^ ^Sn :r?hK 

t : ■ •■ t | t • ■• t : • t - t -: T t 

now 19 on N ; n ^ kS l8 n»N 17 Dinn npDhn m itn : 15 d^ 

-t t: •• _ t : t:t ••- •- 

25 trip >zh 24 d^ho vj 1 ? *yytt ^ 22 in •p 1 ? : 21 hbj; 20 pK 

-p*l njiT *J8 n^O JD*?03 b"j«S iip-np 32 jhv *9 : 31 f w n 
34 8^?rr : 33 >nSir p« jw'ioi p^ HJ^ati D>riW ity 

39 wS 38 jrti vj : 37 (T)p T n ^ >p 36 fP5P : 35 dk ~\mh 
43 mm ivb wn nn mm 42ta vdr : 41 W ^n* ^oS : 40 mm 

~ : t t t •.• t : : *• "V ■•-:■■■ •: t 

knows 1 has wrought 2 * the feminine is used for the neuter § 81, 1. made 
thee 3 chief 4 judge 5 over 6 youth 7 or 8 enemy 9 the planter 10 ear 11 he shall 
hear 12 the former 13 ej'e 14 he shall see 15 where (is) 16 depth 17 says 18 sea 19 
(it is) not 20 with 21 woe 22 misery23 contentions 24 sorrow 25 wounds 26 without 
cause 27 darkening of 28 eyes 29 tm\t tarry long 30 wine 31 knows (prop, (is) 
knowing) 32 besides, except me 33 there is, it is 34 father 35 womb 36 ice 37 gave, 
put 38 the insight, mind 39 understanding 40 toiling, labouring 41 remember 4 ^ 
in stead of 43 . 

Exercise 39. 
Who art thou my soni? Who art thou my daughters? 
Who is this man? What is his name 3 ? Who are these? 
Whose daughter is this maiden 4 ? What has he done&? 
Who is this that cometh 6 from Edom* 7 ? For whose son do I 
labour8? Whom wilt thou sends with me*o ? What is that 
in thine hand** ? Is* 2 in a dreamt truth ? Whose ox} 4 have 
I taken 15 ? or 16 whose ass 17 have I taken ? oris whom have 
I defrauded* 9 ? or* 8 of whose hand have I received20 . (any) 
bribe 21 ? Is he strong22 or 23 weak 24 ? What is the land* that 
he dwells25 in, is it good 2 6 or bad 2 6 ? is it fat 27 or lean28 ? 
Is not one 29 father 3 © to us all 31 ; has not one God created us 32 ? 
What did this people do unto thee? Who has done this ? 
vrhtfn 8 Sd^ 7dhk 6 «3 srwy 4hdS^ Mdi^ 2, n3 (r\3) i^a aii 

17^'Dn (Uonj.) 161 15, .nnpS UTitf ^Ol'Sn JL2tfv(han#T),ll?|T 10-J3J? 
iafem. }HN* 24 n.p*l interrogative H 23 22 pjn 2 1 133 20^ J inp l 7 WfipBty 18 1 



44 Part I. Exercises. 

31 S3 ,§. 90, 2. so ax 29inx 28 nn arruotf 26 run ,n3ftD frm. 310 2535^ 

T TV TT T-: TT T 

.-32 0N13 ,.173 ,1~>3 witlisuff. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 
§25. GENERAL VIEW. 

1. The verbs classified with respect to their origin are : 
a. Primitives : as THD to govern ; b. Derivatives, which 

are either derived from other verbs : Verbal Deriva- 
tives: as pl$ to justify, from p"lV to be just, or are de- 
rived from nouns : Denominatives : as W^\ to remove the 
ashes, from |&H ashes. 

2. The groundform or stem of the verb is the third per- 
son singular of the preterite: ^DD he has killed. It regu- 
larly consists of three consonants (radicals), the most import- 
ant vowel of which follows the second radical ; in transitive 
verbs it is Patach : as 7DD * in intransitives, Tsere or Cho- 
lem: as"JJ3 he was heavy, TDD he was little. The Kamets 
after the first radical is pretonic and drops when the tone 
or accent is thrown forward : as WPh\$0 vou have killed. 

3. The infinitive construct, ^bD to kill, is another ground- 
form and was so considered by the earlier Jewish Gram- 
marians, being called by them tJHt^' root. It consists of 
the three radicals with only one vowel, after the second. 

4. These groundforms are both of great importance, 
controlling the other forms of the verb derived from them. 

Note. From the infinitive as the second groundform are deriv- 
ed the imperative and future. In some guttural and irregular 
verbs, where the infinitive is differently vocalized from the impera- 
tive or takes a nominal ending, the future is derived from the 
latter. 

5. The modifications of the simple and primary idea of 
the root are effected by external variations of the ground- 
form. Those variations are threefold: 



§ 25. General View. 45 

o.. Vocalization, or the alteration of the vowels : as fl/w 
he sends, 117^* ne dismisses. 

b. Reduplication, or the doubling of one, and in rare in- 
stances of two of the radical sounds : as 7^p = 7u?£9p. » 

/•Dp, nrnrr? fr. nnp. 

c. Augmentation, or the prefixing of one or two formative 

consonants: as StDpJ> ^Pj?D' ^RO' ^j?W • 

6. These new forms, more properly called derivations, 
having altered not only their external form but also their 
internal sense, are now generally termed Conjugations, in 
the language of the ancient grammarians DO*J3 buildings, 
forms. 

7. The ancient grammarians, who employed the verb 
7j/;D to do, as a paradigm, named the conjugations, accor- 
ding to the various forms derived from this verb, thus : 

1. 7#3 — Paal, he acted, (now generally 7p) ♦ 

2. 7j£92 — Niphal, he was acted upon. 

3. ^S ~ Piel, he acted vigorously. 

4. 7J/3 — Pual, he was vigorously acted upon. 

5. 7*#$n — Hiphil, he caused to act. 

6. 71^511 — Hophal, he was caused to act. 

7. 7#$rn — Hithpael, he acted upon himself. 

These terms have been retained with the exception of 
the first, which has been supplanted by the equally an- 
cient: ^p light, intimating, that it is the simple original 
form, without external or internal change, while the other 
:six are DHD3 grave or heavy i. e. freighted with a weigh t- 
\iv meaning, which brings with it a corresponding exter- 
nal change. 

§ 26. SIGNIFICATION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 
CONJUGATIONS. 

The Characteristics and the signification of the derived 
conjugations are : 

1. /]}&] » Niplial is the passive, or often the reflexive or 



• 



40 Part I. Exercises. 

reciprocal of Kal : as ")£&* to keep, Niphal : to be kept, 
or to keep one's self from. 

2. byi?' Pid signifies in general intense action, energy, 
frequency : "D^ to break, 12$ to shatter, VOW to send, 
Vn$ *° dismiss. It is often the transitive or causative 
of Kal, when the latter is intransitive : as 7"7 } to be great, 
to grow, ^JJ to cause to grow : WIT) to be holy, Clp 
to make holy. 

3. 7V$> Pual is the passive of Piel. The characteristic 
of both is the doubling of the second radical by Dagesh 
forte. 

4. 7*#5n* Hiphil signifies causation: to cause another 
person or thing to do that, which is indicated by the 
primitive Kal : as 3JTD to write, DTDI! to cause to write. 
If Kal is intransitive, Hiphil signifies only the transitive 
of Kal : as pVT\ to be strong, Hiphil : to make strong, to 
strengthen. 

5. Vl?$n> Hophal is the passive of Hiphil. The charac- 
teristic of both is the prefixed H and the proper vocali- 
zation. 

6. 7iyDiin,> Hithpael is generally reflexive, sometimes re- 
ciprocal: as 7l3prn to kill one's self, Jl^"jn«l to look at 
each other. Rarely has it a passive signification : as rDJ?£V7 
to be forgotten, Ec. 8, 10. Wjpnnn to be embittered, pro- 
voked to anger, Ps. 73, 21. 

Occasionally it denotes to pretend, to feign to be 
or to do what is denoted by the root, hence it has 
been called by some the hypocritical conjugation : as ^tStyfijl 
to pretend to be rich, Pr, 13, 7. DDfinn to show ones' self 
wise Ec. 7, 16. Its characteristic is the prefixed syllable 
D?\ and the doubling of the second radical by Dag. forte. 

Note. There are also unusual conjugations: 1. Poel as 7fpip> 
reflexive 7fi?1plV?»fot. Sfc?1p! > part. Sg)1pO. *b*. pass, /'DipV. 
In the regular verbs it occurs very seldom : *fcp£^? mv judge, 
Jab 9, 15. B^j# to take root Is. 40, 21. In verbs py it is 



§ 27. Inflection. 47 

frequent: as 77 \ft > MID* TJJItl . 2 - Pilel > P U H Hithpalel, es- 
pecially when the second radical is a guttural : as pNtt^' to be at 
rest, JJJH to be green. 3. Pealal (the two last letters being re- 
peated) as nrnflb t0 oeat quick, to palpitate, from 1I7D to' go 
about. 4. Pilpel, formed from a biliterdk root by doubling both 
radical letters: as 737? to sustain, nourish. ylf/lC to tinkle, 

t]}? m py. to nutter. 

§ 27. INFLECTION. 

The different derivative forms or conjugations are in- 
flected, to indicate the various grammatical conditions of 
Tense, Mood, Gender, Number and Person. 

a. The Tenses (D^D?) are two: Preterite (13J?) and 
Future (Try?) . 

b. Moods: Two forms of the Infinitive (7iM fountain), 
an absolute and a construct; an Imperative Vft)f (com- 
mand), excepting in Pual and Hophal as pure passives ; 
two Participles, [U'LVJ (middle) or FT))! („being, ")~Pa,rt. of 
the verb Wl to be], a Part, active (7JTi£)), a Part, passive 
(7)1^3), as derived nominal forms. 

c. Two Numbers: Singular (TfV alone, single), Plural 
(D'3'1 many). 

d. Three Persons: I. P. (i"1J£|J ^3*?p s P ea king for himself), 
II. P. (MPS) present), III. P. (7fiDJ concealed, hidden). 

e. Two Genders : Masculine (*Df a male), Feminine (i"DM 
a female). 

§ 28. CLASSES. 

1. The verbs are divided into regular or perfect and irregu- 
lar or imperfect verbs. Kegular D^7t^ (perfect) are those, 
of which the three radicals undergo no change arid always 
remain audible. 

The regular verbs include the gutturals : i.e. verbs of 
which one or more radicals are of the IJ^nnN ? the changes 
which they suffer affecting the vowels only, not the radicals. 

2. The irregular are divided into DHDI1 Defective, D'!l3 
Quiescent, and CD^flS Beduplicate. 

Defective verbs in some forms drop one or more of their 



48 Part I. Exercises. 

radical letters. Quiescents have one of the half vowels 
*ir?N as radicals, which in some forms either drop or qniesce. 
Reduplicates have for the two last radicals similar letters. 
3. From the old example *?]/ 3 > of which the first letter 
is 3 > the second ]} , the third ^ , those, the first letter of 
which quiesces or drops, were called '£ Hpn or '£) *rtf i. e. 
defective or quiescent in tD> those, the second letter of 
which quiesces, 'J? ^113 i. e. quiescent in ]/, and those in 
which the third is quiescent, '7 ^(1^ i. e. quiescent in 7* 
Thus CJj is called 3"£3 i. e. the 3 or the first radical is 3 5 
"VI D = V'j), i. e. the ]? or the second radical is )', Ha! = H" 1 ? 
i. e. the *? or the third radical is H; DDD is called J>"J> i. e. 
double y 1 its second and third radicals being the same. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE REGULAR VERB. 
EXPLANATION OF THE SECOND PARADIGM. 

§ 29. THE PRETERITE 03tf). 

1. The principal vowel stands after the second radical. 
In the transitive verb it is Patach, in the intransitive 
Tsere or Cholem. For the sake of brevity the former are 
called: Verbs middle A, as 7Dp > the latter: Verbs middle F, 
as */$n to incline, to delight in, and middle 0, as 72* to 
be able, can. 

2. The Kamets in the first syllable is pretonic (§ 14 Re- 
jection 1) and drops when the tone or accent is thrown for- 
ward: as Dn7iDp ye have killed. 

3. The conditions of Person, Number and Gender are in- 
dicated in the preterite by attaching at the end fragments 
of the persona] pronouns, which are called : Affirmatives. 
(§ 15, 2. Note). 



§ 29, The Preterite ("DJJ). 49 

4. Tlie afforinatives of the preterite are : 

Person: 1. 2. 3. 

m. n — 

T 

Singular. Tl com. £ ^ £ ^ 

: t 

m. DD 
Plural. U com. ^ ' com< , 

5. The vowel in the second syllable: — , — , l_ drops in 
the third person fern, and plur.: as r?7tpp T » f l^£?P T {§ 14 Re- 
jection 3). 

With a pause accent it is restored: as H/tOp > nVfill.? H7b^ 
(§14 Rising II). 

6. The verbs middle E. generally lose the 'sound — in 
their inflection : as r$n > r)V§n • 

The verbs of middle retain the Cholem in the second 
sing, and first persons: as JTO3 f » ^Fviy . 

° -*■ t : t • : t 

In those cases, however, where the tone is shifted, Cho- 
lem changes into Kamets-Chatuph : as OFy?y ♦ 

7. Verbs ending with jl suffer a rejection of the fi before 
the aftbrmatives beginning with T) '• as FTO for JVH3» from 
rro, W3: DJJ3? (§ 12, 6. B. 1.) 

8. In combinations with the afformatives FT, p, ^ the 
wordisMilel, otherwise Milra: as fibftp, nStOp > Orbw ♦ 

t : -It t : I |t v : - J : 

(§ 9, 12. II. m.). 

9. Syntactical rules § 100. 

Exercise 40. 

*hSoj :T]S np?n 9 n?2rT 8 dn :cK?y_ 7 ni: 6 ^ipp 
*a?N ^rrwrrn» 14 u^r : i3 nS:3N£ 12 n^p!} u rruK 

v -: t t - v : - t t t -: - • | t - t : |t 

H^vrpO m *TP$ :n?K 23 Dinnn 22 nS^ : 21 n^j; 20 ^E| 

7 T 



50 Part I. Exercises. 

3 °-dS 29 Si k W joTiStfrr 28 ^ 27 n:i;vr)K 26 DnnS^*Dr)N-^S 

- t t • v: t t •• ■ v : - : * 

wtoVyriVi r° s iny 37 rby :ninniN 38 'ntrn :»r&o» 

t : -: t : t t : v • : - t t :^ 

nirv 44 1D?1 43 p T ^n vSjM 2 p?> 41 ^5 40 iins SrtN"S^ 39 NinS 
-nx 48 ^?rvrn* 47 p#' T napi mra : 46 |D^n-ni* 45 xSp 

:>a* w fl^Dl nxtDi 48 DiStr'D^ 

• t • : - t t : t . t : - 

to be great 1 work 2 very 3 to be deep* thought 5 voice 6 to flee 7 ifs to be or 
become wise 9 ant 10 to gather 11 harvest 12 food 13 to remember 14 fish 15 to eat 16 
Tyre 17 to say 18 the perfection of beauty 19 to work 20 iniquity 21 to fall 22 
street 23 to keep 24 precept 25 to send 2 6 hither 27 but 28 Saul 29 to take 39 rule, 
dominion 31 to be too little 32 mercy 33 to give 34 the produce 35 to seek 36 to be 
able 37 to endure 38 to enter 39 the tent of the congregation 40 - because 41 to rest 42 
cloud 43 the gjory ot 44 to fill 45 dwelling, Tabernacle 46 to counsel, to advice 47 
n. p. m. 48 - 

Exercise 41. 

Kachel 1 stole 2 the images 3 - Why 1 hast thou soldo thy 
horse ? Jacob 6 rent 7 his clothes 8 - A dream.9 I dreamed 10 - 
Why have you not sent 1 * a messenger 12 to our father is 2 The 
woman dipped 14 the breads in 16 vinegar*?- Kuth 18 gleaned^ 
ears 20 in the field. Our enemies 2 ! took 22 our city (f.) and all its 
men they killed 23 with 16 the sword 2 *. Why did you laugh 2 ^? 
(fern.) They have not kept 26 the covenant of God. We 
loved 27 , I loved. Thou wast able 28 ? you were able. Islept 2 9, 
Ye slept (fern.), thou hast cut 30 ; I have cut, Ye have cut. 
The Hebrews 31 went over 32 Jordan 33 - Jacob gave 34 Esau 3 ^ 
bread and pottage 36 of lentils 37 - Sacrifice 38 and offering 3 ^ 
thou didst not desire 40 , burnt offering 41 and sin offering 42 
hast thou not required 43 - 

om'Sn (pi.)8dhjg 7 ;n£ 6 ip^;_ 5 *dd arte 1 ? (pi.) 3 d^sha 2 d;j iSni 
i7ybn 16 ^ i5onS uhia 13, :jx with suff. ^ rnxSn unW ionSn 

I V .VV - T • T T , I T : - - T - T 

(inPause! §.14 24^n 23 nn 22 1dS 21 D^N (pi.) 20 D ,l ?3^ 19BpS 18JVn 

-t -t • : • T • |-T 

8213V (pl.)31Dn3V 3 0n"l3 29JKT 28 Sir 27 3HK 26 m^ 25 pnV Lengthening 4) 

~T • : "• -T I "T T ~T ~T | ~T 

41 nS\y 4 0}'3n sonnjn sens? (pi.) 37 D^n^ 35ttj 34 r^ 34jra 33 nv 

:(in pause) 43*7X10 42 HXttn 



§ 30. The Infinitive. 51 

§ 30. THE INFINITIVE. 

1. The second groundform is the Infinitive 7£3D to kill. 
It is called construct, because it is always connected with 
the Prefixes u722> or with a following noun: as J21 D7X 
to lie in wait for blood. With the prefixes : as 7C0D3 in 

killing, TdD2 as killing, T0p7 to kill, SftpQ from 
killing. 

2. The 7"M are regularly vowelless ; the Chirek here 
is a helping vowel. The Dagesh after the f2 is for the 
assimilated J , Sbf?P for Sbp \f2 . Of V'M the S is most 
closely connected, so that the following Sh'va is silent, 
while the Sh'va after 2 and 2 are vocal : as 75*}7> but 

Saw-W?. (§n, v.) 

3. The Cholem is shortened before Makkef : as VQrh&fc ♦ 

x t : 

4. The Infinitive has a form with Patacli of but rare 
occurrence: as 22$ to lie down, *7§5P to be humiliated. 
Sometimes it is lengthened by jl— : as H^HD"? to approach. 

5. The second form of the Infinitive is the Inf. absolute 
^iDp > with immutable Cholem. It is used before or after 
finite verbs to indicate continued action, energy, intensity: 
i!tt)rpSn ? D i ?n they went, going on and lowing, rW'fi iOttf 
ye shall diligently keep. 

6. Syntactical rules § § 105, 106. 

Exercise 42. 

:*-p# ^bpS onto* 2 nn riiriirnK n'qS n^O 13^ 
wpycp'byto : 6 ji3#rt dv n$ mot?" idjitj? >rnp| 5 ipa 
ni?.v ls Tisp 12 n# : u fc>T) 10 toy_p H*n#fc 9 nt?PD 8 nvp3 
18 >rtt* 17 nrot ;nSai nbijr 16 ^ vzh 15 Si£D : 14 nipn 
: 22 r\t2rh 21 3jnS *>tii$ miwm taom 19 omr\ mv» 

| v : - •• tt t t : v t : - t t -: • v: 

^D'Q^n M w" w w 26 d^W 25 bnSS 24 ^S 23 *rm> 



52 Part I. Exercises. 

jonira 37 Strp 36 i5^S- 35 ^ 

shear 1 ho! wo2! mix 3 strong drink 4 to think of 5 sabbath 6 to taste 7 with 
the end ofB rod 9 a little 10 honey 11 time 12 to lament 13 to leap 14 to fall 15 sons 
of 16 ah! alas 17 ! Lord 18 to reject 19 to break assunder 20 a hungry one 21 thy 
bread 22 to go down 23 garden 24 to gather 25 lilies 28 the days of2 7 to judge 2 ® 
judges 29 he that shaketh 39 hand 31 to hold 32 D here includes negation § 106, 2. 
bribe 33 good cheer, delight 34 much less 35 slave, servant 36 to rule 37 - 

Exercise 43. 
God made 1 the sun 2 and the nioon3 to rule4 over/5 the 
day and over the night. I hi rede a reaper" to reap.8 the 
wheats and a builder 1 *} to repair 11 the house. They have 
slaughtered 12 an ox to sell its meat 1 3. He gave me rai- 
ment 14 to put on 15 - I have rejected^ thee that thou 
shouldst not reign 1 ' (from reigning) (§ 106, 2.) over 18 them. 
The Lord said 1 9 that He would dwells (tr. to dwell) in the 
thick 21 cloud 21 - The man went out22 to lie 2 3 on 2 * his 
couch 25 - 
up-ra 19 nj3 9 nan siyp 7-reip e-ofr 53 ihtv 3 n*v 2#d# intov 

I -t v t • -It •• I -t - f t v v t't 

1910X (with plur. suff.) 18 Si? rnS?3 16DND latfoS 14 *U3 13 i"W2 i2n3£3 

-T - '-T ~T ~T VV T : ~T 

:&23til2 24 3 23330 22 J«- 21 SsH? 20 pa/ 

T : • -T T T v t -: I - T 

§ 31. THE FUTURE. 

1. The future is formed from the second groundform 
7tDp hy prefixing the preformatives [jVN» which are origi- 
nally vowelless, and receive the helping vowel Chirek. X 
receives Seghol. (§ 14. Rising I. a.) 

2. The preformatives JjYN indicate the personal relation, 
while the afformatives determine the relations of Gender 
and Number. 

3. The preformatives and the afformatives of the future are : 



Person: 


1. 




2. 


3. 


Sing. com. 


N 


m. 
f. 


n 


m. « 

f. n 


Plur. com. 


J 


m. 
f. 




m. 1— * 

f. m-fl 



§ 31. The Future. 53 

4. The Cholem in the second syllable generally is only 
to be found in the transitive verbs (middle A), whilst the 
verbs middle E and regularly have Patach : as 713* 
from TlJI to be or become great, "T33* from HDD to be 

honored, ]Qp\ from |bp to be little, small. Before Mak- 
kef, Cholem is changed into Kamets-Chatuph : as DfcfDrO?1 
and he wrote there. 

5. The vowel of the last syllable which drops before the 
afformatives commencing with a vowel (§14, Rejection 3.), 
is regularly restored in pause. The restored vowel re- 
quires the tone and lengthens its restored A vowel (Patach) 

into Kamets: as^SpjW' but '*?bpfl> &$.> but faw they 
will be great. 

6. The forms ending in ) or * — have occasionally, especially 
at the end of a period, a paragogic 7. (§ 12, 6. C.) In this 
last case the vowel of the second syllable is restored : as 

qffiff* but pprin, tt^Vi but pmv* 

7. The form ri^bpfl often appears without the H; as 



8. Syntactical rules, see § 101. 

Exercise 44. 

♦a hti&nkh) dm w i2 Straa nS i ntm \nw 10 np^' 9 nw* 
16 Wy :^r 15 Dy 14 tr'i^ 18 pwrrJD :dd^ ^fcto* nirr dm 

t ■• "• v: J - : ' - v t : • t : v t 

i™*bxnb : 18j ip:nn nyrfcx rrBi*a jWd* 17 d^'k-o 

: | t : • v " v: t : • • t : 

^ownft t : 25 pN" 24 ^Vp^ ftVffi *IT$ : 22 ST 21 Vnn ^Sn 
>S n0f 29 En$n oy :pK 28 u?i?» 27 dt; :Won 
-Sk :Dyijb# nrtiT 31 fl'^rn# pivvr) niDsr : 3 7prin 
Paha? bvi : 3& 2jr? 35 D^'n og> :*pl-^*na 32 rrDirn 



54 Part 1, Exercises. 

rbh) Din 41 ^rn ppi 40 nm 39 ipi T¥p T i : jr». : 38 n^.N* 

I = ' 

without 1 tattler 2 to cease 3 strife 4 to counts how long 6 injustice 7 
to lie down, to sleep 8 in vain9 to wake, to watch 1 ** the keeper, watch- 
man 1 ! to rule 12 to be just 13 manH with 1 ^ rich 16 poor 17 to cleave 18 to steal 19 
not 20 to rob 21 poor 22 he that soweth 23 to reap 24 vanity 25 the diligent 26 
upright 27 to dwell 28 young men 29 to keep fast 30 commandments 31 to be joy- 
ful 32 daughter 33 Edom34 unrighteous, a sinner 35 to decay or perish 
quickly 36 to spread out, to extend 3 ? folly 38 cold 39 warmth, heat^o autumn, 
harvest, frequently including (as here) the winter 41 to cease 42 - 

Exercise 45. 

In that day shall be great 1 the mourning 2 in Jerusalem 3 - 
The Lord shall judge 4 the world 5 in righteousness^- In those 
days* I will pour out 8 my spirits upon 10 all flesh 11 - Do ye 
thusi2 requite 13 the Lord 14 ? The work shall he heavy 15 
upon 16 the men. Of thee 17 she will require 18 the blood 10 
of her brother20, f or 2i thou hast killecl22 him. I shall make 23 
a covenant with 24 you, for you are my people 25 , that I have 
chosen^ 6 - 
io Sy 9 nn Qi\st 7qw epi* 5 San mati sD-btiw 2 naoD ibn 

- - i-t t I w •• •■ -t ---r : •• : • -t 

16 St! 15133 fern. 14rn3V seldom as here with S 13 SdJ 12 nX? 11*)^ 

•t t -: -T TT 

23JV13 22 l 7Dp 21 ^ (TUX with stiff.) 20 n« 19 Ul 18tfTT trasl. at thy hand 17 
-t -It • • t t - - T 

.26-ina P3J? with suff.) 25 D£ MfflftQ ,j"»N 

§ 32. THE LENGTHENED FUTURE OR OPTATIVE. 

1. The first persons in Sing, and Plur. of all the active 
future tenses are frequently lengthened by the syllable 
H— » seldom ft— » which has the tone and affects the final 

T 

vowel of the future, in the same manner as the afformatives 
1 and > T : as fhpp>^> ftpph 

2. The lengthened form has the signification of the 
optative and expresses self excitation, purpose, direction of 
the will: as Jinpb^ let us be joyful! — 

Note. In a few instances it is found attached to other per- 
sons: Is. 5, 19. Ez. 23, 20, Ps. 20, 4. (with ft— ), 



§ 32. The lengthened Future or Optative. 55 

Exercise 46. 

-hn 5 Wtu j 4 r\m 3 wnx 2 nizpx : swwa x rrfcfot 

. •• t : : ■ t t • • v , t : | : v I v : • t : : v 

S*nb»o 8 nwpK :d™t^ 7 ejnn "renpa mirr 

•• x : • • t : | : v • v:|t v -: t :| : • T : 

: i7 rn?pN 16 nKrbj/ :nirv rjTj nropi : 15 DiDfi5 14 ^S 

to learn 1 to bury 2 a dead person 3 thither 4 to seek 5 come near, approach 6 
hither 7 to gather 8 heads, chiefs 9 here 10 prophet 11 further, besides 12 to ask, 
inquire 13 mouth 1 * a muzzle 15 therefore 16 to wail 17 come 18 to bend the 
kneel 9 - 

Exercise 47. 
Let us keep the testimony i of thy mouths. I may keep 
thy precepts 3 - Let us make a covenant, I and thou. I 
will pursue 4 aftero Davids I will forget? my complaint^. 
Let us sends a letter, 10 unto the king of Israel. I will 
rememher 11 these things 12 and I will pour out my soul 1 ^ 
in me 14 - I will make 15 with 1 ^ you an everlasting cove- 
nant 17 - At 18 thy hand I will require 1 ^ the nockso of my 
father. 

8rrfr ?rw enn e^na ^-n 3DH-ips (withsuff. ^) 2pi3 itm% 
nna i&b l&xna (with P i. suff.) uty 13, ^?i 12 ?fox 11- dt wnsp 9nS# 

: 20 jX'i' 19 U/y\ (prefix) 18 JD 17 oSl'j? 

§ 33. VAV CONVERSIVE. 

1. The preterite when connected by 1 with a preceding 
verb in the future or imperative is made dependant upon 
this verb, and its time is thereby seemingly changed • — it 
receiving a future meaning. 

Vice versa the future when connected by 1 with a past 
tense either expressed or understood, receives the significa- 
tion of the preterite. See § 102. 1. 2. 3. 4. 

2. This 1 is called Vav Conversive CTpSfin 1J).# Pre- 
fixed to* the preterite it is the simple )ov } conjunctive: as 
^Dtf he said, *)9&0 and he will say, ^J£3 he made, ^J/51 
and he will make. Prefixed to the fut. it has Patach 



5G Part I. Exercises. 

and following Dagesh, before X Kamets (§ 14, II. 2.) : 
as iD?* be will keep, iOt^l and he. kept, iDBWI and 
I kept. 

3. The pret. with Vav conv. removes the accent in the 
first and second person sing, to the ultimate syllable: as 

>nSibp»Wt vnbttpv nnoN, but iron . 

•:~|t • : - J t : t : — t t : - t : 

4. The fut. with vav conv. sutlers the removal of its 
accent from the ultima to the penult, and consequently 
the last long vowel is changed into a short one. This 
rule, however, can never be applied to the fut. Kal of 
the regular verbs, because the penult here is always a 
closed syllable, § 9, 12, r. General exception to this ride : 
When the third radical is N, or the accent is a principal 
distinctive. 

5. Syntactical rules, § 102. 

Exercise 48. 

T]Sn v? 8 wri ^r^-ipg im *\&$ ayh bw$ tb$j 
jrnv 8 rrS^i : 7 vS? 6 n^) *\nw pa rnni rtfjepi 4 u&i!P 
:^5in n rnir? nniK lo{ izm rra nj^j nmr\ ®mprn$ 
d?S np' npgn nWi l3 D^5^n nx fnpt^'n 12 np# irrn 
"hehn 16 *rnri pnv 15 pnv :May 14 rro wk rman-nN 

V$ n "^2 "1?M£ : 21 d^3 20 njn?n-n^ iSspn man jo 
:inx *ijp%j Diflrn# in ipsn : 23 fonp^ roSrn plstpt 
"pjftl 28 vjjrnN 27 dj;S rjSgirri : 26 *toi#3 25 3Ki> 24 vpm 
roy ~\t\ : >» ♦£> DiSc^ 31 diW'?n ^3 30 Sru Sip rj^n 
■©(ft 35 ^Sp?3 3 swnin^ : 32 S}n£"? 33 Ssr) 32 ip^3un». 
38 n:rttn rojift 37 in£m*S ssttfn on : 36 idSd qS:n 



-: 39 T -ii 



number 1 interj. denoting respectful entreaty 2 and see 3 from us* n. p. m. 
the bearer of 6 arms 7 to put forth 8 the end ol'o to dip 10 (honey) twig, honey 



§ 33. Vav Conversive. 57 # 

• 

comb 11 because 12 judgments 13 to cut 14 ? n*^3 fi*l3 to make a covenant (from 
the ancient custom of cutting up victims on such occasions.) justice, right- 
eousness 15 to pursue 16 to inherit 17 to drawl 8 n. p. m. 19 coat 20 blood 21 eyes22 
after 23 to blow 24 n. p. m 25 trumpet 26 to wrap around, to muffle 27 face'-8 
to cry, to lament 29 great, loud 30 n. p. m. 31 3 into, upon ; n. p. m. 32 to fall 33 
shall be 34 strength, support 35 capture, noose 36 to be in dread 37 to be sweet 38 
thy sleep 39 - * § 96, 3. 2. 

Exercises 48. 

And 1 God remembered his covenant with 2 Abraham. 
And 1 Abraham weighed 3 to Ephron* the silver^- And I 
hewed** two 7 tables 8 of stone 9 , and he wrote 19 on 11 the 
tables the 13 ten 12 commandments 1?. And* a mighty 1 ^ king 
shall stand up 1 * and he shall rule (with) greats domin- 
ion 17 - And 1 Moses 18 wrote this law. And 1 Rachel stole 
the images 19 that (belonged) to her father. Hear 2 ", Is- 
rael, the Lord, our God 21 , the Lord is one 22 - And 1 thou 
shalt love 23 the Lord thy God. If 2 * God will be 2 ^ with 
me26, and 1 will keep 27 me in this way 28 , and 1 will 
give 29 me bread 39 , then 31 will I serve 32 him forever 33 - 
God shall send 3 * his angel 3 ^ before 3 ^ thee, and thou shalt 
take 37 a wife 38 to my son 39 from thence* 9 - 

8rinS 7- , }tf 6 Sp3 5rjp3 4 p3# shpW 2 m 1 Connect „and« with the verb ! 

15"ll'3;U connect the article !: 13 Dn 3T 12|Wy 11 SjT lOUfG (stones) 9 D'J^K 

•t : vv -: - t . T - : 

18 nt^D cf. §. 90, 2- r/Wni? 16 31 14 stand up "ray, after the noun! cf. §. 90, 2- 

27*\nti 26H?3j; a&rprr 24 dk 2337™ 22 ^x 2 iD , riSx 2oyn# i9D'sin 

35 l?Sp [fut. A.] 34 n 1 ?^ 33 dS^S 3 2 "O^ (vav Conv.) 311 36 DnS 29 mj 28 tfVf 
:40D^ [with suff. > J3 ete.] 39 13 38nt#K ^Wb [with plur. suff. ^sS etc.] 36\jaS 

§ 34. THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The imperative belongs to the second groundform: the 
infin. const., and in most instances is identical with it in 
form; as ^fcDp Inf. const, and 7t3p Imp. 

2. The verbs with A in the fut. retain the same in the 
imp.: as fut. D3&" he # will lie down, t^'3 1 ?! he will be 
clothed, Imp. MJJ>, CO 1 ? . 

3. The Chirek in the f. sing, and m. plur. is called by 



% 58 Part 1. Exercises. 



the ancient grammarians j"Hp nj^Jl light vowel, its sound, 
originated from Sh'va, being so lightly passed over, that it 
cannot form a closed syllable with the following Sh'va, 
hence 1£T")> read: ri-d'fu and not rid-fu, O^VJ* (§ 11, 7.). 

4. To the imp. is annexed very often the paragogic 
H — t expressive of wish and entreaty, emphasis. With 

paragogic Jl— the form ?bp becomes Jl7t?p > the form 7C0p 
becomes rh^p : as iS£>\ &p$\22tfi ^Dtf. 

5. Before Makkef the Cholem is changed into Kamets- 
Chatuph : as KJT2^J enquire, I pray thee. pT^'O^ii* 
judge righteously. 

6* In pause the dropped vowels or A in the forms 
>V&p> &\Qp return: as 1&£g> flDN fi)flt#P execute true 
judgment. 

7. After the imp. and fut. if the latter be lengthened 
(optat.), N3 is often put, as a particle of incitement and 
entreaty: I pray thee! (the German : t>od)! the Latin: dum 
with the imp. or quaeso, age.): as !HT HYVfop put forth 
thy hand. rO"i"n*VK I will go down. 

8. Syntactical rules. § 104* 

Exercise 50. 

: nop tos^pi 4 npp : 3 Dinn bn rcpw : 2 f5^5 i tib ^sb 

t : V t : t ; t t : t : t : t 

: 12 in>? u ^iK>S 10 i¥j ^D^^DpS :rbf 8 N"ii^m *bnr? 
j ww nay »3 nirjr imn 14 m^rmN cob 18 m 

: t -: T w t t - t • - V T 

i8 rvMDn¥j Jirirr-nN i7 omft rWni :nirv 16ta m 15 ^w 

- : • • : ■ t : v • t t : : t : - : : • 

yyn 2 *by_ 22 oon 21 fK 20 mn? : 0*35135 n§p : 19 rj£K 
29 Drr 28 nptr* rriN* 27 nj;3D nnS^" : 2G v^pN) 25 iprn 24 H7Sd 
:tf"«9 D^pnv Jinefc> :oiW t^N 1 ? "nnrwr? ^ 30 r7*ni 
»yg; nDp-^3 o:$rrnH ss r\*$ip M roi? njjsrj -?# *£& 



§ 34. The Imperative. 59 

iyp#- Tifirjp v r\n?r} tv?9 36 N"!R™- : 35 ^ntw* ^oyhz 
ivyhix\ dud whfi min-iv yp : yt$ph% Kyrssft ^# 

morsel, sc. of bread 1 vinegar 2 orphan 3 mercy 4 for good 5 tor ever 6 great 7 
terrible 8 stones 9 keep 10 tongue 11 evil 12 to write 13 song 14 to hear 15 the 
word of 16 women 17 the commandment oft 8 mother 19 to hew 20 tree 21 to cast 22 
against 23 a mound, rampart 24 to be strong 25 to be courageous 26 boy, youth 27 
to mark 28 the perfect (man) 29 behold 30 the end 31 to pass over 32 quickly, 
hastily 33 to advise, with ^ against one 34 n. p. m. 35 then cried 36 wise 37 -(f.) 

Exercise 51. 

Flee 1 (pi. m.) from this place. Write (pi. f.) a letter 
to the king. Keep (sing, f.) the word of 2 the Lord. Seek 3 
(pi. m.) the Lord. Seek (sing. f.). Seek (pi. f.). Seize 4 
(pi. m.) the prophets of 5 BaaR Shut'' (pi. f.) the door8. 
Keep (paragog.) this (f.) forever9- Preserved (paragog.) 
my soulu, for pious* 2 I (am). Remember (parag.) this 
(f.) my God! Stretch.13 out 1 3 thy hand towards* Him. 
Send (parag. flit. A.) me, I pray thee, onei4 of the young 
men 1 ^ Offer^ unto God thanksgiving! 7 - Sacrifice 1 ^ 
(pi. m.) to your God in the land! Trusts in^o the Lord 
with2i all thine hearts. Remember (following Makkef !) 
I pray thee, the word 23 of thy father. 
i<np# soStyS ahSn 7N ijd sSga 5 T?J 4 ^2n 3#vj 2-15-1 l'rna 
rfvit. a.j lenai isd^im mihm *with pi. suit. Sk ,is^ia i2tdh iiv ^dj 

-t • t : TV v - 1 • t ■ : - 

.23-m [with suff. ^b] 22 3 1 ? 213 20 Sk [fut. a.] \$nm isrni 17 rni'n 

§ 35. THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. The participles are formed from the first ground-form 
(the preterite). Kal has two participles, one active and one 
passive. In the act., the first radical takes i or "__, the 
second — ; in the pass., the pretonic Kamets remains (in 
sing, masc), and } (or sometimes, in order to form pass, 
substantives *— § 56, 3.) is inserted between the two last 
radicals: VlCDD killed ; *V)DN fettered, TDK a prisoner. 

2. The participle involves in its signification the person 
or thing to which the action is attributed : as 1DW keeping, 
properly one that keeps, or a keeper, DJlK a loving person, 



60 Part 1. Exercises. 

friend, D^HN a beloved person. The participle thus having 
the character of a noun is treated as such : receiving the 
article : as ^JlNH > arid possessing the same terminations of 
gender and number. (§ 57, § 58). 

3. The part, preceded by the personal pronoun expresses 

present time: as Tl/H *33N I go. 

4. btDp (or *?£Dip) is the regular participle of the verbs 
middle A, like 7fc3p 5 the participles of the verbs middle E 
and are identical in form with the pret.: as jpt (to be 
or grow old) pret., |pf part, *"U> (to i'ear) pret.,, ijp or Tjjj 
part. 

5. Sometimes poetically, the old union-syllable *— is ap- 
pended to the st, const, m. and f. of the part. act. : as 
tl)0 'iDtT the inhabitant of the thorn-bush. 5. Mos. 33, 16. 
T&n >3£)h who changes the rock; Ps. 114, 8. *3B» Ps. 
123," 1." 'np'X 1. Mos. 49, 11. miN Hos. 10, 11. ' Some- 
times the lis not read: as *i?D#VJJ03# Jer, 22, 23. 51, 13. 

6. The inflection of the participles active and passive are : 
Part. act. Part. pass. 

S P. S P. 

m. 7D1p m. D^tDIp m. TlDj? m. D'TltDp 

, fb®V L L L 

i. r"- f - rvntoip f. nVitop f. niTitop 

7. Syntactical rules. § 107. 

ExERcrsE 52. 

tin on onb# 1 :dwk ^ria mm :Sb3 Wo o'rtStf 
\\ntr-m ntDi3^ nnisi ; 3 orrdN notr 2 ntr*o mm titt 

• t : • v t : i t : t -: : t v -: - t : | v V 

:poffpyi i&iw 4 p? Dvn &bW$ mm tisw twtyn n#3 
n\y r b&) 8 nn"y 7 W? jriyp? smn? *nyai% Q>on 
■nc^ n i^ io £* npjp ngo-Sj; nam? xnt^D 
Nin 17ta on » pete- 11 rot noio 14 i£>o 13 vix briii : M rnn7 

t - t j •• •• : • : • T .. ^t t : 

rwrrp :nyp# \#$ ™oi?\ 19 7ip r^n^n^b p>nS 
24 nnn ^njfjvi ax : 22f ipjra? D'imj ors :D»n 2 7§r?n 



§ 35. The Participle. 61 

: ! r '••• •••: ' t : :t 

Tjg>ra TP351 ifcw© vy# DDnri : pD^l ntro np_s n#g 

nirr; :jnr nS on -lptf :^to m w^^ f)P? nrix :t]Sin 

j/rjpy dSij; 1 ? pam ns nni r]Sn nn :rb 33 ^S pjj 

to love 1 as 2 their fathers 3 between 4 tear 5 joy 6 to totter 7 to help 8 book 9 
there is, are 10 riches 11 evil, harm 12 his father 13 his mother 14 (it is) not 15 
transgression 16 companion 17 destruction, corruption 18 sound 19 words 20 de- 
sire 21 to be sweet 22 to lie down 23 under 24 thy burden 25 righteousness of 26 
to stand, endure 27 for ever 28 to uphold 29 men 30 peaceable 31 to have abund- 
ance of3 2 faint 33 - 

Exercise 53. 

The Lord raiseth upi (those that are) "bowed down 2 - 
Threes kings 4 are standing up5- Wherefores do ye trans- 
gress? the commandments of the Lord? The wealth of'9 
the sinnerio is laid upn for the just. The iniquity of 12 
Ephraimis is bound up 14 ; his sinis is hidi6- She dwells*? 
in the midst is f my people. Ye (fern.) go 1 ^ the way 20 of 
all the earth. The beasts 2 ! of the field flee 2 * from 22 the 
lion 2 ^- The door 24 is opened 25 - Wherefore liest thou 26 
upon 2 ? thy face 2 8? The ant 2 9 gathereth30 her food3i j n 
the harvest32. The fool folders his hands34 together^, 
'a st. const. 8 na 7*n;j orvrvush 5 "iny iwzhn srv&bp 2^33 1^ 
14 "nv i3d;.^3n ,f)p st. const. 12 m? n jay io xmn >Vn st. const. 9S;n 
2 irn| 2inrn 2oij^n ie3"£?n lsipro rrjatf i6|3v (fem.) lsinxgn 

[fern.] 29 n^DJl 28TTJ3 2 ? S V 26^33 25nr\3 (fern.) 24 nS^ 23 n« 22>J3D 
tt; I -,-t - -t -t v v •-: ": * 

:34VT 33 p3n 32T2fp 31 SdND 30 1 JK 

TT I -t • |T t -; - -t 

§ 36. NIPHAL. 

1. The two principal forms again pointed out in the 
paradigm by larger type, are the preterite 7Dp3 and 
the inf. const. 7ppJl ♦ To the first corresponds the 
participle 7&p3 > with the exception of having like all the 
other participles of the passive conjugations Kamets under 



02 Part 1. Exercises. 

the second radical. The rest of the forms coincide with the 
second principal form 7C?P!l> for /tOWH ♦ 

2. From the original S&pJJT (§ 31, 1.) arises ^DM? 
(§ 12. 6, B. 3.), from this, typ* (§12, 4), the future Niphal. 
The first person of the fut. is sometimes found with Chi- 
rek under K : as £0$t#N I shall judge. The optative al- 
ways has Chirek: as Jlp/ftK I will escape. 

3. The 3 pers. fern, of the pret. ri7pp^ is in pause 
H7£0p2 (§ 14. Rising II), identical with the feminine of 
the participle nStDp} ♦ They are distinguished by the po- 
sition of the accent : tf\^) tTh (Milra) part. , fiH^J Ijrifi 
(Milel) is preterite. (§ 9, 12, I. Note.) 

4. In the Infin. after 2 and 7, the Jl occasionally drops 
and its vowel recedes (§ 12, 6. B. 3.) : as iSt^D? for 

: t ■ : 

5. The infin., imp. and fut., when followed by a mono- 
syllabic word, throw back the tone, shortening the final 
Tsere into Seghol (§ 9, 12, r., § 14, Shortening c.) : as 
n£ 1ST he shall be taken by her, flXt DTISH this shall 

T V T • " ' V T ' 

be written. 

6. With distinctive accents Patach is sometimes put for 
Tsere : as C£}1 and he was refreshed, 7D;P1 and he was 
weaned. 

7. The second and third persons plur. f. regularly have 
Paiach, but once with Tsere : H^yfl Ruth 1, 13. 

8. The imper. of Nif. is reflexive or reciprocal in mean- 
ing, for no passive verb would allow an imperative. 

9. The participle passive of Kal and the part. Nif. thus 
differ in meaning: the part. Nif. representing the noun 
to which it belongs as being acted upon in present lime, 
whilst the part. pass, of Kal does not take the time into 
consideration: as nf7Jl5} nyijTt the door opened now, rbljl 
nillili) the door opened, '"D^D tl^pjl the cane broken 
now, I'DlTil iTJDn the broken cane. 



§ 36. Niphal. 03 

10. The Inflection of the participle is: 

S. m. Stpp} P ; m. D^Spp: 

f. h!?pf)j cnb^) f. fflSpj?! 

Exercise 54. 

vr *& 3 ^9^ °wn nii. •■'Tin? ^?. iq wi 

•• T • T I T : I •• T : • TT ' T •• T • V - 

13 .-naSj 12 U£lo tf- lx nfcha bveh : io nSw rya 9 *qtsfn 

t : : • A t t v v : ♦ T : T : ' T ", T ' 

natsg ran 18 D^'pi> 17 n?? rib???} "'map U W#M * m d?£! 
10*1 Di^a dikh d-i 22 nt3^' !*Tifl' ^njno Si :nin> 

T T T T T T T - | " " T ■ ^ T T 

27 njroi *Kjitp **|iyj2 24 naiaa :W?an *p*v ♦in :?]©#; 
^ont?D9f'n : 2 nnjnaniNpi^t^pnn|)n J"aniKT39! 
-♦a naSn riSrr :nirr M nvwn wsj "nfcoaj :'b«stfi 

t:-t|t t : :-: • : - t : : • :• 

-n^f 3 ^na^'rr 33 |? d?^ npgft ;^aN no? nop?;) tpaj 
85 W-nS maji :oafty ma nate oa^Sa nm> nna 

•• t • • v t w ' - T v -: v •• v: t : • : 

*fyitp;»a# 38 nn|nS w ry$h& p$n ^*n-pK :ria- 36 an5 

: 43 £o^Dpnvn? : 42 nwp ^Jjooto ^ nin! :pN 

:nma^ tfRtsh 4r nnqs 46 virr i5 nt?u?) M DW3 

wicked 1 mischief 2 darkness 3 at what 4 stumble 5 (the Tsere in Pause! § 14 
Rising II.) poor 6 to meet each other 7 to deliver 8 to break 9 wickedness 10 net 11 
to hide 12 to take, catch 13 their foot 14 our soul 15 bird 16 snare 17 fowlers 18 
arms 19 neighbour, friend 20 to separate 21 to shed 22 Zion 23 prosperity 24 to be 
grieved 25 enemy 26 adversity 27 friend 28 to take heed 29 before 30 to long 31 
courts 32 that not, lest 33 to neglect, forget 34 to be delivered 35 multitude 36 
shadow of death 37 to hide one's sell 38 there 39 the worker of 40 to trust 41 
youth 42 to be delivered 43 the transgressor 44 to be destroyed 45 together 46 the 
end, future 47 - 

Exercise 55. 

The soul 1 of Jonathans was knits with4 the soul of Da- 
vid. And.5 the number 6 of 6 the children 7 of' 7 Israel shall 
be as 8 the sand.9 of the sea, which will not be numbered**). 



64 Part 1. Exercises. 

Is not 11 the whole* 2 land before thee 13 ? separately thy- 
self, I pray thee, from me 15 - And 5 they separated them- 
selves the one 16 from the other 17 - Suddenly 18 Babylon 1 ^ 
is fallen and destroyed 2 **- Were ye also 21 sold for 22 
slaves 23 ? Tlms24 saith the Lord : Behold 25 , I 25 will give 2 ** 
this city into the hand of 2 ? the king of Babylon, and 
thou shalt not escape 28 out of his hand 2 ^ but 3 <> shalt 
be caught 31 and given into his hand. We are sold, ye 
(fern.) are sold, thou (fern.) art sold, ye will be deliv- 
ered 32 - And in all 33 things 33 that I have said to you, be 
circumspect 3 ^. 

5 connect „and" with the verb: and shall be TTTII 4 3 3T^D 2trUfiT f. 1 B^£)J 

t t : "It I t t : v v 

i5'Si?Q i4-ns w^ish 12-S3 ukSn ioisd m. 9 Sin '8 3 7^3 613DD 

tt-- -t I vt : t -: -t :'■■;: 

24 713 23DH3J? 22 S 21 M 20"13tf (fem.) 19^33 18 DXfl3 17mX Sl'D 16 ^K 
•t -: - - t vt : • ■ -r -" 

Ni. 31{Jf3n 3(P3 29JTD Ni. 28£3S?3 27 T3 26 Part. act. 25 behold I >J 3H 
-t • t • ~t -: • • • 

. Ni. 34 n?0# 33 V3 • Ni. 32 ^Sd 

~T - T 

§ 37, PIEL AND PUAL. 

1. The first principal form is ^Dp* the second *7C3D» 
With the second are allied: the imp. *7fc9D> the fut. v£2pS 
the part. 7t?pP ♦ In Pual the two principal forms are 
identical. 

2. Under the second radical the pret. Piel has Tsere, 
which changes in the inflection into Patach; as *?top> 
ri/Dp * 'Fjh®p ♦ Occasionally even the principal form is 
found with Patach : as *\2&) ""DN he destroyed and broke 
in pieces, especielly before Makkef : niTT^IS 1 ? he teaches 
wisdom. Seghol in the following three verbs : *D*1 to 
speak, DD? to wash, 1$D to atone. 

3. As the first radical in Piel and Pual must be vocal- 
ized for the following Dag., the preformatives of these 
conjugations can retain their original Sh'va : as 7£Dp>, 

4. The participle in these and all the other conjugations 
(except Kal and Nif.) has a prefixed ft. 



§ 37. PlEL AND PUAL. 65 

5. The inflection of the participles in Piel and Pual is 
as follows : 

Part Piel. Pari. Pual. 

S. P. S. P. 

m. b®pV m. D^tpp.p m. S&JJ9 m. D>btpp9 

f. rhvpj? f. niStppj? f. n^pp • f. rribtppft 

Note I. Without f2 the participle seldom occurs : as ^K t"D£^ 
I praise, Ec. 4, 2. HpS taken, 2 Ki. 2, 10. 

Note II. The feminine in Piel is usually fl — , the ending 
Jl — indicating a nominal signification : as Hfiti'Dp a sorceress, 
witch % In Pual the fern, in ft— is rarely found: hp&l?ft Is- 23, 12, 

rnaSo id. 29, 15. 

t t * : 

6. In those forms of Piel and Pual, which have ShVa 
under the second radical, the characteristic Dag. is often 
dropped : as ftTYW for TWfotif she dismissed. 

7. The part. Pual like that of Nif. is distinguished by 
Kamets in the last syllable : as 7&3pp ♦ 

8. The infln., imp. and fut., when followed by Makkef, 
or a word having the tone on the penult, generally take 
Seghol in the final syllable: as ^'^Hp sanctify unto me; 
wWpy fte seeks him. 

Exercise 56. 

. . ... |.. . v |t v - : v " : - t : - v t - 

v: t w ' | t t \ : • x : • t v ~ : • -: - t 

12 rbhn :ncto nvhn rriir ll mx : M ?pino mrrriN 9 to 

V v • : - t ; - i : t t Iv •• t : v •• - 

- 19 ^*p.5 : 18 njn 17 ^rm 16 &mn : 15 nS u nSpp 13 n?f 99 
*h??& :SbS 23 prn^ 22 W? rrjir z\yz : 21 jw nMn 20 fS 
v^}?5; rnin : 26 rruy ^'p3 pir-^'p? n??* 25 nrain 
troto nnn rrjnDfloW hbS :rjgf? njnp 28 >p5? ; 27 p? 
rnrv :»vjao izy vdn too snjn nnuonnnoWvi 

t : . . t t • "'.'• ' T •• - : T T T _ - 



66 Part 1. Exercises. 

tfT&y\ ^rw^ ^]?3? d^s * 32 wp 8l p'?tf 30 ^^! 

34 nviH jrp? rrrini w3|d 33 prrr wp? wrh$-m vfyy 
1330 Jftjtf 38 pn nntrnS 37 rntjtr M nyapn J M D^j?ro 
:i**o 4 2 S^noi rrin* Sin J : 41 n^ 40 WS ena : 39 rvSy 

: t ". : t : t t \ t t : t t I : ^v 

47 orp) 46 n^ : nnirn : 45 DVi;- 44 f^ip ruito 43 nj;ip^' 
51 n™n;rp 5o in^'N-^ ng« Sin* JD'p.HV tt H71 48 ^P'1 

dwnS 56 ro : 55 py/ 4 n§^ : np^ppfi3 :S?pj tfSjnn 

Babylon 1 to destroys to rewards l^i any act done, good or evi]4 to do, 
show good or evil to any one» entreaties6 to speak7 'ft *13 r T to speak entreat- 
ingly, glorious things** to hohorO wealth, plentylO interj. of entreaty, I prayll 
hopel2 to deferl3 sicknessll the heartlo sinnerslG to pursue!? wickednesslS 
to seek!9 a scorner20 yx not21 (including the verb to he,) to make great22 to 
give strength23 to regard24 reproof25 meekness26 priest27 to wash28 D" 1 ^ sons, 
children29 to raiseSO poor, indigent31 affliction32 a vision33 counsel34 an- 
cients35 ship36 to be about37 to be merciful38 (const, with ace.,) the Most 
High39 toil, troubled to bear, bring forth41 to praise42 a report-43 to make 
fat44 bone, body45 to blind46 seeing, having the eyes open47 to pervert48 
the words of49 his wife^O one of»l foolish women52 to receive 53 to fbroive54 
sin55 to sing hymns, praises56- 

Exercise 57. 

Haman 1 stood up to make requests for 3 his Hfe4. Be- 
hold 5 ; the righteous 6 shall be recompensed 7 on the earth. 
The Lord rewards 7 the man of violence 8 - I taught 9 ye 
(the) lawio- Miriam 11 sungi 2 praises 12 to the Lord, with 13 
the harpi-4- I have preachedis righteousness in a great 17 
congregation 16 - Did ye hope 18 in 19 the Lord? Why 20 
have ye (f.) not met 21 the traveller 22 ; with bread and wa- 
ter? I shall not lie 23 ; thou (f.) wilt not lie, ye will not 
lie, they (f.) will not lie. Do (pL fern.) not profane 24 the 
name 2 5 of our God. This (is) the law, (which) the Lord 
commanded 26 to teach you. Thou (f.) art gathering 27 ears. 
Five 28 cities 29 in the land of Egyptso are speaking 31 the 
tongue of 32 Canaan 33 - The poor 34 (women) are seeking 35 



§ 38. HlPHIL AND HOPHAL. 07 

bread. The ears are gathered by the poor. The tongue 
(f.) of Canaan is spoken in Egypt. 

Pi- 9-1D 1 ? SDOn [Pi. act.] -7 dW GpHi* 5 JH M#3J 3Sn ri.2tf/P>3 1 1071 

-T TT -T I I" :- - |_ T | TT 

17 31 m. 16 bnp Pi- lolfc'3 1411- 3 13 3 Pi. 121DT 11 D"10 lomifi 

T I T -T ■ -X T:- T 

25D# Pi. 24^Sn Pi. 231pjy 22mX Pi. 21 Dip 20CTD 19 St Pi. 1813P 

32r\3^ Pi. 31131 30Dn2fB [f.]29Qny 28K?Dn 27 D'Satf Pi. 27^pS 26 n« 
- : - t • - : • -'t •• t • T: • | - T -r • 

Pi. 35-^p_3 3ijlfjl>3M 33 |^J3 

§ 38. HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 

1. The first principal form is 7*£?pn> the second 7*Dpn 
From the second are drawn all the other forms : imp. 
StDpn, fut* bvtf_> part. ^pj?D. for StDpST, S^pHE 
(§ 12. 6. B. 3.). In Hophal, even the two principal forms 
are the same. 

2. Besides the lengthened fut. (§ 32) a shortened, or 
apocopated future exists, which in the regular verb is re- 
cognized only in Hiphil by a shortened form in Tsere : as 
^pp* fut., /Dp* apocopated fut. 

3. The apocop x . fut. is especially found : 

a. In expressions of command and wish, more usually in 
prohibitions with *7K : as fliy he may cut off, Ps. 12, 4. 
NVifi let her bring forifej 1. Mos. 1, 24. n&WrtN 
hide not, Ps. 27, 9. nniPfr^N destroy not, Ps. 57, 1. 
Hence called: Jussive. 

b. After Yav. Conv. excepting in the first person, which 
generally retains >— : as ^Dp;H> but TDfcSW and I de- 
stroyed, Am. 2, 9. Tp^'NI and I cast,' Zee. 11, 13. 
T^ONI and I made kingj 1. Sam. 12, 1. 

4. Before Makkef the Tsere of the imp. and apoc. fut. 
becomes Seghol: as NJPfSDn become familiar! Job 22, 21. 
13'ptrp an( i ne iai^ hold upon him. 

5. The tone in Hi. differs from that of the other con- 
jugations, in not resting upon the afform. fT-7» *~ an( l \ : 



68 Part I. Exercises. 

as nSbpn , l^bpri' •VtJRJj . With Vav Conv., however, 
they receive in the pfet. the tone: as fl7H5ni and sne 
shall divide, Ex. 26, 33. 

6. In the inf. after 70D generally no contraction takes 
place, and the form remains ^DprQs occasionally, how- 
ever, the H drops and its vowel recedes : as TDfi^7 to de- 
stroy, is. 23, ii. n^wb to P ut an end to > ^m. 8 > 4 - 
DHN^ to cause to languish, 1. Sam. 2, 33. 

7. In Hophal there is a second form with Kuhbuts: as 

TlScr'n ne is cast > Da. 8 - n - Iu tlie P art> tnis form occurs 
more' frequently, than the reg. one. *")DpD,Mal. 1, 11 

p579,Ps. 22, 16. 

8. The inflection of the participles in Hiphil and Hophal 
are : 

Part. Hiphil. Part. Hophal. 

S. P. S. P. 

m. S^p? m. D'S^pD m. St?pp m. D^DpO 

f. n^ppp f. niS'topp f. n^ppp f. nibppp 

Exercise 58. 

^•S^xi D?Sp? W0 nan Sn^-S-tS^ •^bd# 5 ^??ah 
B ft?Vp"^ . J n^'nn p* nixn pa d^# ta;n : r^p D^by. 

16 Tp$x rjTD : 16 .w^n np-S# f tkh 14 tin : rjSp^K c'io 
20 n>* J T ^99 19 ptnn 18 oyw ir mh :npx Sn* rrjrn wi 
: 26 napn 25 VSd }Ji3 24 nrnp-b-> : 23 m * 2 &ptj* 2 o*$k 
»B» J 7^9ri sSjnjf^g 28 i:? 27 ribV-n$ in rjSp^ 
mnx ^5 ^rrn "Ss^n lap lap : ™y_^n 31 ttd ^n*ftg 
:i7 ono ijn "oo^po 35 D^3 nrrr Tety : 34 n^n cnjN-bs 
•rrwa :*j$o ran 4 °prm yens pmn : 39 r?o ^Nfctto 



§ 38. HlPHIL AND HOPHAL. 09 

dnv-Sn nmn noam ifo&rn tis d^ds iffir? or 

T . T • T V • ; - - t • • : T : 

nppjj w'n : 43 n?inn 42 -tj/-> ^n rjW'o itftfi run 

holyl profane2 to divide, to show difference3 cause to stumble* saidS 
n. p. m.G to make a king7 to slander8 master, § 82, 4. b.9 to castlO a piecell 
the upper millstonel2 uponl3 fundament, foundations ofl* to sink in, to fasten 
inl5 to commitl6 perversenessl7 ]ipsl8 to put fai*9 slowness20 anger21 to 
give rest, to stilus contention, quarrel23 an offering to God2* (especially a 
bloodless offering) wholly, entirely25 to burn sacrifices26 Solomon27 his 
son28 to be wise, pious29 to shine^O brightness31 firmament32 to humble33 
worm, collect. worms34 a 1135 (they all, § 98, 2.) to hearken36 hight37 to 
lift up, exalt38 words39 to be far off40 to mention with praise, i. e. to praised 
over*2 wall*3 lot, fate**- 

Exercise 59. 

Do not cause 1 a strangers to dwell 1 in 3 thy house*- This 
woman lay 5 upon her son 6 and he died7 and she took 8 my 
living^ son from my hosom 10 and laid 11 her dead 12 SO n 
beside me 13 while 1 * I slept 15 - And they stript 16 Joseph 17 
of his coat 18 and they cast^ him into 20 the pit 21 - 
The wife 22 of Potiphar 23 slandered 24 Joseph. Ye shall 
not deliver 25 the servant 26 to 27 his master 28 who is es- 
caped29 from 30 his master unto ye. My sons 31 strip off 32 
your garments 33 , my daughters 3 ^ clothe 35 the naked 36 - 
This woman is clothing the poor. Hide 37 (sing, f.) the 
child 38 - Hide (pi. f.) this money. This girl 3 ^ is hiding 
her brother. Darius 40 was made king* 1 over the realm* 2 
of the Chaldeans* 3 - The girls** are warned* 5 - If* 6 your 
father 47 taught you wisdom 48 and knowledge 49 ; then 50 a 
good property 51 was given 52 you as a possession 52 - 
snprn * run 6 nj3 533$ 4^3 s^fna 21? m. jussiv,not:Sx, § 108 i|3tf , 

15 jtf' 14 1 13 'StfX 12 riD Hi .11 33# 10 pn (with the Article § 80, 2. § 90, 2.) 9 Tl 

20 § 19, 6- Hi. 191jStf 18ffl3fG 17^p)« Hi. (with two ace. § 85, 2. b.) 16 DK'3 

28VJHX 27 S« 26-|3j; Hi. Juss. 25 "UD Hi. 24j^S 2313 , B13 22f\#R 21113 

Hi. 35#3S 34T1U3 33D3HJ3 Hi. 32 £#3 31 'J3 30 Dl?D fut. Niph. 29SVJ 
-t - : •.•••:• -t -t "••• -t 

• 43D^i:'3 42-noSD ho. 4ittSd 40-^rm 39 mV 38 iV hi. 37?3¥ sen-ony 

• : - : - 1 - t vt : - t : - v V ' - t • " -: 

Ho.52Sn3 51[fem.] nSnj 50 TX 49 mn 4S TVlDTl 47 D3 , 3X 46 QN Ho. 45 "1PIT 44nfl;'J 
-t t:~ t "- ~ t:t •.--: • ~t t: 



In Part I. Exercises. 

§ 39. HITHPAEL. 

1. In Hithpael the two principal forms coincide. 

2. The rules given above (§ 12, 5.) apply to Hithpael. 
In Verbs commencing with a sibilant, transposition occurs: 
as ISftWn, for ISgfrir? ♦ Before £ the D is changed into 
D : as plfDVl for p^Xfy (§ ibid.). 

3. Verbs commencing with "I , fa, D, sometimes also 
with 3 , 3 and the sibilants, assimilate the fi of Hithp. : 

as n.^_n,for nOTorj (§ 12, 4.). 

4. The pret. has usually Patach in the final syllable: 
as p-tnnn to show one's self courageous, 2. Ch. 13, 7. 
Patach occurs also in the fut. and imp., especially in 
pause, and in the future, when expressing command or- 
wish: as JSjnfl delight thyself, Ps. 37, 4; ^pHH sanc- 
tify thyself," : Jos. 3, 5. D^JttllrVK hide not 'thyself, 
Ps. 55, 2, IDfi? TH^iV His name be blessed ! In pause the 
Patach oftentimes is lengthened into Kamets: "VfNfin he 
girded himself, Ps. 93, 1. . ^HKfl! lie mourns, Ez. % 12. 

5. When the accent is thrown forward by Vav Conv. 
(§ 33, 3.), the Tsere in the pret. sometimes is shortened 
into Chirek: W^pHH) Jfl^OT! I will show myself 
great and holy, ' Ez." 28, 23. DiT^pnrn and ye shall 
show yourself holy, Le. 11, 44. 

Note I. A form of very seldom occurrence is Hothpael (with 
Kanieth-Cliatuph or Kubbuts under the preform. j"})> the sense 
of which is purely passive , as 'npjSfin they were mustered, num- 
bered, Num. 1, 47. D55H (arising from D-JDfin) to be puri- 
fied, Lev. 13, 55. N^Dil to be defiled, Deut.24, 4. JtTTT 
to be made fat, Is. 34, 6. ' 

Note II. In later Hebrew (Mishna and Talmund) a pret. form 
Nithpael is very frequently used in a purely passive sense: as 
nVw'IXrti sne became a widow, n*V^fl3 she was made a prose- 
lyte, n£'"UrG she was divorced, NiHn^ be was cured, etc. 
In Biblical Hebrew this form three times only occurs: ^3?^ 
to be forgiven, Dcut. 21, 8. DDI^ to be instructed, corrected, 
Ez. 23, 48. mftBft to be alike/ Prov. 27, 15. 



§ 39. Hithpael. 71 

6. Forms followed by Makkef, takeSeghol: as ybvftiyyjV 

the snow hides itself, Job, 6, 16 

7. The inflection of the participle is : 

k m. btepnn f. n^ejjno p. m. nhtoppn f. niSppn? 

Exercise 60. 

: 14 Dipj 13 nnrS^ n?n^p tDB^p? ^ 12 i3n^n : D?rrnn 
|tt3 15 npiT Dp«R?rj :fi$? "is©?^ ng^ &'\\S did 
:nirr 18 iniipp Sk ring 17 pN :diS^' tfi by. 16 i^nrn 
23 "-Dart*. 22 rhhvm dj : D»pnv 21 to^w 20 i^Hf . 19 nnv fi#3 
: 2 npc> 28 niD33 27 "D?rip tfw 26 *i} 25 i"]N^ ^Trnivj njtt 
34 yiy w pn^jn np?n 32 b^n 3l nrotyn *? 30 n^nn ^ 

: 35 Sdd 

V T 

to glory 1 to understand 2 to know 3 to feign one's self rich 4 not 5 (including 
the verb „to have") anything 6 part 7 to think one's self wise 8 thou becomest 9 
contempt 10 to justify one's self 11 to earn wages 12 bag 13 to bore, pierce 14 to 
obtain 15 to delight one's self 16 surely, truly 17 to hide one's self 18 distress, 
adversity 19 to purify 20 to cleanse one's self 21 works, deeds 22 to be recog- 
nised 23 to decorate one's self 24 cloak, mantle 20 strange 26 to show one's self 
honorable 27 honor of 28 lie, falsehood^ to grieve one's sell 30 joy 31 to make 
great 32 sorrow 33 to multiply 34 folly 35 - 

Exercise 61. 
Behold men beat 1 at 2 the door. Ands Jonathan strippeds 
himself of the robe 4 > that (was) upon 5 him, and gave it® to 
David. Little 8 children' came forth.9 out of the city and 
mocked 10 Elisha 11 - David is hiding himself 12 in the des- 
ert 13 - Joseph made himself strange 14 imto his brethren 15 - 
Before Thee 1 ^ Lord ! we shall not be justified 1 * 7 - Wo- 
men disguising themselves 18 and putting on 1 9 other2i gar- 
ments 20 - Always 22 we shall purify ourselves 23 and walk 24 
with 25 the Lord. Do not hide thy self 26 from thine own 2,7 
flesh 2 ?. Consider 28 (pi. f.) the deeds 2 ^ of the wicked 30 and 



72 Part I. Exercises. 

A 

turn away3i from tliem. Do not feign yourselves rieli32, 
if in truth the Lord has not given 33 you wealth 3 *. 

p*yjj( with P lur - suff< ) b ^y 4 ^0 Hith - ( with acc, > 3 £3Kf3 2S^ Part. Hith. 1 ngU 

11 y&b* Hith. (with foil. 3) 10 DSp BIW' (2 90, 2) 8 D'SBD 7 D'lJ^J fitiiippi 

20QHJ319 #3S Hith. 18tf3n 17 pltf 16T33 1 ? 151TIX 14133 13131D 12 IflD 
" .f? -t -t I t ' vt : TV -t t : ■ -t 

27 spferS Hith. 26 dS^ 25 n« Hith. 24 ^Sn 23 {JHp 22TDp (§ 90, 2-) 21 QnriK 
:34-\^l'r 33?n3 32 1^ Hith. 31pm SOQ^Bh 29^0 S^ with Hith. 28 S3 ; ^ 



CHAPTER VIL 

THE GUTTURALS. 
§ 40. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 

1 . When the first radical is one of the gutturals ynHN » 
in all the forms requiring simple Sh'va, it receives Sh'va 
comp. as Drp.Q J£ to stand (§5.). 

2. When standing for vocal Sh'va, it is generally Cha- 
teph Patach : as 10J£ for "toy ; 1ftJ?*_ from the Inf. const. 

3. The helping vowel under the serviles TJTN is always 
that of the Chateph: as iDJ£(§ 14, Rising I B.). 

4. If the Sh'va be silent, the vowel added to it must be 
cither identical or homogeneous with the preceding : as 
*!OJtt,for 1DJP (Pret. Niph.), Seghol • and Chirek being 
homogeneous "(§ 3, 3.) nDJttTfor -fDJjn (Pret. Hof.],Tpj£, 
for Vpjf!- 

5. In forms with the afformatives H — , ), '>— , before 

T 

which the vowel of the second radical drops, the comp. 
Sh'va loses its Sh'va points: as HD^. from iDJ£; HDJtf% 
from TDJ£h nnpyifrom "!g8£U 

6. The future of the verbs Fut. 0. in most cases has 
Chateph-Patach : as *"iDJ^_to serve. The verbs Fut. A. take 
Chateph-Seghol : as pffT to be strong. 

Note. Sometimes verbs with Chateph-Seghol take Patach, when 
the form is augmented by afformatives : as "1DN* to bind, with 

Suff. VT3P&' rpxwo collect, topgji >£pNn. 



§ 40. Verbs Pe Guttural. 73 

7. Some verbs retain simple Sh'va under the guttural. 
This is most frequently the case with n : as iDfT to covet, 
")DfT to want, lack. 

8. The Inf., Imp. and Fut. Nif., which require a* Dag. 
for the assimilated } Nif. (§ 12, 4.), will lengthen the 
vowel under JJYtf> to compensate for the Dag. : as rnjT 
to cut in, engrave, for tlTSW* "TDJ^for 1D%\* "\ in this 
characteristic is associated with the gutturals : as tn*V to 
pursue. 

Exercise 62. 

tfjn j* 9 nD?S 8 d^'v aorn njrj ^jhrSj? 7 ^nrrn-S^ : 6 nmnz 
pH¥ in^D^f! ./tijpi *nnp M fSj/n d^hv "iibj 
w #heo 15 ^ w nySn* p'jJH? 14 W13 ! 13 f^njn^a 
n^onr? p»*n ftf : 19 Wj£ kS »»|©gn pi arte : 17 a#rr Dr>n 
23 ipm ts^pj "OM&fcp Sk 21 jh5n one :rn 20 D^?n&S 
^mrjjn nS JJV3$? M y3l 25 rj#nn Sk jtobt^n 24 nrrxn 
30 row peh Stotoa' :,iMn ffl ™n dhd d d'odp? ffl nart 

- t •• ^ t t :• t:t I - v v ,V" • • t -: ■■ ; • 

- 33 S^rT xS on:n aha j -on SaS 32 pdn* 31 vi£) :oy 

- : v • t : : t t t : I ■-:.--■ v ^t 

£)!?£! ^Tl 1 ? 3r ^3Pr^ KX? p3T "iifiJ? 35 JflM? : 34 yir'|> 
41 my "O'Wi nfion nn nxn 39 tDrty : 38 vnimN 

: ^jt • t : t : • : xt tt *t t » t 

47 npn 46 nnpK jd'oj 46 rp$£ 44 yv? 43 >otr : 42 ^)j;:i 
i^nxip yph iaj£ ?$ 49 ^n "fjtjflft 

sleep 1 to change 2 Ethiopian 8 skin 4 to have delight 5 understanding 6 to de- 
vise 7 to dwell 8 securely 9 prosperity 10 to rejoice 11 city 12 to draw, deliver 13 
intelligence 14 a fool 15 to keep silent 16 to count 17 oil 18 to become rich 19 to lay 
hold 20 to examine 21 to condemn, punish 22 to explore 23 after, then 24 to hold 
back, restrain 25 help 26 to leave, miss 27 the words of 28 to learn 29 to mourn 30 
the fool, simple 31 to believe 32 to be wanting 33 trespass 34 to seize 35 pitch 36 
to join one's self 37 way 38 prudent man 39 simple 40 to pass on 41 to punish 42 
to hate 43 unjust gain 44 to lengthen 45 fierceness, cruelty 46 fury 47 a flood 48 
wrath 49 envy 50 - 

10 



74 Part I. Exercises, 

Exercise 63. 

In the place of 1 great* men 2 do not stand3. The house 
of 4 the righteous shall stand. The fatherless 5 and the 
widows do (m. pi.) not oppress 7 - And® Pharaoh^ hearcU<> 
this thing and 8 he sought** to slay*2 Moses* 3 - Thou shalt 
not oppress 14 a hired* 4 servant*^ do (f. s.) not take*6 to 
pledge^ the raiment*? of a widow. My heart* 8 trusted*^ 
in the Lord and I am helped 20 and my heart rejoiceth2i. 
The Lord said unto these wicked : as 22 you have forsaken 23 
me, thus 24 I will forsake you, as you have plowed 25 wick- 
edness 2 ^ thus you shall reap 27 iniquity 28 , and 8 I will cause 
you to eat"29 the fruit 30 of falsehood 3 1. Let he put to si- 
lence 32 the lying lips 33 , which speak 34 against 35 the right- 
eous arrogancy 36 - O 37 sword 38 ! put thyself 3 ^ into 40 thy 
seaboard 4 * and rest 42 - 
7pgty 6 ^o i 7x sour m. frra §104, 2. a-ip^ snzrS-u loipa 

13nt^D 12 JHTI Pi- H#p3 [Fut. A] 10nroi£r 9 rilH3 8 connect and with the verb. 

~ T I -t - T : - 

Fut. 21 iS V Nif. 20 ITV 3 with 19 nt33 18m. 3 1 ? TS 1 ? 17 1J3 le^ll 15,14T3# 
-*r -^ -t ;" " ' '■"•* " T * T 

[g 25 7, 5] 29 SDK 28HnSlV 271^p 26 V^ 25 tfrtf 24 \3 23-3TW 22 V^N3 
- 1 tt:- -It - v -t I- -"t '.'-:- 

35 S^ P^t. 34-131 [*'.] 33 f JpfiMri|K$ Jussiv Nif. 32 qSx Pause 31 ^J"I3 30 n3 

:Nif. 42 ^jn erijrn 40 Sn Nif. 39tpa [fj 38:nn 37 in wpny 

§ 41. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL. 

1 . These verbs are subject to the same variations as the 
verbs Pe Guttural, taking Sh'va comp. in all those forms 
where the second radical has Sh'va: as Hprp to go far 
away, for njXn ; *tpntf'Jl to slaughter, for *£?ntjttl ♦ 

2. The fat. and imp. in these verbs are regularly A : 

as prrv . 

3. Pi. Pu. and Hith., which require the characteristic 
doubling of the second radical, lengthen the vowel under 
the first to compensate for the omitted Dag. : as *]"}£} 
for TpJ , tp35 for 7|^3? , TfpQ for ^D . 

Before H> fl and ]f the preceding vowel very often re- 
mains short: as *1#3 to destroy, pft¥ to mock, IHD? to 
cleanse. 



§ 41. Verbs Ayin Guttural. 75 

4. In Pi. and Hithp. the Tsere of the last syllable is 

shortened to Seghol by throwing back the accent, which 

> 
often occurs after Yav Conv.: as BHi'J and he drove away, 

for £HJI*> rn.E^l and he ministered, for m&", or when a 
monosyllabic word or one with the tone on the penult 
follows : as >3 pfl^? to mock me, DC D"!^* 1 ? to minister 

■ I v - : t vt : 

there. (§ 14, Shortening c). 

Exercise 64. 

S# : 2 d<W?3 Dn^ni ^pa qisr mi) i-yjp pSrr wm 

f 83R1 p 9 £H| :dw3 isirnK 8 ^ njnj :1a 7 nvnn Sir 
onTOrnjt rp3 nim_ : 12 ni»j£Nbi n rn?! S50 din : find 
14 n^'nn nSS|? 13 DW^ :Sb? 

n^ ruf i^nis 18 Sxc" ^x t^n nrj ♦sgs 17 ntpii w 
^n>ip9 nS pa iix nS" n ?^ o^" 19 !? t^pp TT^i 
tfbi -^cd^to : 22 tD3^niSpt^ 21 ^Sprn riBbn i*rr? 
»:ra :nirr 27 :w M ra-ttre*N : 25 ijroy:) b*n "Miptfn 
. : VTOrS? vppn-SNi nirr-rux ^'93 

garment 1 training, instruction 2 not 3 to mock 4 to grow old 5 to boast one's 
self 6 to hew 7 to bless 8 to cast out 9 shall go 10 to flee 11 to continue 12 early 13 
$ 105, 6. a curse 14 to refuse 15 to comfort, console one's selft 6 to hide 17 to 
ask 18 son of 19 to purify, to clean 20 to change 21 garments 22 to deny, deal 
falsely 23 to lie 24 fellow-man 25 deceit, fraud 26 to abhor 27 - 

Exercise 65. 

Serve 1 (p. m.) the Lord in truth 2 ; and if (it be) evil 3 in your 
eyes 4 to serve the Lord, choose you 5 this day 6 whom you will 
serve, whether^ the gods, which your fathers9 served 8 or 10 
the gods of* 1 the Amorites 12 > in whose land 13 you dwell; 
I and my house 14 ) we will serve the Lord. And* 5 the 
people said 15 ) God forbid 16 that we should forsake 1 ^ the 



76 Part 1. Exercises. 

Lord, to serve other 18 gods; for the Lord drove out 19 
from before us20 all the people 2 1 ; also we will serve the 
Lord, for he is our God. Do not deny22 your (pi. m.) 
(rod. The Lord trieth 23 the righteous. They cried 24 unto 
God and were delivered 2 ^ Truth (f.) does not spring up26 
until 21 ? the lie 2 9 is rooted out 28 - We bless 30 you in the 
name of the Lord. And he drove out the man. How 
long 31 refuse 32 ye to keep my commandments? Haste 
thee 33 (fern, s.) escape 34 (f. s.) thither 35 - How long will 
ye despise 36 intelligence 37 ? will ye regard 38 it as 39 an ad- 
versary-^, whilst 4 ! it loves 42 you, seeks 43 your welfare 44 * to 
lead 4 - 3 you in the way of 46 integrity 47 . 

8 verb before the noun 7 DX 6 DrH 5Dat. I Uyy$B 3j,n [f.] 2^08 1 12^ 

i5-oN>i 14,J T3 [i as, *: § 96, 2j is 03HK3 ^noxn h^Sn 10 dki obarnfaK 

[the adj. after the noun \ 90. 2.] 1 18 D^IIX 17 transl. from forsaking [§ 30, 1.] 16 ."IjS hS'ST! 
. .. _. T T . T 

24D;»T Fut. 23m3 Pi. Jussive with 3 22#n.3 21 D'S V 20^J3D Pi. 19fc"U 

I -T I "T - T ■ "- •T • —T 

"\V Pi. pret. 30^-\3 m. 29 373 Pu. 28& ; -lt£r 27 -m Fut. 26nO]f Pause ! 25 E)Sd 

l-T TT -T *- -T ~T 

[f.] 37 n>Un 36VX3 357153^ Nif 34 dSd Pi. 33 inn Pi.pret. 32^0 31 HJX 

T : l-T TT -T -T l-T TT 

trans, seeking 43 ti>-\~\ transl. it ff ] is loving 42 3HX 41 ) Part. act. f. 40 3'K 39 S 38 3#J1 

-t -t; -t -t 

r^D'Dn 46TT1 Pi. the vowel short ! 45 Stll 44 3 -ID 

§ 42. VERBS LAMED GUTTURAL, 

1 . To this class belong only verbs with H , Jf and ft (H 
with Mappik § 7) as the third radical. 

2. Their peculiarities are: 

a. These gutturals when final require the A sound before 
them, hence every other mutable vowel is changed into 
Patach; the Inf., Imp. and Fut. therefore have A: as 
nbtt" to send, nSiT , 

b. The gutturals preceded by the immutable vowels f, *), 
♦— , »— take Patach furtive (§ 6.): as Pllia, JfllDB>» 

n'TD. nn. 

3< The forms with Tsere before the final guttural either 
retain the Tsere and then Pat fur t. must follow, or Tsere 
fk changed into Patach: as IT?&'0, or fty&fi, 



§ 42. Verbs Lamed Guttural. 77 

Note. The form with Tsere and Put. fart, is found more frequently 

n't the end of a period (with distinctive accent): as J71J* Lev. 11, 37, 

but inV Na. 1.14. flilD Job 12, 18, but fin? Job 30. 11. 

4. In the second sing. f. of the pret., which ends with 

two vowelless consonants, the guttural takes Patach instead 

of Sh'va: as rij®tf, for WDM; the sing. f. form of the 

participles, take two Patachs instead of two Seghols : as 

Exercise 66. 

3 nyhy; 2 nw}b wvyn oSn rpSn inrfo x yjpb **b ajrjD 
7 r)pp jvn^ 6 Wt? kS :rr?n Djjn 5 p#S Nr 4 nSp jt^q 
■noe ^0*3 ^^ ^ir n ^ WW) 9 nh5 8 p-Sj; pan 

kS : 15 mnK ntirri 14r P n ? pna ris ^ftj ^5« :n^3t?p 
npen \}3 D3D itrh# 18 :nS 17 rw> |* jpqg ra#? 16 myS 
yah 21 pH^o rub 20 n^ a^in own 19 ^hSn :*aS 

:D?rr 26 nn^ tfotfS rrto jSriNn- 25 nn9 row 24 nn^ 

t : v: t : •• t : • w - : • t - - : t : t 

to withhold 1 to anoint 2 §97, 2. 3 to pardon 4 iniquity of 5 to cease 6 midst 
of 7 therefore 8 to open 9 dumb 10 hell 11 destruction 12 the eyes of 13 in 14 to 
slay 15 for ever 16 to cheer, to gladden 17 the heart ofi8 the God of 19 to cause 
or make to prosper 20 to justify 21 to condemn 22 abomination of 23 n. p. f. 24 
door 25 § 85, 4. b. rebuke of 26 other 27 - 

Exercise 67. 

Behold, upon the mountains 1 (are) the feet of2 him that 
hringeth good tidings 3 , that publisheth 4 peaces- Dost thou 
(f. sing.) not know^ whither^ the men 8 did go? I flee 9 
from the face 1 *) of Sarai 11 - And he rose up 12 to flee 
unto 13 Tarshish 14 - And David said: arise 1 ^ and let us 
flee 16 - But*" 7 to the king of Judah 18 - which sent 19 you to 



78 Pa tit I. Exercises. 

inquire 20 of the Lord, thus 21 shall ye say 22 to him : be- 
cause 23 thine heart 24 (is) tender 2 ^ and* thou hast hum- 
bled thyself^ before 2 * the Lord and* hast rentes thy 
clotlies 2 9> I also have heard thee. I will hear what 
God will speak. Again 30 (there) shall be heard in this 3 * 
place the voice of joy 32 - The house of 33 the wicked shall 
be overthrown 34 ; but** the tent 3 ^ of the upright 36 shall 
flourish 3 ?. He that trusteth 38 in his own heart, is a fool 39 ? 
but whoso walketh 40 wisely 41 he shall be delivered 42 - 

4part. Hi. of y^tf 3 part. Pi. of nj#3 the bringer of (him that br.) g. tidings 2>Sjn 1 DHH 

KPJjJD 9 part. f. s. pP3 8 the noun after the verb (§ 107, 4.) 7HJX 6pret,.t?T 5 DvW 
•• : • -t -i-x * -t t 

18 rmrr 171 16fut. parag. in pause lS^Di'p Wl^'SC'l^ 13(§ 19*, 6.) 12 Dpi imi# 
t : : I ■ : - |tt- ~t 

25 in 24r|22 l 7 23 rj;* 1 22.HDX'n 21 713 20 with ace. #"H 19 part, with article 

32nnD^ 31 (g 94, 2) 30lfn 29 ?|HJ3 28lpp 27*J30 26Ni. T»J3 * Vav conv. 
t : ■ "* I':t; ■ -It •• : • '-t 

39S'D3 38 part, with 2 ,J-| £33 37 Hi. 7"P3 36Dn^ 35*7718 34 Ni. 1D# 33 /V3 

.42£3Sd 41 (in wisdom) HD3n 40 part. ^H 

- T T : T '- T 



CHAPTER VIII. 




THE SUFFIXES 


OF THE 


VERB. 


§ 42. 


IN GENERAL. 




1 . The suffixes of the 


verb 


are : 




Person : 1 . 




2. 


3. 


Sing. com. ^ 
Plur. com. ^ 


m. 
f. 

m. 
f. 


^1 m 
DD m 


. in 0) 
n (n-) 

T T 



I 



Note, "jQ, poetically used for D : as iOD3 it covered them. 

2. The suff. are annexed to the verbal forms by vowels, 

called: Union vowels; to the pret. by the A. vowel ( — 

or ~)i to the future by the E. vowel (— or — ). The union 

vowel is only applied to the verbal forms, ending with a 



§ 42, In General. 79 

consonant: as ^tOp' ^7^p ne killed me; whilst with all 
the forms ending with a vowel the suffixes are connected 
immediately: as ! tep> *Ti/ftp they k. m. 

§ 43. THE PRETERITE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The lengthening of the word hy the suffixes causes 
the dropping of the pretonic Kamets. Hence the pret. 
undergoes the following changes : 

Person. Person. Person. 

1. . 2. . 3. 

rtep T into rbtQp (n?Dp) Sep/nto *Spp 

s. ^nStDn into ^Snn T j" Y (before -jj » L T ' 

Y" |t • : -I : t : Jt - t|: 

:_It :_,: \rf?top) :_,: :|t t,: 

2. Verbs middle E retain this vowel before the suffixes: 
as ^5flK to love, D^? 1 ? to put on a garment In Pi. and 
other forms with final —, this — changes before the suf- 
fixes T] » D5 ' p into Seghol ; before the other suff. it falls 
away entirely! as S&p , ^t?p > DJ^p. tf?$j?» 

3. The form Jr^tDp sometimes undergoes a contraction : 
^fi— for ^IUjI— ; Jin— for nfi— as Ml^Dj she weaned him, 
I. Sam. 1, 24. nfitflN (fear)'has laid hold on her, Jer. 49, 24. 

Exercise 68. 

2 >*ny S*nfe» nrixi :fiD3-tp£3 min&is dtiVn urura 

■ ■.- •• t : • t - : I v t I t : • t : - : • v: t : - : 

n l n ! : ^p"iV pp>5 ^wefl^ss ^#TB£?|Jf 4 ^riv?N 
10 n&b *Sk *Sk : w np^ 9 7W W^r^D 8 ^>aSn 

t t • " ■ •• • t~t : j t t : m - : ^ - v dfe •• • - 

* /J^H before grave suff. 



80 Part I. Exercises. 

ost^yj myyi M up*pjj wn >? nirrS i3 rvnin 12 dW|* 
unirr rrjir nriN : 18 n#iD 17; )fn$ 16 fo;n rm ^ 15 I?0? 

to prove 1 my servant 2 fear 3 to strengthen 4 my righteousness 5 to clothe 6 
(with two ace. § 85, 2, 6.) garments of 7 salvation 8 the robe oflJ why 10 to be 
willing 11 to repay 12 thanksgiving 13 to deliver 14 straw 15 chaff 16 to carry 
off 1 " a hurricane 18 - 

Exercise 69. 
►She did 1 him good and not evil all the days of 2 her 
life 3 - For 4 a short 6 moments I have forsaken thee (s. f.), 
but? with 4 everlasting9 kindness 8 I will have mercy on 10 
thee (s. f.). Thine 11 (are) (the) heavens also 12 Thine (is) 
(the) earth, Thou hast founded 13 them. Sarah 14 has 
driven 15 me out of Iter house 16 - No 1 " fear of' 18 God (is) 
in this place and they will kilU9 me. Very 22 refined 2 o 
(is) Thy saying 21 , and Thy servant 23 loveth 24 it. Dost 
thou (s. f.) know 25 the men that have asked 26 thee (s. f.) 
for 2 ? my name 28 ? I do not know29 them. Who has 
killed him? her? them? We have touched 36 thee, (s. m.) 
thee, (s. f.) her, him. Thou (s. f.) hast touched her, him, 
us, them (p. f.). Why hast thou (s. f.) forsaken us? 
her? me? him? They have forsaken them, you. W T hy 
lias she persecuted 31 him? us? you? (p. f.) thee? (s. f.) 
her? He has gathered them, you, thee, us. 

9DSu> 8 "!pn 71 6 jbp 5>U*\ O 3 with pi. suff. D'Tl ^& 1 with ace. S^J 
,IV3 15Pi. ^-IJ 14mi# 1310' i2'"]N 11 'lb 10 Pi. with ace. to have m. on : Dp"! 
221ND 21(f.)?jn1pN 20 part. pass. tptf 19 JPH 18 fiKY 17 j'H 16 with suff. JV2 
.3ir\-n 30^'JJ 29pret. 28 with suff. ">£!£/ ,D2/ 27 S 26 Sn^ 25 pT 24 2HN 2:jn-Oj,* 

§ 44A THE FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The Cholem of fut. Kal, before ^, D3 and p changes 
into Kamets-Chatuph ; before the other suff. it drops : as 

2. Tlie verbs with the fut. A. (including the verbs Ayin 
and Lamed Guttural) not only retain their A sound 
(Patach), but even lengthen it into Kamets, the syllable 



§ 44. The Future with Suffixes. 81 

becoming an open one : as ^SJ^T ne w ^ clothe me ; 
Vl^K^ they pollute him. 

3. Pi. loses or shortens its Tsere, like Kal its Cholera: as 
?Pf3p! n e will gather thee, D¥5j? • 

4. The plur. fern, forms, 2. and 3. person (in J"0) are 
changed into the corresponding masc. forms (in ]) before 
connection with suffixes : as U3&TJ? ^7 V^PS m y maids 
count me for a stranger. Job 19, 15* 

5. In pause, there is occasionally inserted instead of the 
union vowel a union syllable J— > ?—. called: Nun epenthetic, 

as tfijyov 

3 epenthetic is usually assimilated to the first letter of the 
suffix and expressed by Dag. forte. These suffixes are : 
Person. Person. Person. 

1. 2. 3. 

Sing. c. ttr-and *J- *-, (PD-) m. U- f. m~ 

Plur. U- and 1^- 

Exercise 70. 

♦5 ^"|33^ ^pppipj n3^n-SK nr? rnp np3n ^-qp 
:rrirr nntp^Pt njn 0V3 VrS* ■Swpjwo npfo t 2 mp$nn 

■Sn) u 'rp} sf«n&) nj ^rv : 10! f prn? ^g#_p 9 ^onp; : 

t|v ■ J" j •■ "-T v : t j : v v ■ ) v t : 

vfix hint) bx : 16 )r0m 73 wx 15 np ^ "02 iwgQ 

175 innpnp! ^"jpon ♦? tn?n3i tfjPWT 1 ? tftt&pio jjttd 
^3 :niir ^^ : 18 rni?iyi -nrn -umi D'nbjto toyo 

"buy, acquire 1 to embrace 2 to be attentive 3 to sustain 4 the bed of- 5 sick- 
ness 6 pride, arrogance 7 deed, act 8 to bring near 9 to put far away, remove 10 
stranger, foreigner 11 lips 12 to bind 13 correction 14 had died 15 to pronounce 
happy 16 to make inferior 17 to crown 18 (§ 85. 2. b.) our fathers 19 to compare 20 - 

11 



82 Part 1. Exercises, 

Exercise 71. 
The Lord will requite* me according to2 my righteous- 
ness3. The name of 4 God will set thee on highs, will send 
thee help 6 from the sanctuary? and sustain 8 thee out of 
Zion. From the extremity of9 the heaven, thy God will 
gather io thee. Nowii I shall gather them, thee (s. f.), 
you (p. f.), her. Wheni2 my brotherly will meet theeis 
and ask 15 thee: whoseiG (art) thou? Tbou wilt meet him, 
she will meet you. Thou (s. f.) wilt meet her. Why 
dost thou ask me (fut.). They (pi. f.) will ask us. They 
(pi. mas.) will ask you. Who will honoris him, that 
dishonorethi 8 his lifei9? Now will love 20 me my hus- 
band2i. Thou (s. f.) wilt love him. They (pi. f.) will 
love her. You (pi. m.) will love us. 

7ttKp 6 (§ 93, 6.) thee help Jpfj; 5 set on high, Pi. Sjjy 4D^ S^D"^ 2 J 1 SdJ' 
(usually SX'^) S^ U'm 13^:3 12'3 HHJ^ 10 Pi. pp 9^p 8 fut. A. 1£jp 
.21JTK 20 fut. A. 2HJ< 19l^£)J 18nn"3 17Pi.l33 16 to whom 15 with Vav conv. fut. A, 

§ 45. THE INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The infin. Kal when connected with suffixes appears 
in the form ?£3P> and according to its signification receives 
either the verbal suffixes or the nominal suffixes : as ^7Dp 
to kill me ; vtpfj my killing. 

2. With the suffixes ^DD^p a form sometimes occurs 
with Kamets under the second radical : as ^SX thy 
eating. 

3. The infin. 7Dp assumes with suff. the form SlDp : as 
i^tptrS to hinder him. 

Exercise 72. 

• T • • ■• J t : I v v t t : 

wrjfy* nil? mv : 7 dS^ 6 byn zpwii 5 ji^ 4 ooyn 



§ 46. The Imperative with Suffixfes. 83 

I : : • : V ' V : t -; ; t : t : t t -: v : • T 

*:mo ho rrirv Tpn: urn dwi ran S«te6 tyi north 

• T : • t : t : | : t : y - - •• • T : • t 

W£n njn ho pa o 18 rr 1T ?fi!tj*S3 

give 1 the sons ; children of 2 to sell 3 Greeks 4 in order that 5 away from, from 6 
territory 7 keep holy 8 to surround 9 to seize, capture 10 to open 11 your eyes 12 
when rise 13 become many, multiply 14 see 15 the skirt ofw to kill 1 ? know 18 - 

Exercise 73. 

He suffered i no 2 man to do them wrongs* And* the 
manna 6 left off 5 from the morrow 7 after they had eaten 8 of 
the produce 9 of the land. David has sent comforters io un to 
thee to search ii the city, (§ 57, 5. 2 ) to spy it out J 2 and 
to overthrow^ it. And* Ruthis saidi* entreat^ me not 
(§ 104, 2.) to leave 1 7 thee (s. f). Haman 18 has devisedis 
against 2 *) the Jews2i to destroy 2 2 them. Preserve 23 , my 
son, the law of 2* thy mother 25 , when thou goest 26 , it 
shall lead 27 thee, when thou sleepest 28 , it shall keep 
thee 29 - 

?nir)D 6p 5rQ# 4Vav Conv. 3p#JJ 2 no tfS (before the verb) lfT|fl 
lODB'fl 13 ^3H 12 Pi. SjH lllpn 10 part. Pi. Dnj 9 1*3)? 8 transl. in their eating 
23 1VJ 22 Pi. "UK 21 DH-17T 20 Sw 19 3&T1 IS tDH W 3ty 16 with 3 JUS 15/tfl 

-T • : "- - T I TT - > T ~T 

28 inf. with 3 , 33^ STiriJfi 26transl. in thy going, "jSpl Hithp. 25^$ 24fm'jl 

.29 with pi. suff. ,Sv IDltf 
<. _ T 

g 46. THE IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 

1. The form 7bp changes before its annexion to suff. 
into 7pD> as the infinitive. The form ,l ?pp and ^ 7C0p re- 
main unchanged; tl&lDT) takes the form of HfcDp ♦ 

2. In verbs Ay in and Lamed Guttural, the A vowel of 
the final syllable is retained and lengthened into Kamets : 
as OnSc* send me : ^1/NC* ask me. 



84 Part 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 74. 

-^mn nrr£rrn caiW era ^p-rca mrr ^toa^* 

...... .. . T . T | .. - | • : • : ■» ■ • •• : t 

■WTO :niJT ^5pp : 5 w •tibg nm 9*T[S7V^PB3 
-Sn assfi npn : inn?? ip]£ inr 1 ?? irnS^n rijn? 10 wv 

uipa >ror mrr njrr nn& :yeh td vriakfl ns 

• •• | : t • •• : t t : T^ : -t t - ^ t t -.• •• : - t 

: ir *rhD >S 16 Dpm 

- : •■ Jvt • : 

according to my nVteousness 1 to lead 2 in Thy truth 3 to teach 4 my sal- 
vation 5 to deliver 6 to redeem 7 to cleanse, purify 8 to be or become clean, 
puru 9 ye that fear 10 thy throat 11 the table 12 thy heart 13 to enter 14 to 
avoid 15 tu revenge 16 persecutor 17 - 

Exercise 75. 
Hear me (pL m.) and entreat* for 2 me to 1 the king. 
Remember me, prayS, and strengthen 4 me, pray, onlyS this 
once 6 , that? I may be avenged 8 on 8 my enemies^- Gather™ 
them from among 11 the people^ (pi.). Fear 13 the Lord 
and love Him. If 14 iniquity is (be) in thy hand, put it 
far away 16 and 1 ? let 18 not 1 ? wrong™ dwell 18 in thy tents20. 
And he said : draw? 1 thy sword22, and thrust me through 23 
therewith 24 , lest 2 ^ these uncircuracised 27 come 26 and* thrust 
me through and* abuse 28 me. Hear (s. f.) us. Hear 
(pi. f.) me. Help29 (pi. f.) me . Help (pi. in.) him. 
Bury 30 (pi. f.) her, for she is a king's daughter. 

8Ni.optatwithD,DpJ 7) 6(g04,3.)f. D£§ 51jN 4 Pi. pm 3 KJ 2 •? 1 with 3 ,;'J3 

nhm 16 Hi. pm is jw 14 d« 13 kt ncjy ujd ion. pp 9^j« 
(f-3^n)243 asnjrj 22^-»n 21.^ 2or l ,L ?nK i^nSij? i8§io4, 2. m. pitf 

:30^3p 291JV *Vav. Conv. 28 with 3, Hith. ^SjJ 27 D'SlJJ 26 4KT 25 13 

§ 47. THE PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 
The participles of Kal and Pi. lose their final Tsere and 
like the infin. according to their signification, receive either 
the nominal or srerbal suffixes: as \3*Vj£^ he who keeps me, 
■"12&* my keeper. 



^ 49. The Participle with Suffixes. 8i 

Exercise 76. 

3 #'1p n$3$ H339 : 2 S^rr u ^fK)p Sn impw nirv 

t : m - : • t : v t : t t - •• t : • 

nirv :o w n >onN rrnniN "nua 16 ^n nMnn twits* 

t : • - -: t t v ~: t v t J •* — : t : t - \ : • 

! 21 n£S? 20 ^itr 19 v^3V. i^yw tSk 18 ^V nirv ^jpy 
26 Wo tvn 1 ?^ 1 ? 25 jd$ 24 n^ tvr CDV3 23 ^W'- 22 n3V? 
rj3inp'^ :o»JtBh : ^vjtwd-Sd np.^'- 28 nnT^_ 27 ^T'pP 
:"?psp^p *E»t nin? M 7i# 31 Tpn 3o rpK> rj^jjapr 1 ^ 
p>st w re^» vro? : 35 *w ^^ppi *p;?S}Q ™^ : 

to gird 1 (§ 85, 2, b.) strength 2 (that which is) holy, consecrated to God 3 to 
"be or become guilty 4 to swear 5 by his right (hand) 6 if? (§ 108, 4.) I give 8 
corn 9 enemies 10 drink 11 the alien 12 new wine, must 13 to gather 14 to store up 15 
to teach 16 her, its children 17 shade 18 to clothe 19 adversaries 20 confusion 21 as 
the cold of 22 snow 23 messenger 24 faithful 25 a ruler 26 to hearken 27 word of 28 
servant 29 say 30 continually 31 to be great 32 salvation 33 to curse 34 I will curse, 
devote to destruction 35 shall inherit 36 to be destroyed 37 - 

Exercise 77. 

These (are) our judges 1 that judge us. The land 2 shall not 
he expiated 3 oi' 4 the blood that is sheds therein 6 ? but? by 8 
the blood of him that shed 9 it. For I was ashamed 1 *) to ask 
of the king a force 11 to help us against 12 the enemy 13 in 
the way: because 14 we had spoken 1 ^ unto the king, say- 
ing 16 ; The hand of 17 our God (is) upon* all them that 
seek 18 Him for good 19 ; but 2 <> His power 21 and His wrath 22 
(is) against* all them that forsake Him 23 - They that curse 24 
thee shall be cursed, and they that bless 25 thee shall be 
blessed. Lord, who is like unto 26 Thee, who deliverest 2 ? 
the poor 28 and the needy 29 from him that robbeth 30 him. 

8 3 ?DX- , 3 6 3 5Pu. ^2!# 4*7 3Pu. *ii33 2Dative=to the land (f,) lpart. B3# 
*<?;♦ ITT 1«*0XS 15T3N 14 \3 133MN 12 B 11 S'fl WJWra 9part. 



86 Part 1. Exercises. 

2. r > Pi. part. ^p3 24 part. *HK 23 part. 22f3K21>t# 20 1 WH^I'dS 18Pi. part. #p3 
; 30 part. *7U 29 | VOX 28 ^^ 27 VtfD 26 (before grave stiff. fo3) 1D3 



CHAPTER IX. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 
§ 48. VERBS N"£ , 

1. The verbs of which the first radical is N partake of 
all the peculiarities of the verbs Pe Guttural. In some 
of them, however, the N is quiescent in either Cholem or 
Tsere, hence they are called; N '£} ^ftj = quiescent the £) 
i. e. the first radical K» 

2. In the fut. Kal the five following verbs: "DK to 
perish, J"QN to be willing, 75^ to eat > ^5^ to sav an( ^ 
Jlt3^ to bake, have the N quiescent in Cholem : as ^Otf ft 
thou wilt eat, 15^* ne w ^ perish. In the first person 
the N drops : as 1QK I shall say. The verbs tflN to take 
hold, S"|pK to collect, have beside the regular form ?n^> 
*]Bj£. the form of the X"£: tllN'i ^p*l 2. Sam. 6, 1. 

3. The final syllable has generally Patach, Tsere is for 
the most part used in syllables with a distinctive accent: 
138* Job 3, 3. -p# Job 20, 7. SjKn 1. Mos. 3, 14, 
S^Xn 1. Mos. 2, 16. 

4. With Vav Conv. the accent is thrown back: 73^V 
n*DN*n_; but with a distinctive accent, Milra : Sd^V !&&)• 

5. The inf. Kal of "IDN with S> is *"btfS> for iDtfS 
(§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

6. In the verbs 7?N to go away, HIlK.to tarry, to delay, 
Hiltf to come, the N quiesces in Tsere : as 7?N> for ^?NN » 

njTN!* for r\m\> "TH*,for itjkk (cf. § 12, b. b. 3.). 



§ 49. Verbs N"S . 



87 



Exercise 78. 

10 #M 9 ^ori kS) 8 n^3 b^n 7 r)n : 6 nn? btf 5 roNfi 

t . . v : t t - : v v • t t : 

nrjtf rnirr 16 >:? tiring j^ror *p 15 iw* l4 DnMi rnrrp 
: 20 vbm vt 19 ni:hrn^ l8 wyp»i ink win»i 17 pn i7 >:hn 

t : - : tt : •.• : ) — : ~ —. — I v t -: 

^SppVi TO3 21 #W? tow kb :D?rrr) *ja nakn dn 

:D.np ^trir? 28 }Wt nS >? 27 ni¥D 26 n:iy 25 pv?n 

: 3l nrupl? tow 3o ^_ pS-cy 

witness 1 lie, falsehood 2 § 82, 5. and $ 83, 6 ; when dies 3 expectation, (sup- 
ply /lis) 4 fig tree 5 fruit 6 sword 7 flesh, body 8 meet, reach unto 9 soul 10 lie, 
falsehood 11 ruins, destroys 12 my way 13 hight of 14 his heaven 15 sons of 16 
p. n. m. 17 to cut off 18 thumbs., great toes 19 feet 20 weak 21 fool 22 wise, prudent 23 
in proportion, according to 24 dough 25 cakes 26 (§ 85, 3) unleavened 27 leav- 
ened 28 drive out 29 I have sojourned 30 now 31 - 

Exercise 79. 

Say ye to the righteous (man), because 1 (he is) good, 
that 2 he shall eat the fruit of 3 his doings4. Not shall es- 
cape 5 the wicked, and the patience ofs the righteous shall 
not be in vain 7 - And 8 the children of Israel 9 said: who 
shall give 10 us flesh 11 to eat 10 ? We remember (pret.) the 
flsh 1 2 J which we did eat in Egypt 13 freely 14 - Eat thou 
not the bread of an evil eye 15 (i. e. an envious, malig- 
nant person), for eat, saith 16 he to thee, but 17 his heart 18 
is not 19 with 20 thee. The children of Israel are not will- 
ing to hearken to thee. And 8 the asses 21 of 22 Kisli 23 were 
lost 2 *, 

pSr'"^ \13 8VavConv. 7"DK 6 fern. HI Dfi 5 Ni. dSd ^bh^D 3 ng 2 \3 1*3 
171 X6fut. 15 ftf tn 14D3n 13D^2fD 12 riJ1 into lOHi. SDK (give to eat) 

]•<-'- T' •-;• TT TT 

;24*t:N 23 ^p 22 (§ 80, 10) <? -ypX or S 21(fem.) nfifflK 20 D# 1 9 S| 18 )lh 

§ 49. VERBS N' ,l 7 ♦ 
1. In verbs of which the third radical is K,the K qui- 



88 Fart I. Exercises. 

esces whenever the final syllable has A or E, and length- 
ens final Patach into Kamets: as XtfD* for tf¥D (§ 14. 
Lengthening, 3.); N^O to be full. 

2. Before the consonantal afFormatives (fl, J)K quiesces 
in the pret. Kal in Kamets: JH&^D> in the pret. of all 
the other conjugations in Tsere : jINVQ^; in the imp. and 
fut. of all the conjugations, in Seghol: as rUN^D* iliNVpn . 

3. The verbs middle E, like N'T to fear, retain Tsere 
throughout the rest of the forms : as J"I&*V > ^JlX^ft I have 

o T .. T . ., T 

filled. 

4. The part. fern, is commonly formed by contraction 

ntfib.for flfflp (§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

Note. The Infinitive sometimes has the termination HK or jY)r 
as fltiXtf Prov. 8, 13. miZn Zech. 13, 4, frjfcgJ Ez. 36, 3. 

Exercise 80, 

*i$p 6 jfno 4 i^n5 im Sk &bn B ^b 2 inx 2 dk *6d 
^-ara 10 nintp dS : 9 m« nn$ 8 S L ?rrS 7 vr»q &»k 
% ™*prh i4 nW : 13 ^p? 12 sHD n p^ nm : d^k 

tar : 28 f^n 27? ui^- 26 nW 25 nnK) npe> onS b*nS 24 :r)j; 

•1 : - : "J- : - • - ■ t •• -: t •• T • "•• •• : 

owist :N5?£ri ttjnV nil? 33 ny^ rrwan 82 rnjp# : :n]/*j 
37 y?H fi?n"S;s kS jruKgnn vti 36 frrp^ 36 fi^rrn M anj# 

. I . . T T T ■ TT J V T • • -: T T " T T : T - 

father* one 2 to all of us 3 to create 4 why 5 to deal treacherously 6 against his 
brother 7 to profane 8 our fathers 9 clean 10 right 11 renew 12 within me 13 to 
cast 14 bread 15 upon (the surface) 16 multitude of = after many 17 daj^s 18 to 
find 19 to heal, cure 20 to hate 21 congregation of 22 evil doers 23 agreeable, 
sweet 24 afterwards 25 to fill 26 his mouth 27 gravel - stones 28 (§ 85, 2. a.) 
friends of 2 !' to be envious 30 men of 31 (§ 83, 6.) crown 32 gray hair 33 to 
wound, to injure 34 to bind up35 to split, to dash.36 unrighteousness^ n . p. m.38 
sin39 ($ 25, 7) 4 " thy hearts 



§ 50: Verbs / "£ • 89 

Exercise 81. 
I said, Lord heal 1 my soul 2 ; for I have sinned 3 against4 
Thee. And Moses said unto the people: ye have sinned 
a great® sin^- And 7 (there) remained 8 two of 9 (the) men 
in the campio> the name of the oneii was Eldadi 2 and 
the name of the other^ Medad 1 * and 7 they prophesied 1 ^ in 
the camp, and 7 (there) said a young man 16 to Moses: 
Eldad and Medad do prophesy in the camp. And 7 Joshua 17 
said: my lord 18 Moses forbid 19 them. And Moses said unto 
him, enviest 20 thou for my sake 21 ? would22 God2 2 that 22 
all the Lord's people (were) prophets 23 - The ear 2 s is not 
filled 2 ^ with 26 hearing. In the lips 27 of the intelligent 
(man) 28 wisdom is found 29 - And 7 JehoshebaSO stole Joashsi 
and hid 32 him from* Athalia 33 ? and he was 3 4 hid 3 ^ in the 
house of the Lord six years. 

9'jtf 8Ni. 1K2T 7VavConv. 6nS^ 5n*ttDn *S 3Xttn 2^£JJ 1X31 
•• : t : t t r: t t • : - t t 

is ""hx lfcytftirp i6^j;j i5Hith. *oj mttd is\]Bf 12 "nSx unfix 10 npno 

25 [fern.] |TX 24 fut. Ni. fc^D 23 D^iJ 22 \^V9^ 21 ^ 20part Pi. NJD 19 vhs 

ss-m^Snj; 32 m. fut. ino 31 titer 3py3#fir 29NL fut - ssjiaj 27, nsi# 26 n 

. * , J£DD 37 D 1 ^ 36$$ 35 part. Hith. JOll 34 , *rH 

§ 50. VERBS }"£♦ 

1. The verbs, of which the first radical is 3 , lose }> when- 
ever it should take Sh'va, by assimilation, hence the sec- 
ond radical is doubled, i. e. receives Dag. forte: astJW, 
for &2y m , ^H.for B^Mfl (§ 12, 4.). Before a gutt. the 
assimilation does not take place: as p$T> ^COT (ibid.). 
In the infin. and imp., J drops without compensation, the 
following letter commencing the word: as &>■) (Dag. lene); 
before Makkef "^, with pargog. H, fTtfJ. The regular 
form of the imp. is found occasionally: as b'tD} leave, mj 
vow ye. (See 3 of this §.) 

2. With these verbs, in order to make the infin. dissylla- 
bic, it takes the fern, nominal ending fl— — .or Hz^T when 
the second or third radical is a guttural : as D^jl > T\V1 to 
touch. (See 3 of this §.) 

3. In most cases, these verbs have a fut. and imp. 0, 

12 



90 Part I. Exercises. 

many A: as *?b* to fall, tT^- The imp. and infin. of verbs 
with fut. 0, are regular: as ?b^ inf. ^b-55 . 

4. The verb Jfi} to give, has besides the irregularities of 
the verbs ?''£) the peculiarity, that it also assimilates its 
final 3 before the afformatives ft and 3 : as fir0> f° r tyty » 

urufor ttjfjjj infin. na-for n#i (2); Avith T 6^n: no?-. 
nro> rvV?* npD; imp, jri, *#i, ^i, with parag. n : ninj 

5. In njr? to take, the 7 is analogous to the J of 
the verbs' f'fi, Fut HpUbr rrpV, inf. nnpj with D^D^ 

nnpa, nnp*?, nnpo; imp. np, r?p, rip, rtinp. Ho.np*, 

for npT "(§ 14, Short, b.); but Ni. always (IpS: , 
Exercise 82. 

12 Dpn kS j u i#aa 10 nj;? {^ vftjh *\m 9 Va :vaK npiD 
nirv 16 Lran D?tfa : 15 dW "i^fnpjt na : 13 ie>n *6* 

22 nirw 21 ^pn rn^s? 20 ra> d^dj 19 ^ :d^ kSh j*j? 
npjnrr j^rici^jrrarrpsn :iDj;p 23 pinn5npn^D§srb 
>b 26 T]?S 25 ^? rrtti :TfVlJENj? tCDi n0n s rjS pru jttsht! 
i 32 ^il 3lL ?#9 "^T^J 2gL} ® t^ni^ii 2r *aTi ?p/ia 

39 Sna : 38 nn w «grw *K$f 36 f&a D'tf&nrr r^DJ *ip$£ 

rrin? nn? :^ np «B*DTrj 41 ^n >S jn :np> •n^go 

' nrj& npn rib :Sb^ nfc>a aT3?a oab 

to dig 1 a pit 2 to fall 3 to break down 4 a fence 5 to bite 6 serpent 7 to despise, 
contemn 8 all, every thing 9 for, in behalf of 10 soul, life 11 to revenge 12 to keep, 
retain sc. anger 13 to make a vow 14 to pay, perform 15 to look 16 to plant 17 to 
form, make 18 the mouth of 19 to pour forth, utter 20 to turn away 21 backward 22 
afar off 23 knowledge 24 my sun 25 thy heart 26 my ways 27 to observe 28 to put 
off 29 shoes 30 from 31 feet 32 to step near 33 to kiss 34 root out, pluck up 35 the 
chaff 36 to drive away 37 a wind 38 iron 39 earth 40 persons 41 (coll.) substance, 
property J 2 - 






§ 51. Verbs *'£)>. 91 

Exercise 83. 

• 

Put forth* thine hand and touch2 his flesh 3 - He made-* 
a pits, and diggeds it, and is fallen into the ditch?, (which) 
he made 8 - Keep 9 thy tongue 1 *) from evil and thy lips 11 
from speaking 12 guile 13 - Andi4 she vowed*5 a vowi6 and 
said: Lord of Hosts 17 , if 18 Thou wilt remember me and 
wilt give to thine handmaid 19 a man-child20, then2i I will 
give him to the Lord all the days of22 his life. And 
he dreamed23, and behold24, a ladder 25 set up26 n* the 
earth, and the top of it 27 reached2S to 29 heaven. Right- 
eousness^ delivereth 31 from death 32. To take away33 m y 
life 34 they devised35- Lord give us Thy help36. Thou 
shalt not inherits 7 in our father's house 38 - This woman 
said to me: give (s. f.) thy son 39 and we will eat him 
to day 40 and I w T ill give my son to-morrow-* 1 - 
lorni^ 1 ? 9fut. o. nvj s^na 7nntf e^sn 5 *ii3 4m3 311^3 2wjj inS^ 
18DX nmioy lenj i5fut. -nj uconv. 1 i3noirD i2Pi. -im urns^ 

x : v.- -t t : • I v.T! 

26 part. Ho. ^ J 25 D^D 24^n 23 &Sn 22 ^ 211 20D^}KjnT l^riOK 

32H1D 31 Hi. fut. Si'J 30fem. HpIV 29 ($ 19, 6,) local ft 28 part. Hi. w J J 27 1^X1 

VT I TT : ' -T 

41-\nD -lODrn 39^3 38JV3 M^m 36*;^ 35 DDT 34 ^3J Mftph 
TT - '■•: " -t '-.-:■ -t • :- | - T 

,(§ 85, 4, 6.) *TW!X 
t : - 

§ 51. VERBS v'S , 

1. The verbs of which the first radical is * are divided 
i into three classes : 

a. The first class comprises those, in which * is used as 3 
in the verbs }"&, i. e. * is assimilated and indicated by 
Dasesh in the next letter. In this class are four verbs, 
which all havetf as the second radical: fW (Ni. fi¥J , Hi. 
fV¥n) to set on fire, to kindle, #¥* to spread down, to 
strew, p*^ to pour, pour out, *)V T *° form. 

b. The second class is but slightly irregular. The weak 
letter > quiesces in the preceding vowel in fut. Kal and 
all forms of Hi. The fut, Kal retains Chirek: as Dft" 
from y&; Hi. changes the Chirek into Tsere: as^D^ 
for ipMPatach + * = a + i .= e, § 12, 1. b. 2.). To 



92 Part I. Exercises. 

this class belong six verbs: *W (fut. y&\ and y&, apoe. 
TV" and *yJJ ?) *|g^ to be straight, right, 2ffl to be good, 
py to suck, Vt to wail, lament, yp' to awake. 

c. The other verbs *"£ belong to the third class. The verbs 
of this class are properly V'£), but the 1 is changed at 
the beginning of the word into *: as T^Sfor "iVl, *2$\> 
for y&) (§ 12, 7. a.). In those conjugations, which have 
a characteristic letter at the beginning (Ni., Hi., Ho.) 
the original ), being now in the middle of the word, re- 
turns: Ni. pret. H^O* fut. I^tf, Hi. T^Ho. I^H . 
In Hithp. the 1 in a few verbs only is restored: as JHVin* 
from JTV, to know. 
The preformatives , have not the usual vowel, but one 

homogeneous to V iSilfor lV)J , T^for T^li"?; lb)ri> 

for l^n (12, 7. b. 2 T .). 

2. In fut. Kal the * drops. The preformatives now form- 
ing open syllables, lengthen the Chirek into Tsere: as 17% 
for "f?**- With conv. V iVl; in Hiphil with conv. V 

3. About half these verbs have the future E. The 
others with future A retain ' quiescent in Chirek : as B>*j* 
to take possession of, to inherit. 

4. The infin. const, is formed as with y£ , i. e. the * 
drops and the segholate ending jl— — (§ 66.) (with Gutt. 
H-tt) is appended: as fTl?* with'b^M: ft~)^> fi"T?3> 
ri"! 1 ?^ » rn^p ♦ Occasionally, it has the fern, termination 
,1— Jike TVT? to bear, ITll to go down. 

t T- . ; t : ° 

5. The imp. T7, D&Swith H parag. m& , 

6. The fut. Kal of the Verbs JTV to take possession of, 
V?y to be or become dry, yy to labor, toil, is formed like 
the" second class: £n», &2» Jfe". (3), but in Ni., Hi., Ho. 
they are inflected like the third class: as £"Din> JW?» 

7. The verb TIT to go, belongs to v '§ ; taking its irregular 
forms from v '5 : i'ut. Kal Tj7*> imp. H7» infin. rD/> Hi. 



§ 50. Verbs »"£), $$ 

In all cases, however, where the verbs v '£ are regular 
it is inflected as from Tj^H : pre! Kal TjSl , part. Kal 

^in.Hith. ?{yri?\r\. 

Exercise 84. 

• • ' t : v t v v t : : • - I • 

tapxn 5 n^i :?fsi5i 4 b>:n rjbrrtfS :Q3l?S* rnrr 
Nr loi 7 k sin ^jwrSg 9 rnjjjrr 8, 3£ *©#! 7 w 6 dh^^ 
rny 1 ? rn* : trtfrrns tx^h "n^n S^in_ : rpS 12 ^ : n pV| 
: l9 ty^» i8 ^in 17 NiD : 16 d*d> 15 cvDin niiT nNT : 14 iSv 

"T- ; .. . T | . T . " ; • ■ T- 

•*Wn : 22 n^nn n#g3 ^7 T r6ty ^W? 20 ^'n ora eft 
rrwiK ^nWin ^ nycriNi 2M aw'in Ntnso rrtrr wan 

t t • t • : *t •• t • : "• • •• t •• : t : • •■ t : 

rjrrro rftx 3l ru T K : 30 jw> kSi : 29 ^y kS rrj7 oSiy ribx 
35 ny^Ni nnx 34 d&*'dw 38 pdn-dn jiton 32 ^£dd puni 

*T • -> ; T T t • - T | - v • t : I v t • T T : 

rh.T rrnx ^ 38 ?^'w hm^ 37 vtp diSp'3 :^n 36 Sw 

t ; t - It ■ : t : : v t : - t : t | v ■ : 

Drraw 42 omnia nirr 41 onjuin : 40 ^trifi nanS 39 -nnS 

v : - -: - -.•••:•; t v • : ~ .... - v t t t : 

rnjrt; »yja did jn 45 n^r 44 ^ o;ra#3 WJin 43 n?3 
in *3 *in • ? R**n 48 7t$?>? II ^JH. fi*39 47 ^41 46 ^P_n 

x V |-:*t t. t 

statute, law 1 sons 2 the fear of 3 slander. TD1 T7H to slander 4 to sit down 5 
botli of them 6 together 7 the father of 8 the damsel 9 to consenti° and lodge all 
night 11 to be good, merry 12 Levite 13 to bear, bring forth 14 to add, increase 15 
days 16 a drunkard 17 squanderer, prodigall 8 to become poor 19 to put, place- 
before thee 21 to be pleased to do anything^ to make good 23 your ways 24 to 
kindle 25 to burn 26 to help, succor 27 praise, object of praise 28 to be wearied 29 
to be fatigued 30 whither 31 from thy presence 32 (prop. f. thy face) to ascend 33 
there 31 to spread down, make one's bed 35 grave 36 together, at one time 37 
to sleep 38 alone 39 to make dwell 40 to weary, be troublesome 41 words 42 
in what 43 every one 44 that doeth 45 to make rare 46 thy foot 47 to be satiated, 
weary 48 bitter 49 - 



94 Part I. Exercises. 



Exercise 85. 
Rebuke* not a scorner 2 , lest 3 he hate 4 thee ; rebuke a 
wise man5, and he will love thee. Give (instruction) to a 
wise man, and he will be yet 7 wiser 6 ; teach.8 a just man 
and he will increase^ in learning 10 - (It is) good to go to 
the house of mourning 11 - Go, eat with 12 joy 13 thy bread* 4 - 
And* the king put forthis his hand, saying 16 , lay hold 17 
on him. And* his hand dried up. When 1 ^ your children 20 
shall ask 19 their fathers 21 in time to come 22 ) saying, what 
(mean) these stones 23 ? Then 24 ye shall let know25 your 
children, saying, Israel came over 26 this Jordan 2 ? on 28 
dry land 2 9- Forso the Lord your God dried up 31 the wa- 
ters of 32 Jordan from before you 33 , until^ ye were passed 
over 3 ^. That 36 all the people of 38 the earth might know 37 
the hand of the Lord. Labor 39 not to be rich 40 - Know 
thou the God of thy father and serve 41 Him. Boast 42 not 
thyself of 43 to-morrow 44 , for thou knowest 4 ^ not what a 
day 47 may bring forth 46 - We will do thee good 48 - 

7tty 6fut. A. (to be wiser) DDT1 5 DDJlS 4fcOtP 3 j£} 2 V 1 } lHi. Juss. nD* 1 

i5n}w i^on 1 ? 13 nrw 123 nSax ionpS 9m. with ace. mp sm. #t 

22in t. t. come -)PID 21-Dfii3X lQ^Kltf 20 Dm^ 18 '3 17 with ace. tyQft 16 ibtfS 
T T t -: - T -.•■•: - - T 

31 Hi. 3<n#X 29TVVT 28 3 27 HV 26 to come over 1 3 V 25 Hi. pret. 241 23D , J3K 
-.--: t t- | ... - _-^ . T _. 

37 inf. (connect 36 and 37) Se'iyQ 1 ) 35 inf. = your passing over 34 "]p 33DD\32p 32 p 

44*inO DV 43 J 42Hith. Juss. ^H 41T3J? 40 Hi. inf. with S 39 Juss. yjp 38 ^y 

.*Vav Conv. 48 to do good SB" 1 Hi. 47 DV 46fut. iS 1 45 fut. 

§ 52. verbs yy , 

The verbs belonging to this class are contracted, the 
second radical having been repeated in the root, as DDD» 
now Dp » hence termed )}'"]} . 

Irregularities : 

1. The repeated letter is generally written but once, 
with a Dag., which is, however, omitted at the end of the 
word : as 3D . for 3D* but *QD (§12, 4. Note). 

2. The resulting monosyllabic word from this contraction 
is vocalized similarly to the regular verbs, but differs in 



§ 52. Verbs yy , 95 

this particular : the vowel of the second radical in the 
regular verb recedes to the first radical of the verb J?"J? : 
as imp. 2D> for ±lp> like Sbp> fat. DDJ> for ±L0\> like 
hbp\> (comp. 3), (§14, Rising III.). 

Note I. Infin. and fut. Ni. excepted, which have Patach in- 
stead of Tsere. 

3. The preformative forming an open syllable, which 
requires long vowels, has the pretonic Kamets : fut. Kal 
Db» for 22D\> fat. Hi. np>> for DSp!; hence this Kamets 
drops, when the tone is thrown forward : as ni'JDfl (§ 14. 
Reject. 1.). 

4. When the aflbrmative begins with a consonant (f| , 
£")> *n» *£> ni) a helping vowel is used: 1) to avoid the 
meeting of three consonants with but one vowel : as 
MSP = n??P 5 2) to render more perceptible the doubling 
of the radical. This helping vowel is Cholem in the pret. 
(written fully or defectively) : as jTi-lp or fDp , and in 
the future >— : as nMDn ♦ 

t y \ : 

5. This helping vowel receiving 'the tone, shortens the 
vowel in Hi., and in the forms with ni in the imp. and 
fut. Kal: "as nftDn, WID ♦ 

6. In Pi., Pu. and Hith., which require Dag. in the 
second radical, in order to avoid the meeting of three 
similar consonants, as D?P — 33?D> a long vowel (invariably 
Cholem) enters instead of Dag. Thus the forms Poel, 
Poal, Hithpoel, arise, which are regularly inflected : as 

33iD,MiD> Minpn. 

7. With convers. 1 the Cholem of the fut. Kal is short- 
ened into Kamets-Chatuph, and the Tsere of the fut. Hi. into 
Seghol: as loK, D0J5 (§ 33, 4.). 

8. Before suffixes the same change takes place, for the 



96 Part I. Exercises. 

> 

same reason (§ 14, Short, c.): as )}$!* may He be gracious 

to us ; ^njnil ye shall solemnize it ; or Kubbuts is chosen 
instead: as *}#$, Hiph. ♦ ( jap» , Tsere into Chirek (the 
strong sharpening) (§ 14, Short, b.) 

9. The accent is not here thrown forward upon the 

> 
afformatives H— > \> *— > as with regular verbs : as H3D » 

Note II. In Kal are found -examples of middle (according 
to Vd* § 29, 1.) : as ^1 they shoot arrows. Gen. 49, 23. tfjn 
they are lifted up. Job 24, 24. The fut. A. of these verbs has 
Tsere under the preformatives : as *")£?* it is bitter, Is. 24, 9. ^pKl 
and I am despised, Gen. 16, 5. QfT it is hot, De. 19, 6. 

Note III. Ni. in the final syllable has Tsere occasionally: as 
DD^ D?i> bpj > n3p:; sometimes Cholem p!3 he is broken, 
Eze 29, 7. VDJ they are spoiled, Am. 3, 11. 

Note IV. Hi. sometimes takes Patach in the final syllable, 
especially with gutturals: *1Qn he has embittered, Job 27, 2. 
intl he cuts off, Is. 18, 5. pin , ^[JH . 

Note V. In many of these verbs the vowel of the preforma- 
tives in Kal, Ni., Hi. 'and Ho. is short and Dag. forte follows. 
This Dagesh compensates for the one omitted in the second radi- 
cal, as it occurs generally with this class of verbs in Chaldee : 
fut. Kal 3D? and 20^ D^T (fr. DOT); UW\ shall be astonished, 
1. Ki; 9, 8. 1p> to bow the head; Hi. Dp! Jnd. 18, 23. ")&♦ 
Ex. 23, 21. 

Exercise 86. 

nyvpn :^?^ni;n;-Sy 4 S^ itiw s ^$yj? 2 tor 1 no 
Dv? nirrS RasQnj 8 nrv 7 w hnd ^ni^-p? 5 V|T^ 
12 p^^5 n &W ns^i *»ni?? ^5 ^S 10 natfrrns nin; nfei 

BJ3TTK "i?I£ 1™ ^W* PTL. 18 P^ 15 p0tf5 14 fT? T ! 13 0)1 
19 o^n^Sr by ainn o v? Snr 18 Sip? nin* 17 Dim : i»ppc m 



§ 53. Verbs V'J? and *"# , 97 

mrrS 23 ^n ink a pMJi rSsnfc" ^ 21 i^^i ^d&jti 
ibk 27 rb :ink y'rifi "ipsefri crjra "f?J#3 D*p; 24 dj;d^ 
bna dj nS'Wi wg n>o dvh ^wrnN "nanm* rnrr 

... - T ; T • : ... : - • • .- ... .. T T . 

K7) D!?^ 31 k?v nejprw "n^g snpK ih-dn nsn 
35 Dion 3i rh*in : H?r. "in inrr»8 33 nyig p cppi Sin 32 1® 
3S upfinn np\iy^v np\ : 37 mp-Si; bvjn "ityy-^E 
jhrjfjr^s tj?5 nr? ♦? : 40 jnn ^ID : 39 wwv Nan 
44 rpj;: h Njiqpn n^S jjnrr 1 ? ft Srjg »:jjk 42 rrSj; 41 w 
Tina 48 DUiD4 47 o^nn nan hnp >S jnrn 46 n??n «ng*i 
:^S 50 D?in^ ^in? : 49; ifD' orjniaji 

adverb 1 (§ 24, 3.) to be many 2 works 3 to roll, to commit 4 my outcrv, cry 
fur help 5 to be languid, weakened 6 then 7 (§ 101, II, b.) s Joshua 9 Amorite 1 *) 
sun 11 Gibeon 12 to stay, stand still 13 moon 14 valley 15 Ajalon 16 cause thun- 
der 17 thunder 18 (prop, voice, sound) Philistines 19 to contound 20 to defeat 21 
to celebrate 22 festival 23 seven 24 year 25 seventh^ 6 so, thus 27 to break, make 
void 28 my covenant with 29 as 30 the host of 31 to measure 32 I will increase 33 
door 34 to turn 35 hinge 36 his bed 37 to inscribe laws, to rule 38 to save 39 to do 
evil 40 my name 41 (§ 96, 2.) 42 to open, begin 43 n. p. f. (my sweetness) 44 the 
Almighty 4 5 to embitter 46 (sc. life,) to be terrified, dismayed 47 to recede 48 to 
beat down 49 to be astonished, confounded 50 - 

Exercise 87. 

Three 1 times 2 thou shalt keep a feasts to me in the year. 
And he rolled 4 the stone 5 from 6 the mouth of 7 the wells. 
The Lord of Hosts** will defend 10 Jerusalem"- The soul 
of 12 the wicked desireth 13 evil, his neighbor is not fa- 
vored 14 in his eyes 15 - This day will I begin 16 to mag- 
nify thee 17 in the sight of 18 all Israel. And I will de- 
fend 19 this city, to save 20 it. And the Lord discomfited 2 ! 
Sisera 22 - Hills 23 melted 24 like 25 wax 26 - Pie that trusteth 27 
in 28 the Lord, mercy 29 shall compass 30 him about 30 - Be- 
seech 31 ; I pray you, God, that 32 He will be gracious 33 unto 
us. Hazael 34 ; king of Syria 35 , oppressed 36 Israel. And 
the Lord was gracious 37 to them and had compassion 38 on 
them. (He) whom thou blesseth 39 (is) blessed 40 ? and (he) 

13 



98 Part 1. Exercises. 

whom thou curseth-u is cursed42. Why 43 art thou cast 
down 44 , my soul 45 ? hope 4 ^ thou in47 God ! 

«Syp 5|3X 4 Hi. fut. with Vav Conv. ^ 3 to keep a feast Jjn 2 D ,l ?ri ltih& 

HHo.fut.nn i3nmx waj iiD ,l ?tfw iom. fut. m ormoynirr 8*1x3 7»g 

I t : • vv • - t : I t : t : " : 

20 Hi. $&> 19 pret. with Vav Conv. p J 18\T# 17 Pi. inf. Via 16 Hi. ^n 15 rj'JJ 

27part.nD3 26JJH 25 3 24Ni. DDE 23 Dnn 22«1D , D 21 fut. with Conv. 1, Qnn 

- T "T t : • 

36'i'lV? 3 5D*\K S 4 hvm 33jjn 321 31 ^n 30 Pi. fut. 33D 2 9"lpn 28 3 

40 Pa. part. 39 Pi. fut. "113 38 Pi. fut. with Vav Conv. with ace. DfTl 37 fut. with Vav Cbnv. 

: 47 ^ 46 Hi. ^TV 45(f.) ntfflj 44 Hith. fut. nntf 43HD 42 Ho. fut. 41 fut. -HX 

§ 53. VERBS yy AND *]} , 

To the ]?"]? the verbs >]7 are nearly related. To this 
class belong those verbs of which the second radical is ), 
which are best compared with the preceding ]})}, whereby the 
points of similarity or difference can be rendered most 
conspicuous. 

In common with y w J?: ■ 

1. The stem is monosyllabic. 

2. The preformatives have long vowels: in fut. Kal and 
in the pret. Ni. Kamets (Tsere in rare cases). 

3. The forms Poel, Poal, Hithpoel. 

4. The insertion of the helping (union) vowel Cholem before 
the consonantal afformatives, but only in Ni. and Hi., not 
in Kal and Ho. 

5. These peculiarities originate from the principle, that 
the weak letter 1 cannot retain its consonantal power be- 
tween two vowels; (not even between a following vowel 
and a preceding vocal Sh'va,) the 1 either drops or qui- 
esces, and as with J7"^ its vowel recedes to the first radi- 
cal: pret. Dp> instead of 0)0', inf. Dip • for Dip J fut. Dip** 
for Dip* (§ 12, 6. B. 3)7 Hi. tfpi> for D^pH (§ ibid. 
§ 12, 7, a.); Ho. DpIH-for DJf?n (§ 12, 6, B., 3.) (Kamets- 
Chat, now in an open syllable becomes 1 (§ 14, Length. 1.). 

6. These verbs differ from }f"Jf in the following points : 



§ 53. Verbs Y'J7 and >"#. 99 

a. The vowel in Ytf is longer: } in Kal, *— in Hi., a 

vowel-letter quiescing in it. 

b. The M. has a final Cholem DipJ » for DJpJ; fat. Dip*. » 
for Dip* (the 1 becoming'*), § 12, 7. b. 2.), after remov- 
ing the mutable Patach in pret,, and Tsere and the 

i pretonic Kamets in fut. 

i 7. Intransitive verbs occur with middle E. and 0: tM2 » 
nr\f2> fiD (for m? § 12, 6. B.). Part. DO; Inf. niO; Fut. 

rnb>; E/13, nro. ntr'3; Fut. uny. 

T T T : 

Note. In some verbs, the 1 of the inf., imper. and fut. is al- 
ways quiescent iu Cholem: as *YlK to be light, frfj^ to come, 
^i!3 to he ashamed, ffiy) and he came. 

T - 

8. The apocopated Fut. is DJT> with Vav Con v. DiTl> 
1 with gutturals *")D*1« 

9. The usual form of 2. and 3. pers. pi. fern, is given 
in the paradigm : H^D"^^ ; a f° rn ^ like D^D is sometimes 
met with. 

10. Several verbs VJ> in common with ]?")} (§ 52 Note 5.) 
double the first radical : as IVDP?> for JTp?"T . Some thus 
modify the signification: as IT^H to cause to rest, IT^H to 
permit, suffer; p7H to pass the night, Vyil to complain, 
murmur. 

11. Verbs *"JN Verbs having for their second radical a 
quiescent * have a twofold inflection in Kal ; they are par- 
tially inflected like the Kal of VJN partially like its Hiphil, 
after having removed the characteristic syllable of Hiphil 
(H and Jl). Several verbs occur only in this form, others 
possess both forms of VJf and >"J? : as p7 and p7 ♦ 

Note. The fut. of Hiphil can he distinguished from that of 
Kal, by the signification only: as Vy he understands (Kal), DTDD 
he gives them understanding, Job 32, 8 (Hiphil). 

Note II. Not seldom Kal and Hi. agree in sense in these 
verbs ()"]} and *')}) : ^-^ to rejoice, Kal and Hi. y\ to quar- 
rel, Kal and Hi. Q)& to set, put, Kal and Hi. etc. 



100 Part 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 88. 

7 ^£> "mm) 5 n)pn 4 rm> 3 ^30 :nS- 2 nDn inpS % d 

... T . . T . | T t •• •• : * : w " " : r 

in n tPn 1K oW d^^d 10 1n d-»kS 9 ns 8 d& >o :rpr 

.... ... T T T T V T • I | -T 

nniD nnn njn 14 a^b trrirr ♦ajae *6n l3 -ny u* 12 npa 
pN 23 "id> nosra rrirr : 22 iNDD fl pn DWa nirr :>ry ! 

I 'vt - t t : t : t : : ■ I • •• • - -r - t : t ^- 

"Sn iW'aai np&$'hx rjyiK 25 Sba rn^euia D'o# 24 pia 
nirrS 31 Qii : 3o ™i 29 a>?» 28 ^T 27 n$p isp}? 26 Sr 
: »u 84 ooinp np T i T v : 33 bis;' ba oSij^S pnv : 1^ 32 bbinnrn 
Wftl :*J3*?9 "Dps 3S npn : 37 nrr ao 36 jrv-i6 "D'p^a 
Dipan **»kd np?i tfggfa 40 N;ra d*^' j^_ Dip^a apj£ 
trjnS 44 "ih^3 :whd Qip?a aa?*i 43 vn^i? 42 d^i 
:an prrj 47 ^noo ba jw Mfc i^TO b* ♦11^9? 45 Dpjin 
:Vj*i$^8 D*pa pTirt* tugo npn np# ?pi : 49 uurj 4 wa 
: »iBto-*6i d^hv inpa nirr* ^? : oyaTT Sj; D^aaS »♦£ 
rxph) 55 non^D dv 1 ? 54 piD 53 d-id : 52 ^rori Svj; 51 rnKti 
:b§eto D\iSsrt b8 r\^y 57 n^p-Sa-Sy : 56 njw*rin 

to despise 1 (§ 107, 4.) void of 2 (§ 84, 7.) before 3 gray hair 4 to rise up 5 to 
honor 6 the face of 7 to make 8 mouth 9 or 10 deaf 11 open-eyed 12 blind 13 to re- 
turn 14 (§ 107, 4.) to depart 15 his house 16 to tell 17 lies 18 to be firm, estab- 
lished 19 before 20 to establish 21 his throne 22 to found, to lay the foundation 
(of a building) 23 to set up, fix 24 3 bef. inf. const. 25 (§ 106, 2.) to exult, re- 
joice 26 answer 27 soft 28 to turn away 29 wrath 30 to rest 31 to wait 32 to totter, 
to shake 33 to raise 34 vineyards 35 to shout, sing 36 to shout with joy 37 tore- 
move, put away 38 anger, grief 39 to set 40 (prop, to come) stones of 41 to put, 
set, lay 42 r^*Op (from #X"1) place of the head, hence: at his head 43 first 44 
to raise 45 pretend to be rich 46 § 26, 6. pretend to be poor 47 to mark, attend 48 
meditation, prayer 49 to be ashamed, disappointed 50 desire, lust of 51 to kill 52 
horse 53 to be prepared, ready 54 war 55 help, victory 56 deed, act 57 to bring, lead 58 - 

Exercise 89. 

And the Lord spake* to Moses, saying : Send2 men, 
that 3 they may search* the land of Canaan. And the men 



§ 54. Verbs n' ,L >. 101 

went up 5 and earned into the land and searched it. And 
they returned? from searching of the land after 8 forty 9 
days 10 - And they came to Moses and brought back 11 
word 13 to him 12 and said : we came to the land whither 14 
thou sentest us and surely 15 it is very 16 good. Neverthe- 
less 17 the people be strong 18 that dwell 19 in the land. 
And they murmured 20 against 21 Moses and said : Would 
God that 22 we had died 23 in the land of Egypt. And 
wherefore hath the Lord brought 24 us to this land, to 
fall 25 by 26 the sword. And they said one to another 27 , 
Let us make 28 a captain 29 , and let us return into Egypt. 
And David besought 30 God for 31 the child 32 , and he fast- 
ed 33 and went in (pret.) and stayed all night 34 and lay 35 
upon the earth 36 . And the elders 37 of his house arose 38 
(and went) to him 39 , to raise 40 him up from the earth: 
but he would not 41 - And it came to pass 42 on the sev- 
enth 43 clay that 44 the child died. And David saw 45 that 
his servants 46 whispered 47 and he perceived 48 that the 
child 49 was dead. Then 50 he arose from the earth and 
washed 51 and anointed 5 2 (himself^) and came into the house 
of God ; then 50 he returned into his (own) house and (when) 
he asked, they put 53 bread before him and he did eat. 

8 }*prp 7 332/ 6X13 5>S;"1 4 (§ 101, 3. a.) TSjl 31 2 (§ 84, 2) 1 Pi. with Vav Conv. "\21 

16712)12 15DJ1 14^'X 12)P\X 13-DT HHi. y,U/ 10 sing. (§ 92, 3) 9 D^SIK 
t ~:v-: t t • t : - 

21 ^ 20 Ni. j-l 1 — ? 19 partic. with the article (§ 96, 8) 18 (§ 90, 2) fj£ 17 ^ D31>< 

-Stf #"K 26 3 25*733 24 part. Hi. KJ3 23pret. JV!D 22 (g 116, a) would God that: -"i 1 ? 

32*TJ?J 31"UJ3 30 Pi. with Vav Conv. t£/p3 29#&n 28 parag. fut. JHJ 27 (§97, 4) VHX 

38 with Vav Conv. Q-lp 37 "'Jp? 36rUnX 35 pret. 33# 34pret. to stay all night n 1 ? 33 D-ltf 
I -I: • t :- - - t I 

46n3l» 45 XT) 44 Vav Conv. 43^W"3Br 42 , m 41 rDX 40Hi, O-ID 39'Sjf 
tt-: : — ■*• ■ • :- tt I 

.53 Hi. UW 52 Hi. TJD 51 Vrp 50 Vav Conv. 49 Pause ! "VT 48 Hi. j-13 47Hithp. part. ^J-| 7 

§ 54. VERBS H"S . 

1. The third radical of these verbs was originally *,- of 
some few 1, 

2. All forms ending with the third radical, change i into 



102 Part I. Exercises. 

tl' as n^iU for ty (§ 12, 7. a.), excepting the pass. part. 
Kal, wliich is regular *V7jT. 

3. To all those forms ending with a consonantal afform- 
ative, Ql, ft, *fl> U* PO) the original ♦ returns. This \ 
quiesces in the pret. Kal in Chirek: as JT'TJj ^ n tne P ret * 
of the other active conjugations , promiscuously in Tsere 
and Chirek : as JT^i! and TY^h in the pret, of the Passives, 
only in Tsere; as TYj} 5 in the imperative and future in 
Seghol: as H^A /filra . 

tv:' t v •* 

4. In the 3. pers. fern. sing, pret., II is commuted into 
n » in order to avoid the repetition of H : as Hf^ » for 

t : t 

5. Before the vocal afformatives (\ 9 *— ) the Jl drops : as 
Y7h h)fi> for ^f prop, Y% Tl^fl (§ 12, 6. B. 3.). 

6. The H quiesces 

in all the pret. forms in Kamets: as Jl^-J » i"TOJ » H7JI etc. ; 

X .T T T : • »■ T • 

in all the imperat. f. in Tsere: as n?h H^H* *7J etc; 
in all the fut. and part. f. in Seghol : as JlTJN > ni} > 

PT7|»» nS^ etc. 

7. The inf. const, ends in all the conjugations with ffi.: 

as nfrji, niS|n*.ni^| etc. 

8. The apocopated future is formed by throwing off 
the H with the preceding Seghol, whence in Kal and 
Hiphil forms would arise, having three consonants and hut 
one vowel: as 7^, from iT7J?> b}\> from n^Jl* which to 
avoid a helping Seghol is used: as ^y Kal, 7J|* Hi. (formed 
like the Segholates § 66.). With a guttural the helping 
vowel is Patach : as yvf\ let him look, (§ 14, Rising IV.) 
with Pe Guttural, Bflgt and he made, (§ 66, 10.). 

Note I. Sometimes the first syllable is not affected by the 
guttural: as ^PH and it was kindled, 1f"H and he rejoiced, 
JfTl and he encamped. 

Note II. The preformatives of the apocopated Future, forming 
an open syllable sometimes has Tsere : as J^") and we turned ; 
yriil^ and she wandered 



§ 54. Verbs j-j"S» 103 

Note III. The helping vowel can be omitted in case the first 
radical is softer in sound than the second, (a liquid before a mute): 
as gig^l and he took captive, p£^l_ and he gave to drink. 

9. In the verb UN") to see, the apocop. fut. has two 
forms : JO* and with Yav Conv. fc-TVI* 

10. IT!! to be. pret. 2. pers. pi. DJTV7, w . itn 1 : DO*!?!' 
inf. const! nVH » with prefixes fiiTD, hi 717; imp. 1777; 
fut. rtV> fut apocop. *rP. in pause *JT> with Yav Conv. 

11. PITT to live. 2. pers. pi. pret. Kal DJVTT* inf. DiTT, 
imp. n>r?3 with V WlV fut. PIT!** fut. apoc. ft, in pause 
W, Hipiiil pret. n'fjfj', inf. FflTlb ♦ 

12. nntT (original Tlttf) to bow down. Hithp. nVtfiWD, 

fut. ninnt^ , fut. apoc hnw (for inn^) (§ 14. Rising iy.) 

13. The annexing of suffixes, occasions various changes : 
the termination H with the preceding vowel drops before 
the suffix : as *33J£ (from H^JJ) he answered me, ?JV«£ (from 
HV^) he has commanded thee. Piel ^173^' (from H^D), 
for TH3itf> Hiph. ^Jfil ♦ In the third person fern. sing, 
pret., the suffix is attached invariably to the form rp-J : 
as *}rM^J7> he has made me, Piel ^*1D3> (shame) has cov- 
ered me, § 44, 16, ifi73i. ^ snai l consume it, for ^Jln-D ♦ 

Exercise 90. 

3 mT Snon nson-Sjo 2 n^p no** jrra x m^ n,Mra 

v :- tt- : • -I: vv: ., -, x ■ 

7 DH33 6 pyjpfl N7 HMnn : nvpt a6 5 0^3 n*o : ^onyi 
13a ^.". ^"^3 9 nnt?*'i ^nS nnpfcg Sb# i 8 ym 
xb) rrrr 73:5 >p ::>{& pHV W] ^ 'hJp™ WT 
-Si* 12, nnx n niD jSw -to itr*$: coSb* 10 nip r?*o> 
Sv 7 npjM? 16 ^ 15 ' D ^ :n 1 n ^ 14 ^0?n u#B3 : lsL ^fi 
: l9 r?D$S D.^ni nijrS b?y# .th : 18 r?^.^1 *nj?' wrfw 
21 poS ni?. :nnx-oj iS- 20 n^ri-j g m^ssb S>dd jins-Sk 
nia 24 ni^'nS n# 23 pb^? njn ^rrirqS ny mttj 1 ? hjn 



104 Taut 1. Exercises. 

inm^Dwrmwii JDS^'Jb Sty 25 Wn nS nan 1 ? 

:mi ova nirv w> jd*o ^inp^n 29 nb¥-dni ah 
-w : 35 ^"7N 34 iDift2 33 ptr?n jnirr 32 Tnp 31 ^n3W7 
ni^r ^n 1 ? n^iri n0? niD-Sp? : 38 ^ w H)tTrv$ 36 injpn 
bwt» b* : 40 Ttt nir6 nra ovi n&n* 39 >Sw rotyn Sk 
ran :*ygjp 43 hdj? crp^n 42 ni^? 41 ni7^n fl 7jp 
:mDn no njn mp 46 rv:ip no 45 nnon 

to build 1 to buy 2 to make or do much, increase 3 words 4 clouds 5 to be 
weighed 6 for the gold of 7 Ophir 8 to drink 9 death 10 secret of 11 another per- 
son 12 to disclose, reveal 13 to wait 14 to stop 15 his ear 16 the cry of 17 to an- 
swer 18 lame 19 to be equal 20 to break down 21 to weep 22 to laugh 23 to keep 
silence 24 to do 25 a declaration of 26 breath of, mind of 27 enemy 28 thirsty 29 
to give to drink 30 help 31 wait for, hope in 32 to hold fast, adhere to 33 instruc- 
tion, correction 34 to let go 35 to associate 36 possessor, owner, lord 37 anger 
*]& 7JJ| a possessor of anger = an angry man 38 § 89, 4. perhaps 39 enemy 40 
sun-dial (literally : the shadow of the degrees) 41 to turn 42 to stop from, to 
desist 43 help, assistance 44 to want, to be without 45 to possess 46 - 

Exercise 91. 

If ye walk 2 in my statutes 1 ? and keep 4 my commandments 3 
and do 5 them, then 6 I will turn? graciously 17 unto you, 
and -make you fruitful® and multiply 9 you, and establish 1 *) 
my covenant with 11 you. Ye shall not afflict 12 a father- 
less child. If thou afflict 13 him and he cry 1 4 at all is unto 
me, I will surely 16 hear his cry 1 ?- And the Lord spake 
to Joshua, saying: As 1 ® I was with^ Moses, (so) I will 
be with thee: I will not fail 26 thee, nor 2 i forsake thee. 
Only 22 be thou strong 23 and very courageous 24 , that 2 ^ 
thou mayest observe 26 to do according to all the law, 
which Moses, my servant 2 ?, commanded 2 ® thee : turn 2 9 not 
from it fcoSO the right hand 31 or 32 to the left 33 - This 34 
book35 of the law shall not depart 36 out of thy mouth 3 ?, 
but 33 thou shalt meditate 3 ^ therein day and night 46 , that 41 
thou mayest observe 12 to do according to all that is writ- 
ten therein. If thou return to 43 the Almighty 44 ; thou 



§ 55. Verbs Doubly Anomalous. 105 

shalt be built up 45 - From the confined space 46 I called 47 
upon the Lord 48 ; the Lord answered 4 ^ me in tlie large 
spaced. The Lord is on my side 51 : what can (§ 101, III. I.) 
do 5 2 unto me man? (It is) better 53 to trust 54 in^ the 
Lord, than 56 to put confidence 5 * 7 in man. Thou hast 
thrust 58 sore 5 9 at me that 66 I might fall; butei the Lord 
helped me. Be26 not wise 63 in thine (own) eyes. And 
he despised 64 the birthright 65 - My well-beloved 68 hath 67 
a vineyard 66 - And he fenced 6 ^ it and clearedit of stones 70 
and built 71 a tower 72 in the midst of it, and he looked 173 
that 74 it should bring forth 75 grapes 76 ; and it brought 
forth wild grapes 77 - 

Hi. m£3 7m3 6Conv. ) 5 pret. T\WV 4fut. STl'lVD 2 Kal. Art. *Sn I'mpfl 

T T T T T T - : • • ~ T " I '•. 

12 Pi. njV 11 fiN 10 Hi. with Vav Conv. D-lp 9 Hi. with Vav Conv. H3*l 8 with Vav Conv. 
t"t •• I T T 

18"1#X3 171'np^V 16 inf. abs. (§ 105, 1) 15 infin. abs. (§ 105, 1) 14fut. p£Jf 13fut. 
25 infin. with b 24 (fut. A.) |>DX 23(fut. A.) pm 22 pn 21 tfSl 201Ii. H31 19 DJ? 
33Sx'Dt^ 321 31 T^ 30 ace. (§ 85, 4) 291-10 28PL ni2f 27 H3J? 26*1D# 

I • T TT ■ : - ~ T 

4i:rnS 4onS , SiDDr 39 run 38Conv. 1 37tsd 36#?a 35-)sd 34 (§83, 9) 

I*-- : t:tt t tt ' • • v" 

503nnD 49HJV 48 ,T 47with ace, JOp 46Tj?D 45HJ3 44 "^tf 431;* 42fut. 

T :V TT T TIT -" TT 

58Hm 57)-|tD3 56 (§91, 1)D 553 54HDn 53 3113 52 H^ 51 on my side = to me 

TT _ T TT TT 

65 mi'33 64 with Vav Conv. HT3 63 DDfl 62 plTl 61 1 60 with inf. 4 59 inf. abs. (§ 105 1) 

T : TT T T TT 

73Pi. HID 72VUD 71HJ3 70Pi. SpD 69 Pi. DTJ7 68 'TT 67 hath = was to 66D"G 
t|t t: • tt |-t I -t • •: '•".' 

77 □ , iyx3 76 W2iV 75 XUffV 74 with inf. S 
• •.. : • -T-: t "t 

§ 55. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 

Doubly anomalous verbs have two radicals, both sub- 
ject to the anomalies of the different irregular verbs : as 
$&} to bear, carry, belong to J"fi and N"S j"DN to be will- 
ing" to N"£ and JT 1 ? ♦ 

Verbs of the most frequent occurrence of this kind are : 

a. IT'S and N"Q, Hi3N* to bake, fut. Kal T1Q&'* 

b. IT'S and 3"&, HD^ to smite, pret Hi. HDH' part !"!?£> 
fut. HIDS with Vav Conv. 1p_, imp. frail > apocop. ?Jil* 
inf. ttSil, particip. Ho. HDD 5 flD3 to bow, incline, 

14 



106 Part 1. Exercises. 

fut. Kal HEN with Vav Conv. m, fut. Hi. fiftf. with 
Vav Conv. fflY* 

c. ^ff and X>h> tffcty fut, Kal N&>, inf. rW and MN^ » 
imper. N£ # : andVt^* 

♦ t : t 

d. H gX 7 and Vfr, N£ to go out, fut. Kal NJg, imp..Ni, infc 
fWV-, Hi - pret/kyin, fut K*¥l* • 

e. H w ^ and *«£), HI* to throw, Hi. to confess, to give 
thanks. Piel fut. ippj and they cast, (for V\»\ (§12, 
Reject. B. 3.), Hi. fut. rnlS with suff. ^IS/ pret. 

niin.part. niib'2 

/. vy and tf*S Ni3 to come, Kal pret. NJ), TINS, fut. 
NiDN> Hi, to cause to come, lead, bring, pret. N^H* 
fut. ^y i 



Exercise 92. 

"^ 2 n^ri : «S dw d*si? now dw ijritjjQ njm 

PT}V i?"Sj; njrr? n^Ji rrto :d^5 dw. ?jnv D*ribtf d^j; 

M nirr$ 18 nterh np;. 17 wp T 16 prrp nntr : 15f ir^nSn 
^jw'ri tj? 1 ?) 22 D*p:?n 21 n?^ yp^i rpfN 20 arr jds^'p 
: 26 wdj k 1 ? &3#j 25 teSD"*? np'iD nyp 24 yjpjrbfc : orijH 1 ? 
31 Dn-^ : 30 ditv arirj ^rniDi ^rrby* nS vjj^e 27 np?p 
"?|jjrt:M 35 ^r\NV) ***|J!0# unp ?f?fi npn "SjO^i 32 pp; 
- 39 -r;n own rpjn Tpjrvi w niDro ar 37 W jniir yy r 
m s6 >p jdti ^n r\h 4i n$pn jjirrj pj*S "trip w :tj 
^•7^ ninffw : 43 riw rrjilpjj rrjnni >p h^-Sm yv 
rrs^ii ibiftb p^nn im 44 t3yn ink nth 



r 



§ 56, In General. I07 

the end, remoteness ofi to go up 2 the mountain of 3 to teach 4 ways 5 paths' 5 
to go forth 7 the word of 8 to give thanks, to praise9 to fear, be afraid™ to 
bear 1 ! the yoke 12 youth 13 to vex, to be extortionate 14 to oppress^ out of the 
bosom 16 subject of the sentence 17 to pervert 1 ® the ways of 19 to incline 20 the 
words of 21 wise men 22 to set, direct, turn 2 " to withhold 24 to beat 25 to die 2 6 
to cover 27 to prosper 2 ® to confess 29 to obtain mercy™ to incline 31 the right 
hand 32 the left hand 33 (§ 85, 4.) to sit, abide 34 to go out 35 to come 35 to ask, in- 
terrogate 37 the beasts 3 ® to tell 39 to speak 40 to declare 41 the fishes of 42 ($ 81 . 1 .J 43 
j to serve 44 . 

Exercise 93. 

My son, fear* thou the Lord and the king. Jerusalem 
bear 2 thy shamed Peradventure 4 there be 5 fifty right- 
eous within 7 the city: wilt thou also 8 destroy 9 and not 
spare 10 the place for** the fifty righteous that are therein* 2 ? 
Thou shalt not bear a falser reports neither 15 shalt thou 
answer 16 in 17 a quarrel 18 to incline 19 after 20 many to 
wrest 21 (judgment). Trust 22 in the Lord, and He shall 
bring forth 23 thy righteousness 24 as the light. Who 
would not fear 25 Thee, King of nations 26 ? Arise 27 , 
get thee out2S f r0 m this land29 and return 30 to the land 
of thy kindreds 1 - I ( am ) a littless lad 3 2; I know34 not 
(how) to go out 35 or come in 36 - Thou comest to me with 37 
a sword and with a spear 38 , hut 39 I come to thee in the 
name of the Lord of Hosts 40 - This day will the Lord 
deliver 41 thee into 4 2 my hand, and I will smite 43 thee and 
take 44 thine head from thee 4 5, that 46 all the earth may 
know 4 ? that 48 there is 49 a God in Israel. Go and I will 
be with 50 thy mouth, and teach^ 1 thee what thou shalt 
say 52. And 53 Jehu 54 came to Jezreel 55 and Jezebel 56 heard 
(of it): and 53 she put 5 ? paint 58 (on) her eyes and 53 tired 59 
her head and 53 glanced 60 out at 61 the window^- And 
Jehu came in at 63 the gate 64 > and 53 he lifted up 65 his 
face 66 to the window, and said : Who (is) on my side 67 , 
who? And 53 there glanced out on 68 him two 69 (or) three 70 
eunuchs 71 - And he said, Throw 72 her down. So 53 they 
threw her down: and 53 (some) of her blood spirted 73 on 
the wall 74 ? and on the horses: and he trod her under 
foot 75 - 



108 , P^rt 1. Exercises. 

7}1A3 6 D'B/'pn 5 $\ 4 ^tf S^jnSSi 2 Jerusalem fern, (g 57, 5 J) KJjrj 1 XT 
17 1% 16 Hjy 15 and not 14K1# 13 #D# 12 n|"|p3 11 jgoS 10 W) 9H3D 8B|K 
^'lP-IV ^ Hi - P r et. with C. ) , N*r 22p|tt3 21 Hi. 71BJ 20nj-|N 19HCDJ 18 3n 
33jD£ 321j;j| Sl^illSl'D 30 3m 29fem. 28 X]r 27 Dip 26 D'fa 25fut. KV 
42 3 41 Pi. 1JD 40niN32f 391 38 JVjn 37 3 36 inf. N13 35 inf. xr 34fat. JTT 
48 \3 47fut.jrV 461 45S^n 44Hi. pret. with C. lOID 43Hi. pret. with C. 1, HDJ 
55 [§ 19. 6] Sx^P 54X-1iT 53Conv. 1 52 Pi. "131 51 Hi. pret. with C. ), HT 50 D|» 49 {^ 
59 Hi. fut. 3£3' 58 [transl. she made with (3) paint her eyes] rug 57 Hi. fat. Q^jfir 56 S3PX 
67VW 66 0^3 65 fut. X#j 64 Pause ! V^ 63 3 62'p'bn 61^3 60 Hi. fat. *]ptf 
74TJ3 73 fut. with C. 1, HIJ T2BD^ 71 Q^Dnp 70 Ttihti 69 D"Jtf 68 ^X 

.75 fut. with C. 1, D3*l 



CHAPTER X. 

NOUNS. 

§ 56. IN GENERAL. 

FORMATION AND INFLECTION. 

1. The nouns are: a) Primitives, b) Derivatives, The 
more numerous derivatives are for the most part derived 
from verbs; Verbal nouns; as fOnO a gift, from JfO to 
give; rUH knowledge, from JfT to'know. Nouns derived 
from other nouns are called: Denominatives: as Dtrp archer, 
from DUST) bow. 

2. The derivation is effected in the same manner as 
with verbs: 

a. By Vocalization, or the modification of vowels : as ?jSd 
king, from Tjfb to reign. v v 

b. By Reduplication, or the doubling of one radical, gen- 
erally the second, or of two of the radicals: as & D^ 
thief, from MJ to steal, qpSDN rabble, (people gathered 
together from all quarters) ' from CjDN to gather. 

e. By Augmentation, i.e. the prefixing or postfixing of one 
or more of the formative letters VmrNn (nomina he- 



§ 56. In General. lnii 

emantica) : as Dipp place, from Dip to stand, JiOlp 
i eastern, from Dip to be, come before, in front. 

3. a. By Vocalization : 

7£0p> this class contains as many adjectives as substan- 
tives, which, being of the old participial form (cf. act. 
i part, in verbs VJf : Dp = DNp> for D1p)> express either the 
, attribute, or the attribute and subject together : as Dpfl 
wise, or wise man, DHt gold (the glittering, sc. metal). 
Frequently the product or result of an action is signified: 
as 171 child, prop, he that is born, natus; Dpi an object 
seized with rottenness, (from Dpi to rot). 

7&?p> these nouns are intransitive, but when" derived 
from transitive verbs, passive : as 7^ mourning, NOft un- 
clean, ?pf old, 7^5 co °k e d 7 done. 

/)tOp> (partic. of verbs mid. 0) intransitive and passive 
adjectives, a few only in use as substantives : as *7)1,3 great, 
D11D near, Wibtf peace. 

St?ip, htip> (regular act. partic.) (cf. § 35). 

7liOpj (reg. pass, part.) passive and intransitive adjec- 
tives : as tlWO anointed, B^tf strong. 

7*tPp> (Chaldaizing) (pass, part.) 1. passive substantives : 
as 1>p|tf prisoner, captive, from IpK to bind, to fetter, (it 
is distinguished from 7)lDp by being always used as a 
noun, while the latter is a participle only). 2. Names of 
dignity are often thus formed : as 7PD3 a sovereign, ruler, 
Tp3 an officer, 1\JJ) overseer, |*yp a judge, prince. 3. The 
season or time in which the action of the verb is perform- 
ed: as 1'Vp harvest (prop, time of cutting, reaping) C"1f1 
time of plowing. 

7iDp (for 7&Dp> hence the Kamets immutable), 7tOp (for 
7*fcOp> hence the Tsere immutable), 7*t?p> ^1tOp> SltOp 
mostly inf. forms of abstract meaning: DilD a writing, 77* 
a howling, piHV laughter, y)f} a military post, 7^ a 
border. 

Stop, StOp, StOp cf. § 66. 



110 Part I. Exercises. 

3. b. By Reduplication : 

^t3p (Kamets immutable), a) adjectives intensifying the 
sense : C/fl very weak, K|p jealous, b) nouns of habitual 
occupation : f"Qft cook, D|i thief, £HH (for &*T\) smith. 

7t0p' adjectives, denoting a permanent bodily defect: 
^ blind, thx dumb, &ni7 -(for &nft) deaf. 

7l£3p> a small class, adjectives and substantives: T)33 
strong, substantively: a strong one, hero, *")i2£> adj. and 
subst. drunk, intoxicated, a drunkard, *T)£¥ a bird, prop, 
the chirping, twittering, from *l£¥ (Arab.) to twitter, to 
pipe. 

^iCDp* passive and intransitive: 70^ bereaved, p^(l com- 
passionate, rnn (for p^fl) a diligent one. 

7*L?p * adjectives and substantives: p*1l£ righteous, TDtt 
fettered. Instruments of action : 7'&*D an axe, a hoe. 

77t?p > nouns in which the third radical is doubled : 
nrpi3 a young brood, knaves ; J3N^ quit, undisturbed; pJH 
green, fresh. 

h^hfo*) » nouns in w hich the last two radicals are doub- 

J ) l/il" led: D ^^ reddish, ifTlOtf blackish, denot- 

j ^ : -I: ing colors, i. e. an inclination to the color 

specified (English: is%). Many nouns of this class, compensate 
for the reduplication of the radical by doubling or length- 
ening the vowel : D013 star, for D335 ' from DO (Arab.) to 
shine, to glitter ; £°|tpitD > for £"}£D3D a band, a fillet, from 
rp (Arab.) to bind about; 7^D> for W?3* Aram, to con- 
fuse, Hebr, V?3 . 

3. e. By Augmentation : 
N • Prefixed : 

I. D as a preformative occurs frequently, it comes either 
from p , Hp> to give the idea of an objective : wJio, what, 
'somewhat, or it is related by its labial character to the prepo- 
sition 3= in, by, on. Accordingly, nouns of this class de- 
note something, somewhat, 1) in which, 2) By which, 3) at 



§ 56. Is General. Ill 

which, or on which the action expressed by the root is 
performed: 

1) TOP an altar, (from f"Q? to sacrifice) i.e. on which sac- 
rifices are offered ; rtJTlQ pasture, (from fijn to feed) i. e. 
where there is feeding, D")Nft an ambush, (fr. D~IN to 
lurk) where there is lurking ; Dipft place, (fr. Dip to 
stand) where one stands. 

2) nnOO key, (from fljlB to open) an instrument by 
tuJiich one opens a lock; CftJDD a mortar, (fr. £TD to beat 
to pieces, to pound) a vessel for pulverizing. 

3) nipS? booty, (fr. (Ip7 to take) = what is taken; 
TJ/WO a possession, (fr. Fhtff to stretch forth the hand) 
object to which one stretches his hand. 

II. JT» generally abstract substant., hence for the most part 
with f. formation: njpfl the hope, (fr. Hip to hope); rf?$fi 
prayer, (fr. 77£ to pray) TX2WT\ a return, a reply, (fr. 
y\W to return) ; |DT) in;, the south, (fr. p* to be on the 
right hand). 

III. K > is a prepositive, a) usually to give easy pro- 
nunciation, when the first of the two initial consonants is 
a sibilant : bOHK and Sbfi yesterday ; rnj/VN and iTJJ^y 
bracelet: JTl?^ and JHf arm; b) to intensify the action: 
DDK drying up (properly deceiving, lying, from 3*3 to 
lie), *OK bold, daring. (Aktal, the regular Arabic form 
of the comparative and superlative). 

IV. *J often in proper names: as p\l^\ Isaac, Dpi?'. Jacob, 
Some are formed from the future, the 3. p. m. s. having 
been converted into a substantive: as ^HV! 011 ? (properly: 
it shines, gives light, from HH^ to shine, lighten) ; y*y 
adversary, enemy, (prop, he strives, from yr\ Hi. to strive), 
^pV a bag (prop, it gathers, from Dp 7 to gather, to col- 
lect) ; Qlp* an existing, living thing (prop, it is, stands, 
from Dip to be, stand). 



112 Taut 1. Exercises, 

D ♦ Affixed : 

1. The most important is H— (to which JV- or JV- cor- 
responds) : this, besides indicating the fern, gender (§57.) 
is appended : a) to the infinitive, to give it a substantive 
sense: H^puv* the hearing ; njTT knowledge, b) to convey 
an abstract meaning ; n&'M a request, HK^h sin. Fh)$ 
foolishness, n*TIJ^ blindness, firnp (fr. mp to burn) the 
burning or heat of fever. 

2. Dl> D— 3 T\> D— .» J— » (the last not so often, the 
Kamets frequently immutable). These terminations form : 

a. Adjectives: }WH outer, exterior; p")(lN hinder, latter. 

b. Concrete and abstract nouns : |*J3 a building, rdJH 
hunger, scarcity. 

c. Diminutives : Ji^N (from &*W) little man (of the eye), 
pupil ; fh-IV (from ")}¥ or ^NJ¥) neck. 

cZ. D1 occurs many times as an adverbial termination : 
DNil$ suddenly, D1B6# and D^iT the day before 
yesterday. 

e. D— j an old accusative ending, the words that have re- 
tained it, are mostly adverbs : D|!7 in vain, DpH emp- 
tily, vainly, DmTO to-morrow. 

3. *— , this termination forms a) adjectives from nouns : 
\3i5V northern, from ji£¥ the north, T)fir\ lower, from 
rinri the under part, b) Gentile nouns and patronymics : 
,V ?N")£» an Israelite, n.3# a Hebrew, n)H\ a Jew, HVP an 
Egyptian. The feminine is either JT— or fT— J HHVP an 
Egyptian woman, iT^DJ? a Hebrew woman. 

4. JT-7* HI form abstract nouns: iTC^O the beginning, 
HO?.? kingship, rule. 

4* Compound words are for the most part proper nouns : 
as bWSbft (El is King), tffflyg (Ab is King). Com- 
pound appellatives are rare: iT^sDND horrible, frightful 
darkness (the appended pp God, intensifies the idea § 91, d.). 

5. The primitive as well as the derivative nouns are 
inflected, to indicate : 



§ 57. The Gender. 113 

a. the grammatical conditions of gender and number ; 

b. the attributive relations of the noun. These latter are 
twofold : 

1. A noun in the genitive or possessive case follows as 
an attribute, with which the preceding word is joined or 
put in the Const, state (§ 19, 5.): TjSsn *}T\ m the king's 
word. 

2. Suffixes are appended to the noun : H!T1 my word. 

§ 57. THE GENDER. 

1. The genders are two : masculine and feminine ; a neu- 
ter gender in Hebrew is wanting. 

2. The gender can be ascertained: a) from the signifi- 
cation of the noun, b) from its termination. 

3. Masculine by signification: 

a. The names of men and males in general: as DN father, 
Tf?5 king. 

b. The common and proper nouns of nations, rivers, mount- 
ains and months : as DJf people, *)HJ river, "If! mount- 
ain, EHjn month, |J^3 Canaan, VTV_ the Jordan, \}*Q 
Sinai, ?DO Nisan, the first month of the Hebrew year. 

c. The names of seasons : as DOK Spring. 

d. The names of metals : as 3Ht gold ; except npTTJ cop- 
per, and rndj/* lead, which are fern. 

4. Masculine by termination : 

K) The masc. has no characteristic termination, hence 
nouns ending with original radical letters can most fre- 
quently be considered masculine: as "1}5 a garment. 

2) Nouns ending with ft, preceded by Seghol: as iTUS* 
a field. 

X) Most of those nouns ending with *— , Q1 , D — > f— or 
j— : as ^5J? a Hebrew, D1H3 a ransom, *\2X) a sacrifice, 
p£*X the pupil of the eye. 

5. Feminine by signification: 

15 



114 Pakt I. Exercises. 

a. Names of women and females in general: H&'N 'woman, 
JlD^O queen, IT3V a female gazelle. 

b. Common and proper nouns of countries, cities, towns : 
as yy city, pN land, country, *W*N Assyria, D^BTT 
Jerusalem. 

Note. In case the names of countries or cities represent the 
people or nation living in them, they are masculine; as nilH 
(applied to the people) Jews. Compare: 7^ illlfT Isa, 3, 8. and 

itr'ip^ rnw nmn ?b. iu, 2. onin isa T . 19, io. 

:J t: t : t : t • -: • 

c. Names of the members of the body, which are in pairs : 
as "V hand, 7jn foot. 

6. Feminine by termination : 

> 

I. Nouns with the accented final syllable ft—: as HDDn 

wisdom. 

II. Nouns with the unaccented final syllable ft— and 

> > 

after gutturals ft— • as n*lDJ7. crown, flJTTto acquaintance, 

and with the accented ending ft*— , ft), ft—: as HHIlK the 

end, JTD^O kingdom, j^nnD the morrow. 

: - "^ ' tt;t 

7. Many nouns are used in both genders : as ft)1 wind, 
tTN fire, f|TT way. 

Exercise 94. 

38* Wj^! : 4 pip# 3 Dn5K tr>rv) 2 pfe>OT ^nx B>>n 
rnpn? rf^\ :hrnb? qfpns 5 ^? ♦ isft n&? d?1Vo f"j«$ 
rrysr 13^1 : 9 n&v 8 ^v ^3n-n# pavhNpys^hg 
HTVirn^ tip] »nn : 9 l^Rr^1 9 p^p#*rntfi 9 fifJTJ?tf 

v v I v ^- t •• : v • : • t t v > 

jnirr Win; u pT33i 13 mny\ yg& ao :D,nS l2L >ro 
np?nS "piiT b£ : 31*111 15 w ngrrn** 15 m rp_ -in not 
n itotQ »tw phi jrjfm jd man w pnj?9 18 ntoprr 17 fD 
pi j'^nwn-Vts^? 24 f>nm nays tjo^^vM 2 ^ 
qrn 2N 1 ? 29 ^ri jy_ : 28 ^r? nbty ftp] pp^noiph rrin* 



§ 57. The Gender. 11.") 

tnrrf dv? 40 -m:n 39 hddp *rr7jpo hn\ 87 mn 3fl j# 

Aramaea, Syria 1 Damascus 2 Ephraim (the kingdom of Israel) 3 Samaria 4 
a leaf 5 to sprout, blossom 6 with 7 inhabitant of8 n. p. of a city 9 take pos- 
session of™ to dispossess, drive out 11 (§83, 6.) 12 spear 13 javelin 14 *Jfl0' 
(H of Hi. retained) (§ 117) 15 preeminence, excellence 16 more than 17 (§ 91, 2.) 
foilyis (§ 12, 6. B. 3.) 19 Tyre*> fortress 21 (§ 97, 2.) 22 to heap up 23 fine 
gold 24 the mire of 25 street 26 to be high, lofty 27 strength, Vt» niPjJ to do 
valiantly28 (§96, 4) 29 nnp\ const, st. of nnp 1 obedience, respect 3 * mother 3 ! 
to pick out 32 ravens of 33 the valley 34 young eagles 35 tooth, masc. 36 nyi 
(part m. from yjH» with accentless H— ) to be broken, to be rotten 37 (for 
Diypr? § 37, 5 Note I) to be made to waver 38 trust in 39 $ 83, 4.) an 
unfaithful man. 40 

Exercise 95. 

By reason of i (the) cold 2 (the) sluggards will not plow 4 ? 
therefore 5 shall he beg 6 in harvest, and have nothing 7 - 
The ravens 8 Droughts to Elijah 10 hread and flesh in the 
morning, and bread and flesh in the evening. Tyre 11 was 
a mart of 12 nations. Reprobate 13 (§ 90, 2.) silver they call 
them, because the Lord hath rejected 14 them. Their land 1 ** 
is full 15 of silver and gold 17 - The silver and the gold was 
weighed in the house of God by the hand of 18 the priest 1 *' • 
Lo, the winter 2 Q is past 21 ? the rain 22 is over 2 ' 5 (and) gone 24 ; 
the fig tree 25 putteth forth 26 her green 27 figs 27 - When 28 
a wicked 29 man dieth, (his) expectation 31 shall perish-'' : 
and the hope 32 of unjust 33 (men) perisheth. Weeping 36 
may endure 35 for a' night 34 , but 37 joy 39 (corneth) in 38 the 
morning. The realm 41 of Jehoshaphat 42 was quiet 40 , 
and his God gave him rest 43 round about 44 - When 45 , 
pride 46 cometh 4 ^ then 47 cometh shame 48 - The end 49 of 
the wicked shall be cut off 50 - A river went out to water 5 1 
the land. Grihon 5 f compasseth 5 ^ the whole land of Ethi- 
opia 54 - Sinai 55 and Tabor 56 are 5 ? mountains. Siv 58 is 5 ? 
the second 59 month. Hebron 60 is 5 ? the city of graves 6 ! - 
The eye 62 sees 63 , the ear hears. 

7 to have nothing ftf, Pause ! e 1 ?^ 5 Conv 1 itfSf) 3 S^l* 2 fp'n 1 By reason of ft 



UO Part I. Exercises. 

Vhp 1*0*0 13 part. N T i. OXn 12 iriD lin*2f 10.-.n ,l 7X 9 part. Hi. KT3 8 D'^S;' 

20 vno 19 ?ri3 18 T Si* 17 3HT 16 D2HN 15 Ni. fut. with Conv. 1, with ace. (§ 85, 2 a) 
t . I ■• - <- TT t : - 

28 inf. with 3 (§ 106, 2) 27 PPM 26 Bjn 25 mKfi 24 $ 84, 2) ^SH 23 rySn 22 tU&Z 21 13 T» 

T v- ~T T" : l-T l~ T V V ~ T 

3§S 371 36*33 35 vS 34 3 IT ♦ 3 33 £m'X MJlbntTl 3013K 3impfi 29T*Bh 

I . V .T " V V -T Tl. ' T T 

to give rest n=! J Hi. 4ffD£}2h"7T ^lriO^D 40 to be quiet ftp^, with Conv. 1 39rij1 
- t t : : ~ l-T t • 

50 Ni. part, fHJ 49 mnX 48 TlSp .47 Conv. 1 46 JHT 45 part. 443 , 33?0 43withConv 1 
-t •-:- I I.T It • t • 

69^'^ 58 r* 57 F§ 77, 3j 56 inn 55 TO 54^3 53 part. 33D 52 jjJVJj 51 Hi. ppUt* 



§ 58. THE PLURAL AND DUAL. 

1. Masculine nouns form their plural by adding 0* — , 
feminine by adding fVl to tlie singular : as D*D1D > from D^lD 
horse, WW?! from IKD a well. 

Note I. The niasc. plural sometimes is p — : as J*7p *^ 0D ^' 2. 
Prov. 31, 3. Micha 3, 12. More seldom ♦— : as vJEI Cant. S, 2. 
'3D P s - 45, 9, In later Hebrew (Mislina) the ending j* — is the 
common one: as Tllp > pp^DM' ppCD 5 sometimes without the ? : 
as HtDD ' H\J . ^^fl . A few add »— after the Sjriac: Hfc' » 
and thus $-lg Lord (§ 82,. 4. b.). 

2. Nouns ending with *— ,take D only: as DHJJ^from 
HDJ^orthe final ' of the noun is omitted and indicated by 
Dagesli : as D*f?> from n^ . 

3. Nouns ending in H— drop this syllable when form- 
ing the plural: as D\?n> from Hjll (part. act. from H^n 
to encamp.) 

4. Fern, nouns in H— > fi— « HI change these termina- 

T V ^ 

tions into n'V as rHijI law, pi. PHiD; JTVp a crown, 

pi. ninro (§ 72.) nn# a precept, P i. niij;.. 

5. The fem. ending j"V — is to be considered as a- contrac- 
tion from JV~J hence the plural (fl— being changed into 
Hi) m*-: as h»iai! pattern, model, pi. WE©. 

Nouns with two fem. terminations in iT— and }T — .form 
the plural from the latter, thus jTVTinri the lowest parts, 
the depths; HVI^V Hebrew women, I. tV*py and HnDJ\ 



§ 58. PtuKAL and Dual. 117 

Note II. Some nouns form the plural irregularly : as jTD^P 
kingdom, pi. tYPZhOi nfflO and niWp.from tl^O a part, por- 
tion; DinONS for' fliON /from nONa' maid secant, D'nSd , 
for D'Sip/from nSp a lamb, HlkSpiP . for fflSpD. from H^P 
a fold. Such, or similar plural terminations by prefixing S tf or H* 
are very common in the language of the Mishna : as HlHSN » 
fromQK mother; frt*fiiN> from DIN letter; HMEPp, from jjb'p 
sign; riiiOlu* > from ni"l^ back-bone, spine. 

Of. Geiger, Lehrbuch zur Sprache der Mischna. P. 49, 8. 
6. -Nouns used in both genders (§ 57, T.), in the plural 
often terminate both in D* — and JTI : as D^'DJ and niC^'£3J ' 

• t : t : 

7. Nouns (both masc. and fern.) representing objects, con- 
sisting naturally or artificially of two parts or in pairs 
(especially the members of human or animal bodies) term- 
inate in D*— > called the Dual ending: as D^JH feet, DH* 
hands : CTIlp^D ( m -) tongs, snuffers. 

8. In a few instances the dual denotes not a pair, but 
Imply the number two: as D?OV two days. Q7"0C* two 
years. 

Note III. In the dual ending the tone rents on the penult ( — ), 
I the Chirek being only a helping vowel, which drops, when the 
word is lengthened. 

9. Many nouns occur only in the form of a plural : as 
|n3 face, D'T? life, D\Tipi old age. 

10. A considerable number of masc. nouns form their 
plural in fft: as DN father, pi. fVOK; T*1N treasure, pi. 
llTflN I "ISO or nb cistern ; J| roof, TOfO altar ; Di^tl 
dream; pHH vision; ND? seat, throne; tvh tablet; Vj 
night; TiSO light; *)Egp rain; Dlpft place; ^f-O staff, stick; 
J|C*,p habitation ; "U lamp ; "lty skin ; n£J; dust ; DiV a fast, 
fasting; ^1p voice; y\T) encounter, battle; *1£)1C* trumpet, 
curved horn; jll^y a table; D&' name, etc., and vice versa 
many fern, nouns in D'— : as r\TC f year, pi. D\?£\ »1£*N 
woman, pi. D'Ety pK stone, D'Bn; H^3 egg ; ] rhll a 
cake of dried figs ; rnil'l a bee ; fH law ; HlOn wheat ; 
J~OCTr darkness ; H3V dove : fUteb brick or tile : n^.O word: 

t •• -; ' - t t ■■ t • 



118 Part I. Exercises. 

Tlbm ant; y# city, pi. DHJ?; nm»S flax; nij?j? bar] 
nJKil fig-tree etc. 



ey: 



Exercise 96. 

win*! : nn&5 igft* 4 p??VD 3s inis*D D'bro 2 Sp ^tfnbj? 
8 nnrjMniN r nn« ; vyjrnij 6 np3Vp^W"n^ d>$0£ 
kS : 12 oniD*m no? u jniD wi lo Dwng •flriwgi 
on 1 ? D'Mnb kS Dji npri^an onmS nSi 13 fmn D^pS 
17 W9J TO >? l6 ;n 15 D*jrfS kS oai i#y u &yoh tih dji 
oy^pS P^TTS i 19 ptfS t? D»m nib :DSrn^ 18 nnp> 
pons :d*iVd 22 nSrp_ rrifr 21 n3D?->?SNntr> »w&yp$ 
nph 2b Ypnn tvtf?® 1 ? hyyn p d^S 24 |0£i ^dW? 
30 niD^ : »ifn :»iin? Sip? "jfosfr "brritj 26 niSy? 
32 nirp'iN; 32 mw_ 8 W?#b ana rtoV r^prt :*rH*4j3 
37 riSrn :»m»3/© "yyjtf 34 npr m \m : 32 nrai 82 ni\nv 
"hftrqj "iro? 41 n;ip T ? "rxby 39 d*W b jij^ pijitj rijng 
4fi pn^'?i 45 ^p 44 np? DriiJ \n :D?n "rwpi npS : mnicoi 

n. p. 1 light, swift 2 one of 3 roebucks 4 Samson 5 to bore through, put 
out 6 to bring down 7 to Gaza 8 to bind 9 fetters of copper 10 to grind 11 
( £ 107. 8.) captives, prisoners 12 a running, race 13 men of understanding 14 
men of skill 15 favor 1 '' chance 17 to happen 18 tongue 19 tribe of 20 priesthood, 
office of the priest 21 possession, estate of 22 the teeth 23 the smuke 24 de- 
light 25 burnt offering 26 sacrifice 27 hear, obey 28 decay, rottenness'- 29 bone 30 
jealousy, envy 31 gent, noun fern, pi. 32 p. n. of a son of Japhet (Gen. 10, 
2. 4) the founder of the Greeks, Jonians' 3A stand up, arise 34 four 35 king- 
dom 36 to dream 37 seven 38 ears of corn 39 come up 40 stalk, cane 41 full 42 
souls* 3 a drop of 41 a bucket 45 the small dust- 16 a balance 47 to count 48 - 

Exercise '97. 

The Lord heareth 1 the poor 2 - And 3 Absalom 4 pre- 
pared 5 him horses .and men to run 6 before 7 him. There 
is no 8 God, are the thoughts 9 of the wicked. God know- 
eth i" the secrets*] of the heart. Judgments 13 are pre- 



u 



§ 59. The Construct State. 1 1 9 

•pared 12 for scorners, and stripes 14 for the back 15 of fools. 
Audi<> Uzziahi7 built towers in Jerusalem and in the des- 
ert and digged 18 many wells 19 * for he had 2 <> much cattle 21 , 
husbandmen 22 (also) and vine-dressers 23 in the mountains 
and in Oarmel 24 : for he loved husbandry 25 - There are 27 
( six 2 <> (things), which 28 the Eternal hateth 29 : yea 3( >, seven3i 
. (are) an abomination 32 unto Him 33 : lofty 34 eyes, a lying 
1 tongue 35 ; and hands that shed innocent blood 36 , a heart 
( that 28 deviseth 37 thoughts 38 of iniquity, feet that- 8 are 
f swift 39 in running 40 to mischief 41 * a false witness 42 (that) 
' breatheth 43 lies 44 and (he that) soweth 45 discord 46 among 47 
brethren. Many sorrows 48 (shall be) to the wicked. 
( Job 49 was a father to the poor, eyes to the blind 50 and 
f feet to the lame 51 - God (is) father of the orphans 52 and 
judge of the widows. 

fh'sh with suff^ *2£jh Opart, vn Snt^y ADvWdX 3conv.l 2?f3X lpart. 
-t : ••: ■ I t t t : - ' : v 

1 12 Ni. pret. J!|3 11 n£)S,i?.n 10 part. 9 H73TD 8 there is no T'tf, before a noun ptf [§ 108, 1J 

'18^n 17qn*-T» 16couv. 1 15 1J liH^SnO 13 [£33tjf before the pi. ending:] £33$ 
! - t t- \ - t •■-:- t : 

[24^13 23 [the Tsere drops] tD*}3 2213X 21 mpfp 20 to him [was] 19 113 
/'jpnayin 31jJ3tf SOI 29KJ5J/ 28 [§ 96, 4] 27 n.^n 2&&V} 25 HOIK, part, he was loving 

' 37 part. Hf"in 36^-01 35 Ipltf 7J#S 34 Q! 33 [an abomination of his soul] IJJJSJ 
/ -T |-T t Ivt I T : - 

inf. i'r. T'-H 39 IM. part. "IPTO 38 [before the genitive the pretonie Kamets drops] TV2VJrW 
' t t -; — 

44[lp# bef. the pi. ending] lp# 43 Hi. fut. PI-ID 42"1p«rij; 41 H>H | 40 to run, 

'511103 50 1^ 49 3VK 48 31X313 47 P3 46 only in plural • ffiQ 45 Pi. part. nS# 
- .. . ... . . _ I .. I T . _ T 

,[the pretonie Kamets drops] QfjV 

( 

§ 59. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 

, The word standing in the construct state (§ 19, 5.) 

suffers an alteration of its form: 

a. Nouns in 17— change it into il— : as «"OTO camp, 
btfyP. n^nD Israel's camp. 

b. Nouns in '*>— change it into *>— : as Tf living, life, 
fijng *H by the life of Pharaoh ! 

c. Feminine nouns with final rj— change it into D— : as 



120. Part I. Exercises. 

d. The plural and dual terminations D^— and D*~ are 
changed into *— : as ip^D the horses of, *^J?. the eyes of. 
Note I. The vowel changes, which the word in const, state 
undergoes will be shown in the following § §. 

Note IT. In poetry the const st sometimes is found with pa- 
ragogic "«| or »— : as U3 4. Mos. 23, 18, tygg Ps. 114, 8. HDN* 
1. Mos. 49, 11. ni^'2. Mos. 15, 6. ^Dfcf" 5. Mos. 33, 16. 

• t : v • : 

Exercise 98. 

:Tn*t3 QiNrr 3 njn ran : 2 pin ^si^ed W H^h 

J V T T TT T - T T - | V T " I. • » T | V V 

wnrnN U! m^K i3 iDng> 12 fi^p Sm? ; parrot u n^ 
W9E> : ngT; d:db> nirn 16 oV??« d^h ^jr 1 ?? : 15 Si^rr 
Dytya n^r nr\\r\r) pxn ♦3tp , > Sb ^rani D^j>rrr dm 
pari 20 d^ t 19 T?N"Si; n ^ ^"*3 : 18 dpto** w| djo : 
24 o'trjMi fljo? D'piD 23 ntne? : 22 nnN ^ v |^' 21 7§pp 
27 ♦px piv 'Jtxo : 26 n,pin £j£ non^D izftKS 26 ptfn? j? 
minto mrr "ran* : ddS irrr piv 29 rm pi¥ 28 n£w p-ra ; 

... T . J .. . .. T . . .. -. - v _ . f. J -.- T T ~ T T 

: d wSid t 

hedge, fence 1 (a species of) thorn 2 wickedness 3 p. n. m. 4 to carry captive 5 
the force 6 engraver, artificer 7 smith 8 to remain 9 save 10 poverty, hence the 
poorest sort 11 p. n. 12 to kill, (animals) to slay (persons) 13 Elijah 1 * Baal, the \ 
tutelary god of thp Phenicians 15 idols 16 to give ear, to listen 17 fathers 18 my 
land 19 mighty 20 number 21 lion 22 the appearance 23 horseman, rider 24 to run 25 
a wall, rampart 26 stone, weight 27 an Ephah, (a corn measure) 28 a Hin, (a 
liquid measure) 29 the fear 30 to imagine 31 to counsel 32 to morrow 33 the camp 34 - 

Exercise 99. 

The wisdom 1 of a man maket'h his faces to shine 2 - The 
Lord smote 4 the first-born 5 of Egypt. The inhabitants 6 



§ 60. Inflection of Masculine Nouns. 121 

of Jebus 7 said io David, Thou slialt not come lathers. 
Nevertheless 9 David took™ the castle 11 of Zioni2, which is 
the city of David. The Lord is far 1 * (§ 70, 3. a.) from 
the wicked: but 2 ? Hehearethis the prayer*-* of the righteous. 
All Israel saw that the wisdom of God was in 1 ^ Solo- 
mon, to do judgment 1 ?. The queen 1 ^ of JSheba 19 heard 
(of) the fame 29 of Solomon and she came to prove 21 him 
with hard 22 questions 22 - Of the Lord (are) the goings 2 * of 
man 2 ^. Man's 25 are the projects 2 ^ of the heart, but 2 ? from 
the Lord (comes) the answer 2 ^ to the tongue's (request) 
(transl.) : the answer of the tongue. Abel 29 was a keeper* 9 
I of sheep* 1 and Cain* 2 was a tiller** of the ground**. And 
I the man Moses was very great in the land of Egypt, in 
the eyes of Pharaoh, and in the eyes of the people. 

9Conv. 1 8 rm 7D^T 6 3#* 5*1133 4 Hi. H3J 3 D'J3 2*1*1** Hi. fut. 17103*1 
. T- : •• : TT -t T: T 

• lsnaSn n^ato i6 3ip3 15 fut. unban 13 pirn 12 n'** umyrj 1013b 

t : - t ; • vl v : t • : I t I t \ : - t 

i 271 26T1J70 25D1K 1 ? 24 "13J 23 *1l»2f D 22nTn 21 HDJ l 5 i. 20 r^ 10 NS'^ 
't-:- tt : w t : • r • " - ■■ t : 

f »( T ) drops . 34 nrrw «n:jp 32 \\P 31 j&& sonjn 29*7351 »np^n 

§ 60. RULES FOR THE INFLECTION OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 

1. The formation of the Feminine, Plural, Dual, Con- 
struct state, and the connection of the noun with suffixes, in 
addition to the changes mentioned in the preceding para- 

( graphs, cause considerable vowel changes. 

2. These changes are principally effected by the tone, 
which moves forward one or more syllables, producing 
greater or less modifications in the form of the word. 

3. Generally the two last vowels only of the word are 
changed by the inflection, the third from the end being 
very seldom affected. 

4. The penultimate vowel, being mutable, may be re- 
jected, 'the ultimate either rejected or shortened. 

■ 5. Two grades occur in the change of vowels, which 
are represented by the two forms of the construct state: 
the const, state in the singular : *"D ta I and the construct st. 

16 



122 Part 1. Exercises. 

in the plural: H^H . The comparison of these two forms 
shows : 

a. In the construct st. sing, the vowel in penult is re- 
jected and that of the ultimate is retained, hut short- 
ened: nnVfr. n:n. 

- : t t 

b. In the construct st. plur. both vowels of the penult as 
well as of the ultimate are rejected: ^"ID*!* properly it 
is Hyt' the Chirek under "1 being only a helping vowel. 

6. In the vowel changes therefore are distinguished two 
classes: a lower grade, corresponding to the const, state 
sing., and a higher grade, corresponding to the const, state 
plural. 

7. The following forms are inflected according to the 
lower grade: the singular forms with suffixes, the femi- 
nine form, the plural in the absolute state, and the plural 
forms with light suffixes. According to the higher grade: 
the plural forms with the grave suffixes: as D3IT> const, st* 
sing. D5D* const, st. pi. *5?D (prop, ^pfl), fern. JlDDH , 
pi. D*DDf7> with light suff. sing, and plur. *DDH > -'MIT 
with grave suff. pi. Dp*Djn. 

Note I. For Segholate forms, (which are not included in the 
above rules) see § Gb\ 

Note II. Feminine nouns having no distinctive feminine termi- 
nation : as 1N3 a well, are -inflected like the masculine, except- 
ing that they regularly form their plural in J"V), winch form re- 
mains unchanged before suffixes and in the construct state. 

§ 61. DECLENSION OF MASCULINE NOUNS, 

1. With reference to the vowel changes exhibited in the 
foregoing paragraph, the nouns are classed as follows: 
Class I. Nouns with immutable vowels. 
Class II. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the ultimate.. 
Class III. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the penult. 
Class IV. Nouns with mutable vmvels in both syllables : 

the ultimate and penult. 
Class V. The Segholate forms. 



§ 1)2. First Declension. 123 

2. This division is observed in the Paradigms. For the 
sake of brevity we will use the terms : first, second, third, 
fourth and fifth declensions . 

§ 62. FIRST DECLENSION. 

1. To this belong all nouns, of which the vowels are 
immutable, (§14, 1.) : as TJ? city, Vip voice, $u) gar- 
ment, *)13^ hero, rvn&^'D destroyer, 

2. Some difficulty arises with Kamets and Tsere, as these 
vowels are sometimes mutable and sometimes immutable. 
In forms similar to Dp and 1JJ, Kamets and Tsere are im- 
mutable, being derived from Op and "YU and standing for 
DNp T > TJ (§ 3, 6. Note 4.). In forms like b®p„> *?pp»the 
Kamets is immutable, standing for 7Nt3p_> ^NfcDp (§56, 3.a.b.): 
!3^ thief, rDtD executioner, DHD writing. To the form 

♦t- T 7 ,. t: .. 

7iDp belong ^13 rider, for fi^*l3» C^ft engraver, artificer, 

for cnn . 

T ~ 

Exercise 100. 

:T]jn. ?]nx 7 D>S:ra nnnrjNa n^g/rno 6 f3 5 nnp 4 diS 
-Sn : 12 niinpn n i^3S 10 a^h5n 9 h]i : avp*? 8 npK 
SrirSj? rvbj; aq *g ionian- "ipSsrVjJi o^pn i3 .nD»* 
;dW> dW nirr? 17 niSp^ Sk ♦? rniaa "rp 1 ??! 15 -niB> 
: 18 m#N!9 D1*K nnrprn* 18B, p? nin* rrjniN^ Djtt ^Sm 
•vy j^mqv nirr -v?n Trrn- 19 ON 19 o tod tih) St?? kS 
22 ninp-^ :innS 21 n^p pa n#*t k^n rain pj n$n9 

ona :pNn-7?-^ 29 n^'mniDh l ?i Spo 28 TO#V) 27 nipD 
$nj 8 nwi mrv r\m »a i-mir ^nsS wroa 



124 Part 1. Exercises. 

beginning- 1 small 2 to increase 3 contention, quarrel 4 hastily 5 for fear that 8 to 
put to shame 7 to harness 8 to go up 9 (§ 80. 5.) 10 to put on* 1 coats ofmail^ 
to flee 13 escape 14 a spoiler 15 to conquer 16 the recompense 17 (§ 91, 2.) 18 
(g 118) 19 the hosts 20 control 21 near 2 2 (§ 96, 3.) 23 turn back, return 24 to be 
high 25 (§ 96, 4.) to give, to make? 6 fortification, hence : a fortified city 27 
(§ 83, 6.) a column 28 copper 29 to give light, illuminate 30 - 

Exercise 101. 

Hear counsel, and receive* instruction 2 ? thats thou may- 
est 4 be wise in thy (latter) end. And5 David ran, and 
stood upon 6 the Philistine* and slew himS and cut off9 
his head. And when 16 the Philistines saw their cham- 
pion 1 ! was dead, they fled 12 - And David took 13 the head 
of the Philistine and brought*-* it to Jerusalem. And 
Hainan took the apparel 15 of the king and the horse of 
the king and arrayed* 6 Mordecai*^ and brought him on 
horseback* 8 through *9 the street 2 ^ of the city, and pro- 
claimed 2 * before him, Thus 22 shall it be done unto the 
man whom the king delighteth to honor 23 - Her lamp 24 
goeth not out 25 by 26 night. And 5 Delilah 2 * said to 
Samson 2 s, Tell 29 me, I pray thee, wherein 3 o thy great 
strength (lieth), and wherewith 3 * thou mightest be bound 32 
to afflict thee? Then 5 Samuel 33 took a vial 34 of oil 35 * 
and poured 36 it upon his head, and kissed 3 * him, and 
said, Is it not because 38 the Lord hath anointed 39 thee to 
(be) captain 46 over His inheritance 41 ? And 5 the king of 
Babylon 43 slew42 a n the princes 44 of Judah 45 in Kiblah 46 - 

8?f. n-ID 1?fttih& $ Sx 5Conv. 1 4fut. [§ 101, III. a)] 3 J^nS 2 *1D J ,D lK-Sflp 

14 Hi. Nl'3 KJnpS 12 D=I3 11 transl : tbat 03) their chanifljion *113J lOConv. 1 9fH3 

21 JOp 20 3im 19 3 18 to bring on horseback 33ri Hi. l/^TID lb* Hi. KQ 1 ? Uf^h 

r| 



Tl T 



transi. in whoso honor the king is delighting, delighting in 3 ]'3n , honor '^p' , 22H33 

: I ■• t It: tt 

29 Hi. parag. imp. (§34, 4. §104, 1) "]}) 28 Tli#DI# 27nS , S'1 263 25P133 24 1 J 23 (g 96, 2) 

I : • t ■ : tt 

37ptfj 36 (§ 51, 1. a) pT 35 JDK' 34 p BsSlfflDtf 32Ni.fut.1DN 31 HM 30n:33 

«rn«r 44 wi'w piur. ity 43^33 tzvsnv) 4iir\Sn: 4otjj 39ntfn 38-3 

T : -T - vt -t t-:- -t "T 

. nnhO"! here with par. H, vHz^ 
t t : ■ . ■ T : • 

§ 63. SECOND DECLENSION. 
J. Under this are included all nouns having a mutable 



§ 03. Second Declension. 125 

vowel in the final syllable ; they are either monosyllabic, 
or their preceding vowels are immutable. 

Ad J. (in the Paradigm.) Monosyllabic words with a 
mutable A sound (Kamets or Patach). 

a. Nouns with Kamets: as M roof, T hand (TV> D3"V)> 
01 blood (D3OT) . 

■r v : 

b. Nouns with Kamets, doubling the final consonant, when 
the word is lengthened at the end: as D* sea, pi. D^» 
JDt time, DJpf. The Ka^mets is shortened (§ 14, 
Short, c). T 

c. Nouns with Patach: "1£>\ dual DHC breasts, *"D son, 
H3 my son. 

d. Nouns with Patach, which double the final radical 
(derivates from l?"Jf) • as "\tl mountain, (with article 

inn) piur. Dnn(for ann),oy_ people, pi. bw? ti 

living, pi. fiwpr, nt? chief, prince, pi. DH8P (for DHC?) . 

u4c? II. Polysyllabic nouns with final Kamets or Patach : 
as DiDt^P judgment, yyO star. Several nouns double the 
last radical: a) D*7IK vestibule, porch, D'p^liK; fpiN a 
wheel, D^§iiX; Tj^'nO darkness, dark place, &3VftyQl ypS$ 
gift, D^riX> pNt^ adj. quiet, subst. wantonness, pride, 
fP338#S ]ffi& a T liiy, DW"i£>. b) JHiD threshing-sledge, 
fe^lO.Sj 1 ?! wheel, D%&4'« 

^4c£ iU. Monosyllabic nouns with mutable Tsere. Chirek 
in ^DV? is the helping vowel. Other nouns of this kind, 
drop the Tsere only in the construct state plural, hence 
also with the grave plur. suffixes: as W tree, *■¥]£> ^IVJ?.' 
IBSfl?.' Iffi; '¥#' D3'X#' 13 ^ck, n^ ^ JH knowledge, 
'JH, jn companion, friend, >JH, ^JH« 

^4c? 7 J 7 . 1) Several nouns of this class in the const, 
st. have final Patach: as "liDDO lamentation, "IDDp; PO? 
altar, TO??; yT\D couching place, ifi?j® tithe.' 2) Be- 
fore the suffixes T\, D3 > J3 some of these take Seghol : as 
DsSpjJ your staff; DDHgliO your sign, wonder. 3) Some 
nouns retain the Tsere in the plural absolute: as vh$ 



12G Part I. Exercises, 

descendant of the third generation, &%T)$ . 4) Several 
double the last consonant: as JD3D palm-branch, D'JD^D; 
*?.?*"!3 well cultivated plain-orchard. i??"Q . 

Ad V. Nouns with Cholem, changing it into Kubbuts 
before the doubled final radical : as D'TD an axe, DVpTlp ; 
DtO^n sacred writer, person skilled in hieroglyphics D'£iD~)n; 
33*13 margin, border, D*3313; p3J) hight, summit, D*1D1; 
To these also belong the derived nouns in >— , which often 
double the*, when the word islengthened: as H33 a strange]', 
rijTDJi HVT! a Jew, D^VP and DHfflT. 

^tc? FJ. Participles Kal, Piel and Hithpael, with the 
exception of H"7 ♦ Observe here that the forms with the suf- 
fixes T\, D3 > (3 are fourfold : 1) ^/bp » in Pause H^bp ♦ 
2) With Ayin guttural SpiJN . 3) With Lamed guttural 
Tpb& • 4 ) ?p?K (on account of the ») , 

^4d KZ7. Participles and other derivatives from verbs 
H" 1 ?* which terminate in H— •' as HiSn seer, JlVp end, 
change J7— in H— in the const, state and drop il— en- 
tirely before any of the afformatives : as HK1: const, state 
H50, with suff. *jn.plnr. D'iO> with local n— : as HBD 
downwards, from tM$D> H^D upwards, from flSj® . 

In a few instances the original termination * — (§ 13, 7. a.) 
is restored. Thus with suff. ^'ME (sing.) thy covering 
(as from >p3p); ^3QO (sing.) Is'. 30, 23 ; Tj»K>? (sing.) 
(erroneously taken for the plural). Ca. 2, 14. VWjf bis 
Creator Ps. 149, 2. 



V 



Exercise 102. 

apj£ ^13 sjfcty Prin; noa-ris :nirr Tpgrn f©B£tf? 
: nnfir*S ^?:r'3 wij5 ^n^ *3 KTfrSa b?oi?» Tpvi 
-S3 no^p ^noSs :*Mteg 1 n#'y$ ^ nftfa >S rrtpf 
g ^d^tSn m^3v 4 nw ♦jna 3 ^ip >3 v^-Sn* tDrsSiy 



§ 63. SieoxD Declension. 127 

Virrta : 7 vriK-n& #*n ^jj 6 Dwni -iprri yozy ask 
nj5! nsS dW*? ^jS"pn-dk 10 ituh&d 9 0*3^3 ^ § *JS}m 
"UP nriN rrirr :npg ninpB^B : 12 ^wi£9 "TO^p 
l7 ^Tfttpi le T3& 15 nnn? >S i4 SingS 13 nfpa roan >S 

-pin -ri*o DnirDtrb-Sj; jn »W©i 18 pN->xrr nn jnnefef 

lv : t : : • - T .. _. I .. T .. . T . . 

25 nWp,p hi3tf T? tT'K ffl TfiS *^"}P^ "lp# H.3H feTj 

"?prr.»3&lN3 nnvo ?]Wpo* 27 D>m. n3R : 26 S;g T3 
ph# fro "fwyi trjsr^nsDfi d^T 29 D8#3 SD10 KitfoS 

supply: my desire 1 kingdom 2 to wait on 3 (§ 18. Note) 4 to He ashamed 5 
compassion, pityS (§ 97, 4,) 7 to strike 8 to become a surety, to pledge 9 debt 10 
couch, bed 11 (§ 75, 7.) 12 lamentation 13 dance 14 to loosen, untie 15 sackcloth 16 
to gird 17 (2 85, 1. b.) iniquity 18 in the power of 19 HID with suff.2o (g 66, 14.) , 
to be or become little, few 21 to envy 22 a torch 23 intoxicated, drunk 24 do- 
minion, rule 25 wicked, foolish 26 friend 27 to help, assist 28 without 2 9 to go out, 
be extinguished 30 - 

Exercise 103. 

And 1 the scribes 2 of the king were called at 3 that time-*, 
and it was written according to all that Mordecai com- 
manded to the Jews and to the rulers 5 of the provinces 6 - 
Receive? my instruction, the fathers' instruction, our in- 
struction. The angel 9 of the Lord encampeth 8 round about 
the just and delivereth 10 them. And 1 the Philistines 
gathered 11 their camps together 11 to fights with 13 Israel. 
The Lord thy God walketh 1 -* in the midst of thy camp, 
to deliver 15 thee and to give up 16 thine enemies 17 before 
thee; therefore 1 shall 18 thy camp be 18 holy 19 - And 1 Jethro20, 
the priest of Midian 21 > Moses' father-in-law 2 2, heard (of) all 
that Grod had done for 23 Moses, and for Israel, his people, 
and he said: I, thy father-in-law, am come 2 ^ to thee. 
Blessed 23 (be) the Lord, my strength 26 - which teacheth 27 
my hands to war 28 - My refuge 29 , my deliverer 30 and (He) 



128 Part 1. Exercises. 

in whom 31 I trusty who subdueth33 my people under 
me 34. The Lord is thy keeper^ : the Lord is thy shade36. 
The Lord upholdeth 3 ? all that fall^s. My son meddle 3 ** 
not with rebels 40 - Whoso mocketh4i the poor reproach- 
eth 42 his Maker 43 - He that trusteth 44 in his ' (own) heart 45 
is a fool. Deceit (is) in the heart of them that imagine 4 ^ 
evil: but to the counselors 47 of peace (is) joy. 

Vivhv 8part. rU!"l 7 FID 1 ? 6 njHD &*\& 4 fern, m? 3 2 2 ^£3*D • IConv. ) 
It : - tt l-T t • : 

17 yx i6jnj 15 Hi. Sj? : 14 mt. part. -jbn 13 2 12 m. nrh n yap iopi. ySn 

261^' 25 part. Kal. "pa 24 part. 23 S 22 jn'n 21 £*}? 20J1JV ftltftlp 18 ^H 

3113 30Pi. part. laSi) 29 (doubles the last cons.) aitfD 28a*^p 27 Pi. part (6 96, 8) 1ft 1 ? 
- t t : • t I : 

(doubles the last Stf 35 part. 1D# 34 (§ 75, 7) Tinfl 33 part. (§ 96, 8) TP 32 pret. HOT! 
- t t : - tt 

41 with S, pa". JJ»S 4"7W 39 Hit. 31JJ 38 part (§ 96, 8; 37 part. i|QD 36 cons.) 

45 [doubles the last cons.] ^S 44 with 2, part. nft3 43 part. TW$ 42 Pi. pret. epn 

t T 

.47 part, VJT 46 part, Jjnn 

§ 64. THIRD DECLENSION. 

1. This declension comprises all nouns with an immuta- 
ble vowel in the final syllable and mutable Kamets or 
Tsere in the penult: as ^H^ great; pDN faithfulness, truth; 
VTO\ remembrance. 

2. The Kamets or Tsere of the penult is dropped in the 
const, state and invariably when the word is lengthened. 
In forms like fTD^Dagesh of the middle radical is like- 
wise dropped : as p*"D? . Words as ])1~\$ ruler, leader, 
with suff. 1iin$ (Chirek helping vowel) ; p3]H famine, 
with suff. pajn, for pajTl (§ 14, Rising I. b. B.). ' 

3. Some nouns of the form p^3f' when inflected, take 
Seghol instead of Chirek. Thus p*Jfl vision, const, state 
JVtll> plur. ntJl'tfTs p"lt## a tenth part (dry measure), plur. 

4. A few nouns of this class retain the Kamets : as &*v£* 
a measure, (prob. the third part ofanEphah), and a peculiar 
class of soldiers. t1J?D refuge, fortress *•?#£ 5 pft shield ^JlDJ 
J£QE> week PI. D'JDt? and HIJO^. const, st^nty?^'. 



§ 64. Third Declension. 129 

5. In this class are comprehended several nouns, which. 
double the last radical: as DHJ^ naked, D*2?1#; bV)ft net- 
tle, D^in , 

6. In several nouns of the form Dipft place, especially 
those derived from verbs V'J/ , i is changed into ) : as DUD 
flight, with suff. »pMD> ITttO rest, pi. DTrtiO; [tyD habita- 
tion, pi. D^?i ItiD fear/pl. DHMD; 11¥0 fortress, with 
suff. TpWJi pinD sweetness, pi. DOTlD. 

Exercise 104. 

DDnnS mono ^319 ^i^' 1 ? 1*q ; 2 D^i£)? ^p) rr\rv t 
niJOV rrl?v trnp ^np j^'inp :fotefc^ Sto dSi tftp^ 
WVpnr xz : 6 DSir 5 p?r pny!? : 4 ffl:o parrS:) 3 xht? 
vtdd-Sd rtirrn# nn^t MD5p 10 CD^r 9 n»i 8 pSp x 
nrvrr sniii? l4 p¥i m ts6# 12 f5** tnirp ijp n ow* 
16 nnon d^hSk id? :dw533 hmw D^n Santas "V 1 ? 1 ? 
p 19 mp-jp 18 rrrft rnsv? nji 17 ipp D'jSp I3?i nni 
:pxn"^3 ?p# ^ihn-i? wjha mrr :iDip®p iij &$ 
24 'fw'M 23 V^k : rh? run* hiit 22 \rt w" 1 ?? 21 nV? pg 

•• : - • t -: I : t : t • • ^ •• t --•:•: 

:rM 81 jvtn3 30 -iin mwvo' kVi 28 w 27 Dibn3 m&h 

t : t I :. v : - \: t : ■ : I t - : - t t 

p»"iD»'rttn? Jp5*ij^8 ™<T m a^np? 9 viw Dur'np 
35 igtyn pS 34 » V?n nS : 33 nn oSiy toi&n -S3 82 n\} W"Sy_ 

to raisel to bend, bow down 2 the fullness of 3 glory, majesty* (supply : is 
= His majesty fills the whole earth) remembrance 5 (g 83, 6) 6 wantonness 7 
ignominy 8 with 9 lowly™ faithful" weight* 2 perfect 13 delight, acceptance** 
proverb 15 to conceal 16 to search out* 7 to wander 18 nest 19 mighty 2 *) word 21 
behold 22 to touch 23 the anointed (applied to priests, kings,) 2 * old, aged man 25 
healing 26 a dream 2 ? to fly away, vanish 28 (§ 76, 2. c.) 29 Hi. to chase awayso 
vision 31 foundation, basis 32 Tg perpetuity, eternity, IJ^J. D^i r = eternity 
and eternity =* forever and ever 33 , avaricious, hard hearted 3 * riches 35 but 36 - 

17 



130 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 105. 

Our Redeemer* » the Lord of Hosts (is) His name, the 
Holy One of Israel. The multitude 2 of all the nations 3 
that fight 4 against 5 Israel and that distress 6 them shall 
be as a dream of a night vision? (of the vision of night). 
The uprights shall inherits (what is) good, A son 10 hon- 
orethn (his) father, and a servant his piaster 12 : if then 13 
I (he) a father, where 14 (is) mine honoris? and if I (he) 
a master 16 ; where is my fear 1 ?? saith the Lord of Hosts 
unto you, O 18 priests, that despise 19 my name. As 20 a 
dew 21 upon the grass (is) the favor 22 of a king. God still- 
eth 23 the noise 24 of the seas 25 * the noise of their waves 26 
and the tumult' 2 ? of the people 28 - The Lord r eigne th.29, 
clouds 30 and darknesssi (are) round about Him 32 : right- 
eousness and judgment (are) the habitation 33 of His throne 34 - 
He that walketh 35 uprightly 36 and worketh 3 ? righteous- 
ness 38 ) and speaketh 39 truth in his heart 40 - He (that) 
backbiteth 41 not with 42 his tongue, nor doeth evil to his 
fellow 43 ? nor taketh up 45 a reproach 44 against his neigh- 
bor 46 ; He that doeth 4 ? these (things) shall never 49 totter 48 - 
God stands 50 at 51 the right hand of the poor. 

SD'DD nftfl 6 Hi. part. With S,p« 5Sj? 4 part, (g 96, 8) K32f 3Ttf 2 T1DH lS*0 

• T I T I - TT I T 

16 (§82, 4 b.) D'JIIN 151133 14JTK 13 DK) 12]1"TX llfut. (§ 101, 1, c.) 10 j3 9 Sm 

24n'K# 23 Hi. part. n3^ 22 Jfrl 2lSt3 203 19 part. HT3 18 (§ 80, 5) 17&11D 

It -t I t - TT T 

plur., doubles QxS 27 j ID PI 26 (doubles the last cons.) Sj 25 (doubles the last cons.) & 

29 pret. Pause ! Tja 28 [strong shortening of the vowel § 14, II. Shortening c)] the last cons. — 

SBD'DFl 35 part. Kal 341X03 33J13D 32 with plur. suff. y2$ 31 S^IV 30 sing. 
• t : • I t • t v t -: 

44 H3in 43 rn 42 Sv 41 pret. Sjl 4033"? 39 part. Kal. 131 38 pl^ 37 part. b»3 
t :v ■%...•*"- _ T T .. | .... <_ T 

.51 S oOfut. 49 dSi'I?S 48 Ni. fut £31D 47 part, in const, state 46 311 p 45pret K&'J 
t " : It t t 

§ 65. FOURTH DECLENSION. 

1. To this belong nouns of two syllables either with 
mutable Kamets in both, or with Kamets in the second 
and Tsere in the first, or with Kamets in the first and 
Tsere in the last: as "CTJ word, *2±) heart, Jpf old. 



• • 



§ &9. Fourth Declension. 131 

2. Vowel changes in this declension ; 

a. Kamets or Tsere in the first syllable always drop : 

• t : • t : • I ••: 

b. Kamets and Tsere in the last syllable, are changed in 
the const, state sing, and before the suffixes D3> |p in 
sing, into Patach: as nyj, ]ph &b» QT\T\ ?Q22pt . 

D ??5 7 • 

c. In the plural and before the light suffixes sing, and pi. 
final Kamets and Tsere are retained: as DH3*"T> D*Jpt> 

d. In the const, state plur. and before the grave suffixes 
plur. final Kamets and Tsere drop: as Hyf» DDOpt; 
but >Dpli, Hj£g>> njg, the helping vowel is Patach on 
account of the guttural. 

3 In £"pD wing, Djf tail, J77V rib, the helping vowel in 
the t plural is Patach instead of Chirek: as *i?35> fVLlJN 

4. In a few nouns of the form 7iDp and 7£0p . > the 
Segholate form (§ 66.) is used in the const, st. and before 
suffixes: as Wtf smoke, const, state W]^ and KJty; fpjf 
branch, with sufT. DD5^' J^V r i D ? const, st. J^jf and 
ySj? , with suffixes 'J^f ^ 

5. Some nouns of the form 7£0p take the Segholate form 
in the const, st. e. g, fjHS shoulder, const, st. f|rD; "I'll 
wall, const, st. "His TH* hip, const, st. TV; 7M robbery, 
const, st. 7JA ; TpN long, const, st. TpiK; "Dij heavy, once 
const, st. 153 5 7*IJ? uncircumcised, const, st. ^*)J^ and Vl#. 

6. Some nouns of the form 7DP retain Tsere in the plur. 
const, st. e. g. j$J sleeping, const. ^U?U blX mourning, 
*S?N; pO^ joyful, T TOt^ (but also *|TD#) ItptP forgetful, 
TTS^i f§n delighting, ^§q. 

Exercise 106. 

*rnr :ooinS oriS frji nw :r\m rrinj ^-m ^ih 



132 Part I. Exercises. 

rn^nK 7 pin Stdh : 6 K*nB DS 5 Dntra w n frwW^oaS 
- 10 \K3p on 9 nynK .•van* 1 ? rnrr 8 tid :inp2rret 7Dki 

•• - I : •• w t t : - t - • t : t : v ■• . : 

M^gjj i2 rjr *& dx D^n n DTOra D'ODn naff) pN 
•ong 15 y^p3 id**! Dttjr*6 og i4 d^5^" :d?hS ^p_? 
19 2?#na d?x? "jvppfr n 1 ?? 17 P? n ^! 16 n3>vS pa tj^q 
D'DDPrnN riVn :m^ D^pr M nn :riSo ^otd wm 
: 22 D^p5 i? n^n p>xn 2l :nrr?j; ng" nyr :tz&rr 

sniDDi 28 pn^ 27 D^n^p 26 Snp? : D^^'i^oiSf pKniiw 

:n3? d^ID 

the summit 1 to break forth 2 wing 3 lightning 4 flesh, bod}' 5 quietness, soft- 
ness 6 to fold 7 counsel 8 four 9 little 10 (§ 83, 7.) Pual : to be made wise, hence: 
exceeding wise 11 strong 12 to prepare 13 the coney 14 rock 15 locust (# 82, l.) 16 
division 17 (by bands) a spider 18 to catch 19 (§ 76, 2. d.) ornament 20 circle 21 
locust (a peculiar species, small and edible) 22 upright one 23 conjointly 24 
worthlessness, lowness 25 (§ 89, 4.) an assembly 26 to rejoice, to play, dance 
(Pi.) 27 to laugh, rejoice, dance 28 a circle, an assembly 29 - 

Exercise 107. 

The Word of our God shall standi forever. And2 the 
Lord had rained down 3 manna 4 upon the Israelites to eat, 
and had given them (of) the corn 3 of heaven. The Lord 
is far from the wicked. Two 6 (things) have I required 7 
of Thee 8 > deny 9 me 10 (them) not before 11 I die 12 ! Kemove 
far 15 from me vanity 13 and lies (transl. the word of lie)* 4 : 
give me not poverty 16 nor 17 riches 18 - Lest I be full 19 , 
and deny (Thee) 20 , and say, Who is the Lord? or lest I 
be poor 21 ' and steal 22 * and take 23 the name of my God (in 
vain). Fear the Lord, (ye) his saints 24 : for there is no 23 
want 26 to them that fear 27 Him. If ye hearken 28 to 
these judgments and keep 29 and do 29 them, the Lord thy 
God shall keep 2 *) unto thee His covenant. And He will 
love 29 thee and bless 29 thee and multiply 29 thee: he will 
bless 29 thy corn, thy wine 30 , thine oil 31 ; thy flocks 32 and 
thy herds 33 - Speak ye to 34 the heart of Jerusalem, and 



§ 66, Fifth Declension. 133 

call unto 35 her, that her warfare 36 is accomplished 3 ?, that 
her iniquity 39 is pardoned 3 ^ for she hath received 40 of 
the hand of the Lord, double 4 * for 42 all her sins 43 - 

transi. from 9 y ja 8 }ilND lhiK& SWIM? 5 pr| 4 |D 3 Hi. "U3Q 2 C.I 1 D'p 

19 fut. rrnty maty 171 i6#&n ism. r>m uaia 13*0$ i2fut. 11 dibs 10 me 

' -t v^ •• I - t tt :t :".• 

25 ?\S 4 there is no : 24#np 23pret. frfln 22pret. 3JJ 21 Ni. fut. #T 20 Pi. pret. BTO 

I .. | T - T - T - T 

31 iny 30 #JYfl 29 pret. with C. 1 28 with ace. JJDKT 27 to his fearers = NV 26niDnD 
(generally masc. JOtf 35 with pi. suff. ^K 34 *7 y 33 (§ 82, 1.) 1p3 32 (§ 82, 1.) |X2f 

TT ~ ITT I 

41 D ,l 7£)3 40JlpS 39 (gen. masc., here fem.) Y)y 38 Ni. pret. nX"! 37 J^D 36 here fem.) 

.43n"nK'Dn 423 



§ 66. FIFTH DECLENSION. 

1. In this are embraced the large class of nouns called 
Segholates, which had originally three consonants, with 
but one vowel, following the first one. In order to 
make them dissyllabic, a helping vowel has been added, 
regularly Seghol, hence the term : Segholate forms. The 
original vowel was : short a, i, or (—,—,—)'■ as Tht2 > 
h$b» PHR' -^y tne addition of the helping Seghol under 
the second consonant, the short vowel being now in an 
open syllable is lengthened. The Chirek becomes Tsere, 
the Kamets-Chatuph, Cholem., the Patach, however, ir- 
regularly changes into Seghol, in pause only does it 
lengthen regularly into Kamets ; thus the original TOD > 
N9P»#lj2 become TjSb, in pause TjS.b * "toD> ^iB. 

2. The second vowel being only a helping vowel, all 
words of this declension are Milel. 

3. On the lengthening of the word the original form is 
resumed: as ^Sp* 1160. ^IR* 

Note I. Hence He local (§ 19, 6.) appended to a Segholate, 

> 
requires the original form : as H^lK *° the l an d (*/*1N •> orig. 



134 Part I. Exercises. 

pK); r?ri?| to the house Cft??* °rig. H'?) . When the 
original vowel in the segholate form is o, j"| — is accented: as 

t~-: t v: 

4. In the const, state sing, the forms TI^D* "liJP* ^'"Ip 
remain unaltered. 

Note II. y*"\\ seed, *)"]!! an apartment, room, ^HD g am > profit, 
J7r0j| plantation, plant, 7jn a breath, a vain thing, in const, st. : 

IHp TIQ. TIP- pbj, Sprr* 

5. A kindred form of this class, embraces all those 
words of three consonants with but one vowel after the 
second one : as £>31 honey ; "D3 an( i "Q3 nian ; DDSP 
shoulder ; 1$h moisture ; iH ink ; DjN marsh, marshy 
place, and the infinitives of Kal, of the form 7DD > /Dp . 
They agree with the Segholates in inflection: as *t?3"T» 

f). From this form (5. vowel under the second consonant) 
are taken the plural absolute and the plural forms with 
light suffixes: as DttSb. D*tflD* O'BHp'-^D* *nn£D. 

• t : ' • t : . • t|t: - t : I, vt.: 

7. From the regular (THD etc -) are formed the plural con- 
struct state and the plural with grave suffixes : as ^10 > 

n§p-i ^ip T , bra 1 ??* I3H5P' I0^1p T * 

Note III. When the final radical is one of the n53*l,!Q> 
the aspirated pronunciation of the plural absolute is retained in 
the const, st. and before the grave suffixes; as *D*7P > DfTp^O* 
but in sing, vjlpg, O^D. 

8. In the form of two Seghols, as ^frft* the first gene- 
rally stands for the original Patach ('TPb) . But a consid- 
erable number had Chirek originally: as 1& garment, 
n^3 trust, confidence, THp knee, Dg'il rain, hbt remem- 
brance etc., with suffixes: ^IJQ' HDJ ♦ 

9. In the forms with two Seghols (Tj^D) and Tsere with 
Seghol ("ls3p) > some (most of which are Pe gutt.) have 
Seghol as the original short vowel: as ""DN pinion, with. 



§ 66. Fifth Declension. 135 

suff 1159, r^n fat, p^n part, ypn delight, Sag calf, nry 

help, T]*!]/ valuation, ijj before, over against, (i*"UjD Gen. 
2, 18, 20. as over against him, i. e. the counterpart of him) 
nb># ten etc. 

10. When the third radical is a guttural, the helping 
vowel under the second radical is Patach : as yw seed 
yy?\ salvation, PP^ way. When the second radical is a 
guttural, both vowels of the forms ^tDp and Sftp are Patach: 
as 1J73 boy, lad, ")J^ wood, forest. 

12. The form ^fcj'p has in a few instances Kubbuts in 

the inflection before suffixes : as 7pD thicket, ODD 5 7"TJJ 

greatness, iSn-J (also iS"!|) 5 ytip handful, fi&pp , 

12. The form ^jjp with- middle letter guttural takes 
Kamets before the suffixes TT> DID' p : as ^IIN thy tent 

Pfr$M th ? deecl > work ( Inf * with su ^- § 45 )- " 

13. The form 7Dp vocalizes the plural absolute: 

1) D7IJ5 actions, DHS3 cypress-flowers, D'TO") spears. 

2) with Pe gutt.: DHipJ? gazelles, illrHK ways, but also 
without guttural: D^'lpH (thus always with the article). 

3) The two nouns &H&* root, and BHp holiness, have 
|pBh T fc> and tfBHfJ . The noun SilN tent, has pi. D'SiiN , 
whence V^ritf. SP^N* but also »SnK. M'ShN; mk 

t x I v t •• t: t v •• t: T 

way, makes VfifrW' DfilTlK . 

14. With \y and v y the segholate form is only distin- 
guishable in the sing, absolute. With 1 the form blDT) 

[lengthens the Patach before 1 into Kamets: as j"pp death, 
before * the Patach remains unchanged: as jT| olive. In 
all the other forms the "\ and ' lose their consonantal power 
and are contracted with the preceding vowel into a diph- 
thong: a + 1 = 1 ; a + » - — (§ 12, 7. b. 2.) ; hence nib, 
TTJ; p.ij adversity, with suff. *3iN.5 ?pfl midst, const. 7p£l> 
with suff. *5iri5n^5 house, const. JT3' Wltn su ^"- T^5» 

15. I. The JSegholates of the verb r\"b > exhibit the 



136 Part I. Exercises. 

three original forms as follows: H5 fruit, (H?)»'*VD half, 
(?yrj)j vp sickness, (\Jtl)> hence H3 in pause H3> suff. 

>ns; *tfj, nttTN suff. wytJ, ^n in pause >Sn, suff. »Sn. 

II. From such nouns of H"7> the third radical of which 
was originally 1 , arise 1W'* from Tig'* ^flJl* 1PQ from 
in/1-, TQ (§12, 7, b. 3.) 

Exercise 108. 

4 pirn vyjg? s rjr ^-rjnT^a : a njb I'ftQ p'jrw w'k 
6 Vin# W3 p*nfn n>ni j 6 *^^ irw ni,T trrttT mnn 

t | "• : J • ■ tt : •• • t ".: v t : t : 

«3W3 : 9 Si^S ^hSjri iny:? Jfi* fins ng>$$ d^ 7 ^-^ 
1tT!p3 Sn ttr? j^p 10 S,3^ TO*^d t^jt^ bv? 
toi : 12 dentin 9dS tru rrirr : n iSnj :ro nnnSSn 

• t t : t v I •• t : : \ : : - 

ni?T *tf» d^ii •'^pnr^ in? Ip33 : 17 rrDnfja 16 v^k 
21 p^?np nM iiTta^ rm d^n *ror ? lg i^fl vjrrj 18Tin 
125 Niitr 1P3# ip^n : 23 yt2yz'by_ ""fcnis hgh. inirrSj? 
cnx nb 11371 nyii itfjy *W npio **rnB> tortiq 
: 29 v^5 ™*y$h nan *tb :»njra 26 p> niiri 1371 *a#ft! 
D^n kS D»j?Bh.pa maty? n^jrn^^iriMng nap* ohrj 
:?]pSn np? nip 1*711 Sn :?p$* ob?< 32 D^iS& tt5 ?3D3i 
33 rf i£ l7"ji Wgo S? Sj; rrjn; vpm jg SbS tjm? #9$! 
date's ^ntrp rona niM nw :pan hkSd iidih DWn 

: • t I t t -: - v t - r ~ I v t t t:t :-: • - t - 

-nx ufw jiirtMj J 36 nraiiW #k >§t?h ^nwi rnRjp 

:iS wq* ris narjso ing pn-Sa 

the path 1 brightness, splendor 2 pure 3 to weigh 4 shield 5 to plant 6 rill 7 
fruit 8 to wither 9 intelligence 10 greatness 11 food 12 wickedness 13 possessor, 
person given or addicted to a thing 14 the wall 15 stone 16 to break, pull 
down 17 (g 93, 7.) magnificence 18 the deed 19 sacrifice (g 83, 4..)20 to flatter 21 



§ 66. Fifth Declension, 137 

[I to spread 22 step, footstep 23 to seek early, diligently 24 (g 93, 3. = seeks early 
it, the correction) to devise 25 to direct, prepare 26 step 27 poor, afflicted 28 
fr. 'JJP affliction, misery 29 wisdom 30 company 31 scorner, scoffer 32 to testify, 
bear witness 33 hard, vehement 34 flame, burning 35 the flame of Jah, i. e. 

kindled by God 36 - 

I 

Exercise 109. 

Bless tlie Lord my soul 1 ? and my innermost 2 (bless) 
His holy 3 name. I will lift up 4 mine- eyes to the hills 5 ; 
from whence 6 cometh my help 7 - My help (cometh) from 8 
the Lord, who made 9 heaven and earth. He will not 
f suffer 10 thy footia to totter U- The earth is full 14 of the 
| goodness 13 of the Lord. Say not, I will do so 16 to him 
as 15 he has clone to me: I will render 17 to the man ac- 
cording to his work 18 - And 19 Hiram 20 sent to Solomon, 
! saying, I have heard what 21 thou sentest to me for 21 : 
t(and) I 22 will do all thy desire 23 concerning 24 cedar-trees 
(trees of cedars) 25 ; and concerning fir 26 -trees. My servants 
shall bring 27 (them) down 27 from Lebanon 28 unto 29 the 
!sea, and thou 30 shalt do my desire in 31 giving bread for 
, my household (bread of my house). Saul 32 and Jona- 
than 33 ; lovely 34 and pleasant 35 in their lives, also 36 in 
their death were not parted 37 ; they were swifter 40 than 38 
I eagles 39 ; they were stronger 42 than lions 41 - Arise, walk 
through 43 the land in 44 the length 45 of it and in the 
breadth 46 of it; for I will give it unto thee. My flesh 48 
and my heart 49 faileth 47 , (but) God (is) the strength 50 of 
my heart, and my portion 51 for ever. I 

5 (with the art. nHH 5 in plur. § 17, 1) 171 4 Kfrj 3 (§ » 3 , 6 - b.) 2 plur. 3*"!p 1 fern. #£)J 

V TT TT VlV 

12(aubst. with art.) DID nSjH 10|f)J 9 = the maker of (part. >1&J?) 8 D^D 7-^ 6£KO 
20QTn WConv. 1 18^3 17 Hi. 3^ W |3 l&IBfNS 14 (§ 85, 2.) *6n WIDri 

Bffl.1T 261^113 25 PX 243 23V£)n 22 [§ 93,- Note] ^N 21 [§ 111, 2.) 1#K flK 
33?n:r SS^Kl^ 3 1 with inf. h 30 [§ 93, Note] nJJK 29 [§ 19, 6.] 28[§ 80, 3.J pjjS 
391$ J 38 ,§ 91, 1. 2.] 37 Ni. "P3 361 35 with art. D^J 34 Part. Ni. with art. 3HN 

46 3rjn 45 ^k ah 433 42 cnaa-naj pi-1 *o| 41 pi, ni,nx 4o P ret. SSj? 

. 5irpn 501^ 49 33S 481^ 47-nS3 

18 



138 Paiit I. Exercises. 

§ 67. THE FORMATION OF FEMININES. 

1. The feminine termination Jl— is appended to the 
masc. noui-r, affecting it in the same manner as the light 
suffixes. L DID, fern. fiD^lD; NtfiO. HK^iO; II. Decl. 

T T T T 

nptofem. rnjrtos mfc, nrn : K; rtfrtfem. run* in. Deci. 
Sru, ii^iii 5 D*pp ; rib^o; iv. Deci. mix npjqs pN 
mpr. v. Deci. ^p, n^D; d 1 ?^, nnbyj S#;, nS:iy.; 

t : t • - t •• 

2. The toneless fern, ending fi— .modifies a) the ante- 
penult like Jl—: as rn"U wall, from T^U; b) the penult 
like the Seghol in Tlbb? for Tj^p> viz. by the Seghol of 
il— the preceding vowel, with a few exceptions, be- 
comes like it in sound: Patach and Kamets become 
Seghol: as JTfg, fifinS; i"H^K.' HT^; Tsere becomes 
Seghol: Yl|V WT^i Chirek 0-j becomes Seghol: iftjb 

When jl— is appended to the nouns in ^— and 1 (Deriva- 
tives from f]' ,L })» i-et and u-et are contracted into JV— and 

rn . *h#> nog> (for nptth, dmv (for np#)-. 

§ 68. DECLENSION OF FEMININES. 

In inflection feminine nouns undergo less change than, 
masculine ones, and are classed as follows : 

Class I. Nouns with immutable vowels before the fem- 
inine termination Jl— : as il7l' s T| > H/tOp > npfl statute, law. 

Class II. Nouns with mutable Kamets or Tsere before 
the fern, termination 17— : as ny# counsel, j"Dl?ifl abomi- 
nation, HD"J¥ righteousness. 

Class III. Nouns derived from the seghol ate form of 
the masculine: as HD^D^ from T|7p; HIJ/J a young wo- 
man, from ^Jtt-s HlpK word, saying, from 7pN; npflTf 
strength, from p?H ♦ 

Class IV. Nouns properly Segholates, terminating in 



§ 69. First Declension of Fem. Nouns. 1H9 

Pt7T ( witn gutturals D— — ) ft—— > J>r ~ : a « FHJM mis- 
tress; figW wife: rOfD coat. 

§ 69. FIRST DECLENSION. 

In this declension the ending only undergoes changes 
in the const, st. : H— is commuted into fl— •" as Hptl const. 

st. npji* 

Before light suffixes the Patach of j"|— being in an open 

syllable becomes Kamets : as TlDID > but DDflDID . The 

plural JTlDID remains unchanged in all forms. 
> 
He local (p|_) changes the fem. termination Jl— into 

> T > T 

D— : as nn^D. from J~TO n. p. (bitter fountain). 
Exercise 110. 

n^'K : rrjrr rurv n;?;>n 2 nSnn :^S ^lo^gn jrp niir 

NT 5 fOD? ^W^ :r n n ? nn ~ 1n: ? 4 CD*3 l ?nn tp.T**9W 
9 1N!HD own 8 rofpo :m& rnS t&d 7 tw» 6 insna 

• T • " t - ■ I : ■ - I t • : • x t \ •• 

*h$ 18 ^ : 12 inano n nnprpK) 8 Qni^-bj? 10 iri£nprvi 
[^ Hirr? ninin ohm ;>njw> ^99 >#&} ".rwpri d^Sn 
pm&n in ^ sti^d *yn& urmn :ni£D ^'^ 15 Wi 

, ■ : t t I v : • • : : ~ v t • ■ : - 

QVrrbs 20 ^pH¥ 19 n^rrri w' 1 ? : injw'ra irb>n mira Sun 
win nisi n^nmpnp^'^r^ 22 v5ni?^ : 21 ^oSrui 
^vjin 24 ^S :^*T 23 noT 1n ^l? : ftint^W f%3& p^*W 
26 npn px rnrr oSiy TiS# :»$3 VOMJ ^ 25 y0& 

: imanb 

t : • 

secret 1 the beginning 2 perfect 3 (§ 83, 7:) (§ 96, 8.) 4 bridegroom 5 bridal- 
chamber 6 to rejoice 7 the end, extremity 8 a going out, a rising 9 circuit 10 to 
hide, conceali 1 the heat 12 only 13 silent resignation 14 (i. e. perfectly resigned) 
to deliver, rescue 15 path 16 far off, remote 17 near 18 to utter 19 righteousness 20 
praise 21 his mouth 22 push, thrust down 23 unless 24 delight 25 searching, 
^j?n r£i ^ unsearchable 26 . (§108, 1.)* 



140 Part I. Exercises, 



Exercise 111. 



My soul, waits thou only 1 upon2 God ; for my hope 4 
(is) from Him. He only (is) my rock 5 and my salva- 
vationS: He (is) my defence 1 ?. I shall not totter 8 - As 9 
the man (is), (so is) his mights • Thou shatterest the 
ships 11 of Tarshish with 12 an east 14 wind 13 - According 
to Thy name God, so (is) Thy praise 15 unto 1 ^ the ends 1 7 
of the earth. The fear is of the Lord (is) clean 19 ; endur- 
ing20 forever. My son 21 > walk 22 not thou in the way of 
wicked; refrain 23 thy foot from their path 24 - And Ke- 
chab 25 and Baanali 2 ^ came into 21 ? the midst 28 of the house, 
and the king lay 29 on 39 his bed 31 in his bed-chamber 33 , 
(in the chamber of h. b.) and they smote him, and slew 34 
him. Behold, we (were) binding 35 sheaves 36 in the field, 
and, lo, my sheaf arose, and also 3 ? stood upright 38 ; and 
behold, your sheaves surrounded 39 ; and prostrated them- 
selves 49 to my sheaf. Go and cry 41 unto the gods, which 
ye have chosen; let them save 42 you 43 in the time 44 of 
your distress 45 - And ye have this day scorned 4 ^ your 
God, who himself 4,7 saved 48 you out of all your evils 49 
and your troubles 50 - 

8Ni. £31D 7 [doubles the last cons.] yWft 6^^ 5 ""UUf 4mpjl 3 Qftl 2 1 ) 1 }K 

T : ■ *t: 1 1 : • - t I - 

isnxv i7ivp i6 by i5nbnn mdhd 13 nn 123. nn'jx lorrum 93 

t : • v I v r- t • : -It - t • t: t : 

27 -»£ 26njy3 25 '^1 24 HTnj 23^JD 22 Kal 21 12 20 [part.] *\Qp 19 IIPID 

35 Pi. thx 34Hi. rWB 33 33^3 32 Tin 31HBD 30 Stf 29 part. ^3^ 28 inn 

T : • VV T • * - T 'VT 

40Hith. withC.% nn# 39 fut. 330 38 Ni. Pause! ^j 37 DJ 36[plur. D" 1 — and j-\fl, nsStf 
48 part, 47 J^M 46QKD 45 m¥ 44 PH/ 43 dative 42 Hi. fut. j;#"» 41 py? 

.5orm 49 run 

TT TT 

§ 70. SECOND DECLENSION. 

1. The words of this declension drop the Kamets and 
Tsere in the inflection, excepting in the plural absolute: 
as nwf year, rytT, *ny& , but nUtf, 

2. When Rh'va precedes the termination H > J7 

X T T T - 

(as in paradigm) a helping vowel is used: as ]"lp"TV> for 

np/tf from nfrjy* 



§ 70. Second Declension of Fem. Nouns. 141 

3. In the following words Kamets and Tsere are 
I immutable, hence all these words belong to the first 

declension: tlV/y (the feminine of *7J9p § 62, 2.) dry land; 
, rO#n (for tiyyfy) darkness ; H^3 request ; HVW re- 
f proach; HtZHS (for nttfH|3) exposition; ITlDtN memorial; 
, n?^n deliverance; niDH a knowing; pn¥ (fr* TlV* Kamets 
i to comp. the Dagesh), J1JH evil, (fr. ^JD) 5 n"D pure, (fr. 
. VO)i ity rumination, (TU); H>NtD curse, (TttO; iTjJP 
] a saw, (fr, YU); JYjr strange, (fr. Yf); p|02l bight; PHR 

witness ; fiN^p full ; ilKpp unclean ; TCVZH something 
| lost; thtt robbery; rTON darkness; PD13 P oo1 j ^?^ 

something stolen ; H Yip gall ; f?|fjk> burning ; PUNf) hg ; 

fDfiPTD overthrow: fifiJD plague etc. 

4. Several nouns take in the const, st. and before suff. 
the Segholate form D— — or f\- — : as 

HdSdD kingdom, const. mSDO, with suff. 'fO^DO 

ntiBft? family, * nn^'p. » *firw'p 

H^nSo work, » HDnSo. 



j-ddid chariot, » nnriD* " imsnD 

t t : v 7 v v : ■ : - : v 

nWoD government, n flS^'OP > " ifi*?$PP 

nonSo war, ii * n tohSd 

t t : • • : - : • 

il~)X$r\ ornament, n iYl&^fi > " ifHK&fl 

ftPD? cattle, with suff. ^fiprG* ttflpn?; STlBK. crown, 
const. mfati', HY!1!1 mistress, const. JYD-1; rDM 1 ? flame, 

v v j - : t • : y -.• v : t t v 

const, ron 1 ?* 

Exercise 112. 

nirra : 5 rnft 4 onrt on.^ ronrn : 3 -tiy n 2 njtf 2 prjgnnp 
:pny ni$?? KX3 n 8 ^'plo DW$^ ##e? : pHV B*H? 
h^?l ni.n? 8 &rf? nm^S? :dhk 7 nipny wn; pnv 
^mrrSs 13 b>£n dik 12 no^ niir ni : u pao 10 ndBtio 

•• ; - T •• . T t - : • t : " I • ■• t : 

Iny? 17 o?<Sp^Spnpn :n^- 16 mr^? niir 15 n3rin :jm 



142 Part 1. Exercises, 

: 23 fin 22 nnrrp 2l tixh 20 D5^ ^""rrrjrr o^ 18 to 
:DnS- 28 y^ 25r inp-TK liy : 26 inpro ^B^pn? 24 #T 

ZDipp >np n?^n ivy ♦no-nit :d»o 82 niNyin u?d 
D?0O!T 34 p3H tDKp 33 niDi^tD^pni^'^p :^rafo 
niatfro mri : 38 pp b>w? 37 ^I'Drip 5 ) 36 ^>n 35 ^np? N51 

sweet 1 sleep 2 laborer 3 to be exalted 4 a city 5 snare, gin 6 . righteous acts 7 
to search 8 form, imagination 9 thought 10 to understand 11 the breath, spirit 12 
to search 13 chamber, inward part 14 abomination 15 high, proud (§ 83, 7.) 16 
messenger 17 the multitude 18 the honor 19 the want 20 people 21 destruction, 
ruin 22 prince 23 to know, regard 24 the life 25 beast 26 ground 27 to be satisfied 28 
throughout all ages (§ 91, 3. b.) 29 above, more than all 30 a watching, guard- 
ing 31 issue, result 32 slumber 33 folding 34 one that travels 35 poverty 36 want 37 
a man of a shield = armed with a shield 38 to stand 39 * 

Exercise 113. 

The Lord will render 1 to every 2 man 2 his righteousness 3 
and his faithfulness 4 - The lips 5 of a fool enter 6 into 7 con- 
tention 8 - How 9 shall we sing 10 the Lord's song 11 in a 
strange 13 land 12 (in the land of a. si § 83' 6. b.). My 
sighs 15 (are) many 14 - And 16 if 16 there be (fut.) in a man 
a sin 17 (deserving) the judgment of death, and he be put 18 
to death 18 , and thou hang 19 him on 20 a tree; his body 22 
shall not remain 21 all night 21 upon the tree, for he that 
is hanged 24 is a curse 23 of God, that 25 thou defile 26 not 
the land, which the Lord thy God giveth thee rtbr) an 
inheritance 27 - And he said, Thy brother came with 28 
subtlety 29 and hath taken^o thy blessing 31 - Whoso stop- 
peth 32 his ear at^ 3 the cry 34 of (the) poor, he also shall 
cry 35 (himself) but 36 shall not be answered. Jealousy 37 
(is) the rage 38 of a man 39 ; therefore 40 he will not spare 41 
in the day of vengeance 42 - The sacrifice of* wicked ones 
(is) an abomination to the Lord: butse the prayer of up- 
right ones (is) His delight 43 - My rigteousness I hold 












§ 71. Third Declension of Fem. Nouns. 143 

fast44, and will not let it go*5 all*^ the while46 m y breath^ 
(is) in me. 

10Hi.1«£r 9!J\X 8 2n T2 6fut. Kfa 5H3^ 4H^DN 3np"l¥ 2^N» 1 Hi. ^# 
I •• t t t v: I tt : 

18Hophal pret. niD 17KBn 16 Ol 15nt"OK 14 pret. 331 13 *"DJ 12n^N 11 Vtf 
... . ; T T _. _ T T .. t t": 

26 Pi. KDD 251 24 part. pass. 23 nSSp 22nS^J 21 Hi. n 1 ? 20 ^V 19 pret. nSfi 

t t ! : t - : I - T T 

34n£]n 33n 32 pan. desk 3ina^3 3oconv. 1, np 1 ? 29nnnn 28a 27nSnj 

43M"V1 42tZJDJ 41 L 7Dn 40) 39*1^ 36 rWH 37 n*Op 36 1 35f»Op 
It |tt - t vv t •• t :| • t|t 

.47nDBTJ 46ni»-S3 45 Hi. H£H 44 Hi. pret. with a, pTFl 

T T : T T T I 

§ 71. THIRD DECLENSION. 
The nouns of this class, having already been changed 
in form by the addition of the feminine ending, remain 
unaltered, with the exception of the pliiral absolute, 
which is formed like that of the masculine Segholates in 
— — • as Dl^^p queens, from fD^p > like D'?*?P> from THD 
king, but const, st. Di^hfo, and so with suffixes TVD/O ♦ 

Exercise 114. 

r^S Dsrrox ^3 izbyrfibi n^n p*n? jrb many wp 
7 H^/ 6 ^#3 n n V ^|P? rrnntp rrhoat nirr 5 rrhpK 

hirjra 14 cd^j;^3 t.nin; ^? 13 nran^ : l2 p#:p rnrtp 
17 mm dwi d*d 16 iW':n "Tro-^ :vn Sanfe* ^wm 

vv • - x : •- "t:|t : -t ,t ■• X : • ) V • : 

anr\ 22 o?m 21 Hptr'i : pan ifi£ ^V'? i9 75i 18 pn 
inns njfA now ion nwnirnjrSs jockos ffl nwi 

• : " : : v v: V v t : : t t • t : : t : 

ftijn|rn 25 ib*id' onnrr : ^naS rnn> ^ninna : 24 vnnjfi 
CD'iJDn kS wW nnm pto' kS rrnKD nom rweflOfl 

t • : • : t ) • : - : t v : 

t : \ : 

reins, kidneys 1 (§ 94, 2,) 2 to exult 3 right things 4 the saying 5 furnace 6 
(§ 83, 10.) 7 to refine 8 seven-fold (§ 92, 4.) 9 to comfortio ruinll Eden 12 the 
plain 13 a fox 14 to measure 15 the palm of his hand 16 the span 17 to mete out 18 
to comprehend 19 a measure (prob. a third part of an Ephah) 20 to weigh 2 ! 
the scales 22 the hill 23 testimony 24 to give way, to depart 25 - 



144 Part 1. Exercises. 

Exercise 115. 
The land of Canaan (is) a land of mountains and val- 
leys 1 ) (and) drinketh 4 water of 2 the rain 3 of heaven. And 
the inhabitants of Gibeon 5 took worn? shoes 6 upon their feet 
and worn outer 8 garments 8 upon them. My beloved 16 is like^ 
to a gazelle 11 ; behold, he 12 cometh leaping 13 over 14 the 
mountains, bounding 15 over the hills 16 - Ye, mountains of 
Israel, ye shall shoot forth 18 your branches 1 ^ and bear20 
your fruits for 21 my people of Israel. For, behold, I 2 2 
(am) for 23 you, and 24 I will turn 25 ' unto you, and 24 the cities 26 
shall be inhabited 2 ^ and the ruins 28 shall be built, and 24 I 
will settle 2 ^ you after 36 your former 31 state 31 - Thou hast 
said in thy heart I will go up 33 into 32 the heaven ; I will 
sit upon the mount of appointment 34 , in the two sides 35 
(the remotest parts) of the north 36 , yet 3 ? thou shalt be 
brought down 39 to the grave 38 , ' to the two sides of the pit. 
They went up the ascent 40 to the city and found damsels 41 , 
going out to draw water. 
snraSfr 7 nSa fem. nSa efem. by: s.ryna *rw 3-)ttD ih lrwpa 

t : - t t v t — I : • t t t t x I : • 

17 sing. snjj 16n^3J 15 Pi. f£)p 14^ 13 Pi. J^ 12 HI H\DS 10 1)1 9part. HE"! 

27Ni.3#' 1 26Qni; 25HJ3 24Conv. ) 23 Sx 22 (§ 75, 3.) 21 ^ 20 tf!#J 19 n3 18 JfU 

- T • T TT V TT'il-T 

nsv 34it;id 33nSt; 32 (§85, 4) apiur. nmp 303 29 Hi. 3^ asnain 

t : - *•• t-t t :|- -T T :t 

.4imi?J 40 c. st. (g 83, 4) nS#a 39Ho.it 38 SfKt^ 37 ^ 36 j \9R 35 Dual. est. 

§ 72. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
1. The nouns of this class generally agree with the mas- 
culine Segholates. The const, st. sing, remains unchanged, 
and before suffixes the original short vowel (— , — , — ) re- 
appears: as iT\D&D, with suff. TnW'P . In the pi. ab- 
solute the following is peculiar to nouns of this class, that 
the vowel preceding the plural termination (which in the 
masc. Segholates is Kamets: D07D) drops: as JThDfc^Q; 
in the form T)~ — a trace of the (o) is preserved in — : 
as rtptf* plur. Otyfpi Hjltj. plur. ntifi?» const, state 

nuns; but rh'hh pi- tibhi'* npSra- pi».rrtp^ro# 



§ 72. Fourth Declension of Fem. Nouns. 1 i;, 

Note. There are several nouns of this class in whose plural 
absolute, Kamets and Tsere appear in the penult : rnrO chapi- 
ter, pi rvhnis; rb^o kr #> pi- niSpND; rrain reproof, 
pi- niroitf; nyzti ring, P i. n^ya-, nj/SpD. pi. niySpo 

carved work, Dp^D nurse, pi. iTip^D (as if from Hp^D), 
WTjD plowshare, plur. ni£TT?D; D"ifl^ Astarte, plur. 

ninn^j rh>'3 draught, P i. nii-v? . 
» 

2. As ^tpp in general, the form in J"|— — takes before 
suffixes either Patach or Chirek : Patach, if the masc. 
terminates in A (— or — ) ; Chirek, if the masc. termin- 
ates in Tsere or Chirek : niO^D . with suff. WTDtWD , 
from the masc. 10???; fW (infinity,) TODS from the 
masc. 2$ ; Hp^D nurse, ifipTO> from the masc. p^'O ♦ 

3. Before the suffix T], Seghol occasionally occurs : as 
S|fl$K thy wife, otherwise »n^'N . fQ!? (Inf. from ^ffi) 
has' Seghol with all the suffixes ^V- 'tplb, in?*? . 

4. The form ]"> is inflected in certain words (espe- 
cially when the masculine has 1) with Kubbuts : as 
Wrq (masc. £*'im)> with suff. W^J iTJD^D wages, 
rODflD measure, np^fTO division. 

5. In many words the two forms Jl — and fi— exist, 
either by the use of both in the absolute, or of the form 
H— in the absolute only. In both cases the form in fl— 
is most frequently used in the const, state: as H^VJ7 as- 
sembly and iVfiflk const. n^Vj TT\t% and TT\pV_? llHSt© 
thought and hbtftJO* fiDNSp'work, HD^DJD kingdom^ do- 
minion. 

Exercise 116. . 

• • t | : : •• t - - - : • ■■ t : • • v : v 

13 "nnnaa t-Sn 13 nrr£}# W.3 12 Dn^nK t-^n onag 

19 



146 Part I. Exercises. 

igte rinrjn nW ^np/i:n : D\?rp 1 ^n^op^nnc3fi« , \ 
20 npf7 if? >irai rtiir -@k re :S*ni?>! ^T^ ^iij 

to blossom 1 the lily 2 sucker, sprout 3 the olive tree 4 beauty 5 the crown 6 
glory, honor 7 the dog 8 to return 9 the vomit 10 to repeat 11 master, lord 12 fe- 
male servant, handmaid 13 mistress 14 dominion 15 vain 16 profit 17 the charge, 
law 18 a kingdom 19 kindness 20 boyhood 21 to increase 22 fall, ruin 23 - 

Exercise 117. 

Beforetime 1 in Israel, when a man went (transl. in his 
going) to inquires (of) God, thus he spake, come 3 ; let us 
go to the seer 4 - The hope 5 of righteous ones (shall be) 
gladness 6 * hut the expectation 1 ? of wicked ones shall perish. 
And 8 Hezekiah 9 wrote letters 16 to 11 all Israel, thati2 they 
should come to the House of the Lord at Jerusalem* And 8 
the Lord made garments 13 for the skin 14 (of the skin 
§ 82, 4.) to Adam 15 and his wife 16 and clothed them. And 
ye shall keep mine ordinance 1 * 7 - And 8 he took the crown 18 
of their king from off 19 his head. Though 26 thou should- 
est bray 21 the fool 22 in the mortar? 3 among 24 the ground- 
corn^ with the pestle 26 ; (yet) will not his foolishness 28 de- 
part2f from him 19 - Thy kingdom 2 ^ (is) an everlasting 36 
kingdom, and Thy dominion 31 (endureth) throughout 32 all 33 
generations. And 8 a certain 34 woman cast 35 an upper 31 ? 
millstone 36 upon Abimelech's 38 head, and shivered 39 his 
skull 46 - And it shall be, when 41 he sitteth (about (the 
time of) his sitting) upon the throne 42 of his kingdom 43 , 
that 44 he shall write him a copy 45 of this law in 46 a book, 
so. i 7mpn ennafr snbnin 4nto simp. pi. ^n 2 with ace. ^n id^aS 
i6 wx 15 din i4*nn 13 runs 12 with inf. *7 11 Vy lornjK 9-irrpTnv 

: • tt ' v v <- ....... t|-: • : 

artten 2 4-pn3 23 tfrop 22 Via 2ifut.tfn3 20 d« wb^n ™r\?®z ^rnptfD 



.§ 71. Irkesular Nouns. 147 

3inS#np 30 (of all- eternity § 83, 6.) D'pSty-^J 29 HoSd 28 nSlK 27TID 26^ 
36 (3;n Ht. the rider, hence : the upper) nSs 37 nm 35 Hi. ^}0 34nnX 33 (§88, c.) 32 3 
.46 ^_ 45 JWD 44 Cony. 1 43 noSpp 42 KD3 41 with inf. J 40 nSi^J 39 yyi 38 ^Sd^N 

§ 73. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

A. Derivatives of n"*7 ' 

1. 3K father, const, st. *J{$ (like a Segholate form from 
Pt'% with light suffixes: *JN:\ l^* 5 with g rave suffixes 
IfiW^ D?T3$> plnr. nilK /const st. JTQN. 

2. flK> brother, const TIN, with suff. : TIN, hut DDTTNV 
plural DT?K> const TIN, with suff.: TIN. VIlN, ^TlN* 

3. nlflN sister, const ninN, with suff.: >nifTN> (pi. abs. 
and const, does not occur), plur. with suff.: THTIN* also 
TfiiriN. (The ending Di in the singular rhHN is not the 
plural ending, but contracted from DTlN^ cf. DID > c. st. 
from HIE) . 

V T 

4. Dfl stepfather, with suff. ^pfT TO, 

5. man stepmother, with suff. Tjnion » nnion. 

6. J3 son (for HJD' from H^3 to build), const, st. JJ, 
before Makkeph ~|3; seldom jj; once \J3 and 133 Num. 24, 
3, Gen. 49, 11, With suffixes m, ^35" plural D^, const, 
st. ^3, with suff. ^ ^5 etc. 

7. H3 daughter (for f03* fern, from p) , const, st. £Q, 
with suff.: \H3 (for TU3) ,' plur. HID* const, st. nti3# 

8. JV3 bouse (supposed to be derived from rtJD to build), 
const, st. JT3, with suff. TVS; plur. DTt3> const, st. TD> 
with suff. TD ♦ 

9. TON maid-servant, const, st. HDNS with suff. V)ftN ; 

piur. nino**. const, st. ninpN. 

10. ^3 vessel, plur. Dv3» 

11. JlD mouth (prop, for HN£p' const, st. *£)» w Hh suff. 
*3 my mouth, Vfl and tfVg); plural D 4 *? (from 0"$) > 111*9 
(Prov. 5, 4.) and HV§ (Jud. 3, 16.). 

B. Derivatives from Verbs yy ♦ 

1. Bfyt man (from £ON) , const, st. fc*N, with suff. >£»N« 



148 Part I. Exercises. 

In plur. the original form reappears, D*£^X (probably at 
first D^IJK* fr. the sing. & #v tiN) (seldom pV'**)' const - st - 
*g>JN* with suff.: TO, 03'gttN . 

2*. H&X woman (for HEON)* const, st. ng>N, with suff.: 
^^'K.plnr. D^J. 

C. Derivatives from Y'# and V 'J?. 

1. DV day, with sum: W, dual DW> plur. DW c. st. 
>£>, with local (H— ) now. 

■• : T t • T , 

2. TJ? cit y ; P 1 * DHJJ (once DH>#. Ju. 10, 4.) c. st. HJ£ ; . 

D. A derivative from $y is B>JO bead, (for &>>h 
Segholate form) plur. D^'NH (for D'triO (§14, Rising III.) 
const, st. UtfJO. with suff. ^1, once" with suff. VLTJO . 

T - T T 

E. D*D water, c. st. >£ and ^O.w. suff. WD, ^0*0 . 

Exercise 118. 

2H noio \ 2 rhym n#K nmw rrftK J nSro rim n^ 

t - v t : - t • t : •• t — :- I t 

it\w *n?n nninn n§p wn^xb :o\n two 1 ? 4 jn 3 nnS 
rpy N*?p 6 diS?5 :n^03 5 P^D! dtik rjin? ^3^9 "OX 
nup 1 ?** 7 fH) D*0in! *3K in»19 dwSd o^n ra jd 
9 nS,pb* -133 ^'3^ kSi nt^-Stf n^" 8 ^ nfrr*& :Q Ti^ 
ni5rip_ 10 *Hj?! '3 :n W nt^jrS? hin'! rojrin-g n#K 
U DV3 iK n DTrft$s fl^n"^- ^ p?." 1 ??? HT! 5 TI9 1 ? 
on? npm6 DT3D"Sj? i*t o^nin^rrby. 13 n B ^h oxm 
by ?pej p^n^ [j;© 1 ? ^«"n«i ^3N"n# n33 50*550 b# 
bx ^rjS$ rrw >3^ :r|S jro ^ijSs nin> i#r no>;n 

:d^5 Si; riDN pjj npb 14 *op 

the inheritance 1 prudent 2 wreath 3 grace (§ 89, 2-) 4 divide, have part 5 
biruYeage 6 judge, defender 7 apparel 8 garment 9 chance to be 10 the young of 
birds, a brood 11 egg 12 to crouch 13 jealous 14 - (§ 83, 9.)* 

Exercise 119. 

» 

Who can 2 find a virtuous 1 woman (a. w. of virtue 1 ) ? 
her price 5 (is) far* ahove 4 rubies. The heart of her hus- 



§ 74. The Numerals. 149 

band does trusts in lier. Her children arise up? and call 
her blessed 8 - Many daughters have done virtuously 1 , but» 
thou 10 excellest 11 them all 12 - And 13 Isaaci 5 abode 14 in 16 
Gerard. And 13 the men of the place asked (him) of 18 
his wife ; and he said, She is 19 my sister: for he feared 
to say, She is my wife ; lest (said he), the men of the 
place should slay 20 me for 21 Rebekah 22 - These (are) the 
words of the letter 23 , that Jeremiah 24 , the prophet, sent 
from Jerusalem to the children of Israel, whom Nebuchad- 
nezzar 26 had carried into exile 2 ^ to Babylon : Thus saith 
the Lord: Build ye houses and abide (in them); and plant 27 
gardens 28 ; and eat the fruit of them; Take 29 ye wives, and 
beget 30 sons and daughters ; and take wives for your sons 
and give your daughters to husbands 31 , that they may 
bear 32 sons and daughters. And seek 33 the peace of the 
cities, whither 34 I have caused you to be carried into exile 35 - 

7 pret. mp 6 pret. with 2, TMD2 5 13ft 4 (g 91) 3 3 pfrn 2 fut. [§ 101 III, a)] 1 Stj 
11 pret, with following ^p, ft 1 ?]? 10 (g 93 Note.) 91 8 to call blessed : Y^K Pi-, with Conv. ) 
19 (§77, 3) 18 ^ 17 -HJ 163 15 pnr 1*31^ 13 Conv. 1 12(withsuff. fo), ^3 etc.) S>3 

t : I t : - - t ■. T ■• 

a*p carry into exile nSj Hi. 24JTDT 23 ISO a2np31 2lS:» 20 fut. (2 10S, 2) ^H 
•^ tt t: :• v It: ■ - -t 

31 i^X 30 Hi. IV 29 np 1 ? 28 com. (doubles the last cons.) M 27j>£pj 26 Yi'NJ-ptoJ 
.35 to cause to be c. i. e. nSj Hi. 34 nSt5'~1B'X 33 arm 32 iV 

TT TT V": -T ~T 

§ 74. THE NUMERALS. 

1. The numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. The 
cardinals must be considered as nouns, having two gen- 
ders and the const, state. 



2. 




CARDINALS. 






Feminine. 


Masculine. 




Const. 


Absol. 


Const, 


Absol. 




TO 


nro< 


ina 


7ft$ 


i- K 


>t& 


&np 


W 


&w 


2. 2 


uhp 


vfatf 

T 


tvihv 


rrefasf 

t : 


3- J 


VT\x 


VT)$ 


ryTsx 


*t T : - 


4- 1 



Part I. 


Exercises. 






Feminine. 


Masculine. 






Const. Absol. 


Const. Absol. 






con ran 


nran n^'on 

V '■ ~: t • — ; 


5. 


n 


&T "83$ 


.... T . 


6. 


i 


P3# yy& 


■njEjB> nipt? 


7. 


r 


lfca? n±>£>' 


nibs? mbjy 

: t : 


8. 


n 


VW$ y&n 


n#t#i nj^'n 


9. 


D 


*&3l ^VX. 


rr\py nn^j;. 


10. 


* 


fhfc># nna ) 


n^j; nog ) 


11. 


W 


rn?>g w'# ^ 


n^jr tijBty $ 






rftipij. d w > 


T ^ T .. . . m 


12. 


}> 


irifety. w" ^ 


1W w s 






rntr^. thp 


T ^7 T ; 


13. 


3* 


TVipX }TT9$ 


*)ti% nyy\K 


14. 


T 


rnfc># ran 


ivy nran 

T W T t • -: 


15. 


VlD 


rrspv, ww 


nsrj; n#a> 


16. 


I 


rn#j; yyy 


nbr r nj£i?> 


17. 


r* 


TT\py : T\p# 


T *T T 


18. 


n> 


TFpJf. vwr\ 


n^jr njn^ii 


19. 


b 



,nm) Dnw, ,Dnro. -iro* 21. jo >tDnpy 20 - d 
,D^5>Nt 40. ,d^V so: S -anjro oa# 22. m 
.d^o^so- a .o*ja#70: y ,dw' 6 °- d >D>ran 50 - i 

c - st. ,HND 10 °- p .: Hundreds and Thousands .D^^il 90 - . Jf 

^'S^"300. ^ ,[(§13,6..B.3.)D , nXOMD , nND200. 1 jHNO 

etc. nixp rap 500. pn fliNp j^k 400. n >niNp 
-D'jj^j n^'V* 300 °- ii ^o^n 2000 - f ' 5 >*)!$ 100 °- k or k 

(myriads niannplur.) 131 ,,1^") 10000. -^Stf ni^K 4000. -7 

t : • t t : ■ t — : ~ — : - 

,(E«, 45, i) ^ Tr\vy_. and d^x nn^j;. traStf rn&# a ' s ° 



§ 74. The Numerals. 151 

,fNeh. 7, 72. tfl2h >f)# Ps. 68, 18. DVT£n) f^N DH^ 20000. 
P^N^N 1000000. ^KIlND 100000. etc. j^N D'fc6# 30000. 

Note 1. From 13 to 19 incl. the units with the masculine, 
staud in the absolute state ; with the feminine in the const, st. 

Note II. The numerals are denoted by letters. The Units: 
from }< to CO : the Tens : from * to ¥ ; the Hundreds: from p to jl 
and the final letters V , ft , f , Q , 7| : T] = 500, Q = 000, J = 700 > 
t\ = 800,' y = 900; but more usually pH = 500; in= 000 etc. 
The connection of a decimal and a unit is seen in the table above. 
For 15 is employed Y'lD an d not H"*' this last being the abbre- 
viation for HI IT (§ 18. Note). For the thousands and the higher 
numbers the dotted alphabet is used: as J^ (or j$)= 1000; 
5=2000, y =3000 etc. 

Note III. The termination (jf — ) of the numerals with masc. 
nouns is the adverbial-ending (§ 75, 1. Note). Before fern, nouns 
(H — ) is dropped, lest it be considered as the fern, ending (j"| — ) 
(§ 57, 6, I). 



3. 


OKDINALS. 




Fem. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Masc. 


nw 


q&Qf 6th 


T 


fivftn ist 


h>ywp 


vyytf 7th 


m& 


i)tf 2d 


Wf&p 


Wp# 8th 


ptihtf 


*V?htf 3d 


tvywi? 


igVfh 9th 


rvtfy) 


>J^i 4th 


wy&Z 


HT#. 10th 


n^on 


tytlh 5th 



From the eleventh, the cardinals with the article are 
used instead of the ordinals, and follow the' noun; when 
without the article, they are found both before and after it, 
especially in the numbering of years, months and days: as 
DV S^rrl?5^3 Oen. 8, 4. and T\VT\$\ DH^ DV? Hag. 1, 15. 

4. Syntactical rules see § 92. 

Exercise 120. 

in** niir mrr Ninn ova p^rrSa hy ibob nw irm 

t v t : v : • .- - I v t t t ~ I V "•" : t : t t : 



152 Part I. Exercises. 

H|n i&) d? 1 ? rr*n? inj* D§t?pi ntix nnm : nrr# id^ 
nW tram 2? id^ dWi *iSn nnx *rrr ^nrrK :DanK 

t • -: - t - - v • t :*- t I •• - t *>r *tt : - : 

ni-tfo dw nm^ rnni 6 ni^n jn run tr'inS dv iw 

tr'inS nnao yof n B^na : ^rtSa riirrS mints' jn rrigqrj 
U 7]N :&rip- 13 *opa l2 nj;nin n jm 10 {in3# d?S nw 
D3^£ "iM*? kvt 15 Dni)?n Di> rrjn >jp3#n tfirrc ni^ 
^'inS nj^ffii D?W§rn# 17 o##n WT^S nih; y^ 
Di> -fefy ntstora :Dpn?^' "vig^n rypit a^o ys$ 
f]?v : nirrS d^ TSSE& w ni3pn Jin njrj T3^*n t^'lnS 
,rrjfp '0 D0T£* srt JHS ^ cra^3 f"W '* n^DrS wn 
yip pi}*) yp nt^b rp ^pv ,rap ipj£ £"p prry*. 
PtzjSiyn 20 riKnaD) insooS rw" h'M.n^ jrotr 

t^t -•:• "t : : tt I -:• tt 

- • • w ~; t •■ t : x •• x ■ .• w -\ : w -r t t : - - 

how 1 put to flight 2 appointed festival 3 between the two evenings, twilight 4 
the passover 5 unleavened bread 6 week 7 the sickle 8 standing corn 9 strict rest 10 
a memorial 11 a sound of a trumpet 12 a convocation 13 only, but 14 expiation 15 
to make an expiation 16 to afflict, humble 17 to celebrate, to keep 18 booth, tab- 
ernacle 19 creation 20 world 21 a measure for dry goods 2 ' 3 - 

ExERCtSE 121. 

We (are) all one man's sons. We (are) twelve breth- 
ren, sons of our father, one (is) not 1 , and the little one is 
this clay with 2 our father in the land of Canaan. The 
whole congregation together 3 (was) forty and two thousand 
three hundred and three score, beside 4 their man-servants 
and their maid-servants, of whomS (there were) seven thou- 
sand three hundred thirty and seven: and they had 6 tAvo 
hundred forty and five singing-men 7 and singing- women 7 - 
Their horses, seven hundred thirty and six: their rnulesS, 
two hundred forty and five: (Their) camels^ four hundred 



§ 75. In General. 153 

thirty and five: six thousand seven hundred and twenty- 
asses. Two women went out. Ifio thou buyii a He- 
brew* 2 servant, six years 1 ^ he shall serve: and in the sev- 
enth he shall go out free 1 ^ for nothing^- Seven abomina- 
tions (are) in the heart of the wicked. When*6 I break 1 ? 
the staffs of your bread, ten women shall bake*9 your 
bread in one oven 2 ** and 2 * ye shall eat, and not be satis- 
fied 22 - Eve 23 was the first woman. And the Lord spake 
to Moses on 24 the first 25 (day) of 26 the second month, in 27 
the second year after 28 they were come 29 out of the land 
of Egypt. 

6 to them (were) 5 of whom H^N 4 "»^P 3"in&G 2 /IK 1 (§ 75, 3.) with suff. ptf 
limp 10 '3 9 (doubles the last cons.) ^DJ 81*12 7 part. Pi. masc. and fern. pi. of ^^ 

T|T • TT 

17 (in my breaking) -OJtf 16 with inf. 3 15 DJll WJ&Bf} 13 (§ 58, 10.) HJttf 12 "H3 17 
-t t • ■ : t tt • : • 

25*inX 24 3 23 71=1)1 22tf355f 21Conv. ) 20 "HJ3J**, 19pret. with Conv. 1 18 HDD 

TV T - ~ T - V ~ 

.29 XV 28 with inf. and surf, (after their coming out) S 27 3 26 (§ 83, 10.) *? 



CHAPTER XL 

PARTICLES. 
. § 75. IN GENERAL. 

1. The particles which comprise adverbs, prepositions^ 
conjunctions and interjections are divided into inseparable 
and separable. The inseparable are prefixed or postfixed 
syllables, of the most of them we have already treated, as 
D^n § § 18, 19, local n T §'19, 6. 

2. The separable consisting of entire words are partly 
I. primitive: as (a) the negations 7N* ii 1 ? and the poetic 
^3 n °t j ( D ) local and temporal terms : as DL^ Jlftt^' (with 
local ft) there, HiD here, *$ where? ?N then; (c) expressing 

the manner and mode of actions: as j"Q thus, JO a par- 

20 



154 Part I. ♦Exercises. 

tide of entreaty ; partly II derivative : as JT3D within,, 
VTl. together, DOD circuit, nS^D (Inf. Hi.) much, the in- 
terrogative adverhs H£)7 why, J£PTD (compounded of the in- 
terrog. TO and JftT (p. pass, perceived, seen) why — what 
hast thou seen? cf. Gen. 20, 10. 

Note. Eem, forms are frequently converted into adverbs, e. g. 

rtfitraro sooner, runnac later, nnnD quickly, nny now 

t • T t -: - T T •• : T 

(fr. fi)£ time, prop, at the time), H7D wholly, completely, POpK 
truly. On adverbs in D~ > see (§ 56 3» 2. e ) Nouns in the 
accus. are often adverbs, e.g. JllDil haughtily, HM safely, HND 
a hundred-fold, a hundred-times" Prov. 17, 10. Cf. (§ 85, I). 
On Adverbs formed by S (see § 84, 3). 

3. Some of the derivative adverbs, which include the 
signification of the verb or noun from which they are de- 
rived, are connected with suffixes: as n$i7 behold ! lo! 
with suffixes : ^i> *3in and ^H behold I, (properly : be- 
hold me) !Tpn, li^tl behold thou, ^H behold he, etc. 
Titf yet, as yet, still', w.suff.: >rfj^ *itf, ?p]ip* tflljk ftHW 
I am, thou art* he, she is as yet or still ; TJJDj *1j^3 while, 
while yet : HJD while yet I am ; Tij?D since : Hi])0 since 
I am. 

j*N, const, st. pK not, with sufY. ^^K I am or was not, 

B* T5?. there is, there are, with sufY.: ?]£♦> thou art, fog* 
he is, Ot)Vf\ yc are. 

^N, const, st. *N where, i"D*N where art thou? i\X where 
is he? D*N where are they? The force of the substantive 
verb to be is conveyed by all these adverbs. 

4. Prepositions. The greater number of prepositions are 
nouns in the accusative or const, st.: as *7JfN (subst. the 
side) by, near, n (P2 separation, interval) between, and 
they can be connected with other prepositions: as rUlJTO from 
under, from beneath, fiitfp from with, i. e. from, or they 
appear abbreviated as prefixes : thus D/'D'O * 

5. The prepositions being nouns can take suffixes (the 



§ 75. In General. 155 

nominal suff., seldom the verbal stiff.): as nnfi under, with 
suff.: *>F)tlil> DK with, is distinguished from HK the accu- 
sative particle, that the former with suffixes is commuted 
into JlJfc the latter into DK (jT)N): as 'J-1N with me; TIN* me. 

6. Several prepositions were originally plural nouns, ac- 
cordingly they receive only plural suffixes. To these be- 
long: nflNS nnX behind," after, njlK behind me, rpHN 
behind thee, V^IlK behind him etc. 

'*%$ lb$ P° et towards, to: ^N to me, Tj^N, V^K. Dp^&J . 
|*5 between, with suff. \3*3' ?U*5; but also with pi. masc. 
and plur. fern. suff. tfX% DJ^i' ^JJB^ DJTtirn. 
1]£ as far as, unto, (H]£ poet.) with suffixes: HJ?, tIHJ*' 

*7# upon, over (*Sg poet.) w. suff. hjt* ^hjf> vS# DiT^. 

linn under, below, beneath, WrJl, ^finjh. Vfifm TO 

OnTHlil (with the sing, only, ^iltiri (verb, suff.) Dfinn* 

tv : - 

7. Conjunctions. The conjunctions are unchangeable. 
On the conjunction 1 and its vocalization, see (§ 12, 7. b.). 

8. Interjections, fill. rUlN'/fl**, *fiNi V? , {TIN. 1K» W 
ah ! *7?N woe ! alas ! 

Other parts of speech used as interjections : *5 (it is sup- 
posed to be contracted from *J*5 entreaty) I pray: always 
with 71K> tflK my Lord. 

HDIl and OH (Imp. of 31T to give) come! come on! go to! 

DPI hist! hush! pi. )Btl (Imp. Piel of Hpil to be silent.) 

Twwtl (fi*. S/TT to violate, break a covenant) profane! fie! 
far be it ! followed by ^ of the person and inf. with Jp : 
as nWffJlS ^f? n^^P? far be it from thee to do. 

NJ I pray ; used: I. with the imp. opt. and fut. II. with 
particles : N3 HPK sa y> I P ra y thee, ^"PO^N let me go, 
I pray the, NJ"^N nay, or not so, I pray thee ; ttpiK woe 
now ! alas ! At the beginning of a sentence : JON (written 
also H3N) contracted from N3TW oh now! I pray. 



156 Part I. Exercises. 

Exercise 122. 

ytfe ftp] ihito&bjiL in ]Vl'W ^Wl h nun *6 

nyorvi nyi?. d>HS*6 n^rij^ sjjw 6 ^?^ 5 rfey? 4 pSn 
tub* ntrarho 8 any 7 nWi yafe* r'mcui n^n i&y 

T tt t |vt t * : — " t : t:t 

tin rpn r^nwi ::Wn vSn j3# 9 SS'^ Sir rn nne' jtj? 
:'S b% 10 ^^tdk Jtrrfog inie np_S->? wg$\ D^riS^n 

?py# «3H io^? np*e*i njn3fi nyr^K Sao?* ^^-S? 

rbt2 nana -Q-m : 15 W^n u m^S rm cro nWr 

J v v t : - .. -.- . ^.. :: ._ T . TT .. v .. .. T 

tt£P l7 ni& on-) rnfin ^ mn^ vr? ^ ^R- ^ '5 

maj nw*!i :nj 19 nrr9 18 ^p5 sjVows rf?J?.3 3i& en 

:tiS ^n nSm-nx wio rrira ^ rhbn nana Sn 

| t - ~: — : - v • • • t : •• ■ t • t t : - 

to turn one's self 1 to walk, live 2 angel 3 to remain over night 4 wages 5 hire- 
ling, hired laborer 6 supplication, prayer 7 to, unto 8 to roll 9 to act wickedly, 
to be guilty 10 yet 11 diligently consider 12 (§ 97, 2.) 13 p. n. m. 14 the Jezreelite 15 
herbs 16 (§91, l.) 17 money 18 the price 19 - 

Exercise 123. 

Inquire 1 (after) good, and not 2 evil, that 3 ye may 4 live: 
and 5 so 6 the Lord, the God of Hosts, shall be with* you, 
as 8 ye have said. How9 do ye sayio, W e (are) wise, and 
the law of the Lord (is) with 7 us ? Lo, certainly 11 in 12 
vain 13 made he (it), the pen 14 of the Scribes 15 (is) in 
vain. Deborah 1 ^ abode under 17 the palm-tree 18 of De- 
borah, between i9 Ramah 20 and between Beth-el 2 ^ in mount 
Ephraim 21 ; and 22 the children of Israel came up to her 
for 12 judgment. Hezekiah trusted in the Lord God of 
Israel; so that 23 after 24 him was none 25 like26 him among 27 



§ 75. The Subject. 157 

all the kings of Judah. To the hired servant, at his day 
thou shalt give his hire28, neither shall the sun go down29 
upon 30 it; for he is poorsi, and setteth his heart upon it, 
(and to it he beareth 3 2 his soul) lest 33 he call 3 * against 
thee unto the Lord, and it be 35 sin unto 36 thee. 

8*1^X3 7fiK 6|3 5 to connect with the verb 4fut. 3|£dS 2 1 ?** I with ace. #"n 
15-)3D H D^ 1 3 "W 12 with the art. (§ 84, 3.) ^ UJ3K lOfut. "|DN ^TO'IC 

22Conv. i aonsK aoSK-rra 20 (§ so, 3.) non i»pa is *\6p\ H nnn lemirn 

2813W 27 3 26 before light suff. 1D3, 1D3 25 xS 24 plur. const. nriXi 1118 231 
tt t : ••-: - 

.36 3 35pret. with Conv. ) 34fut. 33 X'bl 32 part. N!#J 31 "'Jj.T 30 SjJ 29X13 



PART II. 

SYNTAX. 
CHAPTER I 

THE ESSENTIAL PAKTS OF A SENTENCE. 
§ 76. THE SUBJECT 

1. The subject of a proposition appears either in the 
form of a substantive or in that of an adjective, const, in- 
finitive or pronoun, supplying the place of the substantive. 

2. When the sentence is without a definite subject, the 
impersonal construction is employed. The subject is then 
indicated : 

a. By the third person of the passive conjugations (Ni. Pu, 
Ho.), e. g. T\W# W\p\ TS$h it is called to this woman = 
she is called woman. Gen. 2. 23. 

b. By the third person of the sing, active, e. g. i£# N*")j"3 
he (some one) called his name. Gen. 11, 9. 

c. By the third person of the plural active : as 'TTjH and 
they told, i. e. certain men told. 1. Sam. 19, 21. 

d. By the second person of the future: as ilfeVf fcODJTJw 



158 Part II. Syntax. 

1 there shall no one go thither. Isa. 7, 25, or by the in- 
fin. with the sufY. of the second person ; with regard to 
the latter a phrase of frequent occurrence is: JTUNft *TJ£ 
till thy coming = till one comes. 

3. The third pers. sing, often has for a subject it under- 
stood: as *i"H and it happened ; **p DH it was warm to me. 

4. The impersonal construction expressed by the 3. pers. 
passive, is often found with a following accusative: as 
n^DTl^ Stjtyl ^ was brought back Moses (ace.) = some 
one brought back Moses. 

Note. A noun often is made prominent as subject at the be- 
ginning of a sentence or clause by HiSt* "DK> or J")N is used for the 
purpose of emphasizing the subject in a passive or intransitive 
connection, e. g. Gen. 4, 18. Ex. 10, 8, 21, 28. Nu. 32, 5. 

5. When the active subject can be conjectured from the 
action itself, the participle of the same verb is used as sub- 
ject: as TjTin fl'Tr tib the treader (some one) shall not 
tread. 

§ 77. THE COPULA. 

1. The copula is generally not expressed, the relation of 
the subject and predicate being shown by placing them to- 
gether : as CWH b)1% the man is great ; fiiJT DID God is 
good. 

2. The verb ITU to be, is used to exactly define the time: 
as Dnj£ ?Tn t^nln the serpent was crafty; rjNOl JTiT pHN 
Aaron shall be thy prophet, or to convey the proper con- 
ception of the verb: the existence or non-existence of the 
subject, which may be still more forcibly rendered by ^ 
or }»N (§ 75, 3.) : as p'JK ?]? nVT K^ no needy shall be 
among you, Deut. 15, ' L f>*TDK M?lp3 T\p^f\ Is the 
Lord among us or not, Ex. 17, 7. 

3. The third person of the pers. pron. frO>7> Wtl > DH> 
nftPb jn/n|n ^dropping the pronominal idea entirely and 
expressing only the verb to be, is employed to avoid 
ambiguity and to distinctly point out the noun or 
adjective standing in the predicate : as Tl^D W*1 "^H ^ a ~ 



. m § 78. The Predicate and its Agreement &c. 159 

■|- vid is the king, whereas Tlj*)Qil "IVI could be taken as : 
»| the king David ; or it is used, when the preceding 
[ \ subject is more remote from the predicate than usual: as 

irVrn wn bx^w tfbx rrin^'n^ the fire-offerings-(coi- 

lectively) of the Lord, the God of Israel^ are their inherit- 
ance, Jos. 13, 14. Even when the subject is of the first or 
second person, K1H can be used as the copula: as HflN 
DTfrN* tflH Thou art God; TOP! Dfltf ye are. Zeph. 2, 12~. 

4. This use of the 3. pers. pron. as copula, particularly 
comes forth in union with the demonstr. pronoun, e. g. 
OH ?fox these are, Gen. 25, 16. D^K H-lfi HD what are 
these? Gen. 21, 29. fif Wft >£ who is this? Estli. 7. 5. 

$ 78. THE PREDICATE AND ITS AGREEMENT WITH 
THE SUBJECT. 

1. The predicate appears either in the form of a verb, sub- 
stantive, adjective, adj. pron., or even in that of a derivative 
adverb : as ilT\n much, &#D little, INS ftyin ?PDk> 
thy reward (shall be) very great, Gen. 15, 1. PQ D*£Otf 
.DJ7D the men within it (were) few. Eccl. 9, 14. 

2. When the predicate is an adjective, adj. pronoun, 
participle or noun, it has no article (excepting the adject- 
ive in superlative [§ 91, 3.]), and by this it is distinguished 
from the subject, in case the latter is defined by the arti- 
cle or otherwise : n^H PDi^D £*7 the counsel is not good, 
2. Sam. 17, 7 ?|>?N Siir>5 for thy father is a hero, ibi. 10. 

3. The predicate generally agrees with the subject, when 
a verb, in gender, number and person : n^HJlp *&i?2 ^?^T 
my soul melteth for sadness, Ps. 119, 28., when an ad- 
jective, participle or adj. pronoun, in gender and number: 
fjlJT "0*1 *)V?l the word of the Lord is*upright, Ps. 33, 4. 
i"U2"nn rtt^Nn fitff this (is) the woman, and this (is) her 

T : V : T • T v / v ' 

son, II. Kings 8, 5. Nevertheless the Hebrew allows more 
freedom in this respect than other languages, using a 
construction correspondent to the sense more than to the 
external form. 



160 Part. II. Syntax. 

4. Exceptions. 

a. When the predicate commences the sentence, the third 
person masc. sing, is occasionally used impersonally : as 
tib3 Wjfr# 1^ \*T1 and he had thirty sons. 

b. Nouns of multitude frequently take a plural verb : as 
DJ^il 'IN'VI and the people saw, and vice versa substan- 
tives used in the plural form (§ 82, 4.) are often joined 
with a verb singular: as D*ii*7tf N*13 Q°& created. 

c. The predicate does not agree with the subject, but with 
the genitive belonging to it, in case the genitive is the 
more important word: as D*p#V ^TD^ '%F\ ^P the voice 
of thy brothers blood cries (Gen. 4, 10.), the predicate 
is governed by *D*1 the drops of blood. NJPJ DHpH fTPD 
JlJinNrrn^ and the east wind brought the locusts, 
Ex/ 10, 13. (in feminine, but Njj^ refers to OHj% In 
the same manner with 21 J HMIl WHV D W D'S the 

x : t ^ • • t 

multitude of years teach wisdom, Job 32, 7. and nearly 
always with ^3 , D1K ♦0^3 1W1 and all the davs of 

" t t •■ : t : •- ■ 

Adam were. 

d. A verb singular joined with the subject in plural and 
vice versa, often has a distributive signification : as 
^#£1 DIP J"li£rT3 the beasts (i- e. each of the beasts) 
of the" field "shall cry, Joel 1, 20. $&*) ^TrjW 1DJ the 
wicked (every wicked man) flee, although no one pur- 
sueth. Prov. 25, 1. 

5. When the predicate belongs to several nouns or pro- 
nouns, the following rules must be observed: a) It gen- 
erally takes the plural: as D'NDPT rtbS# 'Xfi >#? I and 
my son Solomon are sinners, I. Kings I, 21. b) When they 
are of different gChders, the masculine is preferred to the 
feminine : as D*/DN VJTttDI V33 his sons and his daughters 

■ : t : t t ° 

(were) eating, Job 1, 13. c) When they are of different 
persons, the predicate follows the most important, i. e. the 
first person rather than the second, and the second in pref- 
erence to the third : HW) ^N HHD Hn^Di let us make a 



; 



§ 79. Verbal Arrangement. 161 

covenant, I and thou, Gen. 31, 44.: as rO^J ^)^ny ^N 
rD""l# I and the lad will go yonder, Gen. 22,5. d) Some- 
times, especially when the predicate precedes the subject, 
it agrees only with one of the nouns, most frequently with 
the nearest, being understood for the others : as rb JO* 1 ! 
' liT^'Nl V3D1 an( * No-ah came in, and his sons and his wife 
' (came in); pHNl DHE ^D^ffi and Miriam spoke and Aaron 
(spoke). 

§ 79. VERBAL ARRANGEMENT. 

1. As a leading principle, the word upon which the 
5 most stress is to be laid, always begins the sentence: as 

< DTfrtf *Oa n>^>n:3 In thebeginning God created, JT#K*}3 
I as the most important word taking the lead ; hence every 

word to be emphatic, precedes the rest, 
i 2. In a simple and independent normal sentence, the 

< words are in the natural succession of Subject, Predicate 
and Object : as jw DVlbH D^?3N ^3 thy sons were eating 

I and drinking wine, Job 1, 18. 

3. The predicate precedes the subject: 
a, When it is an adjective: as *J1# TTlil m 7 iniquity is 
great; Gen. 4, 13. ftbm DJ? iTDJfiYniB wisdom is 
I good with an inheritance, Eccl. 7, 11. 
h. When it is a verb connected with Conversive Vav; with- 
out this connection with *) the succession is regular: as 
pHV* SO*l anc l Isaac camp, but KD pHV!"! anc ^ I- came, 
B^tf H 'TV) and the man was, but PPH BP*Nffi . 

• t • :- tt • t : 

c. When*)^NS an adverb of negation N7 etc., an inter- 
rogative pronoun or prefix, and particles like *5 3 ^tt 
stand before the predicate : as &TO ^#8 VOtifet *7? 
CTH^N all his work which God had created, Gen, 2, 3. 
pT'Vs 1TX)} K^ there was not left any green thing ; 
tiiK TIN npb*'n am I my brother's keeper? >}N bbfi$ '2 
for I languish ;'' nu*2f7 D*pH5>D OnSftJB P*W- *$*< 
peradventure there shall lack five of the fifty righteous. 

d. When a verb stands in jussive or the construction is 

21 



162 Part II. Syntax. 

impersonal: as D?2pil ttp* the waters shall be drawn to- 
gether, rHK/t? \T let there be luminaries. 

4. When the ■ subject follows the predicate, the object 
takes its place after the subject: as D^^X $12 tVW$12 
p.NH flt&\ D W'n HK . 

5. The object connected with an interrogative pronoun 
or prefix, stands before the verb: as TlfTD*? *D ^li&'TlN 
^np 1 ? 1 P *"fi^D3 wnose ox have I taken? or whose ass have 
L taken?'!. Sam. 12, 3. 

6. Of two accusatives, the one of a person, the other of 
a thing, the former precedes; and the same rule obtains 
when besides the accusative of a thing the person stands 
in indirect relation to the verb : as DlflTfiN TCttfl ilDK *D 
pNiTFlN ntH for unto this people shalt thou divide for 
an inheritance the land Jos. 1, 6. ninmnK 1^ TWV XTl 
fitftil n7i*Ijn he has done us this great evil, I. Sam, 6, 9. 
D'riSN npn'i&y tltyytt) that I may do the mercy of God 
unto him, 2. Sam, 9, 3. 

Note. Many exceptions are to be found to the foregoing rules, 
but as by giving them, we would only confuse the mind of the 
student, they are omitted. 



CHAPTER IL 

SYNTAX OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH.* 

§ 80 THE ARTICLE. 

1'. The article is omitted, when the noun is defined by 
a suffix, or a following genitive, or if it is a proper name : 
as TlStDH JT3 the house of the king; *n*3 my house; orHDK 
Abraham. 

* The dependence of the several parts of compound sentences cannot 
be understood, until the student has become acquainted with the syntax of 
the parts of speech and the influence which they mutually exert in a 
proposition. 



§ 80. The Article. 163 

2. The adjective or the demonstrative pronoun attribu- 
tively employed requires the article, when they belong to a 
determined substantive : as ^H^H VT3 my large house ; 
^H|n ifife jTJ the large bouse of the king. 

3. Proper names originally appellative, take the article: 
as JiJTpn tne Lebanon (the white mountain), ilD^H Ramah 
(the Hight, the high city). 

4. The article has occasionally demonstrative power: as 
Ol*rr this day; D3/5D this time; Jl|tS ? 'J? this year. 

5. The vocative case often takes the article: as *T)fe?\ 
king! 

Note. Except when the article could not have been joined to 
the nominative : not IIIH David ! 

6. The indefinite article is indicated by the omission of 
the il; as JT.3 a house, fcJ^N a man; though sometimes ex- 
pressed by the numeral Ifl^ : as Itltf N03 a prophet, or 
&*>N in the sense of person indefinitely used, standing before 
nouns or adjectives, particularly before gentile names: 
pHjf tTN ajust(man), TJ1J Bfy* a hero, H 1 )!!? C"N a Jew, 
rpj? fc^K a Hebrew. 

<5Ae baker , or a baker of the king ; the servant, or a servant 
of the officer of the executioners ; the song, or a song of 
David ; to avoid t ambiguity a circumlocution Ol&^N > 7) is 
used : as ^H TjVp 1 ? H§N I am a baker of the king ; Jl^KH 
Tfiftb n^the baker" of the king ; "IV"! 1 ? -))ft\D a song of 
David; D'TOtDn l&b 13# a servant of the officer of the 
executioners. 

8. The article must be repeated before several nouns follow- 
ing one another, even when of the same gender or number: as 

I xt-:- t- : • : - : t : |v " t v -: : - - - 

t n^ltD^n JH?ni the great trials which thine eyes saw, and 
the signs, and the wonders, and the strong hand, and the 
stretchecl-out arm. 

9, On the article used as a relative pronoun, see (§ 96, 8,), 



164 Part II. Syntax. 

THE NOUN. 
§ 81. GENDER. 

1. For the neuter the masculine is sometimes used : as 

D>-np5rrSy_ nniyrrS:? up* nj this (hoc) they shall give 

every one that passeth among them that are mustered, 
the feminine, however, most frequently : as J1KD J^?t^ *p 
who has heard such a thing? (*D1 res, negotium, a thing, 
must be considered here as omitted, and the part of speech 
agreeing with it, is employed most commonly in the fem- 
inine, as in German : btefeS, for biefc ©ctcfye, and in Latin: 
factum, for res facta). Hence a verb being the predicate 
of an antecedent sentence either expressed or understood, 
takes the feminine form : as 7JSHJ£^3 P^ *HP5 anc ^ ^ was 
a custom in Israel, Jud. 11, 39. (pb masc.) for *JT1 

prr n$r\ wn; nrir rrnjn njn? hnd from God was this, 

for nm WT? n*n; » riND TlStf^" DDK one (thing) have 

V~ T t- tt t: «: - t - - v u/ 

I desired of the Lord, for W"7NE> 1(1^ 'WJ . Comp. 

nKr rrtw? >? 1. Mos. 3, 14. and ntn nrnirflN n*nj q 

1. Mos. 20, 10. 

Adjectives with the feminine ending either in singular or 
plural, are often considered as abstract nouns, conveying a 
neuter sense: Tmbl righteousness: rpNH niN^tim fifrl-in 
the great and fearful things (magna et timenda). 

2. When the abstract stands for the concrete, the signi- 
fication often determines the gender ; as Wfy ♦ , . Hlhy) and 
the exile =*the exiles shall possess. Obad. 1, 20. 

§ 82. NUMBER. 

1. The singular is often used in a collective sense: as 
"IP5 cattle; JK¥ small cattle, flock; rjp3 silver; H^H wheat. 

2. When these collectives occur in plural, their meaning 
is modified : as D^Dfl grains of wheat, D'£)D5 money pieces. 



§ 82. Number. 165 

3. The singular of patronymics with the article, very 
often has a plural signification : as ^D^il the Jebusites. 

4. The plural in some instances is employed to express 
dignity or majesty, hence it is called : Plural of Majesty. 

To this belong: 

ct. D*rHK God, when meaning the true God most frequent- 
ly takes a singular verb : as D*j"frtf N^ rW'frTG In 
the beginning God created. Sometimes the verb stands 
in plural JD^J* tfTiK tyJVT ng^O when God caused 
me to wander, Gen. 20, 13. At a later period, how- 
ever, the construction with the plural was avoided as 
polytheistic. 

b. *}"IN (antiquated form of plural), the regular form is 
0' JlK; const, st. ^'1K > from the sing. JHK master, lord. 
In addressing the Supreme Deity the form ^"IN is em- 
ployed ; in accosting a person of rank ^"1K (with Patach) 
Gentlemen ! instead of *T1N Sir ! 

c. Hg> the Almighty, ancient plural of "!tj> (Arab. T*1£> 
strong, vehement). 

d. D^Hp the Holiest, plur. of W'Hr) holy. 

e. 7^5 kprd, master, superior, when connected with sum 
the plural commonly occurs: as V^3» H^J^3 his, her 
master, but ^J£3 my husband. 

With the plural of majesty the verbs stand in the 
singular, the adjectives and appositions either in the 
singular or plural. 

5. Words with a plural form and singular signification 
- occasionally occur: as " JTilDfJJ = 0|23 or HDW vengeance. 

' The poets frequently take advantage of this license, to add 
l*power to their language, or to give a period a more musical 
i termination, § 58, 9. 

6. The plural of a compound expression conveying one 
iidea (a noun in the const, state followed by a genitive) is 

formed by giving the first noun the plural termination : 
as ^N1{£^ ^5 Israelites, ^he children of Israel. 



166 Part II. Syntax. 

THE CASES. 

§ 83. CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 

1. The genitive having no proper form is only recog- 
nised by the preceding construct state: as fipV ^? Joseph's 
sons. 

2.' Nouns in the const, state -cannot be connected by \; 
the cattle and horses of the king cannot be translated 

rj^n o)D) ip% but ididi ifs&Tj np_5; not tj^j naio nppb 
DhV9» M nbxni onyp ^Sp rrptfD Gen. 40," i. or 

0T3#b T]7P7 "Igftt H^ill bj3#SiT. ib. 5. Nouns in the 
genitive may be connected: as PlNtl CD*£?fiP HJp possessor 
of heaven and earth, or more usually the word in the con- 
struct state is repeated : as p>S*H 'H^Kl D*££77 ♦rfrtf . 

3 . Several words in construction may follow each other : 
as pXiTDK. WiF) DS the heart of the chiefs of the people 
of a land, GiTO!* *TP2& *Q? H^l and these (are) the 
days of the years of the life of Abraham. The predicate must 
agree with the first as the principal noun; in case the first is 
of less importance, the predicate is governed by the follow- 
ing noun: as in connection with aD all, $1 multitude, "ITOD 
choice, best, especially with ^3 and following participle: as 
Ms?D TPDpJ^ "TDD thy choicest valleys are full, prop, the 
choice of thy valleys is full. 

4. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively: 
as nirV DK"V the fear of the Lord; DHVO ?JTJ tlie wa 7 to 
Egypt; Di*n FbWfifi the ruler of the day = which rules the 
day; Dip fipjft * ne C1 T °f Sodom = against Sodom. 

5. The const, st. is often used when nouns are in appo- 
sition, especially when the genus is .to be defined by the 
species : r\~)Q IPU the river Euphrates: JTiVD riHp the city 
Chutzoth; PH-liT D5 H^irO the virgin, the daughter Judah. 

6. The Hebrew being deficient in adjectives a) the ma- 
terial is expressed by a substantive ^n genitive: as C"|p5 rTl^p 



§ 83. Construct State and the Genitive. 107 

♦ ♦ 

a dish of silver, i. e. a silver dish; ^H? vj vessels of iron, 
i. e. iron vessels; b) other adjective conceptions: as^UJHp^n 
the mountain of thy holiness, for thy holy mountain ; 
ftj5# >n$& Hps of a lie, for lying lips; ^yyg fc*N a man of 
understanding, for a prudent man. 

7. Participles or adjectives to he more nearly limited or 
defined by a following substantive stand in the const, st.: 
as nyj?n VilJ great in counsel; ")Nfl n£> masc, ^N*n D$> 
fern, beautiful of form; pT«£ *§*i*"l the pursuers of right- 
eousness; ^1 HID^' the broken of heart == the broken-heart- 
ed. Infinitives being considered as substantives and even 
adverbs with a subtantive meaning can stand in the const, 
st.: D^HN rQW the dwelling of brethren; f]p3 WJ? a little 
silver, literally: the small ness or fewness of silver. 

8. The word in the genitive may be any word capable 
of defining the preceding const, st.: a pronoun, interro- 
gative or demonstrative: *0 J"Q whose daughter? n^J* *W]f 
who does these (prop, doing of these);, an adjective: blt^Jl p 
(Song of Sol. 7, 10.) good wine ; a numeral: 1HN &£)£#D 
one judgment, fi^OTl flJ^'S i n tne fourth year ; a noun 
preceded by a preposition: *VVEJ3 TT\tip2 as joy of in har- 
vest = as joy of (a man) in h. ; J^fcD HO mountains of 
the Gilboa; a whole sentence: *fl#T tfS n§V ( cf « 9 -)- 

9. The noun following the const, st. is sometimes omit- 
ted and must be supplied. Often the relative .£> follows: 

fiJH* ^ fi5^ a language (of a man) which I know not, 

Ps. : 8i, 6. n^rr-ra WTO Ex - 4 > 13. r£D^P*#nB>K 

Ps. 137 8. cfr. § 96^ 45. 

10. No third word can be interposed between the const, 
st. and its genitive :« hence the adjective or demonstrative 
qualifying the const, st. must follow the genitive: the 
good hand of God rD1t9D D^K T; this book of the law, 
njfl Jininn -)£D ; the little children of the king rjStt ^3 
D^pH » Occasionally intervene: a) prepositions (8) : * 

b) the local Hi as n^TlSnwn into the tent of Sarah; 
JJttD n^"!N into the land of Canaan. 



168 Part II. Syntax. 

c) Ity yet, still, after Sb : >? 'flDBg nijrSs all the while 
my breath is in me. 

11. The genitive is also indicated by 7 Htf'N (which be- 
long V): as b W&7 "Ugfo D'lpH the herdsmen of Saul, or 
by ^ alone : as 1)~f7 "itoft? a psalm of David ; the latter 
especially occurring (a) in enumerations: as DH^J?1 njDJJ^ 
^"1(1^ DV on the twenty-seventh day of the month, (b) when 
many genitives follow one another : as *^>ftb D^H **¥Tl 
^H^- tne books of the Chronicles (literally : the words 
of the days) of the kings of Israel, (cf. § 80, 7.); (c) when 
the governing noun is separated from the governed by 
words inserted: 0*rf?N7 Jl^HJl T# a great city of God, 
Jon. 1, 3. ^bV ]tWf jW? in the second year of the 
king, (d) to avoid ambiguity, cf. § 80, 7. 

§ 84. DATIVE. 

1 . The common sign for the dative is 7N or 7, its abbre- 
viation. The verb JTH to be, when followed by b has the 
meaning of to become: as "JflK ^^^7 VHl and they be- 
come one flesh. 

2. 7 with a suffix of the same person as that of the verb 
is often used pleonastically after verbs of motion, rest, 
going, coming, sending etc. especially with imp. and fu- 
ture: as ^i'^2 g°; ,l ?"^ I win g° 5 MS Dpy^" abide 
ye here. It is a dativus commodi, indicating that the action 
is done for the benefit of the subject performing it. 

3. By 7 are formed adverbs, which express a becoming 
of what the noun says, e. g. J^b (Ez. 12, 12.) to the eye, 
i. e. plainly; HD?? (Job 11, 18.) to safety, i. e. safe; 2Fb 
(2. Chr. 20, 25.) to a multitude, L e. much. 

§ 85. ACCUSATIVE. 

1. The accusative is employed for the nearer object (with 
or without DK § 19, 4.) after transitive verbs. 

2. The accusative stands to indicate the remoter object: 
a) After verbs denoting abundance or want: N7D to be 



§ 85. Accusative. 169 

full, to fill; J£?t^ to be satiated; J^ttf to swarm with; , 
&1TI to creep; t|QJ and tJ]H to drop, distill. Kindred 
conceptions are: 7]"Q to "bless; Tpn in the sense of over- 
flow: D^ll rOD^fl niyD^n the hills shall flow withrnilk; 

tt T: r_" T : ~ 

^pfl to want; 710 to cease, leave off (with Jp, rarely 

with an ace); TDD' to lose (children). 

b) After verbs which signify to cover, in which are em- 
braced all those denoting : to clothe or unclothe, to 
gircl, to crown, to plant, to sow: HCD to cover; W^fr 
and Vf^h to put on a garment, C*5*?n Hi. with two 
accus.; rpj? to cover, to clothe; ft £'3 to strip or put off 
a garment; HI J? to put on, sc. an ornament; 7jy to tie 
or latch the sandals for any one; *UI7 to gird; ^ftj? to 
crown; J?ft3 to plant; JHJ to sow. 

c) After the verbs of teaching, commanding, questioning 
and answering : Ifib to learn ; Ift^ to teach ; "Wlpl to 
enlighten, to teach, to warn; PPV to command; *7Ntt> to 
ask, question; J1JJ? to answer. 

<f) After the verbs to do good or evil to any one, to reward 
or to punish: 7DJI to retribute, to recompense ; tfo%> to 
requite, recompense; J3I1 to be gracious, merciful, com- 
passionate to any one ; CJJ? to punish. 

3. The accusative stands in apposition with the nearer 
object after the verbs which signify to make, to form, to 
build : as TOft? D^KiTJlK fijffi and with the stones he 
built an altar; t]'tJTin nV*? Di> he makes the day dark with 
night. The verbs Dt^ to set, constitute, fflj to give, con- 
stitute, make, PltW *o make, are more usually constructed 
with *J> to express the making or converting of an object in- 
to any special thing. 

4. The accusative is also used adverbially and then an- 
swers : a) the questions of place: Whither? after the verbs 
of motion : as H^H BW") ^ they went up to the top of 
the hill ; rn&H h$T\ fcWJ the" people went out into the 
field. Where? SrtNnTinS DtTV Kin 1 ] and he sat in the 
entrance of the tent/ b) the questions of time: How long f 

22 



170 Part. II. Syntax. 



HDJJ rW rHfcT£ D.7W twelve years they served. When? 
•)7 HHinS DIpN nV^nlVrj at midnight I will rise to give 
thanks unto Thee; Dfi#"H 2*T]/* Ex. 16, 6. c) the questions 
of mood: How? D^hK UhX BhJ n^3 Ex. 11, 1. he shall 

v : v "T : -t t t 

thrust you out entirely (PHD completion). D3*fib*£y ^5PP 
Ex. 16, 16. according to the number of your persons. 

Note I. The above questions are more frequently answered by pre- 
positions: as D^niO !l#jn and we abode in tents. ^2 V^ DH1D 

■ T t: T v ••- • v J • T V .T 

Ps. 30, 6. 

Note II. How old? is commonly expressed by V2 or D3 w * tn 
the addition of the year: as H^' D^?^ DW' ^bfl"|5 D*j?N 
J f^np iilN5>? Abram was seventy and five years old, when he 
went out from Haran. 

d) To define the extent of the action expressed by the 
verb, or to indicate the part to which this action applies 
(concerning, in relation to, as to): V^TTlN ThV\ he was 
diseased (concerning) his feet; *]&£ TUK ND3H (as to) the 
throne will I be greater than thou. 

Note III. This is the Greek ace. synecdochical. 

5. The accusative sometimes expresses the means or in- 
struments : as pK iniN 1D.H they overwhelmed him with 
stones; ^DKJl D"lll ye shall be devoured with the sword. 

§ 86. THE ABSOLUTE CASE. 

1. A noun beginning a proposition, which forming a 
clause by itself is not connected with what follows, is said 
to be in the absolute case, and is usually explained by sup- 
plying: as to, concerning, etc. 

2. This case is used to give emphasis or prominence to 
a word. 

3. It stands a) for the nominative : as J1DI135 ^1^ W\? 
a lion, the strongest among the beasts; b) for the dative: 

as f?$0 ^ ffiy ^"^ tne man °^ PQ wer > to nmi belongs 
the earth; c) for the accusative: as DJVW HftN fpm P'p 
as to summer and winter, thou hast made them ; d) for 
the ablative: J|fj Tprq ~\&X pitfrnjDEI but of the fruit 
of the tree which is in the midst of the garden, God hath 
said, ye shall not eat of it. 



§87. Apportion. 171 

§ 87. APPOSITION. 

1. Nouns are often found in apposition in Hebrew, where 
in other languages, an adjective or another noun in the 
genitive would be employed, especially in the determina- 
tion of number, measure, weight and time: as OHiJ^ JliD*K 
an ephah of barley, fi&TUn "lMil the oxen, the brass, i. e. 
the brazen oxen. 

2. When the first noun in accus. has flX* the second 
noun can take or omit it : as ^DiTfiN VfiNTlN his brother 
Abel, D>Nt »5JJ 7$toj?"fi8 Kemuel, the father of Aram. 
Thus it is with the prepositions : as TTriN Till} 1 ? to thy 
brother Nahor. The repetition takes place, when the sec- 
ond noun is not only an attribute to the first, but is employed 
to give a more complete and correct idea than the first : 
as £Dl^5 £^JO VlViFJ an( ^ they pressed sore upon the man, 
upon Lot; Wjfa ^'lN^ to my Lord, Esau; *)T\Q2 H"lb*5 
in the field, in the desert. Jos, 8, 24. 

3. The noun which limits or qualifies the other, takes 
the second place, except t]7£D)l> which stands regularly be- 
fore: rtoS?> TjS^fl the king Solomon. 

§ 88. DUPLICATION OF NOUNS. 

The immediate repetition of the same noun indicates : 
n) a strengthening of the original meaning, or an empha- 
sis: as Y1^> Y1$ Y^$ earth, earth, earth, hear the word 
of the Lord ! ' ?]T\jp] pT* p"$ justice, justice thou shalt 
follow; b) a great number : as HDll ilHK? JTHSO the vale 
of Shiddim was pits, pits of slime i. e. full of slime pits; 
c) a distributive sense, expressed in English by: each, by: 
as 1D.33 "lp.2? i n the morning, in the morning i. e. every 
morning, Di* Di' day by day; d) a diversity or variety, in 
which case they are connected by 1 : as pN) pN thou shalt 
not have stone and stone, i. e. diverse weights; T\yV m 2b) j?3 
with heart and heart they speak, i. e. with different hearts, 
with duplicity. 
§ 89. SUBSTANTIVES USED IN THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. A deficiency in adjectives is partially supplied by 



172 Part II. Syntax. 

verbs: as 7"U to be great; tfbfo to be full, partially by sub- 
stantives in the genitive or in apposition. 

2. Abstract nouns in the relation of a genitive, take the 
place of adjectives: as 7b the whole of, expressive of total- 
ity, stands for the whole (adj.): as P^N/T^S the whole 
earth, or for all: D^PT^S all nations; Tpfi continuance, 
permanence, for continual : as TDFl *"0 a continual light, 
lamp ; TDflil POty continual, i. e. daily burnt-offering, 
^"1p holiness, for holy: as CHpH HjQ the holy garments; 
D 7iJ? eternity, for eternal : as DVty PHI generations for 
ever (prop, generations of eternity). 

3. Substantives are used for adjectives of material (§ 83, 
6.) : n&*n} £Ttt a serpent of copper. 

4. Personal qualities are expressed by a circumlocution 
with the nouns tJ»N, ^5 lord, possessor, fj: as tiyty B"*? 
an old man (a man of gray hair); JT)b /HH 7J/3 the dream- 
er ; TfT|3 a warrior (son of strength) ; hV)lTJ3 a perverse 
man (son of perverseness). 

Note. A kind of adjectives are formed poetically by Ptf>*73 
^73 before the noun, corresponding to the English in, less: as 
^\\ PN strengthless, ^Hjl j'tf unsearchable, J^ft^ ^3 un- 
clothed. 

§ 90. ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjectives agree with their substantives in gender, 
number and definition by the article (§ 80, 2.). 

2. When following the noun, they represent the attribute: 
as H^HJin yjffl the great city; when preceding, the predi- 
cate: *V#H fiVliil the city is great. 

Note I Sometimes the adjective as predicate follows the noun, 
viz: when several words follow, which limit more nearly the sig- 
nification of the adjective : as HD^' D^ ilZhfi HNtH *V#n 
this city is near to flee unto; fjDNJl jn# K7 bh% OVtl Ity JH 
n.^pDn Lo, it is yet high clay, it is not yet time for the cattle 
to be gathered. 

§ 91. COMPARISON. 

1. The comparative having no proper form is expressed 



§ 92. Numerals. 173 

by the simple adjective with ?ft of, from, which precedes 
the object compared: as VfyiD piHD sweeter than honey. 

2. Hence this form of the comparative is also employed 
after verbs and nouns of quality: as D20 *W?p\ ItJW ^DIH 
the cause that is too hard for you ; 'IQft WjN ^D3n p~\ 
only in the throne will I be greater than thou. Before 
the infinitive, this [fj is translated: than that : as ^)Jf *7i"tj| 
NIB^P m y iniquity is greater than that it can be forgiven. 

3. Superlative. The superlative also possessing no proper 
form is indicated: a) by the article before the adjective: 
as jtpDH NIP! TH David was the youngest. 

Hnan Kirrno * atari wwn % ^pvi kstod 

- - v t - t t-:t •• -: )tt- 

injsn ?nnpn kvttio in^^^pinsowrrno ; 3 >|iyn 
M^irnK nn ^rt^'pn nwttto **%bri ^pimrms 

•PHD8 r *|JM n»n ?Sp_n avrns 

precious 1 bitter 2 poverty 3 good fortune 4 (modern Hebrew) hard, 
difficult 5 value 6 blemish, defect 7 - 

b) By doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter 
stands in the genitive plural: as DHDJ^I?^. servant of 
servants, i. e. the lowest servant ; D'&HpH t^"1p holy of 
holies, i. e. the most holy place. 

c) In poetry the words S*ii/*?' 7N> Hip** HID convey a 
superlative meaning : as *?K H.")D mountains of G-ocl, i. e. 
the highest mountains; D'rt^N W&l a prince of God, i. e. 
an eminent prince ; Hi IT HDTV) a deep sleep from the 
Lord = the deepest sleep; Hlb rtShTKp a tumult of death, i. e. 
a most fearful tumult. 

§ 92. NUMERALS. 

1. The numerals can either follow or precede the sub- 
stantive, with the exception of IflN which invariably fol- 
lows it. 

2. In combinations of higher numbers either the higher 
or the lower takes the lead connected by V as PHi? ^0 VfTJ 

D^yn^in^Dn^jnmtyn^oGen. 23, 1. nnivwyiu? 

■T w - v T -T • ■.:: t r t •• ' • : v . 



174 Part II. Syntax. 

runp nap Esth. 1,1. n$# oyypy &}& &ntr\z trp$ 
tfyib ink^ den. 12, 4/ 

3. The nouns to which are joined the cardinals 2 — 10 
are invariably plural. In higher numbers the singular is 
frequently found, as with DV day, Di* IVty TWttf 16 days, 
Vbb night, Gen. 7, 4. JlJgf year, B*K manj t^K thou- 
sand, J1DN a cubit (prop.: the fore-arm), etc. but the plur. 
is used, when they precede the numeral: as *Wtf nJDS^ D*p* 
18 days, PUb?*l D^IK DHJ^ forty-eight cities, Jos. 21, 40., 
but y% n30B^I D^IHK Nmn. 35, 6, 7. 

4. To the numerals suffixes may be appended: as DyM 
they two, or both of them; UtttihW you three. With the 
dual ending, they indicate multiplication: as DT^D?* sev ~ 
en-folcl ; for which purpose ^JH > DJ^§ time (properly foot, 
tread or step) are often employed: as D**7!0 U??W > Vfotif 
D*PJ?§ three times. 

5. The feminine of the ordinals also signifies a part of 
a unit, hence it expresses the fractional numbers: as JT^*^ 
the sixth part of = J, fV1^31 * ae fourth part of = J. 

6. The distributive numerals are expressed by the doub- 
ling of the cardinals: as D*JC? D^J^ two by two. 

7. When something is summed up, 3 before numbers is 
used, in which case it is to be translated consisting of: 
ISfQi &]£}&% consisting of seventy, Dent. 10, 22. Job 23, 13. 

PRONOUNS. 
§ 92. PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

1. In the separate personal pronoun may be contained both 
the subject and substantive verb: as ^fljitf PJH5 DJ1N ]\i<D 
whence are ye? of Haran we are. 

2. To give emphasis to a noun or a suffix (verbal or 
nominal), a separate pronoun of the same gender, number 
and person is added pleonastically: TiriN TlHD H^H *3N 
Gen. 17, 4.; the separate pronoun being often preceded by 
DJ : as *5N *3K Dj ^yiti bless me, even me (Hebr. even I), 



§ 94. Demonstrative. 175 

Gen. 27, 38. [3 *\h\ tf|pl DJI Dti/?) and to Seth, to him also 
(Hebr. he) there was born a son, Gen. 4, 26. 

3. Vice versa, the noun sometimes occurs, after it has been 
indicated by a verbal or nominal suffix: as I^Il'DK IHNHril 
she saw it— the child, Exod. 2, 6. HiiT nbhlrnK iW3? 
he shall bring her (it), the offering of the Lord, Exod. 35, 5. 
fc*Nn 1KOD when he came, the man, Ex. 10. 3. 

■ T : J ' 

4. The verbal suffix conveys the meaning of an accusa- 
tive, in rare instances, as with jjTU to give, of a dative: 
'JJprti thou hast given to me (Josh." 15, 19.); ^pJW and 
they cried to Thee (Neh. 9, 28.). 

5. When the verb has a double pronominal accusative, 
the former is connected with the verb, the latter with j"lN : 
as ^n'tt'DKI. iriK MliOni and he will show me both it and 
his abode, 2. Sam. 15, 25. 

6. The nominal suffix is often objective in sense : as 
inip? fear before Him ; DDfim DSKTiQl and the fear of 
you and the dread of you. Gen, 9, 2. 

7. When a noun in the const, st. conveys with its fol- 
lowing genitive one conception, the suffix is attached to 
the genitive: as iDpH^p ^D his instruments of war (prop- 
erly: the instrument of his war); *>Vf~]T) ^H my, holy mount- 
ain (prop.: the mountain of my holiness). 

Note I. The personal pronouns are implied in the preforma- 
tives and afformatives of the verb, and are expressed only, when 
they denote emphasis or opposition: as l.tt /J £V)DK JlflK thou, 
thou hast said in thy heart, Isa. 14, 13. wSj/il Oi^'WiT SftK JlD 

D3>rfr*rna< QOTS9 DP** 1 ! ♦♦♦♦ pnyab ^vrpTr^ thus 

saith the Lord : I, I brought up Israel out of Egypt and ye, ye 
have scorned your God; KIHil B*JO ^STlN ^K TW1 I, 
I will set my face against that man. 

§ 94. DEMONSTRATIVE. 

1. The personal pronoun of the third person is used de- 
monstratively: as N^lJiri DV5 i n that day, pointing out the 
more remote object. § 22, 2. 



176 § Pakt II. Syntax. 

2. The demonstrative when standing before the noun must 
be considered as the predicate of a clause: as *1gfa? THpn Hf 
H2?J? 'fc'Jjn this, is thy kindness, which thou shalt do unto* 
me; ,♦.. D(l I^DH 1 ? Hf this is our bread, we took it hot for 
our provision; n&'NiT HNt this is the woman; ^ttf»1 \S\T\ 
that is the man. 

3. The demonstrative when following the noun is consid- 
ered an attribute, and usually has the article: as TV\T\ JT3J7 
this house; n^KH D^^H these men. 

' v •• t • t -; -r 

Note I. fr^H is used to make the subject very prominent and 
distinguish it from other things, and so it may be rendered self: 
• as Num, 18, 22., hence WT] may be joined to the first or sec- 
ond pers. pronoun, e. g. JOH *ji&$ I myself, Isa. 43, 55. frO<7 J1DK 
thou thyself, Jer. 49, 12. 

Note II. frOH > 2"W before a noun with a following demon- 
strative makes the meaning stronger: JlTH Jl/^il £017 this 
same night, Ex. 12, 42. 

Note III. Jl7K in connection with numbers is always placed 
after them: Gen." 9, 19; 22, 23; Ex. 21, 11. 

4. When a demonstrative and an adjective are both at- 
tributes, the adjective is second in order, the demonstrative 
third: as JltH /VUO *)Hn this high mountain. If the ad- 
jective follows the demonstrative, the sense will be altered: 
as ^i"Un ntn ^inn this mountain (which is) the high. 

5. The feminine DKt when separate has a neuter mean- 
ing: as WV HNT Gen. 45. 17. flND") DND thus and thus, 
so and so ; 'nK? tVpV T ^t? DH3 in the integrity of thy 
heart thou didst this^thing). Gen. 20, 6. § 81, 1. 

6. nf is occasionally used relatively: as jTTD* iff Dip/!? 
DH^ the place which thou hast founded. 

Note. |"lt in connection with interrogative particles or appended 
to words of exclamation makes the question more animated and gives 
emphasis: Jit *D who there? H? *N who? H-pHP what then? 
fjj H^H see there ! Relating to time it is equivalent to the 
German fdjon, English now: D*OJ£§ Ht now twice, cf. Gen, 31, 
38, 43, 10. 



§ 95. Interrogative. 177 

§ 95. INTERROGATIVE. 

1. Theinterrog. ^p relates to both genders and numbers, 
usually it refers to persons, rarely to things: as TO^'^Jp 
what is thy name? Jud. 13, 17. HD* TTQ what? of things, 
in questions either direct or indirect, Num. 13, 18. 

Note I, Sometimes *p and esp. HD are used in a prohibitory, 
denying, blaming sense: JIDJIlTTp why tempt ye? Ex. 17, 2. 
JII^I/VnD what do ye strive about? ib. so that it forms the 
transition to a negation; sometimes it is quite negative: 1. Kings, 
12, 16. Job 6, 25. Num. 23, 10. Is. 53, 1. 

2. n in a direct interrogation : 21*K ♦'tlirSN Tfib fitiW?! 
hast thou considered my servant Job ? In an indirect inter- 
rogation, tolieiher : niiTTlK Q^JJN DD^H to know— wheth- 
er ye love the Lord. 

3. In disjunctive questions H is used in the first, DN in 
the second clause: WHtf 1 ? DK rifiN Vhfl art thou for us or 
for our adversaries? 

Note II. *p and HD followed by a relative, become also rela- 
tive in signification: "lb*7 *)^K *JD be who learned; ITn&' HD 
that which was. 

§ 96. RELATIVE. 

1. The particle 1$$ gives to pronouns, substantives, ad- 
verbs and even to a whole sentence a relative signification. 

Relating to a preceding noun that expresses place, time 
and manner, it can denote with respect to place where, with 
respect to time then, when, with respect to manner that, 
wherefore. 

2. The verb or other part of speech that governs the 
word belonging to 1#X (which as relative begins the clause), 
is interposed between them: as iDK *ftVhVJ ^WX ^/©H 
the messenger (angel) whom I have sent, not *"1£^ H^aDi! 

>nt^' ink 

3. 1C>jtf often appears with prefixes, in which case that, 
the personal pronoun, or another antecedent, that has been 
omitted must be supplied: as 'fOnK W*0 QW.W V ^W 

23 



178 Part II. Syntax, 

make unto me savory meat, as which I love (i. e. such — 
as that); DIP Nttl 1#K|for God has heard the voice of 
the lad — in which he is there, (i. e. in the place in which): 

*")&'$* 7 to that person or thing, who or which; 
*1EW flK him who, that which; 

*1LW£? from or of that which; 

*"ltWO as that, according to etc. 

4. *)&% is often omitted, not only as the relative in 
English, when governed by the verb or by a particle, but 
also when governing the verb itself: as (Isa. 42, 16.) I 
will cause the blind to go in a way ty'V t^7 (which) they 
know not, (Exod. 6, 28.). And it was in the day iTiJT 1*21 
(in which) the Lord spake to Moses. 

5. When an entire sentence is the object of the princi- 
pal sentence, Ti^K HK precedes the sentence in the objective: 
as tyiDTT '©"ng *ip\ ^"Oin-n^ n# UJW" we have 
heard how the Lord dried up the water of the Red Sea. 

6. 7 l^tf another form of the genitive, see § 83, 10. 

7. Sometimes, especially before participles, the article 11 
(H* Jl) stands for the relative: as IKVO^Jl that are found, 
1. Chron. 29, 17. tip] iTYirp D^HgJ who walk in the 
law of the Lord, Ps. 119, 1. 

§ 97. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 

1, The reflexive pronoun signifying the accusative, is ex- 
pressed by the reflexive conjugations Niphal and Hithpael 
or in case these cannot be employed, by i/lK > rlilK etc.: 
Do they provoke Me to anger? DHK NiS*7 (do they) not 
(provoke) themselves to the confusion of their own faces? 
Jer. 7, 19. Woe be to the shepherds of Israel VH ^'K 
DrriK D'JTl that do feed themselves! Ez. 34, 2, 8, 10. 

2. Denoting the remoter object i. e. the dative or the 
case governed by a preposition, it is expressed by the suff. 
of the third person: as (Jud. 8. 33.) and made Baal-berith 
God DH^ to them (themselves) (Gen. 46, 7.). His sons, 
his daughters and all his seed ifljtf N*3H brought he with 
himself (him) into Egypt. 



§ 98. Other Pronouns. 179 

HgV 4 DW$rhS 3 dot D*9?ri tvjo : 2 jiSp T 1S rrp.S f S * "ip 

jdhS kVi Dnnso on 5 S^t^ 

V t : • •• - : t 

to chastise, to instruct 1 disgrace 2 to be like 3 physician 4 (§ 83, 6.) 5 - 

3. By certain substantives with suffixes, conveying simi- 
lar ideas to the following: &&} soul. D 1 ? heart, TQ3 honor, 
anp inward part, DJf J?, bone", ' [♦# eye, p^jj I myself, Job 
19, "27. >?# I^D before me, Isa.'l, 16.)," or: my flesh, my 
name, etc.: as i!D73 7DK he hath said in his heart = to 
himself, Ps. 10, 6. And Sarah laughed H^HM within her- 
self, G-en. 18, 12. DVJJ commonly used in this sense in 
modern Hebrew (Mishna): iDVl^> to himself. Comp. Job 
2, 5. 1DVJ? he himself^OVJ? * ' myself, Job 30, 30. 

4. The reciprocals: the one, the other, one another, are 
expressed by VHN t^'N the man— his brother; fining n&*K 
the woman — his sister; 1HJH £"K the man — his neighbor; 
nfilJH H&'N the woman — her companion. 

§ 98. OTHER PRONOUNS. 

1. t?*X or D"JK used indefinitely, signify some one, any 
one. ^0% ^72' ^QT^D without the article, something, any- 
thing. N7 or pK connected with the foregoing: ^3 T^S' 
1T\ p». HEtfN? *6> (HOWP for nDI HD i. e. whatever) 
not anything = nothing. 

2. For eac/i, ever?/ when substantive, t£^N» Jlt^N are em- 
ployed, sometimes in repetition : as £"N ^'*K « C^frO £"K 

To convey the sense of an adjective, the noun is either 
doubled, or 73 is used : as *1M3 ^P.^3 every morning ; 
D1N/3 (without the article) every man. 73 with the ar- 
ticle after it, expresses all, the ivhole: D"lNn 72 all men, 
^PT^? the whole nation, D^rrS:? all nations. Thus Sb 
with suffixes: DD72 J e all, D^ID they all. 

3. The same, himself, with persons X1H» N*Jl (Num. 18. 
23. Ps. 50, 6.); the meaning appears stronger, when N1H 
or N*jl precedes the noun, and njTH* ilKtri follows it: 
n\n FfrfytJ Kill this same night, Ex. 12, 42,; § 94, Note II. 



180 Part II. Syntax. 

with things by Dtf# same, selfsame : nt!7 Di^H D¥#3 in 
the selfsame day. 

4. No, nobody, no one is expressed by |*itf following : 
|W DlK>andJ>K preceding or following: bW5{$ ngT? PS 
the fear of God is not ; by K*% or by D&NJ DipE D£N !]?_ 
till (there was) no place. 

5. Whoever: *ft; whosoever: *W# *1D; whatever, anything, 
something: TXft, HQ or HpINQ following the const, st. in 
the genitive" HD "m Num 23, 3. ftOINfi DN&D Deut. 
24, 10. That which: htftf HD. 'Ut 7V2 

6. Some, several of, by VO\ DJ7H JD several of the people, 
Ex. 16, 27. D^O some of the blood, Ex. 12, 7. 

THE VEKB. 
§ 99. IN GENERAL. 

1. The Preterite and the Future, properly the only 
tenses, convey in different ways almost all the conceptions 
of time. 

2. Their primary inherent meanings are however: Pre- 
terite — what is past or completed; Future — what is in- 
complete, what still continues, and what is to come. 

§ 100. THE PRETERITE. 
The preterite denotes: 
I, The Past, 

a) The absolutely past: as TO T3n$? who told thee? 

b) The historical tense (Aorist) : as ^KFTfiiD* ^^k} /HI 
Rachel was of beautiful form. 

c. The Pluperfect: as Sb5 VSTp^T^ TO TX\tV) and the 
Lord had blessed Abraham in all things, 1. Mos. 24, 1., 
especially 1) in relative or dependent sentences and clauses, 
which define the principal action and in the point of time 

precede it: as HliT tfTjJf T#8 Vd? m fc^ffli and Noah 
did according to all that the Lord had commanded him; 
2) when it is connected in the same sentence with an- 
other past tense: as HN3 ^OUtl VT1 and the sun had 
gone down. 



§ 100. The Preterite. 181 

27. The Present: 

a) In verbs of quality, as Mft to be or become wise, 7l| 
to be or become great, JtOD to be little, small: 'flJDp 
DHDnil /3D I am unworthy (prop, little) of all the 
mercies. 

b) In verbs of habit or frequency: nt^ft*H?N W^5 S|3 ♦IjSm 
my God I trust in Thee, let me not be ashamed, Ps. 25, 2 t 

c) In verbs of state or condition: q^fi ib^ HdSi ?|S mil H^S 

' | V T : X T T : | T T T T T 

wherefore art thou wrath? and wherefore is thy face 
fallen ? 

d) Of a state or condition commenced in the past, and yet 
continuing: tIHDJ? Vtl i"OpP *$$$ tn y servants are cat- 
tle-keepers (men of cattle). 

III. The Future: 

a) In predictions, prophesies and assurances, which' are re- 
garded as certain, as though already fulfilled: Isa. 9, 1, 
11, 8. 

b*) When indicating the consequence of an action in the 
present or past, or when connected with a sentence ex- 
pressing a result : J^JTr?? VEJl "JHN DV D^p^TI and 
if (men) should overdrive them one day, all the flocks 
will die, 1. Mos. 33, 13. 

c) Connected with a sentence standing in the future, when 
it has conversive Vav: "1DN1 hlDS D^? *Op> ^ tVZft 

- t : _ : ~ v t t| : • t t : 

Qytyy&'tlD and it shall come to pass, when Pharaoh 
shall call you and say, what is your occupation? 

d) Or with a sentence containing a future condition, when 
it is either itself conditional or expresses the result of 

the condition: DITOffl ^p3 W&fi IfiOB^tD^ nfijft 
Ofl^ri 1 ! *flH3"nN Now, therefore, if ye will obey my 
voice indeed and keep my covenant, then ye shall be 

IV. The Subjunctive: 

When joined to such a sentence: as *JF1Q1 H^ii ^M"TI1"J|3 
lest some evil cleave unto me, and I die, 1. Mos. 19. 19. 



182 Part II. Syntax. 

V. The Imperative and Optative : 

1) By connection with a similar sentence : flJ^DNn *T? 
BIT'?]* ri^DKI htfijtP ^.prriK go and gather the elders of 
Israel together and say unto them. 

2) After a conditional sentence: as ifi& JJlpDl JMH |5 DN 
iTm N*H n? DN1 if it he a son, then ye shall put him to 
death, but if it he a daughter, then she shall live, 2. Mos. 
1, 16. 

VI The Future perfect: as TpflH "\0)T) fltfE) from the 
time that the continual (sacrifice) will he taken away, 
Dan. 12, 11. fWTltt? HK¥ HN 'jig f VT\ DN when the 
Lord shall have washed away the filth of the daughters 
of Zion, Isa. 4, 4. 

§ 101. THE FUTURE. 
The Future expresses: 

I. a) The future "absolute: as DlttTflN HTOK I will hlot 

out the man, 1. Mos. 6, 7. 

b) The future perfect: as 13J? h ITjT iflN KJR^ *)?&* he 
with whom it shall have been found, shall be my 
servant, 1* Mos. 44, 10. 

c) The present, especially when conveying the ideas of 
quality, permanence, iteration or frequency, or in gen- 
eral and moral truths: V31N 13#1 DN !2y |3 a son 
honoreth (his) father, and a servant his lord, Mai. 1, 6. 

II. The Past. 

K) In all states or actions continuing in the past, and in 
those, which were often repeated in the past : 1N3* ^&*tf 
which (often) came; JJT liD thus Solomon gave to Hiram 
year by year, or D) when the past is expressly indicated 
by an external sign. Such are 1) adverbs of time tN then, 
D*"KD not yet; 2) conversive Vav. 

III. The following Moods : 

a) The subjunctive and the auxiliaries may, can, might, 
would, should etc.: SdKH Sbtf J#J jf# Sm Gen. 2, 16. 

♦mrp wcdtSd irm ft. 4, 14. 



§ 102. The Conversive Vav. 183 

b) The imperative, a) in prohibitions, the imp. never being 

used negatively: tfW VpU?$ tib) 'W^TVXb) JQljifl tib 
iiTpJ7!J Lev. 19, 11.; b) after a preceding imperative: 
M(TI Ibtfn S$nfc» ^3 S*S 131 Ex. 14, 2. 

Note, The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is 
always expressed by the future (Jussive): *))# VV be there light. 

c) For the optative, especially with the particle JO : $} 1Di\ 
Oh, let come to an end, Ps. 7, 10. 

§ 102. THE CONVERSIVE VAV. 

1. The conception of time, contained in the principal sen- 
tence of an argument or narration, affects the following 
sentences, determining their respective tenses. 

2. This influence, however, is only exerted when the 
verb begins the sentence, but is entirely neutralized when 
the sentence commences with any other word. ■ 

3. The converted tenses (preterite and future with conv. 
Vav) substituted for the simple tenses, are the same in sig- 
nification. 

4. The preterite with convers. 1 must be preceded by a 
future, an imperative, or by some word or phrase expressing 
futurity: as DfV&OI 1M tomorrow, and you will see; 1iJ7 
^ft/pD 1 ) £9J#? yet a little, and they would stone me. Vice 
versa the future with convers. 1 must follow a preterite 
with its original signification or another word or phrase re- 
ferring to past time : rusn^l TN$ T^H niDTl^'3 In 
the year of the death of the king Uzziah. I saw... Isa. 6, 1. 

5. The converted tenses are only employed when the verb 
commences the clause, so that the copulative force con- 
veyed by the convers. 1 relates also to the time of the 
preceding sentence (which may be either expressed or under- 
stood). But if any other word commences the clause, the 
simple tense must be used: as "DK1 TO^Hl *E)# ^H'DN 
WhVH N^ W. *3*?n iib If thou wilt go with me, then I 
will go, but if thou wilt not go with me, then I will not go. 



184 Part II. Syntax. 

(The converted tense TOpHI is used, because it commences 
the clause, the simple TJ^N* because N7 precedes). 

6. The converted future, following a preterite with the 
pluperfect signification, must often be translated as pluper- 
fect : as wz n$n t#n D!§n nhjo-nx Hem pn?? a*5 

P^B^S D^npVvDN brrj38 And Isaac digged again the 
wells of water, which they had digged in the^days of 
Abraham, his father; and the Philistines had stopped them. 

7. The connecting influence of the convers. *) is not con- 
fined to the time, but also extends to the mood, so that a 
preterite with convers. 1 takes the meaning of the subjunc- 
tive or imperative, if the preceding verb is used in either 
signification: ifr JWJft «•• IfiN JOT) ^N fear him not ... and 
thou shalt do him ... 4. Mos. 21, 34.; oj tlpb) IT Vb&\ fg 
D'TJH WD lest he put forth his hand, and take also of the 
tree of life; U^T^V. DN »J3iTl NttTffl lest he will come 
and smite me, the mother with the children. 

Note. Books and chapters commence with a converted future, 
(*)/pK*l> *iT1 frequently occur) past time being presumed and the 
books being considered as continuations of a preceding narration. 

§ 103. PARAGOGIC AND APOCOPATED FUTURE. 

1. The future lengthened by H — usually occurs in the 
first person (§ 32). It has the signification of exciting or 
urging one's self to action. It also expresses wish or pur- 
pose, when connected by 1 with the antecedent, which 1 
may be translated in order that: M^Nl v HN'Drn bring 
it to me in order that I may eat, Gen. 27, 4. 

Note. The apocopated future, in Hiphil only possesses a proper 
distinctive form, with the exception of n"/» m which it is found 
in all conjugations. It supplies the third person in the imperative 
(wanting), and in the second person, when expressing a command 
has a less forcible signification. 

§ 104. THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The imperative commands or encourages. In the 
latter sense the particle JO, denoting respectful entreaty or 
exhortation is added: as SO HDN say, I pray thee. . 



§ 105. Infinitive Absolute. 185 

2. Prohibition and dissuasion is expressed by the future 
(jussive) with ^N or tf7 : t£^N NJp'^S ^ et no man g° out . 
Hb chiefly precedes the preterite, and if the future, it de- 
notes a distinct command : n^pFr^N kill not ! n":OFl tf 1 ? 
thou shalt not kill! 

3. The imperative following the future, is sometimes trans- 
lated by the future : as ^DfrO 03 ' W?N I W1 ^ g lve to you 
and ye shall eat. 

4. Two imperatives following each other, stand in the 
relation of cause and effect: VIT) W£ DKf this do, that ye 
may live, (prop, and live) }H N^pi '^ irfr Sj; CDfO 
write them upon the table of thy heart, so shalt thou 
find favor, (prop, and find favor) Prov. 3, 3. 

'§ 105. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 

1. The infinitive absolute being for the most part used 
adverbially, and either preceding or following the finite 
verb, denotes increased intensity of action, certainty or con- 
firmation : as Tp*"D?$ n*").?"*? I W *H greatly bless thee ; 
|?r#" n ^ n ?^* nyib! and I will exceedingly multiply 
thy seed. 

2. The inf. abs. is employed for the finite verb, when 
several actions of the same person are spoken of success- 
ively. The first verb is then found in the requisite finite 
form, the following verbs taking the form of abstract nouns in 
the infin. abs.: as Gen. 41, 43.; 1. Sam. 2, 28.; Jer. 14, 5. 

3. The infin. abs. occasionally begins the sentence in 
an animated style, which resembles the case absolute of 
nouns. The context determines the translation: as jhn 

rvuM nna *3 men Si:)* r n Wi ^3 Sbx r*hf titwh ipa 

T T T • t : tj— t : TT t| t:|tt 

slaying oxen and slaughtering sheep, eating flesh and 
drinking wine, let us eat and drink, for to-morrow we 
shall die, Isa. 22, 13. 

4. Most frequently, the infin. absolute has the sense of 
a very emphatic imperative : as fiiODI Tli^H Go and call 
Jer. 2, 2. teftjjjb HW^ Oi*"fitf ^i3N Remember the sab- 
bath day to sanctify it, 2. Mosj 20, 9. 

24 



186 Part II. Syntax. 

5. To give more emphasis, trie infin. absol. is often used 
in expressions, where we would expect the inf. construct: 
as yen nDS learn to do well, Isa. 1, 17. VDTO ttK tf? 
T]i7n they would not walk. in His ways, Isa. 42, 24. 

6. The infinitive absolute is sometimes employed as a 
mere adverb : as TT\T\ J13DD T\T>XW\ and thou shalt rub 

I •• t TV- t I : - t : 

(some) of it very small, (from ppl Inf. Hi. to beat small, 
break in pieces). 

7. An inf. absol. immediately following the same verb, 
and appearing to convey one idea, adds to its signification 
completeness and duration. This infinitive is translated 
by: always, further, continually, totally, utterly etc.: as 

T^C 7 ^?3 he is <i uite s° ne ' ^ ^ yynvf 'BW hear y e 

indeed, and see ye indeed. When two infinitives of this 
kind (one of the same, the other of another verb) follow 
the verb, the expression receives additional force : as N¥*1 
UitSH NW it went out to and fro (going and returning), 
^3*11 DD^D DJ^N *"Q"IN T anc ^ I spake unto you, rising 
up early and speaking, Jer. 7. 13. Tl^Jl is most fre- 
quently used in this manner. By its infinitive Tjibn the 
continuance or the gradual progress of an action is indi- 
cated: as TiDIT) Tli/H VH D^n*! and the waters decreased 
continually (were going and decreasing). Sometimes by 
the participle: 1)®) *TJll Iph fTH T^rn and the lad 
became greater and better (went and grew and was good). 

§ 106. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 

1. The infinitive constructs are considered as verbal nouns 
(the English: ing) and occur in all cases, with suffixes 
and prepositions: as 03*73^ Ei*3 ^ n * ne ^J of jour eating. 

2. The abbreviated 0"hn (§ 30, 1.) are joined with the 
infin. — constituting gerunds — : as 13 U^iD in his light- 
ening upon him, i. e. when he alighted.' Subordinate 
clauses conveying the idea of time, are most frequently 
denoted by the infinitive with 3 and D ♦ When the action 
is understood as of prior occurrence D is used (most gener- 



§ 10G„ Infinitive Construct. 187 

erally, giving the infinitive the meaning of the pluperfect), 
but 3 when taking place at the same time: t^K "TDJTN^I 

vnx -l 7N tipi* injinrD ^^ and tliere stood no man wita 

him, while Joseph made himself known unto his brethren, 

i. Mos. 45, 2. i:^k iiinnro itt>9J rn$ w^ "i^S tliat 

we saw the distress of his soul, when he implored us, 

i. Mos. 42, 2i. in^npS y^ipyivsw-nx I? 1 ? JW3 TO 

when Laban had heard the report of Jacob, he ran to- 
wards him, i. Mos. 29, is. D£W? nnter\-p w^ipKi^j-i 

and the sons, of Jacob came from the field, when they had 
heard... 1. Mos. 43, 7, *7 maybe variously rendered: to, fa7Z, 
#/i«£, so £/i«£, because, ivhen, about: ^D"! 1 ? H75 he finished 
to speak. When a noun as regens precedes, it expresses 
the genitive of the infinitive noun or the Latin gerund, 

e - g. rrfih fiJ?. Eccies. 3, 2. 

The infinit. with ft is used as a noun in the ablative: 
P?*n "Vlflft 13^1 and they returned from searching of the 
land. Often it includes negation: HipiDft from visiting, i, e. 
that he may not visit; ""D^ft that thou speakest not, Gen. 
31, 29,; "Q^ft that they not pass over, Num. 32, 7. 

Note. )} before the inf. const, denotes comparison of the two 
actions with one another. ^ must he considered as the shortened 
flJ9 » D V5 ' wmen sometimes is still retained: as J^^H DfT DJ^3 
Gen.' 31, 10., for DOWIS; 1*7 "M"? nj?.5 Chro. II. 28,"22., for 
ft *WD* Thus Uftft DD^N Db Gen. 3, 5,. for 0^*0 

• t : : • v : t -: : v : t -: - 

Wftft (it cannot be taken literally: at the day, because Adam lived 
after having eaten of the forbidden fruit 900 years). 

3. The inf. const, can be (a) the subject of a sentence: 
y\& )$> 3ifcD better (were it) for us to return, Num. 14, 3.; 
mn^nk ^DiJ? ^2) JH Jer. 2, 19.; (b) the object: JNft 
WSJ?. TJ'TD Dif?3 V Mos. 22, 14.; (c) the attribute of a 
noun: Tijri rijn Hfib *1R Eccl. 3, 4. 

4. The infinitive of a transit, verb takes the accusative 
of the object and the genitive of the subject; the genitive 
immediately succeeding the infin., and the accus. taking 
the third place: 11>\* HilT njOtr? Deut. 1, 27. 



188 Part. II. Syntax. 

5. The infinitive partaking of the properties of both noun 
and verb, uses a verbal suffix, if the suffix denotes an ob- 
ject, a nominal suffix, if it expresses a subject: as '^nil 1 ? 
to slay me, 2. Mos. 2, 14. h)p 'PHPO as I lifted up my 
voice (prop, my lifting up). 

6. The infinitive, when representing a finite verb, 

commences the sentence : as O'D^iT/S l/O£*0 TW Jos. 
9, 1. As subject it takes its proper place: DiTt DitO £w 
ilD 1 ? 0"WT it is not good, that man should be alone (prop, 
the being of man). As object it follows the verb: as 

irvDn tram 2. Mos. 4, 24. rvrb r\m xy dk Jud. 7, 10. 

7. The verb JlTl to be, the particles V?\ and V$ (inclu- 
ding the verb to be), with ^ and the inf. const, express: 

1) to be about to do somethings to be on the point of 
doing: as NiD^ WD# V *TO an( ^ tne sun was about to go down; 

2) it is to be done, must be accomplished: as Tl'j nifc^ 1 ? TO 
what is to be done unto thee? tfjJSPl ^N T]S"^5lV ^H 
wouldst thou be spoken for to the king, 2. Ki. 4, 13. 

8. The verb JH3 to give, with ^ and the inf. const, and 
the accusative of person, expresses to allow, to permit: as 
T]SnS DJJJItf JJV *6 he will not let you go, 2. Mos. 3. 19. 

9. A peculiar construction is, that the inf. with or with- 
out 7 , following the finite form of the verbs : C]D*> Jl^D > 
^TO> y\W ^NiH etc. expresses the principal idea, the 
finite verb being rendered adverbially: as ("HD 1 ? DfrGnj ilflb 
wherefore didst thou flee secretly? (prop.: wherefore hast 
thou hidden thyself to flee?); -fly V^N y\& nfiD^^I and 

t •• t : t : 

it returned not again (prop.: it added not again to return), 
itfj^ TpW n»JJ n^DJI tfS thou shalt not ^<;Ao% reap the 
corner of thy field (prop.: thou shalt not complete to reap 
the...). 

Sometimes the verbs are both finite, either connected 
by lor without!: Vb&'l 3B*1 2. Kings 1, 11. rppltf 
nty «C>|?3# Prov. 23, 35. ^Sn'^KtH he walked willingly 
(he was willing, walked), Hos. 5, 11. 



§ 107. The Participle, 189 

§ 107. THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. The participle associating in itself the nature of both 
the verb and noun (substant. and adject.), as substantive 
represents either the subject, the object, or stands in ap- 
position, being inflected precisely as a noun: as subject: 
Orb l^MnpiN 15V Prov, 12, ll. as object: *>r\V0 

nyhi tizb^nntix Gen. 37, 17., in apposition: rqh 

"Q4o ^?k"n# 'fijflSW Gen. 27, 6. As adjective it agrees 
with the noun in gender, number and definition by the 
article. 

2. The participle of a trans, verb, when substantively 
employed, is followed by the genitive, as object: 7\t2V? ^iJK 
they that love thy name ; fipn Hpfcy they that keep the 
door. 

3. The participle as verb but faintly conveys the notion 
of time: the part. act. most frequently expressing present 
time, especially when connected with the pers. pronoun: 

Tl^h 03K I g°> tne P ar *- passive past time: hVCT) killed = 
who has been killed. Sometimes the latter is used for the 
partic. pass. fut. (in Latin : ndus): as 1^13 to be born 
(nascendus), Ps. 22, 23. frODJ to be created (creandus), 
Ps. 102, 19. Vpnp to be praised (laudandus), Ps. 48, 2., 
or if formed from an intrans. verb it represents the Latin 
deponens: ITlM nixus, confidens. 

Note. The pers. pron. regularly precedes the partic., to convey 
the notion of present, seldom following: Tl^D^ tyV® *4?* ^P^ 
Ps. 45, 2. *iM HKin G-en. 31, 5. In later Hebrew this con- 
struction is the most common ; ^^ JT1V I know ; *3N HIID I 
confess; ^K J/OCO I adjure. 

4. The participle without pronoun 'and without copula, 
lis very frequently used for the present, in sentences con- 
veying truths of a practical or moral nature. This present 
generally includes the subject and relative or the conjunc- 
tions: he who — whosoever, or : as he — when he, so that 
we would render in Hebrew : he who kills by : ^t?p . 

.iny> imgjD nyi# pn nwp rtop* *$ pnrio w? There 



190 Part II. Syntax. 

is (one that) keepeth silence, because he hath no answer 
in his mouth, and there is (one that) holdeth back his an- 
swer for his time. &2p rfclD UnT] nT)D (He that) 
useth many words, useth many lies. 

5. The participle standing in the place of a finite verb, 
of the past, present or future, always adds the idea of 
permanence or duration: O'THK JTt* God knows; frW *tn3 
a river goes out; fii&^n D3VT1?. your eyes have seen. Often 
the copula is expressed: iViWD IT?! *tt£3n and the lad min- 
istered (was ministering), fizb'ty tTOTXO Wfl tlT\) and 
Hannah spake in her heart, 1. Sam. 1, 13. 

6. The participle according to its verbal or nominal 
meaning, is connected with either the verbal or nominal 
suffix (§ 47.). 

7. Sometimes one participle is added to another, object- 
ively, (instead of an infinitive) to complete its meaning : 
as TiiD? JJUP J/'T £"K a man knowing to play on a harp. 

Note. The participle in a few instances is connected with fTi! 
to express the perfect : y% ttfiZ 'Tftj DiTT^? JA5i V^| 
In later Hebrew, this construction frequently occurs: frO *tV*tl 
rpTQ I came on the way (JYQ N"£) iTD^); njTijP tfaftji ^ 
she "did not drink ("f'0 V'fl HtOlD) 5*WD1K flT? T]3 thus he 
spoke Q"£ T'fi »pVJ 

The future of jlTl > being also employed to express future time: 

ptDN vm cydVa rnonn) 

PAKTICLES. 

§ 108. PARTICLES OF NEGATIVE SENTENCES, 

1. tt7> 7K : K/ expressing the direct and real negation, 
is used before verbs in the preterite and future, ^?K the 
desired, intended or supposed negation is used only before 
verbs in the future; both regularly precede the verb. JC^, 
?&> ^3> >fi'??: X 1 ? and ^3 (the latter chiefly used in po- 
etry) deny the predicate, J*K, }>N the subject: TtoN N 1 ? 
I have not eaten; ptf 1£pn IDp^ ^ they do not 
rise nor possess the land; D-'ffHjf f^i^ 1 ?? ^Dl "tDN the 



§ 108. Particles of Negative Sentences. 191 

base man saith in his heart, there is no God. VT?3 chiefly 
found before an infinitive (where N7 never stands): 73N7 
to eat, hb$ 'aW? = SbfcS 'fiS? not to eat. 

PK (absol. st.) closes a member of the sentence: ptf D1N1 
Gen. 2, 5. p£* (const, st.) appears before the noun, inf. or 
partic. ^5pp p& without number, Gen. 41, 49. 

Note I. The partic. mostly representing the noun is preceded 
by ]*>#, more rarely by tfll ng>3 ^ JHV"*^ Ze P n > 3 > 5 - 
In the Mishna J^7 is often used, when standing immediately before 
the participle, p^ when a pronoun intervenes: tfj) J'^IN N^ 

paw (H"D K"£ D*rrD5), wbti ^ q"d rt"fi ' mra) 

Note II. &7 and 7K may be best compared with the Latin 
non and ne 

2. fg £es£, indicating a prevention of what follows, is with 
but few exceptions, connected with the future: pnpfl [3 
lest ye die. 

3. The preposition Tp, ♦£ conveying the notion of away 
from, is occasionally used as a negation: T|^£Dp IDND TlK 
DiT*7I£. Sam. 8, 7. ...that I should not reign over them; 
TjbDPlb ITON DDJjn ^_ Isa. 5, 6. ...that they reign not. 

§io : e; 2. 

4. The conjunction DK in swearing is properly condi- 
tional: if, provided: as in Sam. 3, 17. God do so to thee, 
and more so, "OH \3£D ITO^ &X if thou hide anything 
from me; but when the form of imprecation is omitted, 
it is best rendered by a negative : not, and the phrase 
lib DK by an affirmative: pNH HK IITV DN if they shall 
see the land = they shall not see, 4. Mos. 14, 23. K7 DK 
D^^ nLyj/X J3 if I will not do so unto you = I will do, 
4.' Mos.' 14, 28. 

5. Two negations in the same sentence do not affirm, as 
in English, but give more emphasis to the negation: as 
DETT) S^7 £]D3 p^ silver was nothing accounted of (in the 
days of Solomon), 1. Ki. 10, 21. 



192 § Part II. Syntax. 

§ 109. PARTICLES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

1. H, kSh (§ 24, 4.). ^Sn is also Used elliptically for a 
whole sentence: ytDPi OK N^H is it not so? Gen. 4, 7. 

2 OX ^ is an interrogative particle in indirect questions: 
as }5^n ntl")D"DN H^Ttf let us see if the vine nourish; or 
in indirect disjunctive questions before the second member: 
as K^'ON Wj; »13 n? nriNH whether thou be my son 
Esau or not. 

Note. The second member is but seldom introduced by IN : 

hlD iK iTIT DDlin ynV >£ Ecc1.2,19. or by n repeated: as 

n5^»l Niri ptnn whether they are strong or weak, 4. Mos. 13, 18. 

3. Sometimes the interrogative particle is wanting, and 
the question indicated by the collocation of the -words, or 
by the tone of the voice: Jit HHN art thou? 03 pWD Tp.il? 
wilt thou hold them still? 

4. The answer ,,2/es" is regularly expressed by a repeti- 
tion of the word to be affirmed or denied : as *"D*1 CT[ 
U}\ *yQW\ hi<T DNO is there any word from the" Lord? 
And he said, There is, Jer. 37, 17. 

§ 110, PARTICLES OF OPTATIVE SENTENCES. 

1. b (negatively $hfo or hh) if! that! utinam ! 
It is coupled with the future : as PjtV Sn1?£{?* b 
1. Mos. 17, 18., with the jussive: TpTQ W iVO that 
it might be according to thy word, 1. Mos. 30, 34., with 
the imperative : •JtfjDB' iS nflNTDK T]N if thou wouldst 
only hear me! 1. Mos. 23, 18., with the elliptic participle: 
^ V]?& '?!£ ^ taa * m 7 people would hearken unto me, 
Ps. 81, 13. if the wish refer to the future. If referring to 
the past, to what should have happened, but has not, the 
perfect is employed, where we would use the pluperfect: 
as ^nft t? that we had been dead ! si mortui essemus ! 
Sometimes ON is used as an optative particle : as ^N")^* 
*h yiy&T) ON O Israel, if thou wilt hearken unto me, Ps.81, 9* 

2. A wish is often expressed in the form of a question: 
as DID Ittnr'P OnON DD1 many say, who will show us 



§ 111. Particles of Objective Sentences. 193 

any good, Ps. 4, 7. A peculiar formula of wishing, for 
'that! is: [IT *P who will give, with following accusative: 
T)y jrV *D would it were even! 5. Mos. 28, 67.; with fol- 
lowing infinitive: as ^iTlO |1T"'P would that we had died, 

2. Mos. 16, 3.; with following finite verb with or without 
1 : as 0(1^ nt 055*7 iTrn JJV V that there were such an 
heart in them! 5. Mos' 5,' 26.'; ^nj?1^ fIV >D that I knew ! 
Job 23, 3. 

§111. PARTICLES OF OBJECTIVE SENTENCES. 

1. After the verbs of seeing, knowing, saying, hearing, 
believing etc. the sentence employed as the object is in- 
troduced by >5 or l ess frequently by !$$ : "D^ *D Wl they 
saw that they had conquered, Jos. 8, 21.; ^ ^J7 T^H *£? 
JlfiN D11J? who told thee that thou wast naked? Gen. 3, 11. 
After verbs denoting the operations of the senses, the sub- 
ject of the dependent clause becomes the object of the 
principal sentence, and is followed by the dependent clause 
with its introductory particle: ni£0 ♦? nlNfTTltf DTi>X K*V1 
instead of: TlKil DID >? I D'rt7N Kin (almost the "'Latin 
Accusat. before the Infin.) 

2. 1£>N : ilW flS^ l^'K that ye may know, that the 
Lord distinguishes,' Ex. if, 7. or "WK nN cf. (§ 96, 5.) 

§ 112. PARTICLES OF FINAL SENTENCES. 

Dependent sentences in which intention or purpose is 
expressed, take the particle: (a) 1&X: *f? 2Q» IWX that 
it may be well with thee, Deut. 6. 3., or the more precise 
\Vl > \Vfcb > "ftDJ^D with or without "1J£'J$ 5 as prepositions, 
they are connected with the infinitive, as conjunctions 
with the future: n*TV tf 1 ? ng>N fj£ that he may not see. 
Ez. 12, 12.; riBP *l#8j |^S GTen."l8, 19.; KOH f J/D 1 ? ib.; 

Ski?!? ?VTt?iin tqis Gen. 22. 30.; »rirr\K ^nfcnn tojs 

Ex. 9. 16." (b). S with the infinitive: 'rY\kr6 "ID Ex. 

3, 4. Ez. 12, 2. (c) 1 : and bring your youngest brother unto 
me njH$0 that I know, Gen. 42, 34. if) #&>>) ftjn^ rttj? 
Prov. T 20, 22. (d) Jfl., ^SlS lest: IT IT^. jfGek 3, 22. 
WSO-^N >JT73Vib! 3,' 11.' 

25 



194 Part II, Syntax. 

§ 113. PARTICLES OF INFERENTIAL SENTENCES. 
Inferential sentences are usually introduced in English 
"by that. In Hebrew that is expressed by : a) "I : as God 
is not a man 3?3*1 that he lies, b) ^ with infinitive: 
'i^tJjTW Jli*DD*7 (thou riast magnified Thy mercy) in keep- 
ing alive my" soul, 1. Mos. 19, 19. c) 'iffe'. HilT H35! 
X&yt? ^?y\mib Igftt the Lord will smite' thee, that thou 
canst not be healed, Deut. 28, 27. d) *3 after interroga- 
tives: as 7JTN *3 TtDTTD what is my strength, that I should 
hope. Job 6, 11. 

§ 114. PARTICLES OF TEMPORAL SENTENCES, 
a) The introductory W1 is of especial importance, as it 
occurs with the greatest frequency in adverbial sentences 
relating to time; b) the prefixes 3 and 3 with the infini- 
tive (§ 106, 2.); e) 1 connected with the finite verb or par- 
ticiple: as, the angel came to the woman rD&*V N^ffl while 
she was sitting; d) the conjunctions: >3 : *fl£Hnn *3 when 
I kept silence, my bones withered, Ps. 32, 3. *WN3 •' 

3np ne>io >m 2. Mos. 32, 19. dk: to rto dk when 

-1 t v -: - • : - • t -r -r 

the vintage is finished, Isa. 24, 13. D"1LJ-> D~I^3J D""l&3 
^nj;T JE33 tpVX Jer. 1, 5. TND \ 'HK3 WD since I came 
to Pharaoh, Ex. "5; 23. !$_, >3 h]l> 1#K "!]/: Jos. 2, 16. 
2. Sam. 23, 10. Deut. 2, 14. 

Note. Sometimes conjunctions denoting time are omitted : 

rrigtf k? toiSi f»*n-Sj; *w ttfpf n aen. 19, 23. 

§ 115. PARTICLES OF CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
a) >3 because: HKt fVfcqj >3 Gen. 3, 14, 17. b) []£ be- 
cause, n#& JJ£, »3 p£: Num.' 20, 12. Gen. 22, 16. Num. 

11, 20. *UTK alone: B^Jjn ^^ for the Lord dried up the 
waters of the Jordan, Jos. 2, 23. c) 3p#> >3 3p& TEftJ DJJJJ 
because, because that: Num. 14, 24.; Gen. 22, 18.; 2. Sam. 

12, 10. d) p-ty_ g.« Gen. 38, 26. e) ): NVTj D£T IS *3g$ 
VW# Wliose is the sea, for He made it, Ps. 95, 5. 

§ 116. PARTICLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

1. a) For conditional sentences the two particles DN and 



§ 116. Particles or Conditional Sentences. 195 

iS are used, or their negations: $b DN and X^ (W). 
ON in case the condition and consequence are real, ^fo when 
they are only presumed : ..♦>£# ^JTDK ♦♦♦ -^h?) ^ DN1 
if thou wilt go with me, then I will go, but if thou wilt not 
go with me, (then) I will not go, Jud. 4, 8. UlTI* {'§11 & 
Sm4 ^iTDn 1 ? if the Lord were pleased to put us to death... 
Jud. 13, 23. Frequently the expression is elliptical, the 
subordinate sentence, expressing the consequence, being 
omitted, whereby *b gives an optative signification to the 

verb: DHVP p.S3 Mf®"^ woulcI tnat we liad died in the 
land of Egypt, Num. 14, 2. ^{fr JTIT Sk^O^ ft that 
Ishmael might live before Thee, Gen. 17, 18. 

OX with the preterite immediately following gives to the 
latter the signification of the future perfect: 1D1 ^fftjTDN 
Tib *3£p if I shall have been shaven, then my strength 
will depart from me, Jud. 16, 17. 

b) »£ if, supposed that: nDtf "D# ftipn ^ Ex. 21, 2. 

Note I. QK is purely conditional, in ')•) the conditional idea is 
often incorporated with the clause of time. Compare Ex. 21, 2. 
3, 5, 14, 18. 

c) n#tf: ♦♦. tyDfc>Jl -)#{$ the blessing, if ye obey ... Deut. 
11, 27.'' " 

d) \r\ or njri •• *S ^JD^"kS JiTI if they will not believe 
me, Ex. 4, 1. rWT)X Hfcty HliT H^H if the Lord make 
windows in the heaven, 2. Ki. 7, 2. 

e) V VDK HK rtfjn = Dfc DK1 Gen. 44, 22. 'St^NI 

©#-nD = nD# dVi* Ex. 3,13. irft^' 1 ? j «orii = jNori d& 

Ex. 4, 23. 

f) 5 with the inf. const,: Gen. 44, 30, 31. \Nb3> 1*T*n? 
Note II. The conditional particle is frequently omitted: 75* 

••• H^ Tl^P ( if ) a thousand slia11 fal1 at % side ••• Ps - 91 > 7 - 
2. The second member most frequently commences 1) with- 
out any particle: JO T\T[ •♦. Wyp JO"DN if now I have 
found favor in your eyes, speak, I pray you, in the ears of 
Pharaoh, Gen. 50. 4.; 2) with V ♦M7ni W. *5*?# DK 



196 Part II. Syntax. 

3) with stronger particles: as ftf , >ft* , tyW'W ^JTVifi ^ 
*#£) TH3N fN* Ps. 119, 92. If it had not "been the Lord, 
who' was' for us ,.♦ !tf|tf?3 D»n W Ps. 124, 2, 3. 

§ 117. PARTICLES OF DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 

As well-as ) H : plW nfW; DJr-OJ : KiSpp-DJ |3©T3| 

both-and $Gen. 24, 25. pjv-bj: CM1 nihTDR'QJ 

D^38"Dy. 1. Sam. 2, 26.; lJMp,njri— D, ^D' Deut. 29, 

10.'; Gen. 19, 11.; Gen. 9— 10. Neither— nor: N^mM-CM- 

iT»V K 1 ? TJ^DJ ^"D^ I- Ki. 3, 26. Either or: itf-iK- Ex. 

2i,' 3i.; ox-nit •• Ex. 19, i3. ; dnv-dn: na^TOW B#?"DN 

blW Eccl. 5, 11. 

§ 118. PARTICLES OF ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 

The most frequent adversative particle is V '/J? 1 ! hut 
from the tree, Gen. 2, 17. All this is come upon us 
fflitB?^ K^ yet have we not forgotten Thee, Ps. 44, 18. 
Stronger: D 1 ?^ D^NIbut: Gen. 28, 19. ON '3 but: thy 
name shall be called no more Jacob ^fcOfc^'DN O but Israel, 
Gen. 32, 29. T]K but, p& but, limiting what precedes: 
K*2 T]K but not, Gen. 20, 12. Ps. 31, 23. 

*3~W although, usually at the beginning of a sentence : 
ll^5n to^rPa Oil although you multiply prayers, Isa. 1, 15. 
ON although: come now and let us argue 03*N&D V!T"DN 
D^&*3 though your sins be as scarlet, Isa. 1. 18. ) although: 
thou shalt die for the woman, whom thou hast taken 
*7JD rV?J?3 Nini although she is a man's wife, Gen. 20. 3. 

§ 119. INTERJECTIONS. 

♦W* *iH, nil, n«» ?TiN. >V?K exclamations of grief, com- 

T T t - : - O 7 

plaint: ah ! woe ! alas ! for the most part with following *? : 
3KlD ^58 Num. 21, 29.: Ufh HH Ez. 30, 2. Ez. 6, 11. 
V^N Micha. 7, 1. HHN with ^ Jo. 1, 15., for the most 
part with D^N HtrT Josh. 7, 7. IlKH exclamation of joy, 
aha! Ps. 35, 25., of terror or mockery: Ps. 40. 16. Isa. 44, 16. 
*3 an exclamation of pressing entreaty: O that ! in addressing 
God with ^""Jjtf Jos. 7, 8., with ^'IN in addressing superiors; 
1. Ki. 3, 17. 



PARADIGMS 



A. PARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 


7 to, sign of the dative. 


3 in. 


3 as, for which 


♦P' JP 


Sing. 




also fD3, 1D3, 

: t 




I.e. *7 to me 


*^) in me 


«»5 as I 


^PD, I»et. ^p, 


(m. ^ in p. }S 






^0 from me 


Tp in p. 1| 


^103 as thou 


!n^^j in pause 


2"; to thee. 
Cm. "J7 to him 


in thee 




T ^00, from thee 


1? 





TJ©9 


"J3 in him 


fillD j as he 


ttpP* poet, ^mp, 


$.\ ToSpoet. 
) f. H 7 t0 h er 

( T 






^7130, from him 


}"13 in her 

T 


niDS as she 

T T 


H3J3JD from her 

T V " 


Pirn-. 








1, c. f)^7 to us 


!)^} in us 


mOD as we 


^D fr0m US 


2. J » to you 

| f - 157 


DDD i" y° u 


D53 as ye, 


d|p 




seldom D31"D3 


from you 








13? 


(m. 0^7 
3 | , to them 

>• J97 


T 


PCD* DHD, 


Dnp, poet. 


in them 


071103 as they 


D71JO, from them 


m* m 





ffffi 



JlN s ig n °f the accusative. j1£$ at, with. 
Sing. Plur, Sing. Plnr. 

1 • «- 7l& TON m e UHK os 'fitf a t, with me !flfltf with us 

T T • 

fm-Tjn^. in P 
2.] ^n« thee 

if. rjnfc 

fm. inN him DHN 1HN at > with him QflN 

them T " with them 



DDflK you irjriK , in p. ^ DOflK 

with thee with you 



3.<! 



If. nriN her JpK nnN at , with her jfltf 

QJ? with. 
w. me w . thee w. him w. her w. us w. you w. them 

fe& ?|pj?, in p. ^sj?, i&#, n&y, usy* D 5#tf - DQ1?' D n&y 



198 



JPret. 3. m. 

3. f. 

2. m. 

2. f. 

1. c. 
Pilar. 3. 

2. m. 
2. f. 
1. c. 



B. REGULAK 



Kal. 
Transitive. 

? t : | |t 

Oftep 



Niplial. 



Intransitive. 



*"0? 

t: |t 

J?"]3? 

: — r 
: - t 

n?? 

ornM 



, T 

rn?,^ 



^ 



IDp 



Jinns 



#l ^p;> 
nSt?p : i 

j?%pj 

— DfJ^Dp3 



:>> 



2 to 



Piel. 
*^P 

rfep. 

n^p 

T>%P 
$©p 

ori^P 
I^P 



Inf. const . *7DD abso1 - ^j? *Sl?pn (!?t3 P^ 



OB [371) 



^Dp. <% 



Imp. m. 


^p 


*133 


bftprr 


Stop_ 


f. 


,L 7£3p. 


H33 


,L ?£ppn 


,L ?9p. 


Plur. m. 


ilStOp 


n^3 


•iSapn 


h®\i 


f. 


mbbp 


t : - : 


mbttpn 

-r : - It- 


t : "1- 


Fut. 3. m. 


Stop*: 


13?! 


^top;. 


%\? : 


3. f. 


Sbpn 


I33n 


^pfi 


tapn 


2. m. 


^topn 


I3?fl 


Wn 


' tapn 


2. f. 


^tppn 


H3?fi 


♦ "It- 

♦7c?pn 


♦tap/? 


1. c. 


Sbps 


13?K 


^p? 


tap** 


Plur. 3. in. 


&i?j?! 


^3?! 


j)Scpp» 


^^P: 


3. f. 


rn^bpn 


n^3?il 


njtaJ3.ii 


n^ppii 


2. m. 


T ^tppn 


H33^ 


itapn 


itapn 


2. f. 


rn^pn 


n^3?n 


nitapn 


njtapii 


1. c. 


T ^P^ 1 


T 13P3 


T ^pJ 


T tap4 


The length. Fut. 


nSap* 




ntapa 


nStDpN 


(Optative) 


t : | : . 




t : | t • 


t : |-~: 


Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 










Part. act. 7£)p 


pass. 7?) tOp 




Spp>3 


St?pJ? 


i 'phiy "> p. 

• : t 


2 ^ID 1 in p. 

T 









VERB, § § 29—39. 

Pual. Hipliil. 



HophcH. 



199 

Ilithpael. 



rh$p 
>n%p 

\rbvp 



*S>t?pn 
nS'Dpn 
rf?Dpn 
nSapn 
>rfepn 

6'tDprr 

BflS&p.rr 

uSepn 



*S&pn 
nSppn 
nStDpn 
n%pn 
^nSiDpn 

6t?po 

fn%pn 



*Sc?pnrr 

nStDpm 
nStopnn 
TiStsprn 



orbtophn 



\Qpm 
vbwnrt 



Sep ^'R>*^prr 


^R-?) Sapn < 


^•Stapm 




St?pD 




StDpiirt 


wanting. 


•fyippn 


wanting. 


,l ?£3pnn 




iVopn 




6i3pnn 




rnbtppn 




ruSttpnn 


Sfcjr 


Vtop! 


^p\ 


St?pnt 


b@pii 


^t?pn 


btopn 


StDprin 


Stspn 


S>t?pn 


S^pn 


S&prwi 


• ^Vpn 


^Of>0 


^tppn 


^Stppiin 


%px 


S^pN 


StppK 


%p.m 


' ^W: 


fato$\ 


bftpl 


^pw 


rnS&pn 


njStppi? 


^Wpi? 


n&toprin 


fepn 


^tppn 


V^cppn 


??®pnr\ 


mSapn 


rnStopn 


n^S^pn 


n&toppft 


T »■ ! •. • 

^P.4 


^copi 


T ^pi 


%\>W 




n^cppK 




nb^pnN 




SlDpl 




t : 1 - : v 



hspft b'tipfi 



Sdpd ^?i?9> Scspna 



200 C. VERB PE GUTTURAL. (§ 40) 

Kal. Niphal Hiphil. Hophal. 



rnpipr 
mzyn 

t : - ^t:t 

rmyn 
tJJTPE7 



inf. const, *-tEj/ abs - ni " D ^ *nibyn nfcjsj? *Tp#ri n^n) nojjn 



Pret. 3. m. 


•iop T 


•TOJgJ. 


*"t'9#D 


3. f. 


«¥»& 


irtwa. 


nTws? 


2. m. 


W, 


J3T91& 


rnp#n 


2. f. 


OTWt 


Ensjy. 


*hdikj 


1. c. 


W0X£ 


w&kj 


TO© 


Plur. 3. 


"9? 


ro?i$ 


n*pj£? 


2. m. 


DJf]^ 


0^1?^. 


D^no^rp 


2. f. 


JOTOJ^ 


ffl"ieB3 


tCHP#n 


1. c. 


«T8B 


HlOgS 


W1QISI 



Part. act. ^ P*ss. f^j; "iDJtt I^D 10^ 









^yn 


TQJltf 




Imp. m. 


iDg 


pttJ 


f. 
Plur. m. 


HDJJ 


'pm 
sfptn 


• :1t" 

noyn 

: |t" 




wanting. 


f. 


nrrajj. 


nipm 

tI: — : 


rmDyn 

t : -*t~ 


njTD^n 




Fut. 3. m. 


iQfi|l 


pflffi 


^Dif?. 


T9J2. 


1QJ2 


3. f. 


"to#£ 


prrjrn 


•Hate 


■TO£B 


TDjjn 


2, m. 


iDjm 


ptW) 


toyn 


T51tt3 


"fairti 


2. f. 


hokb 


*p?Ctf? 


HPJfn 


Tpgjs 


HOI® 


1. c. 


1P$* 


p«38 


TSI» 


T9J&J 


-*t:t 


Plur. 3. m. 


nogi 


*pjffi 


£«¥?- 


W£J£ 


nojg 


3. f. 


njiQjgi 


rtfpfrMj 


rr^©J33 


™nP#£ 


tinwh 


2. m. 


ntpj® 


iptnr^ 


nppi 


n*pJ33 


n?^ri 


2. f. 


miDj;fl 


njpBffi 


n:npj£ri 


njTOSp • 


raip#n 


1. c. 


10$ 


p- r P? 


iMp 


"vpJ9 


™fe 


Fut. apoc. 


(Jussive) 






Tffi!£ 





D. VERB AYIN GUTTURAL. (§ 41). 201 

Kal. Niphcd. Piel. Pval. Hlthpael. 



Pret 


. 3. m. 
3. f. 
2. m. 


- T 

t — : t 


t : - : 


H3-Q 

t : •• 

nnnn 


113 

ro-ia 

t : 


tjinon 

nnnninn 
finnnnn 




2. f. 


now 


nipn^ 


nnin 


roin 


flninnn 




1. c. 


m®h& 


♦flOO^ 


Win 


'finin 


♦Winnr? 


Plur 


.3. c. 


W1& 

—. T 


WWW 


Din 


Din 


mnnnrr 




2. ra. 


DOT 


pemW 


orpin 


DC013 


onnnnnn 




2. f. 


l&wv 


fOiprr^ 


?$?in 


R?TO 


jWinm 




1. c. 


W&J& 


^eow 


knin 


uTO 


^nnon 


Inf. 
Inf. 


absol. 


T 


■' T 

bo#j 


TO 


TO 


TO*? 


Imp 
Plur 


. m. 

f. 
. m. 


txy# 


BPflSfrl 

•• T 

• — : t • 


TO 


TO™ 

wanting. ^ 




f. 


njtantf 


t : - t • 


rums 

t : - t 




t : -t : • 


Fut. 


3. m. 
3. f. 
2. m. 
2. f. 


BOP? 


" T 


TO 

>nnnn 

• : it : 


TO 
TO^ 
TOP 

>ninn 


TOO* 
TOW 
TOOfl 

'nnnnn 


Plur 


I.e. 
. o. m. 




tontrN 

•• T V 


TO£ 

: It ; 


TO$ 

Din* 


TOW 

onnrv 




3. f. 


roernMi mbmwi nmnn 

t : — : • : — t ■ t:~t: 


runinn 

t : — 


ronnnnn 

t : - t : 




2. ra. 


itonpft 


-: t 


innnn 

: It : 


ininn 


mnnnn 




2.f. 


n»wfi rtHjrnsfei run-on 

t : - : • : - t • t : - t : 


-uninn 

t : - : 


romnnn 




I.e. 


ton^) 


.. T . 


113? 


TO? 


TOW 



Pan. ton^" tone^ ipnp TO*? TO*^ 

pass. tOlfW 



26 



202 



Pret. 3. m. 

3. f. 

2. m. 

2. f. 
Plur. 2. m. 





E. 


VERB 


Kal. 


NipJial. 


Piel. 


*ym 


*ytm 


*VW 


T\V0 ^ 


nyws 


nym 


nysw 


Alffl^J 


ny.w 


tW2% 


igjgBQ 


v\ym 


WW 


DfJSWW 


Qftym 



Inf. 

Inf. absol. 






iwi 






Imp. m. 


*ynuf 


ynwn 


iW 




vj?y 


\j?D#n 


'JW 




tynf 


•uw'n 


}y??# 




ruynw 


nj^D^n 


njyra^ 


Fut. 3. m. 


j»# 


j»tf* 


i 


3. f. 


ynyn 


JWfl 


vw& 


2. m. 


ymr\ 


yo^ 


ymp 


2. f. 


ynufrs 


>tf?^ 


<ym<r\ 


1. c. 


you?$ 


POtpfc 


ym<$ 


Plur. 3. m. 


. tyti& m 


W9#? 


W&\ 


3. f. 


nyytivrs 


n$©#ji 


n;y0n ' 


2. m. 


wwn 


Wfcffi 


w?&& 


2. f. 


Hffig^l? 


mjwri 


T\yy%vr) 


1. c. 


po#j 


yto^j 


vWi 


Fut. with. Suff. 


*#d# 







Part. act. 



ytiv pass, jgo^ y^ 



E9#9 



AMED GU 


TTURAL. (§ i 


12) 


203 


Pual. 


Hipliil. 


Hoplial. 


Hithpael. 


*ym 


*#wn 


yntpn 


*ymu?n 


xxyotf 


nynu:r\ 


*W¥$ 


nymufn 


nmv 


t^vsvn 


t ■*: - : t 


tiyrnvn 


w®& 


tWM?7\ 


jij^'n 


wmufn 


dhytev 


nwmr\ 


D$j?w"n 


DW?n^n 



y©# 


TQ#n 


jflDtfn ■ 


j;pn^n 


— 


jajfri 


EP^'O 


ym^n 




yn&n 




yteWn 


wanting. 




wanting. 


— 




m;^^n 




— 


PQ#' : 


1PP# 


1^ 


ymw\ 


y?en 


gp^fl 


ywn 


ymvn 


iWfl 


iNDtrn 


yt2%m 


ymtpn 


*)ttpt#i 


yD^ri 


yw'n 


ynnvr) 


VW$ 


JWK 


vwx 


ymvf$ 


tyftW 


TO 


WDt?* 


tyjptW?\ 


n^^fi 


rujfoifri 


n:j^n 


nyytzwrs 


tyZpt^i 


^p#ri 


WOsfa 


tysnvn 


njgo?^i 


n^jfD^ri 


n^?Di?^i 


niynnvn 


JW'} 


RW3 


JflDfift 


ymv?} 


Fut. apoc. 


PO?* 







ymn 



JWO 



yoyo 



y&r\m 



204 



Pret. 3L m. 

3. f. 

2. m. 

2. f. 

1," c. 
Plur. 3. c. 

2. m. 

2. f. 

1. c. 



Inf. 



Kal. 

T X 

T T X 

T T 

WD 

: it 



ukvd 



F. VERB 

Niphal. 

t : • 
t -• : 



LAMEDII 

Piel. 

t : • 

nN2fo 



«WfO 



k^o abs. (Kftfo) *Nvan «*?» ***¥» ^ 






Imp. 



m. 
f. 

Plur. m. 
f. 



t : 



\xvan 

• :|x • 

mKstan 



N¥9 
'Kara 

UCSD 

rux-sfa 

x V- 



Fut. 3. m. 

3. f. 

2. m. 

2. f. 

1. c. 
Plur. 3. m. 

3. f. 

2. m. 
2. f. 
1. c. 



Kypn 
Kvpn 

wye? 

T V 

wy^n 



atran 

•• x • 

won 

: Ix • 

natvan 

X V x • 

x v x • 



»¥5n 
^^?n 

♦ayon 

n^yon 

t v - : 

wan 



Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 



Fut. with Stiff. 



W5W 



Part. act. 



N¥D pass. ^?|VD NVOJ 



KSDJD 



ALEPH (N" L 


?)- (§ 49) 




205 


Pual. 


Hiphil. 


Iloplml. 


Hithpael. 


*N2flD 

T \ 


*mr?n 


t : t 


•*S©pn 


t : . 


t • : 


t : : t 


HNypnn 




O^VPn 


flNVpri 


t ■•—.:■ 


im6 


nKvpn 


" : T 


nj^peori 


>nN¥P 


♦nwpbri 


•• : t 


VjMfpnf? 


wsfP 


wvpn 


NttflDrl 

: : t 


^pjifi 


Ettsrarq 


BflKSpn 


DTtttVOn 

•• : t 


OflKVPW 




jr>^pn 
tt^pn 


|J>^prr 

*• : t 




n^p 


*N^H abs. 


otton) avprr (xvpn) N^pnn 




NSP3 




Nuprin 


wanting. 


wxnn 


wanting. 


wafonn 
wafpnn 


•* 


t v : - 




t v - : • 


K¥0? 


N'VP! 


WW 

t : t 


Nyorr 


»arori 

t ■ : 


N>¥pfi 


t : t 


Nuprin 


t '. : 


^'V?^ 


t : t 


Nuprin 


vyop 


Wypfl 


^VPO 


VVpfip 


t '. — : 


arabtf 


t : t 


K^DJflN 


wab? 


JiK^Vp! 


wvp: 


WSRJJT 


m^pii 


T •/ ; _ 


t v : t 


n^VDjnn 


WVPfl 


UPVPfi 


ttfiflgfi 


wvonfi 


t v "• : 


r\m^r\ 


hiwbn 

t v : t 


njainftfi 


K2fpJ" 


Vvpj 


t : t 


Kypbi 


NXffi 


W*?fiP! 



NVDD 



N^OO 



KVO& 



KXOnO 



206 G. VERB PE ALEPH (&•'{$. § 48. 

Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal. 

Pret. 3. m. ^N SlMO S^KH SdNH 

" . t - v: v • v: v - t: t 



Like the Verb Pe Guttural, in Paradigm C. 



inf. SbN abs. (Vdw ^xn (l?i ?™ S^nh Sdnh 

'•" ■• t •• • ~: — - t: t 



Imp. m. 


Vox 


^KP? 


*»Nn 




f. 


"SDK 








Plur. in. 


•iSdk 


etc; 


etc. 


wanting. 


f. 










Fut. 3. m. 
3. f. 




)^W. 


^bs! 


- t:t 


2. m. 


feari 








2. f. 


♦Sdkti 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


1. c. 


•»» 








Plur. 3. m. 


hi& 








3. f. 


irtoKfl 








2. m. 


to^n 









2. f. n^jtfn 
i. c. S:>*o 



Fut. Vav Conv. *J2tf*\ , IQtft 

- I" v I- 



Part. act. SON V™s. ^DN SoNJ S^NO SdNE 



H. VERB |"fi (§ 50). 



207 





Kal. 


Niphal. 


Hiphil. 


Hophal. 


Pret. 3. m. 


nwj 


*Wti 


# ^'^n 


*mri 


3. f. 




T 


T • • 


n^n 


2. m. 


etc. 


t : - • 


t : - • 


t : - ■. 


2. f. 




fMMJ 


p#g?i 


n^jjj 


1. c. 


regular. 


W3J 


>n#an 


Win 


Plur. 3. 




^a 


^'^n 


i^n 


2. m. 




d#mj 


D^in 


Dfi^n 


2. f. 




?£#* 


Jfj^in 


t$#an 


1. c. 




M^U 


ue^jrr 


itfjrj 


Inf. constr. 


T\V$ abs - ^^ 


"Eton c^ajro 

"T • 


*^'^n ^.^ c y jn <# a*? 


Imp. m. 


•tfj 


" T * 


^n 




f. 

Plur. m. 




'Eton 

•:|t- 

:|t- 




wanting. 


f. 

• 


t : - 


t : _ T ■ 


mttftn 

t : ••- 




Fut. 3. m. 


m\ 




tfq» 


^ 


3. f. 


wm 


•• T • 


&»#i 


#30 


2. m. 


&yn 


" T * 


B^an 


&m 


2. f. 


»#|p 


• :|t • 


^"^n 


WW 


1. c. 


tsfjg 


"T V 


B*JK 


#4$ 


Plur. 3. m. 


«$ 


: it • 


wy_ 


«?# 


3. f. 


mt^h 


merlin 

t : - t • 


t : •• - 


t : - ". 


2. m. 


ratyi 




^#1 


W|Pl 


2. f. 


ruttfjri 


t : - t • 


m#jn 


t : — ". 


1. c. 


' B^U 


"T ■ 


^ 


etej 


The length. 


Fut. HBfoN 

t : v 


x : x ■ 


. T - ~ 




Fut. apoc. 






B& 





Part. act. 



tfti pas^ t^j coi 



BWHO 



b^b 



208 



I. VERB PE YODH 



Kal 



Nijjihal. 



Pret. 3. m. 


w» 


3. f. 


rw> 


2. m. 


roB* 


2. i\ 


wr 


1. c. 


rats* 

_ T 


Plur. 3. c. 
2. m. 




2. f. 
1. c. 


USE* 



#303 



WU 



Inf. 


TS1& abs. 


0NJ£> -JQt 


' •■• T* 


Imp. m. 


*5& 


Bh? 


3wr 


f. 


*%& 


^T. 


• : |t- 


Plur. m. 


atf 


^T. 


: t • 


f. 


t : ■■ 


ru#T 

t .- — : 




Fut. 3. m. 


-^ 


&h» 


3w 


3. f. 


3#fi 


r^n 




2. m. 


Wfl 


trvn 


3B*m 

.. T . 


2. f. 


Wfr 


♦#TO 


• : |t • 


1. c. 


agte 


»h*jt 


" T - 


Plur. 3. m. 




: |- 




3. f. 


ronton 

t : - 


t : — • 


t : •• t • 


2. m. 


iQ^p 


= r 


totrvi 


2. f. 


t : - 


rusrvn 

T : - • 


t : •• t • 


1. c. 


^J 


tfyi 


" T * 


Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 








Fut. with Vav Conv. 


^1 







Part. act. 



D£» 



pass. })&y 



20)1 



^ (prig. V'£) (§ 51.) 



J. Verb prop. PeYodii 0"£) 209 



Hiphil. 



Ilophal. 



Kal. 



Hiphil. 



*n#in 


# 3?nn 


_ T 


*3;D»ri 


T • 


t : 




T 


rots'in 

t : - 


t : _ 




• n3B\n 

t : - 


s?Og>ir? 


ro?*in 


regular. 


ro&'n 


*fi3g>in 


•pjgftn 




>#3D>ri 


d^'ifi 


i3e*irr 




Wf) 


Dpp^in 


oragnn 




ojijot 




U3t?nn 






3^"in abs - D T in 


>fn) 3^n 


2)^ otej ; 


a^vi db^h) 


arin 




*3a?> 


ae*n 




wanting. 






t : •• 




t : - : 


njaern 


ypv 


3gw 


3&» 


iv?. 


ymr\ 


nmn 


3B»ii 


3'P'fl 


rrtfin 


3gnn 


Wfl 


^t?>n 


own 


♦3t?*ifi 


>3B*n 

• : |- 


3^ri 


3'tjriK 


ng*iN 


3DW 


n>m* 


!Q»B>1* 


*D^V 


ttt?" 


!Qt)>> 


m3tr'ifi 

t ; •■ 


t : - 


ru^n 


ru3t?*ri 


irwin 


totjnn 


i" 


trow? 


t : " 


msgnn 


t : - 


rU3CD>n 

t : •• 


anpia 


agto 


3D*J 


3^3 


n^v 






30*! 


aefyi 




3&»!> ff?":! 





3T'iD 



3&no 



3D>> 31JDJ 

2? T 



3H3*D 



210 K. VERB AYIN DOU- 

Kal. Niphal. 

Pret. 3. m. *3D *DD3 

- - T 

3. f. HDD H!JDJ 

T - T _ T 

2. m. nttD ni!jpi 

2. f. niDp rrap:? 

Plur. 3. c. ?|3D ttD} 

— — r 

2. f. Ji^P }W*3 

l. e. JtffcD UiDD3 



Inf. constr. 




*DD 


abs. Ol'atD) 

T 


*DDH ai ' D ™ 


Imp. m. 




nb 




Dpn 


f. 




'3D 




^DPT 


Plur. m. 




dD 




odh 


f. 






Sty 


Fut. 3. m. 


T 




DD> 


3. f. 


dda 

T 




nbn 


spri 


2. m. 


Don 

T 




ddh 


ddj-i 


2. f. 


♦aon 




npn 


qpri 


1. c. 


»g 




DDK 


DDK 


Plur. 3. m. 


tio* 




ttp* 


ttp* 


3. f. 


rwaon 




t : 


T V - • 


2. m. 


don 




iDpn 


Dpn 


2. f. 


x v ■. : 




-mon 


rwgpri 


1. c. 


ddj 

T 




iDJ 


Dp} 


Fut. with Vav Conv. 


DD>1 

T T- 








Fut. with Suff. 


♦350! 









Part. aet. ^y\0 P aS8 - HDD DDJ 



BLED (jrjt) 


. (§ 52). 




211 


Hiplnl. 


Uophal. 


PtW. 


7>w. 


*3pn 


*3pin 


*331D 


•3310 


napn 


T ~ 


. nrqio 


H3310 

t : 


rvDpn 


ni3Din 

T 


m?iD 


03310 


rrapn 


ni3Din 


P?31D 


03310 


♦ritoprr 


>ni3pin 


. 'fnpiD 


♦03310 


i3pn 


napnn 


6310 


mio 


QWaprj 


Ofltooin 


DJ3031D 


QP331D 


jiT&pn 


Ifflapvi 


|fl33lo 


J0331D 


uisprj 


uiapin 


1:13310 


U331D 


*30H 

•• T 


3p-in 


3310 


D31D 


• 3pn 




MID 




-son 

" T 


wanting. 




wanting. 


nrapn 




ruaai'o 




30^ 

•' T 


3p-v 


33lo> 


3310* 


3on 

•■ T 


30m 


33lon 


33100 


3pn 


3Dtfi 


33100 


33100 


1 3pn 


>3pin 


>33ion 


♦33100 


3P$ 


apat 


3310*? 


3310?? 


130> 

•■ T 


130V 


13310* 


13310* 


n^3on 


• rwapin 


nrniori 

» t : •• 


rurnion 


130fi 


130m 


i33ion 


133100 


n^3pp 


nwpin 


nrnion 

t : •- : 


n:33ion 


3pi 


3pij 


33103 


3310: 


30*1 

V T - 








'J3P! ' 


:d33p? 


WiB! 





300 



3010 



33100 



33100 



212 



L. VERB A YIN VAY 



Kal. 



Niphal. 



Hiphil. Hophal. 



Pret. 3. m. 


*Dp 


•wp< 


*D*pn 


*Dpin 


3. f. 


T ) T 


noipj 

T | T 


wpn 


nop/in 


2. m. 


j?Pp- 


nioipj 


nterprj 


nppm 


2. f. 


npp_ 


nioipj 


njo^prj 


flppjib 


1. c. 


^Pp. 


Tiioipj 


♦niD'prj 


'fifcptfr 


Plur. 3. c. 


m 


«pi 


ifc'pO 


iDpin 


2. m. 


d ??p 


DOiDlpJ 


DiiiDprj 


DJpopjin 


2. f. 
1. c. 


^pp 


jni£ip4 

ttll^pJ 


f0 1D 'pO 

ui^pn 


jAPpjin 
wspjin 


Inf. const. 


*D1p abs. 


(Dtp) * D 'jpn 


*Dpn < D P?' 


D, P? Dpin 


Imp. m. 


Dip 


Dipn 


Qp.0 




f. 
Plur. m. 


imp 


^Di'pn 
*pipn 


wpn 
m'pn 


wanting. 


fi 


mop 


mppn 


^^P-T 




Fut. 3. m. 


D^p: 


Dip? 


op: 


Dpi* 


3. f. 


wipO 


Dipn 


D'pn 


Dpin 


2. m. 


Dipn 


Dipn 


D'pri 


Dpin 


2. f. 


>pipn 


vjipn 


•o'pfi 


>opin 


1. c. 


Dip* 


Dip?? 


D»pN 


DpiN 


Plur. 3. m. 


»f: 


i£ip> 


©•pj 


iDpv 


3. f. 
2. m. 
2. f. 


nrpipn 
loipn 


ruppn 

ioipn 

njppn 


ruppri 

ifi'pri 

ruopn 

t : } •■ t 


n^pin 

iopin 

njopjin 


1. c. 


onp^ 


T Dip^ 


&W 


Dpi^ 


Fut. apoc. 


Dp: 




op: 




conv. 


Dpn, 


ORl 


OR2 




Fut. with suff. 


W*p* 




W*p! 





Part. act. 



DD pass.Dlft DiM 



DTO 



ppiD 



M'ty). (§ 53), 


M. \ 


r erb Ayin Yodii 0"}?) 


§ 53. 213 


Piel. 


Pual. 


JSToZ. 


NipTial 


*opip 

HD'pip 


*Dpip 

HDpip 






rippip' 


nppip 


n;? rnig 


jtuoj 


fippip 


npoip 


rus nwa 


nwoj 


>fiDpip 


>nppip 


♦rips TO 


»iittoj 


npoip 


i^pip 


h? W3 


uiaj 


Dppoip 


DflPDlp 


D^3 Dflir? 


oofroj 


jrtppip 


ffippip 


fry? fcii^g 


fflwci? 


tippip 


pppip 


y3 tfiya 


ittoj 


Dpip 


Dpip 


*|Vj (|3) 


•JtDTI 


Dpip 




r? 


pan 


•IDDlp 


wanting. 




as Dlpn 


njppi'p 




— 





opip> 


opip> 


p: 


?13». 


opipn 


Dpipri 


P3$ 


as Dip' 


opipri 


npipn 


rw 




>ppipn 


^pipn 


73£ 




DpipN 


opip*< 


m 




lEDip* 


'opip! 


• T 




rnppipfi 


ruoDipp 


nr.ron 




lopipri 


ibpipJi 


wan 

• T 




niooipp 


roppipji 


rwpifl 




opip^i 


Dpip4 


>w 








PR 








IKS 






^3! 



Doipo 



doipd 



I?. -pa 



pa? 



214 N. VERB LAMEDH 





Kal. 


fflphoH. 


Pi el. 


Pret. 3. m. 


•nS| 




•ffa 


3. f. 


nn9ii 

t : |t 


nnSjj 


rtmz 


2. m. 


0^1 


n4jj 


T ■• • 


2. f. 


trhz 


n**?« 


jtVji 


1. c. 


•JT^I 


♦0^43 


wfo 


Plur. 3. c. 


'# 


6il 


& 


2. m. 


ditSb 


Df?^ 


DO^ 


2. f. 


P^M 


lO^ij 


1*7^1 


1. c. 


• T 


• w^ij 


^ 


Inf. constr. jll /Jl alas - 


(nS|) (poet, fra) 


T * 


n&i <"^ 


Imp. m. 


*n^ 


*nS*in 


■nVa 


f. 


'Vi 


'^n 


<b; 


Plur. m. 


^ 


**?an 


Aa 


f. 


t v : 


nrSan 

T VT • 


T V ~ 


Fut. 3. m. 


^ 


rhy. 


'7^: 


3. f. 


n^n 


rhir) 


n^iri 


2. in. 


nStfi 


^W 


n ^ 


2. f. 


*!?w 


>%n 


%i 


1. c. 


nSia 


rfost* 


hVjik 


Plur. 3. m. 


fti; 


'& 


£r 


3. f. 


■w^tfi 


tiy%n 


n:;Wi 


2. m. 


ton 


pin 


$3P 


2. f. 


ny!?jri 


rg^n 


prjp^an 


1. c. 


n*?^ 


V T " 


n&? 


Fut. apoc. 


^ 


T • 


^ 


Fut. with Suff. 


'jfe?! 




'J?£ 



Part. act. H^ pass. «fo j| nSlJ Pl^t 



HE (H"b). (§ 


54). 




215 


Pual. 


IiipMl. 


Hophal. 


Ilitlqmtl. 


*rhi 


*rb)r\ 


* n ^0 


*rhjr\n 


nn?4" 


rtn^in 


rrr&O 


nn^nn 


rvW « 


? ,L ?jn) n^n 


ntan 


o%?n 


-r •• '. 


n&n 


n^jn 


ntarin 


Ww 


vy?jn 


v?!?in 


w^n 


& 


tan 


tan 


taiin 


op^i 


Qo^jn 


nntan 


ptftann 


lO^A 


to^n 


jn^jn 


Ifninn 


v&i 


w^rr 


utan 

•• : t 


utann 


rfhi { ^P 


ntan «ty™ 


ntan <nf?»» j 


-ita;in cn^) 




ttan 




nWin 




% 




^jnn 


wanting. 


fyn 


wanting. 


njnn 




t v : " 




nrWin 


?bx 


rta? 


*c 


ths?. 


nVifl 


rtan 


nSVn 


rhinn 


n|ai 


rtafi 


n S*3 


m$V) 


^ 


tan 


ta£ 


^nr\ 


nVi** 


rta*t 


rtai 


tr?^x 


&; 


% 


U 


taw 


m%jfl 


^tari- 


nyhin 


rri^inii 


tan 


tan 


tan 


tar>n 


n^^jn 


ratao 


nyh'yn 


njtajpri 


ri% 


T rtaj 


V : t 


ri;?ipj 




^ 




SlT 




>ta> 







•"taa nSas hS;id nWiE 



216 0. REGULAR VERB 

Suffixes for 1 Sing. 2 Sing. m. 2. Sing. f. 3. Sing. m. 



Pret. Kal. 3. m. ^ ^ T]S^ ' .^ 

3. f. *rte[? ^ap 



into 



2. m. 



♦tflSfcp 



Tfi??3p ) 

in^p j 



2. f. wito — — l" ,: 

i. c, . — ^fiV^j? T^R vp^oj? 

piur. 3. c. vnSpp ?pS&p rvbbp vn*Mf? 

2. m. ^inSi?p — — imnSap 

— ^^n t^or ^V^n 



1. c. 



Inf. Kal. 



ai. c :]t > 'l :|t > H^P ^P 

suff.verb. VTGp) ^pQp) '" : ' T 



imp. Kai. ^Sldp — — nnScDp 



'•VI 



Fut. Kal. 3. m. ljS|pj£ Jj^jpj^ ^Jpjj* ^^ 

with Nun epenthetic '&• *'•' T ». .• : > : j •• : i : • 

piur. 3. m. »^#8j3t ^p^tpp! T^Pi? ^70(5! 



Pret. Piel. *&{$p ^StOp ^Dp lSt?p 



WITH SUFFIXES. § 42—47. 217 
3. Sing./. 1 Plur. 2 Plur. m. 2 Plur.f. 3 Plur. m 3 Plur.f. 

rhtgp : uStop djAq^ .f^ap oSiDp [^Dp 

nnStpp tip^pj? WoVipp f3^Wp: D ^9p : ?r^9p 

nnVep wnSofj — — orh^p jr&ep 

tpaVefi — D^*?ep R^^ii D^ep) pj^ap 

H&Dp afapp DS&pJJ P^Bj? DlVpp) pSpjg 

rnr^top wi^pj — — o^opj P^f? 

nuSpfj — D 5^i? P^&p cm^Dp jufej? 

nSpp T uStpp o?Stpp j^&pp thsp T fStpp 



n^ps " :|t * :,t 



pro 

tv : | t 



nW 



ll^l-J ^|?r 03^3! t^TBfJj DSfc?p? [tap* 

n&W W^pp? — — — — 

nrapp «i7Bj3! M&jp f?&p|?! DiStp^ p^tpp* 



nStpp uStpp Dj^p p*?t?p oSt?p fSt?p 

28 ' 



218 



P. MASCULINE 



1. Declension. 


s 


E 


C 


N D 






i- 




II. 


ni„ 


Sing, absol. 


hero *yfoa 


hand -p 

T 


star 


DD13 


name Q^ 


— constr. 


Tftj 


T 




n?iD 


Dgf 


Light Suffixes. 


niai 


• T 




• T 


»oa^ 




TJ 1 ^ 1 


TO 


i 


l?pi3 


*j9# 


Grave Suffixes. 


Dp^isii 


W7! 


D33313 


D3P^' 


Plur. absol. 


bni:y D vr T Dn -D>T 


• T 


nipt? 


— constr. 


niaj 


T 




*33te 


mot?" 


Light Suffixes. 


nty 


- T 




- T 


. «rtio^ 


Grave Suffixes. 


DSn^l 


D3H* 


03'3?i3 


D3^nio^ 




Fourth Declension 




F, I 


F T H 


Sing, absol. word *")^' r T grape ^V old 

T T T*" 


m 


KingTT7D 


book *^i3p 


— constr. 


^1 


sjs; 


m 


« 


^P 


Light Suffixes 


^?! 


>3$ : ^pr 


>37? 


nop 




tjIH 


TO #. 


^fe 


T|>t)p 


Grave Suffixes 


Djnrj 033:1; D^pj; 


D33 1 ?? 


d ?i?p 


Plur. absol. 


phni d , 3^j; : D^pr 


D'3^p 


" t : 


— constr. 


H.31 


'3W * 


m 


'3 1 ?? 


HOP 


Light Suffixes 
Grave Suffixes 


hjrj gjjr ^pr 
D3ny| 03041?' Dpopr 


D3'3% 


n -?p 
D3*?5P 










FE3VEI3STHSTE 


1. Declension. 


SECOND 


DECLENSION. 


Sing, absol. 
— constr. 


kw npn 


year H^' 

T T 


sleep HJ^' right- npTi' 
T .eousness ,T ^ : 

n^ ripiv 


Light Suffixes 


>npn 


• t : 




top 

• t : 


Ttp;i¥ 




W! 


^ 




nw 


W« 


Grave Suffixes 


D?npn 


D ? J '?^' 


Dproi^ 


Q3rip.iv 


Plur. absol. 


nipn 


fW 




rru# 


nipny 


— constr. 


nipn 


rw 




— 


mpnv 


Light Suffixes 


rvipn 


w# 




— 


Wp"W 


Grave Suffixes 


03'nipn 


oym^ 




— S3Tiipn¥ 



NOUNS. § 61— 6C. 



DEC' 

IV. 
staff Spp 

D3?p£ 

niSp'.p 

. mSpp 

■ >nibpp 

ddthSm 



L E N S I O N . 

"V- VI- VII. 

S D'Tlp enemy ^ seer H?h 



219 
3, Declension. 



a PTp 

W?P 



D'ETPp. 

win 



3?* 
>3>n 

D33W 

DOW 

♦3!K 



in 

D5?n 

nn 

Drwh 



1 3hj 
! »3nj 



I rra 

1 ^?r 
5 Wo? 

D*iror 



1 &p 


D E C L, 

lad *)j;jj power p[\^ 


E N S I, O N . 

worker) fruit H£) death ;-)•)£, 


olive f"p? 


1 k'lp 


-ijy nvi 


Sj£> n? filD* 


m 


s ^^ 


njy ^rsp 




w> 


£Wlp 


zpyj r\ny;i 


rj?j;3 # ^rw. ^rra, 
DsSys Dana osnto. 


D3H7 


t) t: 


onjtt dto 


\yh$& (°rn?> 


DVT? 


*?HR 


nia wi 


^St?^ p 1 - on,y in rno<1 ' *iri^ 

"■*t:t mi Hebrew *.'"-" 


W 


^IR: 


niN >n?J 


^P t d nr\z tiid, 


tw 


0.?'£Hj? 


o?n#3 Dynp 


D5^£) ^a* D3T)i£> 


DDrrr 



TsTOUINrS- § 69-72- 

Third Declension. 

queen poSs word mOtf desert rDTl 

t , : - t : ■ t : t 

f07B 



FOURTH DECLENSION, 



^?!?9 



WOK 



DDn?Sp 
rrdSp 
nir^p 
ttdSw 



I win 

nhps 

WtOK 



♦nmn 

• t : t 

nimn 

T TJ 

nimn 

: t 

♦nimn 



^ig np;v 
Tjnp3v 

DDDp^V 

mpji* 
rvipjv 



coat TUn.? 

mm 



odttd^d DirnnDK DSTiimn D^niMV 



.• : : t ". 

nuro 
♦ntira 



CHRESTOMATHY 



I. Abraham is commanded to offer up his child as a 
burnt saci'ifice. (Genesis 22). 

nox-n orraN-nK no: D^rtSxm rhxn onn^n tin wi 1 

t t : - '.' t • • v: t : v •• t • t : - - ** • : ~ 

ipsa orraN DD^i : sj^ noK S#*t onnri im hv_ rfoyh 3 
m prnr nKi *ifiK rjijj *3#"fi# tip*} lioirnk #3QQ 
: D^iSxn iVnoNng^ Dip^n-Sx* ^- D p^- nSy rjffe ypjri 
: p'rno Dipsrrrw kt» vjyriN orroK Ntsn >£*Wn 01*34 

j t— I t - :-- -1 *•• •: t t : - t • - • • : - 

-rust arras np*i tby^s nrrtt^ niWDBty fto""^ mVj 6 
-rtsn trtttrriN 1T3 np*i to prw-by am nS'^n >yy 

■• t t: I -— I t : • w - v t - t^ t ••*-: 

nw : n*$yn) p$n nan ipj<ft qa ^n npan dx ip*h 
nS'yS nt^n ^tint dWb* oitdk n&*n :nSj?S rrfrn 8 

t ^ : v — v : • v: t t : - v - t ^ : y - 

DNiSNniSnrjKn^Dip^D-S^^i : WDn^'o^vj? 9 
~m ip^l ^VJ?.n-Di\* !f^3 rar&rrritf ditch ce> p*i 
on^N rhsh : tyjjn Sy_£p ratair^ vtn D#n i:g piw 10 

tstfa run nojn ornaN omaN -on &om-m nm^2 

.... .. _ T T . _ T T . _ .. _ . _ T _ J V T . 

vripj? rjatpa tp$ -ids Sw-n -irn xy_) vyirr\$ Drn$# Ntm 13 
*qp*i :i:p finjn nS'yS v^ign Vwrrn$< npy ornaN ^ij 
nrra-owi ""iow i^t n^^ nin^ Ninn DipOT^oiTO? 



Chrestomathy.. 221 

1 5 : dw n-p mtf DnnjN-S^ f#r tje^b Nipn : r fwrr mrr 

is pN*n w« Sb sprits D'lafini :vn\v lyj? m ^vy_ enn 

fco^iwj?ji v^rS# Drrj3» ngn j»Sp3 fiif£?> i#n ip# 

:jW maa Drrba nt^i jn# -fcc-Stf hit 

*^ - x •• : ■ t t : - v ■•- ~ - T •• ; v T . - 

i § 87, 2. 2 § 84, 2 3 § 97, 2. 4 § 92, 4. 5 § 83, 7. 
6 § 76, 2, a. 7 ?*j$y the south-western hill of Jerusalem to which 
rP*iO« with Solomo's temple on it, belonged, was called HilT *V7i 
iT3Tl ^»l or fuller JTjIT n*3 in (Isa. 2, 2.) the temple-mount- 
ain. About this mountain the proverbial adage was current: 
n&S"V nin* "inU on the mountain of God one is seen, i. e. is pro- 
vided for. 8 with "2 of the person or thing by whom one swears; 
here God swears by Himself. 9 § 111, 1. 



II. Birth of Moses. His flight to Miclian. (Exodus 2.) 

lib&l fies*0 TUB vb-m-ng tip^Jh n^o .c*k ^ 

t:t : ■ t: t : : : : " l '■■" 

natm nam wartm kdj ron irnpni i w&2rn tb? 

4 3 Dvnrn :i*rn nst?-^ tpD3 D^m nzrrntf ra D^rn 

'sprjS rijnsTfc Tjrn :ib n^jrno 4 njji^ prng irinj? 

e nS>rrn$< 5 \nir\jrn roiern : nnprvi nrorii^ nStftn cfon 
nparn : ntonsRp? nVp nprirnvbij bbrwginsa ^rajm 

rin^n p npya rngfl* rjS T^p! ^*?n njnirrQ-^e ifi'n# 
s nzhvn r\hty\ >?S rtinsras nS-npKni : n^nng rjS prrn 
*nx 6 >?>7n -rtjris'na nVnpNfn nW* Darn?? N"!P™ 

■fej wan nprn tposrns \m *&l$2 ^p?r\) rrjo nfefi 






222 Chrestomathy= 

onn o*pp 'en nnn^p D'pn-fp ♦:? np*tro_ rwo idi^h 
nin nvp b*n Hjp Dn^3P? k*jr warS** sapi ntr"D Vsft 
-n# 7 ?p e»k jw ^ ann rial rto js?i :rn**p nartf^if 
o^jf*3# rarrj ^'n avi m*! :Sira ^mp^i nvpn 13 
Tpir >p n&rin typfi. n?n npS yanS 'ipan d^j Dn?i?i4 

-ru* rtrjfi pg^t : wi inn pN nDinngto jn^nsarr 15 
rijns »jsd ntra rrsjn n^QVK? shrh tfjscn. nrn irnn 
ntiaV3# pnp jrb^ nttrrSj; a#?i jno-f>\? r^iie 
:f TON pfcc nip^'nS D*ermTtt$ n^Diiij n^ntn^ani 
9 :D T ^rn» $m \y&n npn n$\ "oitfnjn D'irin win if 
:ovn K3 10 j#nnp jtfra npxn jftog S^yr^ naarnis 
naS nbn nbntui D'jnn to uWn nvo b*k pdniti 19 

t tt t - : ^- t "- ■ t ■ ■ ■ : • ■ tJ : - - 

-ng f©?rj? u nj n&b vk) vnirbtf np*n ip&rrng pt^o 
tfterrnK natr'S nato bail :onS bawi iS mnp #WT2i 

• t v v v t v - v t - : I v : J • • t 

ofchji iop-n# N"jp*5 p n^rn jngfa*? in? nisvnjs* jrnaj 
no-n onn crann dm m :nn^ paa w>n u naa ^23 

t t - •• t • -t ■ t - • : - t • : t I v v : • • t ■• - T • 

bnjw S#rn ^p.nnayrrfp bi*n&»->:p w^nonyp rjSp 
nan anp^-DK pTt*?8 yp#*3 :nnaj;rr|p d^SsitSn^I 
kti sapgrnjn prw-nN DnnriN-nN innsrnj* D\ibN 25 

jdniSn im Sk-ib* vtdx wrhx 

... w _.— .. T . . .. . .. . ... 

1 The sibilants ¥> $ and the letters 7, p, 3 sometimes are doub- 
led for the sake of euphony (Dagesh euphonic). 2 The third f. s. 
suff. often without Mappik : Jl — instead of H - ♦ 3 ror D^TMll 
cf. § 12, 6, B. 3. and § 14, II. 1. T 4 inf. of JTT § 51, 4. 5 § 93, 3! 
6 Hi. II. of 7[S> (only in imp. fern.) regul. Vpiil . 7 §55, b. 

8 nj^ipi = m^"irii &. n^. » Di^nin for ji^nri, the 

masc. suffix sometimes used irregularly for the Jem, thus 0.3^ for 
P^ftT. 10 § 106, 9. 11 § 94. 6, Note. 



Chrestomatiiy. 223 

III. The Appointment of Moses. (Exodus III.) 

in** xift \nt? fri3 upn imp? pfcmg 'rqfi nr} mm 
stjnSd ann :nrin D>rtS#n nn-S^t N:n njnari nriK f*&n 

tfaa -iite ruon men «n todm nino mmsbb vbx mir 

.. T .. ,. : . .... : ._ ., : . , '•(_"•■ t - t •■ 

v : - - v .• : v : t t \ x v v - t v •.• •• 'JT'r '_' J 

1 4niNnS np;? nirv *rn rnjpn U£3T*& HP© 3 fim V-un 
: »^n i&th. ngto ngfa -©sen njpn rpnp D\iS# v£n *nbn 

6^3« >nS$ b^N npan :mn ■EfjjrtiDTK vSj; nDiy rrm 
»3 vj| r?#£ nnpn ip^_ >ri-w prr# »rt^ Dpfajj >rtS# 

7^-n k Nt *mn ri*n rnrv ip^n ?Dtffrr^ BBC© *nj 
SUFI! '3 w£ «3M *fipptf DnjjjgrnRi DnvD? to** >£># 

-b$ &T]i nSn rar p*rS# rarn rerfa pjjr^j aorrrr 

9fttflsn ^PQJDl wii f n?fT! n '^?CH *WET! ^|?D Dipp 

nr'N p htot-flg •rwrroi'j >S*? nra V?£PJ3 njis ran 

ioN>ini ripjs-Sg ^oV^l n ?*? ni ?^l :D 0^ cvbS dhvp 

iDnacao b*nfc» ^3-nx *wik oi nms^K n^ ^ oat 

• t : • • ■• t . • •• : v • . : J ...... T 

i2^s^vin3 ?|wW »33K *3 man ^-nn rj»jr n\n?T3 nb#j 

i3i9^i : rr?n ~\nn by d»|rW^ jnaSFi OfigE© diht-jIK 

dhS wiotfi S*nfc» ^rS*t nd ojk mn D'HSkh-V^ rwto 

v t • : - t ■: •• t : • •• : v t • t •• • • v: t v v 

noK no iatf-ria 'Vroo 03^ *r6t?> ogrrybg *ij ( ?N 
i4npN^_ 7 .Tn^n^ n;n^ ngto-^ o'rt 1 ?** "©K*! : Dh^N 
15-rij; *\&m wphg ^nS^' s n^nN S{ntj>* ysS na\*n rt^ 

D3*rQN ^hSn nin^ Sk^^^ ^3^ ^dkh ro TOtr^t d^Sk 



224 Chrestomathy. 

wv~iV oyhx *Tbw npy* t6*o pnr >;iSn oniric >r6^ 

• : v ■.•"-: • - t : | w —.- •• ■• | t : • ■■ v: t t : - •• v: 

• : • v : t w : 

l § 107, 7. Note. 2 § 37, Note I. 3 § 94, 4. 4 In the East a 
mark of respect and reverence. 5 § 83, 6. 6 const, st. part. fern, of 
%)\ ♦ 7 I remain always the same, I am unchangeable. 8 With this 
name the tetragrammaton HlIT in the following verse is identical. 
(See § 18, I. Note.) The correct pronunciation of the latter was 
Jahaveh or Jahveh, according to the Samaritans Jabe. 



IV. The Proclamation of the Decalogue on Mount 
Sinai. (Exodus 19. 20, 1—18.) 

-dim up!! v p -oip *&3 ctt^d wp?i • t? "^"P **? 2 

t| : • - • v: t v t w t v t t vv •• t : • t ! - •- " 

*s£> Tini apgj nw nENn rto ^ekS npn-p mrr vSn 
-Sj? D3p** m^\ onvp 1 ? wfc#; *i#fc Dpwp Dps* : ^r$» 4 
»Vp3 W&R yw'-ax m%) : >Sn d? w N3*n ons^j *&j3 5 

oyn vjprS *np*i rob *fcn :S*n&* ^-Sn nann 1^7 
uyn :nm» vm n#K nwn onnrno hn orvj&7 o^is 

^-: — t t • v -: v •• t • t : - t •• v •' : • v t~ 

ngto db^i r?g>ia nin? n|T^ ^ nptfl ^p! 0?0^? 
^k run n^'o-Sx nirr loan jninH?** oyn nrrnN9 
?jsrbi1 $d# n?i5 D^p ya&?» "V0E3 J$p ME? ^78 N? 
nifi* n^i : njnr^ oy T p *5W*w$ n^'D 135 obiy*? topSS 10 
lorhtiv 10331 npDi btti Dp^Ppl MfiT^tf ^ n#o-*?# 
-S5 yyh rrirr iy wh&n Di>3 '3 tyhvtn nvb DW **P1 » 
ddS notrn io^S 3»ao DjrtrnN nS^ni : ^d in-Sy oj^n 12 

V t t • t ^t ■» t : ~ : ■ : t - r - "tt 



Chrestomatiiy. 225 

*6 trw 4 DN nana- 4 ok m* rrv-ix bpo** Sipo-^ t 13 

T •• : V T • T I •• T • I T T 

i7Dj;irn^ npto nw nrn ^g n&n 6 7yn rjfctoa njir 
is »yp Tj) : nrrn nwn? fctf-W. n^n-p wfe$i riNnp 1 ? 
J0% w# ty.5. ^? rn;n* vbjj tv n## van -fag j^ 
^prrri rjSin nsfr'n Vip >n : n iiNp Trrr*?| nnrn j^rorr 
ina d\hSn *DT! iSiprj ti^g. D'rt^ni i|hf! rtg^b iK?i 
2 T mwirr nate wfra* nirv r±!K tiDab nWr DnsirrSa 
3-^3/ anna DVi7# ^7 njir-tf? JDnajrrra? Drnfp pap 

5 on 1 ? njopi^n 16 :p#S nnro d®3' ig^ji nrrnp pra 
$ nbx fig ipa rop s^ ^jjSjst rrtn; tij» >? 8 dt?2£i J61 
1 60^^ npri rr#jn s : 9 w^ d^3T^&T'I^K d^?"^_ 

7 w^? ?frt7^ nin^otrrns* N&n xb JTftfp T?^ *9rW? 
1 s-m 1( ni3r :n^2 iDtrn** K^n8* TO nwnp.^NVp 

h-rjnp^D- 1 ?? M n*on"f3E0 u D^nrW n^p^m^jiov 

lonpaSp- 14 ^ nfc^n i4 nS ^S.Knin^n^' T5^'n 13 dvi 

:rf^?^8^i s ?(^ii^in ^33; ^$31 ^p\ rim 

iicgjrnx parrnw D*p#rm# nirr n^ D^-n^' *g 

prrw rrjrr ^pa p-by_ *ra?fa Ma rw isrngfly^n^ 

i2^PC F^OB? P©*? ^"^ T^" ni >* n35 : ^Hp-?- n 5#tf 
isnS : 15 reiri *& jtjS pro spr^R ninp^ i^rorr W_ 

|*iom tfS np&> ijr ?pp3 n^n-^S :n^r» kS rtjKjji 

pbrji iWi moan 1/0K1 *pp n 0* HtorjJri6 spp rig 

: p'rnp npjnwri djjh scp \c% ^00" n ^l ^¥& ^p f*n 
i6 way -dt-^w nyotetti way njia-nai Wo-Sk na k vi 

29 



226 CllRESTOMATin . 

oyto'by inan> rvrm Tiayai wrhxn an oarw niDJ 

...... ^-_ t :• v : • -:~ • v: t ^ v : v 

1 t^*1n the new moon, the first day on which the new moon is 
visible. " 2 On the same (the first) day. 3 The Sinai. 4 § 117. 
5 ■jaWi i|g*b or fuller ^fj flpa Tj&'O (Jos. 6, 5.) t#blow 
the trumpet in protracted sounds, i. e. continually. 6 § 105, 7. 
7 Q^|3 face, thenperson generally, ^JiD my person, myself. S Q^OJJfi 
not Ho. but Kal = D"OJ7,fi ♦ 9 7 denotes here: as to, with respect 
to. io § 105, 4. 11 § 85, T 4. b. 12 § 102. 7. 13 § 118. 14 § 98, 1. 
i§ § 104, 2. 



V. Moral Laws. (Leviticus 19, 1—4, 9—18.) 

Ssnfc^jsi n$£hxb% nan : -taNl? nt^rSis* nih? naip_ £ 
:Da*nS# nw >at &rnp *a VHP D'tnp or™ y^pn 
: Da*?f?s? rijrip w rtotffi ;nna^# 1 wyri vato 123$ 2 b^k 3 
niir ^ oaS *fl£i kS nppD >iiSn). dVS^h-^ ^jirksu 

: DD^riS^ nin* *j*t on** atyp ytr\ wb topSn *6 ^rna 
wa^rrKV; : wojte b*n mpe>fi kVi «#pjri6i nijfi *6 {2 
ptfiarN*? :nin?^ spj^j D&rn# n^nj nptrS >p$ais 
-*& npnj; ^w t?^ n^$ 1^7*6 b^n-NV; rpn-ntfu 
^ ^tf^P 0^1 ^50 |£W **b TB? 'Mfo ^0 ^?ft 

nS ?f BSE? ^31 rf2*?$b : ^yo# baata pTjf? VhJ ^ 16 
^35*73 ^t?ntis K*fiTi& rriirt? *i** spn 6 bT*% 10^17 
*6i : bprn& JKtpn v^ t NfrrrN t 7 , i ^DjrruNt WW) rrain lg 



1 § 100, V. 1). 2 § 98, 1. 3 The inf. with suff. like the Scghol- 
ate ^tOD sometimes has Kubbute. cf. § 45, 1. and § 66, 11. 4 § 106, 9. 



ClIHESTOMATUY. 227 

5 7j? "]/tDJ7 to stand up against, fol the blood, i. e. the life, the 
slandererer standing up against the life of the slandered (Ibn Esra) . 

6 3HN with accus. : to love in the widest sense, with 7 of the person: 
to bestow love upon one, to be devoted to. (Fuerst. Lex.). 

VI. The Priests Benediction. (Num. 6, 22— 21.) 

| ioaS VB-^fj prjS"^ ^Tl ♦ ^vh fl&Q^l$ ft\tv s ""DTI 
24 j y*$vfa niir r\?-)y : oriS x "liox wp\ ^Th# to^on ris 
l^s oin ^j* v;a njn? n&! : 2 ^.rn ^n* vjfi riinj -k?> 
27 :D:raK ^i Sinfc>' ♦rrbj; wrus* iofen :oiW 

- -:t -: ■ ~: - •• t : • •• : w - • : ■; t : t 

i § 105, §. 2 § 52, 8. 



VII. Exhortation to love the One God. (Deut. 6, 
4—9.) 

frriir m mrusn nm niir wrtSa mtv bmur iw 

O t : • t : - t : t v t : ••-.•: t : •• t : • ^ - : 

etnjrjn vm jrpap-^rn ^'or^ ^5? i ?" L '?? ^rfa# 

7^57 'Drai^i ^m 1 ?"^ oi*n ^v? *3^ ng>>t n^n 

:^p!rt ^33^31 ?|T!3 ^W 1 ??! ^JT33 ^3^3 D ? #^3*1 

l Refers to DHinn , 2 § 51, 7. 



VIII. Exhortation to revere God and to observe His 
commandments. (Deut. 10, 12 — 22.) 

*-: " : t -; - : t t : t : v v t | v -.•: t : 

nnp\ rv#p-ft# iD#k :^'5rS53^3?V"^3 ^tPg n l n ! 

14 ^N? n l n ^ 10 : $ n1Dl ? W*9 W? '3^ y&Z vnprrn$n : 

1 5 pet? fpnsga pi : nr^^^ pan d w*n ?oeft p?9f n 



228 Ohrestomathy. 

DW"T^ dm onnnx ojnra inm oniN rorrob ww 
itrpn nS Ppfrgn D333 1 ? rby r m othm tn^ 2 Di^ie 
Dtf-wn #tki p^iWi *riS# win DyrtS^ nw >3 ntytf 
nhw tip nVi d^s titiP'tb npfc *niam "ban SiJin hm 

I - • : • T t • v -: t - : • - t - •• t 

jn^p^i or? 1 ? iS nrh ij adw n^so Din* d§^'d ngtyis 
mrr-rust jonvp jt*» po?0 DHT3 wn$ Dwn^Jo 
W :jwn tegtyi prin En inj;n ini* *r?n ^ibgd 
T^n 3 ri^|rn» ?pw n^ip^if ^D^ x,|r H ^?nn 
ryrisx ttv e^fij 4 D*iftt?3 : spyg an i#$ n Wr 3 nini -in 22 
: 5 :nb own »35tt3 ^ri^ mn; r\w rrjjgj npnyp 

1 Inf. of $y cf. § 30, 4. 2 as it is this day, just now. 3 § 81, 1, 
4 § 92, 7. 5 § 84, 3. : 



IX. Appointment of Joshua to succeed Moses. (Joshua 
1, 1-9.) 

■ 2 f 3 jfflvv^s mn; t?k*i mm n;jK n#D mo nqa * Wl i 
?ij8 igfc Dip nigirj no ^3# n#o n'p^S n^'o nn^'p pba 

4 is D^4T*p Tpimn^f 3 aipD-S3 : bants* ^b dd 1 ? 3 
nrn fonbm -o-isno jneftrbN tfrai ntf*o wro Dob 4 

•.•-It:-: t : • - •• •.• •.• • : - • v -: - ■ - : v t 

B .bii|D D*n--ij;i : 5 Dwrn p£ bb mjinrq bi"un nrm iin 
wb's Mfib £"N D^m-^S rDobtt-i mm Wn NiDos 

iotfb ixp fp^o prp pi ton 1 ? nnb orbj# '$VS#)r 
*ii@o Tiomba »tpk n&o rp : y ng>$ rninrrb?? mfe>#b 
n^p Btoj-nS :r|bn ^ ^3 b>?i?>n $pb baofcn po* 8 
rwyb iwn jroS nS^Si 7 dpv is num wao nrn rrnnn 

J : • T : - T T T • T : I • • •/ - T 



Chrestomatiiy. 229 

?pjSg nirv spy >? rirwrSe'i p^rr^N po$ pro ?|W¥ 

1 § 102 Note. 2 § 73, 6. 3 § 86. 4 § 96, 2. 5 All the in- 
terior of the Phenician inland. 6 The Mediterranean Sea. 7 § 56, 
a, 2.e. and§ 85, 4. b. 



X. David slayeth the giant Goliath. (1. Sam. 17, 1. — 54.) 

2-jr'w bwen :d>ett dq#3 hjjQrr^ rtMfr-pj arri nnm'S 
rtnp^ npri 1 ??) *or$*i rh^n ppi£ ypa iaj?&) ^n^! 

3^ onby Smtrn nro nnrrSK onby D'lwS&i : dwSs 

5 i^rS^ ntrro jwdi : nnn niftN trttf iroi mo W h^i 

- : w - : vtt - •• : t t • : ~:t 

c :vpn? pa n#hj pi^i vSft-Sg rtetfro Jinyo'i ♦ n^'m p^jinp 

7 Sr© D*Vj3^ JUNDts^ urjn finrfe bui« ii:p? ifvari p 01 

sSani^ rirnj^-SN *npiiDjn JV^ 1 ? rjSn n|Vn ft^fl 

♦mt^sn ^n tibn n&nSa iriyh wvn n^S onS noan 

••■:.•:- • t -: t t :. ■ | *--.- : •■ t t v t 

9 onWiS ^rox : »Sn tvi b*n osS-ma SwtrS onny dmni 

on w m vrom ib-S^N ♦jn-dki dh^S ddS mil ^dhi ™ 

.o"n k st >n£nrr ^s ^n^nnp^i n^nKDnnDyiDHDj;. 1 ?^ 

fiyo^5 :tt nnvhi) b*k ^-un n ; ?n bi»n ^xnw niS73?5 

*«m 8 vim 2 nWn wbsn nrrnx ^^-Sdi bwtf 

... v ■' t • ; • : - •• : • v •• t : • t : • t 

2 ns* idb«i rmn* onS n*io n?n ♦hnfiN tfwn nm : ino 

f " - " : t : v v " • v _ • t : v -I v ■ t: 

. .._ . T _. _ T i|.. T T .. . • t : ■ t t : : 

3imn in^toi noafi awbtf n^nS^!i id^h n^ vaa ntfoff 



230 Chrestomathy. 

nnx oSn D'V-urr ntrViri rcpn an thi : row ♦pStrm 14 

••-: - : t • : - t : It|t- • t : t - ■ • : - : 

W3 VDK IK?tin nun 1 ? !aw# Sjtt? 7 d^*i rjVrr tttpi : hwf 15 
:dv D^5>st 3jji') 9 nn#rn : B3#n w?en #jn : 8 DnS 16 
JT}&EJ n-jn wbjri ne»« tjtjkS atrnp i^ ttj!? *#? noK*t 17 
a^rin Tit? n^# n#\ i^v.zh naoon pro ntn or? 1 ? 18 
"ii«n oiW 1 ? ip$n ^arntfj tyxn *wh xqn rhxn 
rhxn pnyz hm& ^n-Sdi n»ro Vinp'i :npn lo on:ny 19 

.. _ ._ _ . T T : _ - T- T • T- V ~" |V"- T •- 

-b# ityjg D'bsrrn^ -in pte^_ :n:r$p n*opS nrnrp^ 
: DiWS vn^ Sn^i n:ti nmyftn p'1 d^Sdh nw t 

t : t v : - : • ~ t- t t^-: - - | tt- ■ •• - - 

W">n0f)n ro^ n^iy oygn wx roirn ddj? 1519 arn* 

nil yp0_ nWi Dnrj? na-n dwS? nttisao nip 

:i^o wn*i vifib tow pwrna onijoa *?*oi5» tfw Sbi24 
. . ._ TT . . T - . T .. T . . .. T . . . . 

-hk tnnb s nrn ntyn tf'Nn l4 on win bmw wx ys&w 

Sn$ ngty rj^pn l5 ^.^'];n^n^ tfwn roro n|?p *»rft? 

T?jW :baofc>:5 nrpn rr^jjLVjN rv? dki i^-^^. imv^e 

ng>K #wb nto^np ioaS i&y Dnpyn n*&wtirh$ iri 

>p 9 S*r*» ty_p nino Torn 16 rVn >n^rrntf n?? 

ip*n jd*o DTt^f ntoTBP tpn >? njn Snyn w^gna) 

yp^i nijn^ ^nS nfeTp, ris -to** 1 ? njn nrp mjn iS 2 ^ 

ins n^Sx tiN-nnn d^kh-Sn n^nn Sn "in vn« dn^k 

• t : t • v: ) - - ■ - • t -: t v : : t - • t t • v: 

-\yp2 r\inr\ fa&rj coirp n^'Dj ^"Sj;i n^^ nrns 1 ? npN^ 
aw J-wn 17 nn-! wbn nnj; ^n^y no in id^ :m^f 

T T " 1 T "r T '.-•:-•.•- T T~ V ... - 



ClIRESTOMATHY. 231 

si ^m-^b ta na tpt 737 n$? onnin wotf t :)i#K7n 
32 tpgg 2o vty T d-jn- 19 ^ %r*?s Jtjkb^s in 7£K-n : frrfrjpi 

cn wrn row 7j?r? ifttf btityi^ hfft m^iT^st niV? 
34V5K 1 ? ^31? nm nip ■jwb^ nypsiien ivyfc tinrbb 

35 vnnK Tircn : nyno ntr Kk>n Di7n- 21 nw ^xn xd rasa 

t -: - • tt : v"^- t •• v t -r : v : • -: T t | - 

: 22 vn^ni rnpni ttpD ^pltjrjl ^ Bp7_vso •iH^rn vrorn 

36 ^yypn wSsn frm ^31? ran ninrr 23 ^ ngrrriK 23 oji 

37 nn 7o*n mm D*rfra rijipo *nn ^ dho nn*o mn 

•tv " ' ~ ■ V: : I " •' '.•■•• - - : V - 

1 •ptpSsn i*o ♦&£ air? im 7*01 njsm 7*0 *iWrj 7#a rr&r 

2 38^^^ t^3>3 iTjoK n^r nirn ^7 iTT^? ^^' IB^i njtrr 

:jin^'inK ts^ W^tSj; ngrrj jnip ifjji vig nirni* 
s fcnpK*! nor^ '3 naV? b#*i vno 1 ? Sj;o ftniirnj* nrj ijrri 

, T ........ . ... .. T ., ... T - T ... . T 

40 -jp o^pat ^p.^n n^oii iViEft it? i?pp up :vbj;o 
mo ii^pi ^p^3*i l*r*^8 D^in ^93 ona ogn bnxi 

41 ^m niT^ d Tt1 ^ W^^ 1 ?:-! JW^SCr^jj #35 . 

i-»3irir.3*HH"^^ 25 n#7*i wS§n toag tv^ 1 ? rr|yrr|^^ 

43nn-S« wSsn 70&7 :naao n£rDy ubnN v i 7jo nm 

-n# w^r? ^pH nnpg? '7K-N? nriar? >3^ ^3<7 

. T ...... .. T . . T ... ..... .. _ T .. . T 

Dtr'3 ^Sk-nd ^jw rnoni jrjnm mm *Sn ao nrw 

... I v •• t . • t : I • : ■ -: - v v : - •• t t - 

46 mm am :nmn n^x b&7^ nttnyo 'rtS« mi^m r?in» 

v - - t : - ■• v -: •■ t : • . - - •• v: x : t ; 

;; f 7nii rvoS o?9^'n Jpi; 1 ? njn Dim Dm^ 1 ?? rrjrj© 7^5 



! 



232 Chrestomathy. 

n>npS Dip^ ?fo wSsn Dp- 27 ^ mm ttima oon*^ 

_j. . -J : - ].••— • : • : - |t • tt : -t : v : v 

mn rfwi : ♦nts^srr n*opS rmpsn p»t in -non mn 49 

•t -:•- •:•:- -| : • t t^-:- - J tt- • t •• - :- • t 

111 28 p_r.tn_ ttian^ T3fbi? ^i mvojj^nystpni inyoso 
pa rnrr; innori ^{p^i^ rjn jags* jfrp w^rrfP 

*MPjn i^rn^ n^-nn^i nnrlo?3 n'jgip np 1 ?^ 
n-mrm Smfc^ wn «dd«i :3W*i brrtaa ner£ DWW152 

T • •• t : • •• : ~ I -.t- -T- t • •• • • : • : - 

rash :p^rn^ : nrn^ : Dnj;^r[nn3 owSs ^rr &b?j4 
r0 :t3p^n&*f6 «t^jWT^?|i hrj» pS^p b*w? ^.554 

T t •• v : • t t : •• • :- - : / : - •■ • t 

t: t : 

1§ 85, 4. 2§ 83, 10. 3§ 52, Note II. 4 KVftt ^y\ ex= 
ceptionally J|JO* cf. v. 24. 5 the dW men; some read 0*^5 = N-J 
D*JD*3 to advance in days, years. 6 § 91, 3. 7 § 105, 7. 8 § 85, 
4. 9 § 105, 6, 7. 10 and thou shalt take a pledge in return from 
then*, i. e. a token of their happiness. (Fuerst. Lex.) 11 se. y^JH 
cf. Gen. 29, 1. 12 § 96, 7. 13 fr. JJH. 1*1 was in this word 
doubly pronounced. 15 = tii^J£ , 16 § 22, Note. 17 an en- 
quiry. 18 § 76, 2, c, 19 H 1 ?'^ to lose heart, courage. 20 y^y 
refers either to Goliath, or to D1X, cf. Ps." 42, 7. 142, W 
21 § 76, 4. Note or HN = with, § 75, 5. 22 HAS, Hi. DpOH 
§ 53, 7. 23 § 117. 24 § 83, 7. 25 regular jnV, ' 26 for Jj*#i»I 
27 § U4, d. 28 § 91, 2. 29 § 76, 2, d. 



XI. Solomo's Wisdom. (1. Kings 3, 5—28.) 

Dti^t * r p<*5 rWRi oiSpa rift V"^ ftp] j " 7 ?TP ptf??3 5 
Tisffflpiffi n^j; rtFtfj rib^ n$#n ♦^"I J ?^ n 9 *W6 



ClIRESTOMATIl Y. 233 

ag* ja iVfOPl 0?n Si-un nppn-n?? iVrogflji r|©p a:nS 
7 tin naSon nnK >hSn nsr nnin :nrn ova iNDa-Sy 

V t : ~ : ■ t - t v: t x - : v-~ ~ 

r 2 Kai x nN¥ jhk ^ pp *^3 ♦5flgrj ox -in nnn tppg 
r*6i njar^ *#*? avDy_ rnna ngftj ?p? ^^? ?|T5jri 
9|>ar6 ^?irn** mb6 29# ab sppax^ firm jano n$D? 
iod^i :n?.n "1335 ^irng eisg6 bav *q »? jrjV atrpa 
mowi :nrn naiprna nbS^" b^' *a >:hk wya nairr 

P : t : - t : •;"■ t t - t : - t v -: 1^— t •• 

n^K^i rvy'x && n W" kVi iw ?b tobtwFtib\ Don d>£> 

t : - t : ) v : v v t : - x v } : t : - t : • - • x 

mrf? wu mn ^.513 8 Wi£ mn :bb#9 jopS pan ^ 

:^m Dip*-*6 spTptf) ?f 39^ rvrrKS rpoa t#k paa o^n ab 
i3-N^ ng'j* maa-DJ mortal ^? 'rioa ffa/xrtb if$ 041 
|rtog6 gnna rj^n dw i^sr* 7 ? D ^b£a ^ ^°? n x0 
i5fp'l :^??r n ? ^3^3^*3^ i*n ^r? T#8S VW^ 130 

nin^nn3pnN^^^^lpy^ Niai Dibrj rtirrj rtriW 
i6 ro*brr 4 flK : vnajr^ab rtflgflp tesn trabtf fegs m^y ^ft 
i7n&tynn»Krn :via*? nno^i.^^n-S^ niir d>&>' t bvutf 

nzpi? -fan inx jvaa riaipriNfn ntr'am >:k ^ >a nrn*n 
is naftn rttf&rriy nSm^ni^ ^S^'n oi*a TO JJ?aa 

:n?aa unjjrore^ M nSir rraa upK TP# "Htt ^W«3 
ifflTQ Dpm :vby naatr nufc rMvnrirn mwtrrp hb*i 

jJ(J I : } x x - x *x x : x : ~: x : x - x • x I v "x x~ 

>i^3Ti^ p^n 1 ? npaa op*n :^n3 nao^'n nsrt njarntn 

rrrtV n^'N ^3 irrn* 1 ? n^ni npaa vSx piap^tj riD7T|rn 

|niDN rufti nan ^331 ^nn ^3 '3 nS nirr^n n^N.fSpKn? 

>s rjS®n nDN^. : ^S^n ^ nrai^ii w ^31 m??D ^.? '3 ^ 

30 



234 Chrestomathy. 

rp.5 g *6 rr$a «*n npn rprn *nn ^3- 8 n.t: nnpk natf 
♦j&S mnrr wm mmS ^np riSsn nDtfi : 9 w 'jm mn 24 

m?"i^ ngMi "©^J i 9 nn«V ^DD'Wl^nN^VDJi 26 
~m >im '3 "©Khi &#"*?# rrarn npsr? ^95"^ TO 
-oj ♦Vp3 flick wfrj p? W 1 ^ fiPCH TO n&frrttt nS 
TO ^ T irn*< rh'ur) Tgtfr\ r\bm jjn : lo rirj rw ^ ^i 

DSBtorrriK Sm^ -Sa worn : iqn K>n ynrmn lib nom 28 
pft^nwn $ isq >? rj^rr ^p no»i rj^pn togr n#j* 

jb|k#? nifc>i& ir)p3 

l Inexperienced. 2 J^l N¥* to go out and in, denotes me- 
taphorically the actions and conduct of a man, (Fuerst Lex.) 
« § 100, III. a) 4 § 101, II. 3). 5 § 83, 11, (c). 6 >— p ara- 
gogic == fl^lf ♦ 7 An expression of humility for L 8 § 94, 2. 
9 In pause. 10 § 34, 6. 



XII. The happiness of the godly, the misery of the 
wicked (Ps. 1.) 

wmn rjTpi D'i?En mi£ rjSrr kS i#$ tfwn ^jpfc i 

o^lbgrhjlL Ww'pis irrp :nVSi dov n#r innirod 
: n^vi h^2n^ Vm : Si^-kS ^rrSjn my? j# in? n#K 

ritir mv*3 jD*p*nr mya owsm BSBtea oWt w 6 

t : - •• | ■ - - : - • t - .- t : ■ - w - t : | vt 

1 *")^tf happiness; only in plur. construct in the character of 
an interjection: O the happiness of the man ! 2 §44, 5. 



Xln. The character of a godly man. (Ps. 15.) 

• *|#7f? ^D? ppTV ^?D£? ^r^ n 3 n - ^H 1 ? "fi^tS 



ClIRESTOMATTIY. 285 

?r"by_ hrrth nn^? rip?* imi piv ^ 8 tw?0 2ta |^ n 
4HDi nrhp-Si; Ktm& nsnrn njn injnS n^r^ tt^? 

I : T T t : v : "t t ^- •• : t w t 

:y&to) 6 innS w i3D* mw wv-ntfi 6 dmm wjd 

t . T : - : ■ •• - : T : •• : • v : t : • t '- : 

t ^ : 

l §83, 11, 2 §107, 4. 8 Accusative, §85, 4. c) and §75, 2, 
Note, 4 7 7j^ SjH to bear slander upon his tongue, i. e. to slan- 
der. 5 The subject of the clause. 6 Inf. fr. J^j;^ , supply y) to 
do evil to himself, i. e. to his own hurt, cf. 3 Mos. 5, 4.: 

aw 1 ? in jnrh . 

• " : m - t : 

XIV. Confidence in G-od's grace. (Ps. 23.) 

l-hy wan* mi nisoa nontf xh y^ nirr ivb mbtt 
3 : iD*f fty? 1 ? pir>!?a?P3 ^D^ * 331^ ^$3 : ♦jShj? riprap *P 
4^D5tr' hsi? nrix-»3 in K7N-16 2 r\)ti?y mi i\htp$ m 
*#W*l Tjtf "^ VflV ^V ^#p :*JPt# nan ^iwpi 
e*p ♦ops ^£>Tv ipm nto rjK : 3 rrri 'pia mh jpgfr 

:d>p> rjiN) nin|-n^a 4 >rn&ri 

1 To lead back, refresh (the soul). 2 Shadow of death = the 
thickest darkness, cf. § 91, c). 3 Abundance; in poetry often an 
abstract noun takes the place of an adjective, = my cup is abun- 
dant, overflowing, 4 = ^3^1 > as T\ (Jud. 19, 11.) for yip. . 



XV. God's excellency and providence. (Ps. 113.) 

\ np\ db> m : rnrr ntfrp$ hhn niri? h.3j; iV?n rr iSSn 
3D^' S^np iNiap-ij; tfptf-rnjpp JD^ijnjri nnj/p rjiap 
Inirra *p :niap own ^ niir DirSrSj? di t ;m;n; 

sD^nroj? 2 d^mhS :jv5n onj ris#Np S-r najjp wpp 



23 6 Chrestomatrt, 

5 nrair d^5h- 4 dn* rr?n 3 nnp.y w'to :i£j? rarg di?9 

rftnbbn 

t : - 

1 § 106, 9 and page 17 Note I. 2 Inf. with paragogic >— in 
poetry not unfrequent. 3 Barreness was considered among the He- 
brews a great ignominy, cf. 1. Sam. c. 1. 4 Accusative, answer- 
ing the question where ? § 85, 4. or apposition to 3 = as a. 5 § 83, 10. 



XVI. Israels' e&odus from Egypt. (Ps. 114.) 

: nin^ nb> mn din ru\n o*n : 2 vnfrBfao S*nip> i&Hp 4 ? 3 

t : ■ I •■ : — t - tt T- t :, : - ■•■ t : • •'l T: 

nun >3 D^n T]V"np :}^^33 rW?J oty*o 3 npn Dnrrji| 
: 1^^333 niinj d^3 npflfi ^nnn : nin?* 1 ? ^bn pnsj 6 
n«n >39hn ••ipJ?*. 3^8? ^?W H^ ^n jhn ^p| 

• t : : _ : • t - • t : 

1 § 57, Note. 2 The plural poetically, § 82, 5. 3 Cf. Exodus 19, 
18, 4 Cf. Exocl 17, 6. 5 § 59 Note II. 



XVII. Feelings of an exile in captivity. (Ps. 137.) 

-by :pnrw ^ton ^a?-Dji bpgp np S33 nnnrSj; * 

-rcn *Mfi# tfftwtf Dtr «3 : u wras wSn * mira D*my 3 
...... .. . T .. . T T . T ^. : « 

: 3 to ra^fi oWr? rjrE^tM* : *d j nana ty_ njnp# 5 
oWn^n^ n^jjg vb-m *'TSN$ drat* ♦atft ^i^S p3ine 

•t t : •■ v: •• : • t : : ■ t : ■ *- 

ntrx rrrntsfri S^- 8 ra :m iwn ny r\y 7 r\y ononis 

1 Refers to Babel, 2 Of the song — one of the songs. 3 Let my 
right forget to do its duty, or play on an instrument 



OlIRESTOMATHY. 2§7 

(Kimclii) 4. poetically = *"p5?N ♦ 5 The summit = the highest, 
joy. 6 The day of downfall, misfortune. 7 I n f. Pi ; to lay bare 
the ground "JlD* i- e. to destroy to the ground. 8 In poetry very 
common, either for the city or the inhabitants. 9 Cf. 2 Kings 8, 
12. 



XVIII. The preciousness and true character of wis- 
dom. (Job 28, 12 — 28.) 

iftfttg yvtb :nya Dipp ^nj *$\ Wfop l$® noanrn 

14 on Nvr'3 n^ nox oinn :o w nn prcn wtsn »&i rang 
brrryro ^95 *?p#* kSi rrj?nn ntip pir** 1 ? snsj? p# n ?K 
|bnt timyrtih :nwi np; T Drt^'5 t^k Dffie hVpn n* 1 ? 
is hmh rrpfri -or **S tf'rm m&an : rsrho 2 ptfrmni noon 

t : t I •.• v •• t • • t : t t • : t t : 

i9:nWi kS Tina dhd3 t^D-mcsa n^ny^b jd^oso 
K-^d wj?o no^l :nr? Dipp nr njn xon pas nppnni 

H wn-o : noiptrn^ in* 4 wrtj fi3T! pin D^nSiH : 3 nj/p# 
Lrrh!? ni&T : b :n#*v d?^ nnn wy pxirrrwp 1 ? 
26 : niVip rW? rp-n ph nos*? inirio : nn?3 pP d:^ 'JRPto 
Snan* ?n dinS tdk'*i rnnprrDJi nm mson nxn ?k 

;£0 -:•!•• t x t v - t| t-: - : t • v: t : - :- t t t 

j'rtte ina -wi nban N M n tfna 

t - w -" t:t • T-: 

l §94, 6 Note. 2 Supply the antecedent kS- 3 §93, 6. 
4 § 93, Note. 



XIX. Judah is threatened for her ingratitude and 
rebellion. (Isa. 1, 1 — 21.) 

i nbra D^'rn nwrSjf nrn n^ p hdn-r in^ pro 
2*wi D>»tf wotf :rmrp ote irrprir ma onv vi»?j? 

.._._. --t *: ■ t : ••:- t | • : • ; tt t t • ._ 

3 jrv :*3 v^s orn ♦flogrtni ♦ri^ti D*i3 njn njnj o p$ 
: ponn *6 *e# jrn^ nS ^tnt?? v^jd don mom mip nir' 



238 ClIRESTOMATHY. 

mrj^ ovrnra o^a D*jn© int. pj; ^aa dj? Kbn »m 'in 4 
00 2 n*rSy mm* no Ssnt^ trnp-ntf ww nin'-nNS 
-nm 7n-*po : *n aaySai 3 ^n^ tfarSa mo i£>Din my 6 

: V V I — • t - t •• t : • t: t t tt 

r&zo tify Min* 1 ? nnip napi nmam 1^3 bnp ia-jw #*h 
Daman** &fo ntinfr oany nootr nana : psfr naan kVi 7 

v : - : - •• \ : v ■•'x t t : v : : - I v x - t : : 

nnntii :onr nasnoa iiDDJrt nna D'Saa onr oan^s 

T : : -t -■*:■-: t t : x ■ : -x v : : v : 

nin> hh : nnra: n*ya n^'paa miSiaa onaa naoD rwrm 9 

t : •• x ~ : x J : • : x : • v t : t \ : I 

:won nnoyS w\n onDa ayoa nnir ^ wnn niNav 

• t x ^-:- -x : T t : • • t x • x : 

aSm d^n rtVy wafc> nm> inw oaTraran h n&Sn 
wan *a :Ttt£n &6 onvon D^aai ons dti owns 12 

x ■ : x x - : • t : • x - : • • : 

mnn tib :n*n 'ban ddtd nw Bfana 6 ^3 5 ni*oSi3 

x •• •-: : v : v | ... . TT T .. 

*np : man 8 trjn ^ wn nayin rrjpp : anj^mp wan 
^'53 rntifc bjTglo-i Dytnn : nnvjn p# ^awafr *nj?9 14 
D7J?K D^ga 12 D3t?nMi : u Kfc>4 vtn 1 ?} 10 nitDS^vni| 
naSo dw Dan* yw' ^n rhbn onma dj oao >yy 
-\-\zh :ynn bin w% i#p oyihyn y.n n>pn 13 orn nsqn ^ 
:mp^ 15! ian out ib$b> potj n#K db^'d ib>tj 14 a^n 
:iWa o^a oawDn mi?-on nin> no# 16 nn?pi aria 1 ? is 
anyp^'i orijrnN :vrr np^a ySina iqhstoj* wa^il 
>3 iSa^n 17 n^n Dnnp-i wNpp-D^n nS?^n p>xn n^D J 

nan nm» >3 

... T . . 

1 § 65 5 5. 2 Upon what ? 3 Supply JT.n » with following ^ to 
become, § 84, 1 : to become sick. 4 <yft (Kal in the form "if) 
5 = HlNnnS . 6 *4S = y^ 1 ? before me. 7 Apposition to fltff , 
8 Cf. 2 Kings," 4, 23. T 9 Supply HN^ to bear. 10 On the Ka- 
mets of ^ see §18, II. 3. H Inf. const, of NJ^more frequently 
n k N&* and SUt^ . 12 — D3^|) mf. Pi., Tsere "becoming Chirek. 
13 For *)D?nn § 39, 3. 14 §105, 5. 15 Supply y\ . 16 Niphal 
here reciprocal §26, 1. 17 § 85. 5. 



Chrestomathy. 239 

XX. Description of the Messianic time. (Isa. 11. 
1 — 10. 

arm vhy nmt :m£r wh&Q T^n w ywo nbn am 

T *t t -i- : v : • t t t • •.••: t • w - v • v t + : 

nam nn nn rrvo:n nyp rrh nwi noan nn mn> 
s-kSi tois^. vr# nino?-**^ nirv n*ri?5 Mnnrn jmn* 
*"*15l6 nifc*p3 own p^n pip P9^1 : n^v v$*t ynyzb 
s n*m jyeh wry v$W $^ v ? D ?^3 H 1 * 71 ?^ H# 
6^3-djt dn? -ni :vvSn mm mio^m vino lira* pn^ 

"> •• : T : t t -: ■■ i v: t : x : t -I ■;'.' 

: D3 jrb jbpj njtt) w anpi i^ ^JJft f?7. h^-dj; np^ 
7 -S:dw npas man inn 1 ?* rarv nn* nnnn rm nnai 
siT^pj W9V rm? 'Ififos TpX pjv Wl$>l :|3n 
9 HKnni*S£-g>^ 3 WT^ :n 10 

*°*Bh# wrtn ova nvn :d>d:>£ 5 d*S d^d mrrrik *nyi 

- - t t : • - : t- • •- - T 1 V *T •■ 

: HDD inroo nrvm itPTV d*u vSn d w oh ntiy neto >&> 

1 His delight, nHH with 2 to smell with pleasure, hence gene- 
rally to enjoy, delight in. 2 Pilpel of ]}$$ . 3 §76, 2. c. 
4 Inf. of JTP § 30, 4, hence with following fitf ♦ 5 HD3 com- 
monly with ty , here with 7, 6 § 86, 3 b. 



XXI. Jeremiah's letter to the captives in Babylon. 
(Jer. 29, 4—14.) 

4-n^K nbi-in-W? San^? •riSg fii*ov ninj npN rto 
5 tew ritia ^wi »8fi D*rn u? jhSm qWvvd w^n 
6 dw ayxb inp) mia b*aa n^ini onW ^np :p£rnK 

7 nstf osnK *rrS:in nttf** nyn DiW-nN rahfi : raynn 

t v t v : • t : • • ( t : v t -.— 

dan i^ dptoSh-Sk lyjD^n-SNiDS^p'piD^gnpyn^N 



240 CflRESTOMATHY. 

rw o'lntr SnnS ^nSo ^S o nirv *idn rim:) :rhmo 

xt ■ : - y t : : • : • r : - t • t : 

DJJT& S^Or ^itsn ^?T n $ D ?^ : *tf°j3CP- WW* T 5 ?^ 
ddS nnS njnS kVi DiW rrfitrno nirv dm DD^y ntr'rr 

v t ■■ t . t. t; : t : : - t : \ : v •• -: 

^ DrbWim DroSrn tin onanp} jropm nnnN 12 
-7?5^1in >? DflNVpi tin DJ^prri :d?^ Ttyptjni3 

T^jrnt?** Dip&rr7$ paw ^Dtrm ninrD»3 d^ d?^ 

JDtTD DDDN 

t • v : v 

1 § 49, 4, Note. 2 To be found by one i» e. to show himself 
inclined toward one. (Fuerst Lex.) 



XXII. The new convenant. (Jer, 31, 31 — 34.) 

rva-p8i htrtw WTm ttoi ninnwj D'*a dw run 3l 
dv? dentin W3 *\v?$ nn?p nS :n^"nn nn? niwd 
tin nan n&rr 1 *"^ orjVP H$9 D^vin^ dt? ♦pwjrj' 
■uft* nn?n nar >? :nw-ow d? t^E? 2 ^*?1 TH333 
wu mrp-Dao onn own nrot S*nfe» rra-n&t rroN 

• - x t : \ : • t • x - ••-: - •• x : • ■■ v : v 

v x • • x : x v x: : v x ■ w - : x :J • : • x 

D^ppS tvin tyT D^o >3 nirr-ni* son ioN 1 ? 4 vnN-n# 
: tutor* nS DnatDhSi DiiyS nbDN o nirrDiM oSnr TO 

' x : v x x - : t *--:- - ; v t : ■. : t 

1 § 96, 2. 2 1 although, § 118. 3 For HpfiDN ♦ 4 § 9?> 4. 



Chrestom ath y . 241 

XXIII. Kesurrection of Israel by the reviving Spirit 
of God. (Ezek. 37, 1—14.) 

i nyj^rr rpn? om^i mm nrq on^*} wm s -m ^ ™#i 
2ni^ njrrj ^p npp DfrVjJ TP3#m • wo^? ™Sp imji 

3onx-f3^NnpKn nkpniety njrr) nypin 09-^j? inp 

4 *i£*h :nyT nriN mm onx now ri?xr\ niov^O ™ !™ 

nitron mown DrAxmoNt n WrniDvyn -^y kmtt >Sk 

: - t -: t V " -: t : - t : v •• t t -: t « •• t • - •• 

6 run rh$n mow 1 ? mm o'-ik *»dk lis :mm-m vatf 

•• v •' t t -: t • : t -: - t t : - : w : • 

«W7yro d^o DD^Sr ♦nroi sown nn dm n»m ok 
Dm?m tm d?? ^mi my o?*Sy ^d^i n^a d?^# 

T tW? Sip-^nn >rwy nates »p»3jj tnin? oap? Dpyin 

•■rijrn y?*n) iiDvy-S# 0$? wove, ^rnpm tfyTnim 
mm nbyp^p my omSy Dnpn nSy nfe>?i d*T! orvSy 

gmoNiD^-pK^rr rmrr 1 ?** aaan bx -oh :Dm> px 

t : — t : t t I v •• t • - t ».« •• t • - •• v - v t I •• 

♦nsi a rmr? tea nwi yrwD mm ornt noa-ris nnrrStf 

* : t ^ -:-•••: t -: - t t 

10 dh? Kism 3 ow "i^3 ♦wwrij nw nV$ri Dorra 

inp^i nap in? Sinjt b?r? Dm^"by vtp?9 viri rrnn 

nun * nan S*nfc» n^3 hSkji mown D-?a-p *Sk 

... T .. .. T . . .. T V " T T ^: T T T I v - •• 

wN^rr pS : 5? oS onuj ompn maw wmovy vtfy Dnofc 
m wiap-na nrifl ok rfen mm o'-wnox-rta Dmba mow 
npn^-^ D?ip k y ^nxsm 6 >py bjwojjo d?j>nj *m?i?rn 

i3 f m9^n?i D?*mn?p-n^ w&?mm o^aottTH jW"^! 

ju^itjrn Dm?m d?? w w$ * w D? i mn?i?p D?rte 

,• *mc>^ >rr£n mn? o« o* o#yY! afflsrythx d?^ 

j mm-D*o 

t : \ : 

i^orH^pn* 2 §80, 5. 8 sc. Him* 4 §77,3. 5 Dat. Commod. 
^7 we are so entirely cut of (Fuerst Lex.). 6 Apposition to DDHK. 

T * V S V 

31 



VOCABULARY. 



I. HEBREW AND ENGLISH, 



2K father : see § 73, 1. 
"ON (§ 48, 1) to be 

~ T f 

lost, to perish; Pi. 
and Hi. to destroy, 
to let perish. 

P*1D Nt destruction, 

[abyss. 
fD^ to wish, to be 
[willing. 
'13K misery, woe. 

DttN crib. 

^DN5 ear 0I * grain, 
[time of ears, spring. 

fi*5N need y» P oor - 

' O^X pr. n. m. 



rrwaK pr. *. m. 

T t * -: 

T3N eighty, chief. 

^73N #"• and .Eft. to 
t [mourn. 

/Dft mourning. 

/2N truly, but, yet. 
J3J»$/. stone, wheight. 

g^j Abraham, 

DiSt^JN Absalom. 

t t — : 

"UN to gather. 
QlnN Edom. 
pNLord. 



y*fe mighty. 

QHN to be red ; Si*. 

- T 

[to shew a red hue. 
D*tfc^ man; col. men. 

T T 

rtftTK ground, soil, 
T T ~ : [land. 

'j9"W$ Edomite, Idu- 
~ : [mean. 

^0"|N reddish. 

p1$s{ socket, funda- 
';' v [ment. 

**JHK Lord, the divine 
T ' : [majesty. 

p?3-\n$ p-n.m. 

*Xm mantle, tunic. 

nrw a. ^rrn to love. 

atfa S friend ' 

it^CRJ *• love - 
nn^ohi 

S"TN tent, tabernacle. 
prW$ Aaron. 
W or. 
vjtf woe! 
yj^ enemy. 

^N sill y» f ° o1 - 

' TIN perhaps. 

DSlK but. 

rb)V silliness, folly. 



pjsj iniquity, misery, 
v T [vanity. 

TSIN Ophir. 

*llN (§ 53, 7) to be or 

become light, bright; 
Hi. to make bright, 
to illuminate, to en- 
lighten; VJ3 TNH 

J T T 

7N to look gracious. 

-|1K light. 
jTiN sig n - 
fX then. 

nirX belt, girdle. 
JffcJ Si", to listen. 
jtN/. ear. 
1fl£ j£ a. P*. to gird ; 

~ T 

Hit. to gird oneself. 
HN brother (§ 73, 2.) 

a^rrKp.n.m. 

"UlN one > nrst . 

T V 

*)in$S$ behind, back, 

[backward. 

rfifTN sister (§ 73, 3.) 

T 

JH^ to seize, hold, 
[catch. 

tnx P- n - m - 



bah 



>HN P- n. m. 

^h^ Pi- to delay, to 
" T [tarry. 

nnjtf other. 

")!"TN after, afterwards, 
[behind. 



244 pnrrN 

pnilK the last. 
nnN after ; w. suff. 

nrjK, § 75, e. 

JTirTN end, future, 
' " ~ [eternity. 

nnN/-ofnriN,oiie. 

DDN to close, to stop. 
^ woe ! 
i$ where ? 
]}♦£$ enemy. 
JTN where ? 

nmjob. 

nD^ how? how! 
[where ? 
7^ ram. 

Jl /'N Ajalon, name of 
1 T " [a city. 

J>Nc.p£s*,not; 

?>K3 without ; 
w.sutf.itfX, §75, 3. 

j"7£*£s£ Ephah, a dry 
[measure. 
ji£)*N where ? 

JJf>N man, see § 73, B. 
' [1. and § 98, 1. 2. 
^[{^ only, but, surely. 

IVlHtDN fierceness. 

S^N (§ 48 ) to eat, Pw - 
" T [to be consumed. 

TON eater. 

S:>n, hSon food. 

t : t 

|3N surely, truly. 
Stf not - 

. ' [§ 75,"e. 

7£$ a mighty one. 2) 

• strength, power. 3) 
God, the Almighty. 



Vocabulary. 

nbtf/- oak, terebinth. 

T •• 

rrtass D*riS# God. 

t • v: 

Ktvhjf P. n. m. 

V^-8 ido1 - 

^SSN al as ! >S 'X alas! 

t [for me. 

D7N dumb. 

ruoStf widow. 

H /{^ to learn, Pi. to 
V T [teach. 

C17N thousand. 

QJ$ mother. 

DN if; DN >? except 

that;!|^Q^ohif! 

HDN maid -servant, 

[§ 73, 9. 
TON ell, cubit. 

jH0JK p. n. m. 
H^DN faitn > faithful- 

t v: r-~~~„ 



TON to be firm » faitn - 

ful ; Hi. to hold firm- 
ly, to believe, w. 3» 

ftDfc^ depended on, 
1 " [faithful 

V^{^ JT. £?. to be 

firm ; Pi, to fortify, 
to strenghten. 

nON (§48) to say, to 

~ T 

think, either follow- 
ed by ^3, lb 1 ? or 
not. 
*1£N .Mb* speech. 

t : 

HON Amorite. 
np^ truth. 
J73N whither. ? 



nynN 

t^'l^N ma n, mortal. 

PON ■^ r *' t° lament, to 
" T [mourn. 

^njNwe. 

fptf K. a. .H&. to be 
'" T [angry. 

BVfMpL of ^X, 

men,'§ 73, B. 1. 

"riots *>*• dhion* 

fetter, 'fr*n ITS 
_. T 

[prison. 

^lDfc*^ to gather, to 

gather in; JSTL to 
gather oneself, to 
be gathered, taken 
away. 

*1DN to bind, to har- 
" T [ness. 

h^ nose, anger, wrath; 

0*5N face, anger, 
fitf adv. also ; *3 t|K 

how much more, how 
[much less. 
H£)N to bake. 
Ni£)k then. 
H /5N darkness. 

D£5S *) en(i ' 2 ) a ^* 
not, nothing, '^^ 

[without 
[*3 'N except that. 

D'EHDS^P-n.ofa 
[place in Judah. 
ffl^N the young of 
: v [birds, brood. 
DH$N Ephraim. 
THEN Ephrathite. 
b^h ne ar, by, at. 
njSN locust. 

yrJN r. 



nj/rw «. 



four. 



T)H 



Vocabulary. 



*V)M 245 



SIX to weave. 

J*)J< cedar. 

rhtf /• path, way. 

n?^i lion - 

?]1N to be long. 

Hi. to prolong, e. g. life, 
to lengthen, to tarry- 
pong, to delay. 

?]*")N$ a putting off, 

delay, ^ Jpfct, 

D?5N '8 lon S of 

temper, long-suffer- 

[ing. 

TjiK length, Q>pt <tf 

[length oflife. 

0H5>»$ Aramea, Syria. 

jH#/.' earth, land. 

TIN to curse. 

~ T 

#K/. fire. 

Jl^'N* woman, § 73, 
7 ' [B. 2. 

*flJSftt /• Assyria, an 
[Assyrian. 

D^andQ^tobe 

guilty, to transgress, 

to be condemned; 

Hi. to condemn, to 

- [punish. 

flbt^S dunghill. 

$$&*$ P> n - of a 

city of the Philist- 

[ines. 

"\tifH Pi - to g uide , di- 

- i 

rect aright, to make 
or call happy, 

")$^£S who, which, 
v " : [when, as. 



tune-?i<?£ used-) hail ! 

[happy ! 

rUSTilK l)sign of ace. 

w. suff. >;-)K 2) with; 

w. suff. ^J^ etc. 
JlDN to come. 
T\m thou. 



5 in, with; w.suff. V}, 

n»9 /• well. 

P&>'n*Dp.n. of a 

[city. 
D5N3 without. 

^33 Babylon. 

V T 

*T^3 to t>e faithless, to 
[transgress. 
1M garment. 



bha 



on account of. 



Tl^} separate, alone, 

"j7 apart, separate, 

7*73 -5*. to divide, to 

~ T 

separate, show dif- 
ference. 

norra beast 

t •• : 

'. thumb. 



5^*j*3 to come , to set 

(of the sun); Hi. to 

[bring. 

f?)3 to disdain, with 

7 to show contempt 
: [for somebody. 
J!|3 s - contempt. 

\)Z see pa, 

TJ3 well, pit, cistern. 

£?*j3 to be disappoin- 
ted, to be ashamed, 



to come to shame; 
Hi. to put to shame, 
to disgrace. 
fopret. of fog, 

J"1f3 to despise , dis- 
[dain. 
ft3 to spoil. 



without. 



pro 

-flf73 youth, young 
T [man, chosen. 
[f73 to examine, try, 
~ T [search, tempt. 
**in3 to choose, to se- 
lect, w. 3; ^H^de- 

t : • 

sirable. 
|"7t33 to trust, to be 

~ T [confident, w. 3. 
ffJO*} security, safety ; 

"37 m safety,securely. 

V T 

fD3 /• oelly , heart, 
' '•* v [womb. 

*3 inter j. O that ! 

p3 *° understand ; IK. 

to discern ; Hit. dil- 
igently consider, to 
[fathom. 
p3 interval (space be- 
tween two things), 
du. ED*J*3» hence 

D?45D #****» tne 

man between the two 



P3 between ; w. s^jjT. 
' " [§ 75, 6. 

|-|3*3 understanding. 

nv3 nouse, rvap 

. [within. 

Dn7'n^p- n - ofaci *y' 

,""J33 to weep. 

T T 

*li33 firstborn. 



246 7 3 

Sjnot. 
i^y% without. 

/i^lS worthlessness, 
"7 : [lowness. 

£3 J?^3 Balaam. 

fD,n^30)witii- 

out,besides, except. 

^S^without,^^ 1 ? 

[that not. 
iTtpJinwhat? 

f3, "|3 son, §?% 6. 
1*1^3 to build 

T T 

^^^3 in otrV?r that. 

n^'for. 

"T)i^3 within yet. 

7J^!U to l>e lord over. 

^7J^3 man, lord, hus- 
band, person given or 
addicted to a thing ; 
§ 89, 4. II. Baal, god 
of the Phenicians. 

to burn, tr. to con- 
sume. 
1^3 profit, unjust 

[gain. 
PV3 dough. 

yp3 Pi. to split. 
H^p3 valley. 
1p2 herd, oxen. 
""1D3 morning. 
3*^p^ within. 

t^pS pi - to seek > <*e- 
'" T [mand. 

S"0!3 to create. 



Vocabulary. 

j— H^) to choose, to 
♦ T T [select. 

•jfig iron. 

H^3 to flee. 

- T 

KH3 fat, full. 

• T 

rW*")^ creation. 

t • : 

rV*")3 covenant, 
rpg to kneel, W^ 
blessed, Pi. to bless. 
TTlJ) knee. 
fD13 blessing. 

t t: 

p^!3 lightening. 
12^1 meat, flesh, body. 

T T 

H3 daughter, § 73, 7. 

Tiin3 m * ne m idst °f) 

' ; [within. 

D*rDp*ofjTa§78,8. 



ni^il haughtiness, 
, ™ '' [pride. 

/Nil to redeem. 

- T 

j-j^JJ to be high ; Hi. 

— r 

to raise up, make 

[high. 

j""OJ| (only in const.) 

T T 

IH3 high, haughty 
[of, tall of. 

nb| high- lofty, tall, 
rn'jl height. 

/"Oil boundary, dis- 
trict, territory. 
TiSil strong, hero. 

m'^lll strength, 

T : [might. 

Tl| lord. 

tS^JJI crystal. 



^3JI JBi*. to enclose 

- T 

around, to set bound- 
aries. 

ny^jl I. hill, II. p. n. 
T ' [of a city. 

|iy3£p.n.ofacity. 

"DJ to be strong,to pre- 

- T 

vail ; Pi. to strength- 
en. 
I^jj man, hero. 

D*1DJI mistress. 

M roof. 

THJI great, old, loud. 

♦nj iid. 

71 J| to be great; Pi. to 

make great, to make 
» [grow; Hi.id. 

7*U greatness. 

rfcijj and nSn-j 

[greatness, majesty. 
1"JJ cons. Tlj wall, 

[fence. 
1J back. 

vjjj nation, people. 

Su see ^| 

SlJ) , ^ see Sbj|. 

n^iil a company of 
T [exiles. 

J^pit. 

*"V)Jl to sojourn, abide. 
JJjJ to shear. 

- T 

SU to rob. 

" T 

J^fJ a stem. 

*"tfj| to cut, to cut off, 

— T 

divide; Ni. to be 

[cut off. 
N*j| valley. 






*7»J| sinew. 

7* J to rejoice, exult. 

J-J7JJ to reveal ; Pi. id ; 

T T 

Hi. to lead into exile, 
fl^jj p. n. m. 

^ to roll; with Jtf 

to throw upon; with 
[jp, to remove. 

Qj( also, yea, even. 
KDJ ■?*• to swallow. 
XJpjj bulrush. 

/I Oil an y a °t done, 

good or evil, behav- 
* [ior, desert. 

/lOil a weaned child. 

t : ■• : 

the recompense,pun- 

' [ishment. 

7DJJ to recompense, to 

[do. 

M garden. 

^JjJ to steal. 

aaji thief. 

T — 

IJ^Jl to reprove. 

nn^^n^re- 

[buke. 
"■jjj stranger. 

Ml-ftf ^-/.throat, 
• • [neck, 

an axe. 



J^ljl Pi. to drive away, 

-T 

[to exile, cast out. 
Dt^lJ P. n. m. 

T see g^j'. 
Dt^JI rain. 



Vocabulary. 

[P'JJ *) P- n - of a region 
in Egypt; 2) p. n. of 
[a city in Judah. 
jljj p. n. of a city. 



yi ° r an bear - 

t : t : 

bee. 2) Deborah, p. 

n. of the prophetess, 

[Judge. 4, 4. 

p!l1 t° cleave, to cling 

121 iT. usually Pi. to 



fish, fishes. 



1^*1 word, thing. 

T T 

fcJOl honey. 

n 

T T 

J^TTcorn. 
1H,TH David. 

• T • T 

<>y^ languor, illness. 
*!j^] faint, sick. 

T — 

U%OP[ see DOT 

- T 

n*D*TT silence, resig- 

T " [nation, 

ftl or V*?| to judge, to 

rule, to contend 
l^ generation, age, 

ninnin 1 ? to aii 

[generations. 
Hill to drive away, 

T T [to thrust down. 
?V?j judgment, strife, 
' [contention, 

pi judge, defender. 

71 poor. 
117*1 poverty. 

T - 

Jl7*l to draw, as 

T T 

[water from a well. 



>Sl bucket. 



247 



;*^ to totter, to be 



slack, weak, to lan- 

. [guish. 

p7l to pursue hotly, 

Hi. to kindle, in- 
* [flame. 

Jl7*l door, gate. 

£21 blood, the pi. 

D 1 D1 blood-guilti- 
T [ness. 

nOI to be like. 

T T 

/YDD"! likeness, image. 
DD1 to be dumb, si- 

- T 

lent, to rest, to stand 
[still. 



tear. 

p^£D*l Damascus. 

pU njn see JH* 

jlj^l knowledge. 

fiyi knowledge, in- 
[telligence- 
-fa see ill 
1H with 3 , to tread. 

e. ^. a way *, 2H. to 
[lead. 

way. 



J£Jll to require, to 

" T [seek. 

J CI -P*' to make fat, 
' " T [to anoint. 



^gn vanity, empti- 

[ness. 

}— j^jj-j to meditate, to 

think, with g of the 

[object, to utter. 

nwn thought. 

J^pi meditation; 

[prayer. 



248 nnn 

n*Tf7 *° stretch out. 

T T 

*nm to honor ; 

- T 

w. Q^JjD, to favor one's 

• T 

cause ; Hit. to decor- 
ate oneself, to boast 
[oneself. 
•y7|"J ornament. 

T T 

rrnn,c.rrnrrhon- 

t t~: - : — 

or, ornament, glory. 
K1H he. 

"tin beauty, majesty. 
*j,*7 woe! ho ! 

Jin wealth, riches. 
Dn see n^ 

T T 

K>n she. 

n*n to oe;w. 7,tobe- 
j : [come. 

7-D^n palace, sanctu- 
[ary. 
J\n Hin, a liquid mea- 
.»* [sure. 

£$717 not ? indeed ! see 

" Ufa and §25, 5. 
Di^Jl hither. 

7] 7tl to walk, to go, 

to live ; Hi. to lead. 

*5^n ^« to sing, to 

praise; Hit. to glory, 
.{ [to boast. 

D7n Either. 

QDm to confound, 

[to scatter. 
n^n I- they (f.); II. 

[hither. 

njjn lo ! see ! behold! 

" '[w.suff. see §75, 3. 

T]tDn to turn ; w. 7 or 

w. two accus., to change 

[into. 

nn mountain, § 17, 5. 



Vocabulary. 

175^)17 much, 
jnn to slay, kill. 

n^in to conceive, to 

T T [ De pregnant. 
D*im to tear, to pull 

down, to destroy. 

Dbt^ use <l as ««&>•> 
[early. 

r 

3K? woif. 
raft ( f ) tMs. 

Hit -S; a- Pi. to 

— T 

slaughter, to sacri- 
[fice. 
J 1 nt wantonness! prid e, 

nt this. 

nntgoM. 



[haughtiness. 



nnt &*- to be taught, 

to take heed; Hi. to 
shine ; Jig. to teach. 

njit brightness. 

if which, that. 

iit to flow. 

nit to boil up; Hit. to 
act insolently, wick- 

nSit 0. nSit; «>. *«/ 

' T 

prep, besides, except. 

7 /It squanderer, prod- 
igal. 

nit ^-jz-niD to g° 

away, Ni. to turn 

[aside, 
nit or nit to bind, to 
[bandage, 
fpf olive 

t| t pure. 



fen 

nDt to be pure ; i\\ to 

cleanse; jSft. to cleanse 

[oneself. 

H'SOt glass, crystal. 

n^t to remember; Hi. 
to bring to remem- 
[brance, to praise. 
niDt a. npj[ memory. 

Jinpt remembrance. 

nDt Pi* to sing, to , 
[praise. 

tilt a - Wit harlot. 

pj^t to cry out. 

npjft the cry. 

nU.t Pitch. 

Jpt-ff". and.fi*. to be 

[old, to gi-ow old. 
Jpt old man, an elder, 

chief of a family, 

[tribe or city, 
jnt beard. 

D'Jptold age. 

npt to raise, to com- 
' ,_T [fort. 

ppj to refine. 

nt stranger. 

T 

J^int arm, strength. 

nnt to break forth, to 
[shine. 
y)\ to sow. 

jHt seed, children, 

[sowing, 
nnt span. 



JOn -£• Si. to hide, 

T T 

shield ; M. to hide 
[oneself. 

nni^n stripe. 

7^ n r ope, company. 






pnrr 

D^fT to embrace. 

p3fl folding. 

""Dll to bind, to unite; 

- T 

Hit. to ally oneself, 
(with (Qp), 

^Dfl companion. 

m " T 

lilDIl Hebron, p. n. 

: v [of a city, 

t^ill to bind up, to 

- T 

gird, to saddle; Pu. 
[to be bound up. 
JJP7 festival. 

T 

^jn locust. 

T T 

3JH7 to celebrate a 

[festival. 
*Ufi to gird. 

— T 

Hill to gladden. 

T T 

rrnrtjoy- 
inn and Snrr to 

-T •• T 

cease, to leave off, 
[to be wanting, 

pi.o and tntj ( a 

[species of) thorn. 
"HPT chamber, inward 
[part. 
£^*Ul Pi- to renew. 

- T 

tJ^Tfl new. 

T T 

{^'*tn the new nioon, 

[month. 
J!|n circle. 
tO^lPT thread. 
*!)H Hivite, a Canaan- 
/ " [ite tribe. 

7?)f7 ^. to move in a 

circle, to dance, to 

writhe in pain; Hi. 

to make tremble; 

Hit. w. *7,to wait for. 
*7Jf"J sand. 

ir. off— j^n^tobe 

T T 

[sick. 



Vocabulary. 
nOlPTwalL, 

V)fl exterior, abroad, 
[pl~D without. 

1 Jll¥(T, street. 

Jltfl to see, especially 

a vision, hence to 

[prophesy. 
?"jfl7 vision. 

JTtffi vision. 

T 

fi^ffl intuity, vision. 

rtn arrow, ni^ip'n 

[thunder-flash. 
pffl to be strong; with 
|£p to be stronger 

than, i. e. to con- 
quer; Pi. to give 
strength, to strength- 
en ; Hi. to lay hold 
of, to seize; Hit. 
to strengthen oneself. 
pjfl and pjn strong, 

[violent. 
i^COn to sin ; Hi. cause 

T T 

to sin, lead into sin. 
^£3(1 sinner. 

T _ 

2) the punishment of 
[sin. 
iltDfl wheat.' 

T * 

^ItOfl a shoot, twig. 
♦ft living. 
ttVtl riddle. 

T • 

j— pft to live; Pi. to 

T T 

make alive; Hi. to 

[let live. 

j"|*n living being, an- 

Limal, beast. 

D^rr life - 

S»tl see ^H 



pSfl 249 

7j|"j strength, force for 
war, army, wealth ; 
'tl t~l&j} to make 

i. e. put forth power, 
do mightily, ♦gg£ 

^*J3 mighty men, 
[heroes. 
T]f7 palate. 

fOll to wait for ; Pi. 
[id., to hope. 

flhhSf} darkening. 

D5H to be, or become 

wise ; Pu. to be made 
wise ; Hit. to think 
[oneself wise. 
Q^H wise. 

T T 

HDD 17 wisdom. 

t ; t 

7J"7 profane, common. 

nbrr miik. 

T T 

ibn fat - 

n^n to b e ill; 5%. to 
T ? T [become sick. 
D*J7f7 dream-. 

7 vl"T flute, pipe. 

n^Sn § 75, 8. 

. T • T 

^"7711 Pi- to profane ; 

♦ ~ T [Hi. to begin. 
07f7 to dream ; Hi. to 

~ T , [cause to dream. 

£"| 7H to change ; Hi. id. 

'." T [to renew. 

T>7f"7 to draw out; JIT*. 

to be extricated, de- 
li vered;Pz. to deliver, 
set free. 

D^n loins - 
p7(7 to divide, have 
part, w. ^J; Hi. to make, 
[smooth, flatter. 



250 



rhn 



p 7ft part, share, lot. 
pytl °dj' smooth, 
t^ 7ft weak. 

T _ 

OJf warmth, heat, 
DPT P- n. m. 

- T 

IDn to covet. 

- T 

ftDft wrath, fury. 

T " 

i7£ft warmth, heat. 

riD/7 a violent man, 
' T [robber. 

TiOft ass. 

ffl/tDft mother-in-law. 

vDft t( > have pity, 

T [compassion. 

0-tDft to oe warm ; Pi. 

T [to make warm. 

VQft to be leavened. 

Yt2H leavened. 
Vfth vinegar. 
*"lftft bitumen. 
7Dft to daub, to pitch. 

- T 

*lDft clay, mortar, ce^ 

ment. 2) Homer, a 
[dry measure. 

J (7 favor. 

i""0ft to encamp, be- 
[siege. 
p. n. m. 



D*}ft lance. 

CD-)n gratuitously, 

T * [without cause. 
Pf7 to be merciful, 

gracious to; Ed. to 

[find pity. 

*]Dlfmercy,love,.kind- 

[ness. 

*7tppjpious,good man. 



Vocabulary. 

*")DH to suffer want, to 

be without, to de- 
crease ; Pi. to lessen, 
[to make inferior. 
*1DFT ad J- lacking, 

[void. 
HQtl bridal-chamber. 

T •-. 

P£)ft to wish, to de- 
sire, to have delight. 

Y&tl delight, precious 
1 v " [thing. 

^1511 to dig. 

t£*£ft to search. 

- T 

*c'£jn °dj- ^ ree > ex_ 

: t 

[empt from taxes. 

i^H to dig out, to 

[hew. 

iTittft the middle, 

[midst. 

»Jf|-j the half, the mid- 

[dle. 

ygft grass. 

• T 

}*Vn to cut, divide, 
' " T [hence 

Y^h dividing into 
I " [swarms. 

Y'&tl gravel-stones. 

^ft court, yard. 

" T 

pfj bosom. 
pfj statute, law. 
ftjjf] law. 

ppft to engrave, to in- 
scribe laws, to rule; 
[Pi. to decree. 
*"lpft to search, ex- 
' " T [plore. 

^jpll a searching out; 

"pi pjtf unsearcheable. 

*)f-f a hole. 

37 ft sword. 

37ft P» n «°f a top of 
[Sinai. 



nnrr 

ft37ft dry land. 

T T T 

ft37ft wasteness,»?w. 

t : t * 

waste places, ruins. 

77ft to quake, to 

[tremble. 

P77ft to be kindled: 

T 7 

w. flj^ the anger was 

'" [kindled. 

1*1717 diligent; % fine 

1 T [gold. 

T**7ft a piece, a slice. 

fc^?7ft sickle. 

£"|7ft Pi. to upbraid, to 
' " T [scorn, reproach. 

£]7ft autumn, harvest. 

Hi3in reproach, 

T : v [shame, 

tyin to work, to de- 

- T 

vise, imagine ; Hi. 
[to be silent. 
^717 artificer. 

TT 

£>7|7 dea f- 

3Cft to think, to be 

about; with ^-7, to 

count as, to regard ; 

[Pi. to devise. 

ft£>ft -& -Hfc to be sil- 
T T [ent. 

darkness. 



T||^n to withhold, 

' " T [restrain. 

p£2M7 to have delight 

in one, to love, w. 3. 

♦rift /• rvnrr Hit- 

tite, a race of people 
dwelling in the reg- 
ion of Hebron. 
?i7ft bridegroom, son- 
1 T T [in-law. 

nnr?(futnn^tob a 

afraid, terrified ; JV*. 
to be confounded. 



htm 



to 

- T 

17DID to sink, to pene- 
trate; Ho. to be sunk, 
to be laid deep, to 
[fasten in. 

T 

nilD to be or become 

- T 

clean, pure ; Pi. to 
cleanse, to purify; 
Hit.to purify oneself. 
DID g°°d, fair, beau- 
tiful. 

rnico/. of ma; 

[2. prosperity. 

3^ ,the good, best 

[things. 

Jf7D to g rind - 
fc^JJ mire, mud* 
7^ dew. 
7ft ft to hide. 
O^lD to taste, 
JiytO see Jfoj 
|"HD burden, trouble. 
**W- n-Hto fresh. 

• t t • ; 

D*")D> D^t?5 before, 
v v : [not yet. 



7^* Si. to be willing, 
~ T content, to con- 



*)W a river, esp. the 

, : [Nile. 

V^D 7 produce of the 



^D'Q 7 Jebusite. 

^-73^ or ^OV a he- 
goat, hence '^jf Hp 
[rams'horn. 



Vocabulary. 

$y to be dry, to with- 
" T [er; Hi. to dry up. 
ypy adj. dry. 

?]&y dry land. 

T T ~ 

yy> to be weary, 

fatigued ; Pi. Hi. to 
fatigue, to weary. 

-jniand 7 sideD j*>n T 

t : ~ - 

a side, i. e. bank of 
[the Nile. 
jTpp -H*. to confess, to 
TT [praise, thank. 
J^t to know, to re- 
gard, to have respect; 
Hi. to let know, to 
inform, to teach, 
ft* abbreviated from 

[rnrr 
^n* lot > fate - T : 

t : 

ffflfl* Judah. 

f^H 7 toe Lord, § 18, 

T : [Note. 

y^'iil? Joshua. 

» T T : • T T [than. 
2K1 7 Joab - 

T . 

fn)?l* mother. 

Dl* piur. tZPW, da y> 

DVfi to-day. 
DOi*byday, 2) daily. 
?V Greek. 

I TT 

i"Oi 7 dove*. 

T 

VJV Ionian, Greek. 

• t: 

p<Ji 7 a suckling child, 
' [2) a young twig. 
vlpV Joseph. 
W"j 7 counsellor, 
*")\fJ7 potter. 
ty'pV fowler. 



DJTJt p. n . m. 



251 



*/8ttt* 



Jezreelite. 



"Iff 7 conjointly, at one 
[time. 
I^rt 7 together. 

t : - 

^JTptrV Hezekiah. 

mTf 7 (tne ° nl y ° ne ) 

T * : [child, girl, 
^ft* to be good, merry, 

- T 

to please ; Hi. to do 
[well, to do good. 
p* wine. 

rpseeJlDJ 

fTD 7 &*• to dispute 

— T 

with one another; 
Hi. to determine, to 
reprove, to rebuke. 

7^7 to be able, to pre- 

T 

vail over, to oyer- 

t [come. 

*f7* to bring forth, to 

•bear ; Hi. to beget 

•jS 7 ohild. 

T) / 7 born," I. e. a boy, 
. j [a child. 

^ see tjSn 

Q* sea, the west. 

T 

JtJQ/ right hand," the 
1 * T [south. 

f|^7 ift. to oppress. 

TT 

pj* to suck; Hi. to give 
' " T [suck. 

"JD 7 to found, to ap- 
" T [point. 

T)D 7 ground, found- 
Cation. 

FlD 7 -^ a. Hi. to add, 

' " T [increase. 

"ipUo instruct; Pi. to 

correct, to punish; Ni. 
to receive correction. 



252 *jp 

]3Pj *1^'Nl fy because. 

£"1^* to be fatigued, 
'- * [faint. 

t"\W faint, wearied. 

VJ7* to advise ; Ni. to 
' " T [deliberate. 

3P#* Jacob * 

n*TJt?l (honey) twig. 

HiD*/- HD* beautiful. 

V T T T 

*£)* in jp. *£'i beauty. 

• t: 

J^£* Japhet. 

T T 

lead out, to carry 

[out. 

3*£* -H2$. to set or place 

-T 

oneself, to stand firm. 
ygi to set, place. 

- T 

T^£* ift'. to make a bed. 

^)^* to create, form, 

~ T [make. 

^ygi form, imagination. 

-)\£J former. 

*JJ^* to burn ; Ho. id. 

HPTD* obedience. 

t|: • 

YT)i to awake. 

■Jl^t to be precious ; 

iZ&. to make pre- 
vious. 
*0* precious, dear. 

Js^V to fear, to be 

"T 

afraid ; Pi. to terrify. 
J^t fearing. 
n*rV fear. 

t : • 

h}?5y Jerubbaal. 
0^31* Jeroboam, 



Vocabulary. 

*pl* to go down, de- 

scend ; Hi. to bring 

[down. 

}""p|* to cast, to shoot 

TT 

arrows ; Hi. to teach, 
[instruct. 

[Jerusalem. 
|"|*V month. 
|-f^t moon. 

- "T 

in^"illH^ Jericho. 
Ml^l'' curtain. 
f^*)* herbs, greens. 
{Jf*")* to inherit, possess, 

-T 

to dispossess ; iW. to 

be dispossessed ; Hi. 

to take possession, 

[to make poor. 

£?♦-{£# there is, it is. 

3t^* to sit , inhabit, 

— T 

dwell ; Hi. to cause 
to sit, to make dwell. 
'yif'i inhabitant, 

♦£?> Jesse. 

T : [ance. 

£f>gj* old, aged man. 

• T 

Xrgi to sleep. 

y$) Ni. to be saved ; 
Hi. to help, to save. 

yW'ipW nel P> as- 
sistance, salvation. 

^JTWfc^ Isaiah. 

IBf* upright, right. 

T T 

PHC* honesty, piety. 

t : • 

Saot^* israei - 

•• t: • 

DID* orphan. 



3313 

^/"V iTi. to remain. 

- T 

HjV Jethro. 

turn! preeminence, 

: " [superiority. 



5 as, like ; w. suff. 

• T 

3N3 to grieve, to ache; 

'• T 

[Hi. to cause pain. 

j"7£0 Ni. to be rebuk- 
T T [ed ; M.to afflict. 

If $2 as. 

133 ', 133 to be 

•• T - T 

heavy, weighty ; Ni. 
to be honored, fart. 
&• /• ni"!35; as 
svh. glorious things : 
Pi. to honor ; Hit. to 
make or to show one- 
[self honorable. 

133 (const. 133 an0 ^ 

•• T - ; 

133) heavy, num- 
'•' •' [erous, rich. 

133 t° g° out > *° be 
T T [extinguished. 

1133 nonor J majesty. 

T 

p^}3 Pi. to cleanse, 

" T [to wash clothes. 

^22 £"i. to multiply. 

- T 

b03 a y omi g snee p« 

an oven. 



rta thus, ri3i ri3 

[hither and thither. 
1 13 priest. 
1313 priesthood. 
Jf3i3 helmet. 
3313 star. 



to 



• D W" t° contain, to 

sustain , Hi. to hold, 

[to contain. 

p3 to stand or exist ; 

' Ni. and Hit. to be 
set up, to be estab- 
lished, prepared, 
ready; Pi. and Hi. 
to place or set up, to 
establish, fix , pre- 
pare. 

DiS/.cup. 

C*D/« Ethiopia. 
*(5*D Ethiopian. 
20 lie, falsehood. 

T T 

H3 strength* 

"Tf"D -P*- to hi<*e» to 
[conceal. 

tJTO *o conceal, de- 
ceive ; Pi. to deny, 
to lie, speak false- 
hood. 
*3 because, for, when, 
[that, but. 

}i"V3J avelin - 

1^*3 miser, avaricious. 

HDD thus. 

T T 

, T -{all. 

3*73 dog. 

J"l 7D to be complete, 

T T 

finished ; Pi. to com- 
plete, to finish, to 
[destroy utterly. 

j"773 daughter-in-law. 

T - 

y\/2 bird-cage. 

* 73 vessel, instrument. 

apparel, jpfor. D*7-3 

vessels, arms, 

[weapons. 



Vocabulary. 

' [reins. 

T7D/.nV73 com- 

• t t • : 

[plete, perfect. 

073 Hi. to reproach, 

put to shame ; Ni. to 
[be ashamed. 

J—lftHo reproach, 
shame, ignominy. 
iDD as > like. 
D#D3 see B£p 
7D3 #*■ to ^e kind- 

- T 

led (of compassion.) 
?3 thus, so, right, 

[f5"Sj^ therefore. 

?i^33 Canaan. 

^4J?J3 a Canaanite. 

C1J3 wing, the skirt of 
,T T [an upper garment. 

KD3 throne. 

J7D3 t0 cover, to con- 
. T T [ceal :Pi. id. 

^TDD ^)ol, foolish, 
f ' : [silly. 

^>DD strength, sup- 
[port, folly. 

F|D3 to long after; 
'- T [Ni.id. 

flp? silver, money. 

D#3 an g er > grie^ 
f|5 dual Q^S?* the 

hollow hand , palm 
[of the hand. 

*-^jn £-n the sole of 

• '• • ' [the foot. 
*1*£)3 young lion. 

£"l£)3 to bend. 

■")£3 Pi. to atone, ex- 
" T [piate, to forgive. 



p7 253 

DH93 (° nl y v luT -) 

atonement, expia- 

[tions. 

ma to dig. 

T T 

Q7D vineyard. 

n^D to cut off, to hew 
down, ;V)3 fttj 
to make a covenant ; 
Ni. to be destroyed. 

7E>2 Z. JW. to totter, 
- 1 

to stumble ; Hi. to 
cause to stumble. 

Di"0 to write. 

- T 

on? s° id - 
njh3 als °n^ri?, a 

shirt or tunic, coat. 
/"IJ15 to beat, dash ; 

_ T 

Ho. to be smashed, 
[to be destroyed. 

b 

^ rarely tfiS not, 

[*6,n§24,5. 

HN7 iW. to be weary, 

T T 

[to dislike, loathe. 

DN7 to wrap around, 
" T [to muffle. 

DNS people. 

37 ,"^}7 heart, under- 
standing. 
337 heart. 

-ftS a lone, f^ 

, [I alone. 

J737 flame. 



rt 



2K. to be white, 

to make white ; Hit. 
to purge oneself, 
[cleanse onesell 



254 pS 

J37 Laban. 

(_ 

£^/ to put on, to 

clothe oneself; Hi. to 
[dress, to clothe. 

ninb ?. r-nrfo a 

T T V V V - 

flame, the glittering 
f¥)7 tablet. [point. 

♦$j Levite. 

n^b wreath, garland. 

NSlS , fyfo if not, 

. . " [unless. 

P7 or p*—? to stay, to 

abide; iK. to keep 
overnight, to harbor. 

j*)7 Pi. to scorn ; -Si'. 

[to interpret. 

HI? 7 /• perverseness. 

0(77 bread. 

Qf77 JVi". to make war, 

"7 [to fight. 

Vfl^ to afflict, to 

T [oppress. 

rf"T7 oppression. 

fl^S night 

t : — 

pS see pS 
t]S 8 ee^n 
*TD 7 to capture. 

— T 

"T3 / capture, noose. 
Jp7 therefore. 

na| ^e rfSrr 

*TD^ to learn ; pi - to 

- T 

. [teach. 

DH'lD? training, in- 

[struction. 

rroS.naSwhy? 



Vocabulary. 

|j;g^ for the sake of, 

. [in order that, 

JJJ^~J to mock, to de- 

. [ride. 

tj^7 to speak unintell- 
igibly, in a foreign 
[language. 

*£7 according to* 

"PJ37 torch, 

^5? be tore; w. suff. 

f*7 scorner. 

Up / to take, capti- 
vate, to accept. 
^p7 Pi. to gather up, 
[to collect. 
Wb a gleaning. 

P Wl tongue, 

7^7 5"*. to slander. 

D 

*7&D might, power; 2) 

oafo. much ; 

*1^/?"1^ exceed- 
ingly, yery. 
rtDI^D anything, 

t : 

[whatever. 
iTttND opening, hole. 

t : 

D.^fKO scales. 

hsm food. 

nS?iXD knife. 

JND -P*» to refuse, be 

[unwilling. 

DKD(w. 3) to disdain, 



Sid 



reject ; JVi. to be de- 
spised, rejected. 

NttO the going down, 

■i 

setting of the sun, 
[hence the west, 
11\Din trust. 

t : • 

I^DD fortress, forti- 
[fication. 

[shield. 
*7D an upper garment. 

15*1/? desert. 

11D to measure. 

— T 

J"J*7D a measure. 

P 7ftcontention ; strife. 

y HD wnv • wherefore? 
P"TD strife, only^Zwr. 
[contentions. 
J^TO knowledge. 

TH12 » fiD > J1D» 

what? how? (§24, 1). 
7|7np°ne that travels. 
*inO to be quick, to 
[hasten, Pi. id, 
*)!"?D o^fl. hastily/ 
nT[i!Jp quickly. 
DKlDMoab. 

T I 

^NiD Moabite. 

• T 

DH10 i^. J2S. r?T 

TT 

£0?)D to move, totter ; 

JUi. to be moved, to 

f [tremble, totter. 

7^Q to circumcise. 
/ i \DP re P' before, 
'D 7$ over against, 
[towards. 



*1D10 instruction, cor- 
[rection. 

lyitD appointed time, 
hence festival; ap- 
pointed place for 
gathering together, 
hence 7j 7i"T& the 
tent of the congrega- 
tion, the tabernacle. 

N^iO utterance, a go- 

■ T 

ing out, depart. 
tPJTlO snare, gin, 

Iftfa Hi. to change, ex- 
change ; intrans. to 
alter, change one's 
[mind. 

rniO teacher. 

K^D t° give way, move 

[away, depart. 

Dt^'iD a sitting, a so- 

[cial circle. 

J^'iO savior. 

il^lD to die ; Pi. and 

Hi. to kill, to slay. 
HID death. 

VT 

nt^lfD a door-post, 

TlDtD a song, psalm. 

n^?D rising o/i^ «m, 
. T: " [east. 

^fiO dance. 

T 

ntjlD vision. 
I^H/p P riee - 

n^CTD sickness, dis- 

T " " [ease. 

JTJTO cam P- 
HD CIO refuge, shelter. 
DiDnO a niuzzle. 
^llDmfi want, defici- 
ency, poverty. 
YtlQ to strike. 



Vocabulary. 

foj3*np lawgiver. 
*nnO to niorrow ; 

'0 Di*? aftertime, 

hereafter. 

rat^no thought. 

t t -: - 

|— innD destruction, 

t • : 

ruin. 

staff, rod, tribe. 

noB bed - 

T * 

^"IDD -S»* to rsfe? 
*")DD ra ™« 

T T 

>p who ? 
D*D jwater. 

*T) {£>>£} plain ; justice, 

equity, impartiality. 

*"US^!3 evenness; ^Zwr. 

T 

right things. 
I}20D pain, sorrow. 

i13D a stroke, wound. 

T - 

J^^foundationjbasis. 
"1^0 to sell. 

- T 

/b^'DO a stumbling 
block. 
^S0tobefull;P-i.to 
fill. 

nSd «?• fun. 

•• T 

ttSo a nd KlSa ful- 
ness, multitude. 

^[Js^ /D messenger, 
angel. 

HSkSd work. 



■"UDQ 255 

P?SK word. 

Pl^/D rule i domi- 
nion. 
il^So a night-hut. 

t : 

nDmO war. 

t t : • 

D^D -Pi- to deliver: 

— T 

Ni. to escape, to be 
delivered. 
T| /ft to rule, to be 
king;: Hi. to make 
king. 

r|7^ king. 
n^bp queen. 
nO/O kingdom. 
nSj/oSp above. 

kingdom, dominion. 

by_w see Syo 

Pl/G^OO dominion, 

tt ; v 

rule. 
7f2 of, from ; w. sw^*. 

n^D to number. 

T T 

nniiO stillness, rest. 
ease;'nm^^stm 

t : 

waters. 
TJ3G3 a weaver's beam. 

T 

hnib g^t. 

t : • 

DUO refuge. 

T 

yjJD to withhold, 
-tf PJP smith. 



256 



•po 



7|DD to mix « 

n2D?2 a pouring out, 

T " - 

fusion of metal, 

V >&$ S° ds of 

fusion, i. e. molten 
gods, idols, 
15 DD lamentation. 

*)& Dfo number. 

/JIJ7D a track, way. 

nSjyD a round 

rampart, wagon-bar- 
ricade. 
"l^D to waver, totter. 

LDJ^D to ^ e small or 
few, to grow small ; 
Pi. to become few, 
little. 

Qtyft subst. and adv. 
little ; ftjfip J but 
little, nearly, almost. 

\>>y0 robe - 

JJJftJ a spring. 

7J/Q from above,from, 
see yg t 

hyn (fr. thy) what 

is above, *~7};pp 

above, JiS^dSo 
from above, upon. 

j—]7j7p degree on a 
dial-plate. 

T?VD work. 

TJ^D only witn <» as 
JJflD/ because of; 



Vocabulary. 

2 ) conj. w. inf. In 
order that ; ^£>X '^ 
so that* 

n^D an swer. 

I^D controU. 

^8 west. 

r~Dij£D arra y ? «» 

army generally. 
Hfe^O work. 

n^gP (/•) ^11, ruin, 

carcass. 
V)5p before. 

pb. pio cliaff - 

Ktf ft to find. 

T T 

j"^ftunleavened Jra^Z 

T - 

mi¥JB net. 

t : 

fil VO commandment. 

t : • 

Ti¥D fortress. 

T 

HVD forehead. 

nfiy? a greave. 

"UMD small. 

PHyp Egypt. 

DipD Pl a ce. 

7|55 staff, stick. 

rr^pD property,cattle. 

KIpD a convocation. 

rTty'pp a cucumber- 
field.' 
*■)£ hitter; 2) a drop. 

PTKID a sight, ap- 



rvrwo 

pearance ; Q^*J^ ',0 
the view. 
HiST'SOD (only injfc 

^nit^>fn5) a tthe 

head. 
Jf^ft to be bitter, to 

T T 

be rebellious. 
DinO height; '£3 on 

T T - 

high, 
rllp a running, race. 
&**"V!3 a fatling, esjp. a 

fatted calf. 
Jin'OP-n. of a hill in 

T. * 

Jerusalem. 
HD^D cunning, de- 

T t " 

ceit, fraud. 

evil-doer. 
jnO *■ J- J£t friend, 

companion. 
MSnO healing, cure; 

quietness, softness. 
^HiD to be bitter , to 

— T 

be in grief; Hi. to 

embitter, to make 

WWO burden. [sad. 

T ~ 

nmo ^bt. 

T T - 

H&Q safety. 

t : • 

tl$!2 to draw out. 

T T 

Jlj^'O Moses. 

Pl^Bfip a hedge, 

fence. 
flC^'O to anoint. 

— T 

i"Vl7&*D destruction, 
corruption. 



fTB'Q adj. anointed ; 
2) s. anointed one. 

t]L^b to draw, to ex- 
tend, to defer. 

t]^D possession. 

iftgfiO couch, bed. 

7*3^9 wise.prudent. 

]2&0 dwelling, tab- 
ernacle. 

b&D to rule ; Hi. to 
cause to rule. 

/&£ a ruler. 

7£VJ proverb. 

T T 

yS&t? a bearing. 

H3&Q a watching, 
guarding, custody. 

ntlftttfO a charge, 

rU^P second, [law. 

f0# B>P support,staff. 

tO^'b justice, judg- 
ment. 
SpCf v ,p weight. 

JTlJ^'p servant. 

Jlfl&'P drink, a feast 
generally. 

J"|Q dead, a dead per- 
jn # *5 bridle. [son. 

DHQ uninjured. 
D'JJflD loms. 

• - : r 

PlJlS sweet, 



Vocabulary. 

VTO when ? 7*5 -m 

how long ? 
pJIO to be sweet ; 

-Hi*, to make sweet. 



H j now ! pray ! I pray. 

a dwelling, }$fc2^ 'J) 
grassy pastures. 
i"MN3 pleasant, becom- 

T 

ing, suitable. 
DJO speech,utterance, 

declaration. 
rpKJJ faithful. 

£"]£s$3 to commit ad- 
ultery. 
Y$} to slight, reject ; 

Pi. to despise, con- 
temn ; excite to con- 
tempt. 

ilp&O a complaining, 

outcry. 
N3 J ^ to prophesy. 

T T 

ijS^nattj Nebu- 

chadnezzar. 
Ji33 intelligent. 

JTI3J P- n - m - 

T 

£3J ZB. to look, to 

- T 

behold, see. 
N*33 prophet. 

• T 

73 3 to wither, to fade 

•■ T 

or pass away ; Pi. id. 
to lightly esteem, to 
disgrace. 



TO 257 

foolish, impious. 

ft733 *• folly, wicked- 
ness. 

J^33 ^K to pour forth, 
to utter, to publish 
abroad. 

*7jjj ift. to declare, to 
telh 

"llji '37 before, over, 
against, opposite to. 

i"UJ) splendor, bright- 
ness. 

y^K.a.Hi. to touch, 
reach. 

£"p J to smite , strike, 
dash. 

b^3 to oppress, to ex- 

- T 

act a task from any 
one. 

£OJ to approach, to 

-T 

touch. 
"J*73 to wander, flee. 

-T 

fJ13 to thrust, expel. 

— T 

3**0 a noble, prince. 
£"|*73 to drive, to drive 
Y!J to vow. taway. 

— r 

3*73 to lead, to drive 
[(beasts.) 
7i"0 to lead. 

- T 

T T T ; 

a.ni7n^)river,esp. 

t : 

the Euphrates, 
ff?Q to rest ; Hi. to 
eause to rest, to set, 
put down, place. 



258 



P* 



JO P- n - m - 

PO to flee ; Hi. put to 

flight. 
Jft^ to move to and 

fro, be shaken. 
N*V)3 fearful, terrible. 

T 

Hi Noah. 

plp]^ K. a. Hi. to lead, 

T T 

conduct. 
^PO brook , river, 

valley. 
PI7P0 inheritance* 
QfO ffl. to pity; 2) to 

— T 

comfort oneself; 3) to 
avenge oneself; Pi. 
to comfort, console ; 
Hit. to console one- 
fc^'rO serpent. [self. 

T 1 

J""l£TO brass; tfoaZ 

DTi^'flJ fetters. 
HDJ to stretch out, to 

T T 

incline ; Hi. to turn 
away ; to incline, 
pervert. 
y*0$ to plant. 

^)£13 to retain, keep 

- T 

sc. anger, to bear a 
grudge. 

C'fcO^ to leave (in 

_ T 

charge of any one), 
to forsake. 
PJDJ -2*- to strike, to 

T T 

J1^ just, right. [sla y- 
*)^ j iVi. to be recog- 

- T 

nised, to dissimul- 



VoCABULARY. 

ate ; 5?. to discern, 
to recognise; Hit. be 
recognised. 
*)33 strangeness; ^"tel 

T •' "I V 

a stranger, foreigner. 
^D^ foreign. 

• : t 

Thttt ant. 

t t : 

*\f2% panther. 

" T 

p j a standard, banner. 
JlD-3 to recoil, shrink 

- T 

back ; Hi. to remove, 

carry away ; Ho. to 

turn away, pervert. 

p| (3 J Pi. to try, tempt, 

T T 

prove. 
tyO} to move on , ad- 
vance, depart ; Hi. to 
lead forth, remove. 

DD^ to ascend. 

I - - T 

hjH (/Oshoe. 
*ftl^ Naomi. 

* t: t 

*")i^ to shake. 

*1W boy, child, youth. 

n^^ girl, young 
woman. 

DHJtt youth. 

I7£J to breathe. 

7£^ to fall, to turn 
out; Hi. to cast down. 

VQ$ to be overspread; 
Pi. to dash in pieces. 

J^'^JJ {com., mostly /.) 
soul, person, life. 

r?\£3 JVii. to quarrel. 



fljl H^ brightness, 
victory, 2) eternity ; 

HIO 7 f° r ever - 
7^3 JK. to deliver; 

Ni. to be delivered. 
*)^J to watch, guard, 

- T 

to besiege, to keep. 
*1VJJ branch. ' 

3J73 to bore, pierce. 

*D3 P ure , innocent. 

QJ^^ to avenge, take 

I -t 

vengeance, 2V7. to be 

avenged or punished. 
Ip.3 to bore, prick out, 

|-T 

Pi. to pick out, to 
pierce. 
*)3 light, lamp. 

JiTO whisperer, tatt- 
ler, tale-bearer. 

pj£H 3 idle {part.Ni- of 
JIQ 1 ") to be slack). 

T T 

NCO to lift Up, to take, 

T T 

D'35 '3 to accept 

• T T 

the person, i. e. to 
take the part of 
somebody, w. ^^, to 
be gracious; w. or 
without following 
*7jp, to lift up the 
voice, to utter, to 
speak. 
Kt20 to lead astray, 

T T 

to deceive. 
D*{£^ women, ^?Zwr. of 
n^'N § 73, B. 2. 



I to bite. 



n^J usury, interest. 
7&>3 to take off. 

- T 

HOC^ breath, spirit, 

t t : 

wind. 
r5£T) to kiss. 

*!\0 eagle. 

yru m. a. rtyrv /• 

■ t t • : 

path. 
[rO to g ive > with 7, to 
make. 

D 

N2D to drink. 

T T 

K3D drunkard. 
DDD to surround, to 

- T 

turn ; Ni. to turn, 
THIN? back, to go 
back. 

13*3 D a c i rcu ^ '•> a ^ v - 

a. prep, round about, 
around. 
?np thicket. 

jl^OD burden, task. 

t : • 

TJJID pure gold. 

H7JD peculiar prop- 
erty ; treasure. 
*IHD -P*- to deliver up. 

_ T 

Jflp Ni. to draw back. 
*Jl p an assembly,circle 

2) secret, counsel. 
D^D horse, 
rpo fla g s - 
H^D tempest. 



Vocabulary. 

"113 to depart, to turn 
aside, to draw near; 
Hi. to remove, to re- 
call. 

niDp booth, taber- 
t T • [nacle. 

7DD silly. 

DtSpD folly. 

H 7D Pi" to weigh. 

T T 

n*7D *° pardon. 

- T 

HID forgiving. 

T _ 

n? /D rampart. 
y?p rock, support. 
ft7D Pi" to overthrow. 

T]DD to support, up- 
hold. 

"T VO *° support, sus- 
tain. 

1j3D to mourn, lament. 

- T 

H^tDD ship. 

t : 

"V£ D a sapphire. 
*")^J3 to count; Pi. to 

tell. 
*■)££ book. 



W 



259 



SpDto 



stone. 



'I 

•)Qpret. o/*V1D. . 

T 

|"HD a turning away, 

TT 

(from the law, from 
God.) 
fplO to hang over. 

-T 

[i^D c °at of mail. 
*tf!D to Q ide ; ffi. to 

- T 

hide oneself, to be 



hidden ; Hit. to hide 
oneself. 



3J/ cloud, thick cloud, 

darkness. 
Hiy* to serve. 

H3J/ laborer. 

"Ot* servant, slave. 

n*0}/ work, labor. 

TQ# with 3 p-<?/. be- 
cause of, TQJ^/ 
for the purpose that. 

^DJ* to pass over or 
away, to tresspass ; 
Hi. to lead over, to 
cause to pass; Hit. 
to be careless. 

m$ a. ruy cake. 

■Jtt witness. 

*iy 1) s. duration, 
eternity; "1^7 fo r " 
ever; 1J/1 dV^ 1 ? 
forever a. ever. 2) 
prep, as for as, to, (of 
space and time) -|J> 

*j"ID now fo n g • 

jTTjJ testimony, wit- 
ness ; assembly, con- 
gregation . 

py Eden. 

•y\p flock. 

•fty .Hi', to testify, to 
bear witness. 



260 Tiy 

Hiy still, yet, since, 
while. 

fjy strength. 
7*!^ ) unrighteous- 
JLI^f 1 "^ iniquity, 
1 '/!>L ) unjustice. 

JlTiJf burnt-offering. 

suckling, hence an 
infant or child. 
D^ty eternity, age; 

pbi^ or cDSir 

nVI for ever; 2) 
world. 
?*]J/ iniquity, sin. 

*}•$ see >JJk 

tjV to fly. 
t"pj/ fowl, birds. 

j^JJ p. n. of a place. 
Tjy skin. 
Tl^ Pi. to blind. 
y\y adj. blind. 

ry ««§• (pi™. £3^) 

strong, imprudent, 
jjf strength, ^ my s. 

3fj/ to leave , desert, 

forsake. 
H-ty Gaza. 

nj^^P-n. of a city. 

"I*]/ to help, deliver. 

1#' n iy help * 

JltO]/ to cover, wrap. 
*")C0j/ to surround ; P*. 
to crown. 



Vocabulary. 

crown. 
Vy eye, fountain ; du' 

wltj? a<Zj. weary. 

town. 
7j^ upon, on, over, 
against; w.suff. ir})}. 

Sy^swiT. Invoke. 

H 7J7 to go up, ascend; 
Hi. to bring up, to 
offer up ; Hit. to lift 
oneself up. 

ni]} burnt-offering. 
?hy leaf. 
fSjf to exult. 

pr7# ni g hest > the 

Most High. 
7* 7,17 furnace. 
^S,T p *- to glean. 

dS^-^*- to be hidden; 
•* Hi. to hide, conceal. 

dSj; youth. 

HD/^ a maiden, 
ijp to rejoice, exult. 



r^ 



EDJ? with ; w. suff. 

W< 

CDJ/ or CD^ people, 
nation. 

*1*JJ? to stand, to end- 
ure , continue ; w. 
\3£ 7» to withstand, 



resist; w. rp, to stop 

from, desist. 
Ifey prep, with, but 

only w. &uff. HEtf 

with me. 
!)£$ Pillar. 
[i£DJf Ammon. 

oisg/.nyiojjAm- 

monite. 
/"Vp^ neighbour, 

fellow-man. 
7p^ to toil, labor. 

Spy toil, trouble. 

pQJf -2*' to deepen. 

ppy valley, field. 

npj? sheaf; 2) Omer, 

a dry measure. 
rniD#P-n. of a city. 

JJjy ##. to delight 

oneself. . 
tlty to answer, to tell; 

w. 3 testify against; 

Pi. to oppress , to 

humble; Hit. to be 

afflicted. 
]}y humble, meek. 

J71^ humility, meek- 
ness. 

0^ ^ ^?. ♦ jy, misery, 
affliction. 

\J^ poor. 

PJ^ cloud. 

^ W to punish, fine. 

*)£}? dust, sand, earth. 



TV 

VJf tree, wood ; plur. 
sticks for fuel. 

"y£)f 2fo'. to be grieved; 
Sit. to grieve one- 
self, to be angry. 

JiD^i^ sorrow, pain. 

H^i^ counsel, advice. 
QWy strong. 
/jy ^ az y» sluggard. 

T 

DSy/- bone > bod y- 

r)*^Vi/* /• festive as- 
sembly, a feast-day. 

Dp V reward ; for the 
sake of, because. 

~]py to bind. 

*)p]? to tear out, to 

uproot. 
^IpT^dkZ/.barrenjSterile. 

P"lp# p. n. of a city. 

!}*TJ^ to become dark ; 
Si. yiyri adv- at 
evening; 2) to pledge 
or pawn, to be or 
give security. 

%**)]} to be sweet. 

2*1^ «^j. sweet. 

3ny evening; D?9HJ? 

the two evenings, 

twilight. 
y]y raven. 

^11^ (only^Z.) willows. 

t r 

Tiy^y. plain , wilder- 



VOCABULARY. 

n^J?. security, 

pledge, 
n^l^ Pi- to make bare, 

uncover. 

naked. 
Q)~\y prudent. 

TT)y to set in order, 
to array (a battle)', 
' to equal. 
Tw*lV foreskin. 

t :*t 

tXiy neck. 

Y^V to fear » tremble. 

try//, bed, 

Dt^i^ herb, grass. 
rJJyV to make, to do. 

T *T 

Tlfc^, ")£>]/ ten; 

virh "ti&y3 on 

the thenth (day) of 
the month. 
y$$ rich. 

rpy&p. the tenth 

My to smoke. 
f^yc-.ffi^? smoke. 
\ V?]l smoking. 
T)$y to oppress 
^tyy ten. 

It^'ytoberich^i.to 

make rich, to become 
rich ; Sit. to feign 
oneself rich. 



"^ttfj? wealth, riches. 

fry com. time, 1j-|#3 

in its time , in due 

TIDy now. [season. 

"Nfly he-goat. 



*1NJ3 -P*- to adorn , to 
beautify ; Sit. to 
glorify oneself, to 
boast oneself. 

y}Q to urge, press, 

reach unto. 
y^B chance. 

*1J)5 corps, carcass. 

J^Jf} to meet. 

I7£) c- ^ (§ 73) mouth, 
edge; ^, tg-^ 

in proportion , ac- 
cording to. 

j"J£ here. 

f £ refined gold. 

(75 snare. 
*in3 to fear. 

— T 

m£05 topaz. 

JJ7£) rill, brook. 

(17$/. apiece. ' 

^75 to escape; Pi.id., 
to set free, to de- 
liver ; Si. to rescue. 

escape, deliverance. 
775 .Hft. to pray. 



262 dSd 

0/B scales. 
'ftyhs Philistine. 

~j£D ^ es ^> that not, for 
fear that. 

M13 to turn, w. ^, 
to or towards. 

£D*J3 countenance, 
face, surface; V|£) 7^ 
upon; ^£7 before; 
*jSjpj "before , be- 
cause of. 

D^\)3 pearls. 

HD 5 a passover , the 
passover-feast [prop. 
an over-leaping). 

tlBQ lame. 

/D5 carved image, 
idol. 
7J/£ to do, to work. 

7pb the worker. 

7J^£ deed, act, work. 

n^5 hihor , r deed, 
wages. 

EDJ^iD a step, trace, 
tread or beat, fig. a 
time, rifli* D£B 
one time ; ^'^72^' 
&t2V& thrice. 

y¥iD wound. 

"TpB to remember 
think, visit, number; 
with *— 7, to look 
after ; Pi. to muster; 
ZTi. to appoint, to 
charge. 



VoCABULAEY. 

nip9 (only pi) pre- 

J"JD^ to open. *- " 

Up? open-eyed, 

seeing. 
*\Q (w. the art. ^l^H) 

- T — 

a young bull,bullock. 
"H*} X. JK. to se- 

- T 

parate. 
r™Tll3 to bear (fruit) ; 

TT 

Hi. to make fruitful. 
TT\£ young cow. 

TT 

'•HD p. n. of a Ca- 

naanitish tribe. 
H15 to sprout, to 

- T 

blossom. 

£3*)f} collect, single ber- 
ries which fall off in 
the vintage , stray 
fruits. 

H§ fruit. 

D*)5 to sever, to break 

- T 

assunder. 
J^)Q to reject, avoid. 

|ijH£ a title of the 
Egyptian kings. 

Y")& to break down, 
to destroy. 

*■)*")£ K. Hi. to make 

-T 

void, to violate; 
Ho. to be brought to 
nonght or nullified. 
tJ^5 to stretch out. 

- T 

t£?^5 to spread out, 

- T 

to extend, specify. 
&*)& horseman, rider, 

T T 

horse. , 



hpns 

yiy£ to transgress, to 

sin, with 5 
y$£ sin. 

]■)£) morsel. 

DNH3 suddenly. 

nnB to open ; Pi. to 

- T 

loosen, untie, 
fini? door. 

Q'NJHS) foolish- 

t : 

ness ; 2) concr. a fool, 
simpleton, 
ft an adder. 



JKV flock, sheep, small 
cattle. 

T T 

xsvaost,^. ni*oy. 

T T T : 

^£ roebuck, gazelle. 
m \y£ to heap up. 

- T 

p**l!£ righteous, just. 

tfTtf/ JTiT¥ Si- 

T • 

donian. 
pTi£ to be right or 
just ; Hi. to pro- 
nounce right or in- 
nocent , to acquit ; 
Hit. to justify or 
clear oneself. 

piy ) righteousness, 
J,--.^ > justice ; plur. 
' 'JW; ) righteoubacts. 



JTl¥ ^ to institute, 

TT 

to command, charge. 

mitf/.Tyre. 

•ytf rock. 

\)tV£ to laugh ; Pi. to 
laugh heartily, hence 
to sport, to be joyful. 

M»y Zion. 

*)t\£ messenger, 2) 

hinge. 
*— ?\£ shadow, shade, 

shelter. 
n^V to go on well, to 

- T 

succeed, to prosper ; 
Hi. to cause to pro- 
sper , to make suc- 
ceed, and intrans. to 
be successful. 
D7J£ image. 

n.1D^¥ shadow of 
death or death-shade. 
Wty£ to be thirsty. 

" T 

*1D¥ w ° o1 - 

H3¥ cold, 2) shield. 
Jft^V numble, modest. 
VJV to be low, modest. 

ijr/step. 

young. 

npl^V cr y for nel P- 

It t : 

JiDV north, northern. 
-VJiDVkird. 

nmsvp-n.f. 



Vocabulary. 

?£\f to hide ; with ^, 
to lie in wait for 
somebody ; 2) to lay 
up , to treasure or 
hoard. 

tffydV a basilisk - 

T\iS£ Zephath, p. n. of 

a Canaanitish city. 
lUt H¥ w * destict. ac- 

— T 

cent or w. art. , as 
*1Vi"l) enemy. 

T - 

iH^ trouble, distress, 

T T 

adversity. 

tfyg to smelt, esp. of 
gold and silver, to 
refine, to purify. 

*n\£ to bind up, to be 

- T 

hostile to ; Hi. to 
V"l¥ ba g- [afflict. 

*yijf adversary. 

P 

J^p vomit. 

pttqp s rave > se_ 

pulchre. 

^^p Pi. to receive, to 

admit; Hi. to be 

opposite or over 

against. 

r*3p Pi. to gather; 

1E£. to assemble. 
"Dp T to bury. 

"Of? grave. 

t^j} holy. 

(Tip to kindle. 



ha 



263 



BHp Pi. Hi. to sanct- 

ify , to keep holy ; 

Ni. to be sanctified. 
t^*"ip holiness , holy 

thing ; 2) holy place, 

sanctuary. 
/Hp congregation. 

i^Dip helmet. 

H*)P ^. Pi. to hope ; 

t|t 

Ni. to assemble. 

"P 1 mSp voice, 
7p ) sound, thunder. 

Q?|p to rise up , arise, 
come forth, to stand 
firm, endure; Pi. 
perform , confirm ; 
Hi. to raise up , to 
establish ; Ho. to be 
raised up, erected. 

nnp>/ : | ,_T 

I tOp to be small , %. 
unworthy. 

ppi5 /• njejji small » 

young. 
*1DD ^*" to burn in- 
cense ; Ho. to be of- 
fered as incense. 

n"i.tDp/- incense. 

Vtp summer. 

fJB^p P« n - of a stream. 

Sp (i>z. D'Vp H s nt ' 

fi^p disgrace. L 

Vp a. K*7p roasted 
grain. 



264 hbp 

SSp to be light, to 

-Jt 

abate : PL to curse, 
to revile. 

J"y7f? curse " 

J/Sp Pi. to sling. 

ybo a slin s- 

J"T£Dp standing corn. 

T J T 
ip. C ' IP nGSt * 

NJp3 P*. to envy ; M. 

to make envious. 
tfjp jealous. 

i7K3j"? envy. 

r||p K. Hi. to buy, 

acquire, possess. 
HJ3D s t a lk> cane. 

• It 

( p jp possessor, master. 

DDp to divine, spoken 
esp. of false prophets. 
mp end. 

nvp end - 

^>yp harvest. 

• J T 

rj^jp to be angry, 
wroth. 

rvp -P*- to cut ° ff - 

*!Vp to cut , to reap ; 

T/p reaper. 
pp cold. 

JOP to name, to call, 

. T ' T 
invite. 

frsnp or riip SL 

t{t t|t 

to happen or chance. 



Vocabulary. 

JlSOpS to meet ; 2) 

over against, 
^pp to approach, to 

come together ; Pi. 

bring near; Hi. to 

offer. 
2T)T) inward part; 

^pP3 in the midst 

of, within ; ^Jppft 

from admidst,among. 

^"jpp near, he who is 

near, neighbour. 
j"J")P K. Ni. to meet ; 

Hi. to cause to meet. 
Hpp ice. 
r\np city. 
Q"Hp to cover, to lay 

"It 

on (skin). 
'. horn. 



f)Pp city. 

3£/p Hi. to listen, to 

hearken. 
jl^'p to be hard ; Hi. 

to harden. 
ilCp nai "d, vehement; 

ibba n&p ha ^- 

faced, impudent. 
rS-VpWT) the scale of 

a fish, of an armor. 
PS^'P to bind. 



r~l£0 to see, to look 

T T 

out, choose ; JSfi. to 
be seen, to appear ; 
Hi. to show ; Hit. to 
look at one another. 



niENn (omy pi) 

T 

corals. 

head, top, summit, 
J^'^p poverty, [chief. 

£>>a see fc^'p, 

T T 

{1#*n first - 

/WX") beginning. 

^*n abundance, multi- 
tude. 

much, great, many, 
^p or 3*p quarrel. 

^^p to be numerous, 

- T 

many. 
H331 myriad. 

t t : . 

p^l to become many; 

T T 

IK. to multiply. 

: t t 

CD ^31 great grand- 
children, man of the 
fourth generation. 

T^P to lie down ; Hi. 
to cause to lie down. 

*~7^p to tread down, 

- 't 

i. e. to slander, 
pjjp com. gend. foot. 

£"Hp K. Pi. to pursue, 

to follow. 
ftp 5 "! persecutor. 

£3 PHP a watering- 
trough. 

31P multitude o£ 
much, many. 



rm 

FTn> f-jv-jlft. to smell, 
w. 3 j to enjoy the 
odor of. 

|f?H c - 9 wind, spirit. 

j"7*Vl abundance. 

tt ; 

□*)*") to be high, lifted 
up; Pi. Hi. to raise, 
lift up high. 

y*T\ Pi. Hi. to cry 

aloud, to shout. 

YV*\ to run, to hasten ; 
' Hi. to bring quickly. 

ly'Y^ to be poor or in 
want; Hit, to feign 
oneself poor. 

j-yn p. n. f. Ruth. 

(IP prince. 

^fV") a ^j- wide, broad. 

T T 

dm, 51(11. /• street. 

D^m a AJ- merciful. 

p i r7"^ a-dj. distant, far; 
HI PTO fa r off > from 
afar. 

'Cm to love; Pi. to 
have pity; Pu. to 
obtain mercy. 

D^fT") mercy, affec- 
tion. 

VfT) to wash, to bathe. 

pf"7*1 to be or remain 
far; Pi. to put far 
away; Hi. to remove. 

iDHi Di"l to contend, 
to conduct a cause. 
^"1 contention, quar- 
rel. 

n"i(^.D^3"l)«^j.soft. 



Vocabulary. 

33*1 chariot; 2) upper 

millstone. 
tfO") property, 

wealth. 
7*3*1 slander. 

T 

TjD*"l to be tender, 

timid, faint. 
Q") high , lofty (part. 

of on). 

HOT worm. 

T • 

DD"I to be high; Ni. 

to lift up oneself. 
DD*"i to tread. 

- T 

flin a shouting, joy, 

T • 

outcry for help. 
P") to shout. 

J/") companion, friend. 

J 4 ") (w. distinct, ac- 
cent y~\ , with art. 

inrr orV-in) bad, 

- T * TT 

evil, wicked, dis- 
pleasing. 

^""j badness , wicked- 
ness. 

3j/^ to be hungry; 
Hi. to cause to hun- 
ger, to let famish. 

DJtH a®3> hungry^ 

pfyi to feed ; Pi. Hit. 
to be a companion, 
to associate oneself. 

Hj/ 6 ") shepherd. 

pM*""} badness, wicked^ 

*r t 

ness, evil, adversity. 



yen 265 

QJH 2T.272. to thunder. 

y^*n to be evil ; Ni. 
to become evil cr # 
worse; Hi. to do ill, 
to act badly ; 2) to 
break, to crush; intr. 
tc be broken. 

t*/l7*"l earth-quake. 

K£H X Pi. to heal. 

T T 

H^l to be loose, weak; 

T T 

Ni. to be languid, 
idle ; Hi. to slacken, 
leave off, to abandon. 

DH»51 P- n - of a 

station. 

j— }V*"1 to accept , to 
cherish, to be de- 
lighted, pleased; Ni. 
to be graciously ac- 
cepted. 

p^n will, delight, 
favor. 

\T£T\ to murder, kill, 
slay. 

*3p"l to decay, perish. 

^P*l rottenness. 

It t 

"]T)^\ to leap, dance, 

V'pl expanse, firma- 
ment. 
t> 1 poor (pi'op, part. 

of &t\, alsq t^jn, 

J 4 J*/*1 to act wickedly ; 

Hi. to condemn. 
l*u*1 unrighteousness, 

wickedness. 



266 yen 

y&*1 wicked, guilty, 

a guilty one. 
ilj^'l wickedness. 

a flame. 



SWB^ Saul. 

world, hell. 
/NfcP' to ask, demand ; 

tiafoefo bx$ to 

t : - t 

ask after the wel- 
fare, to salute. 

nNtr'tobeleft;i^.id.; 
Hi. to leave, to 
remain. 

^ imp. of^*, 

- T 

ytfpret. of y\$, 
n^t^ to carry away 

T T 

captive. 

nyn^' ° atn - 
ny^ week - 

JHOtf /• captivity; 
nd^D^to bring 
back the captives. 

D^t^ stick, staff, 
sceptre, tribe. 

Wytf seventh. 

V • T * 

ear of corn. 
J^tJJ JT. iVi. to swear ; 
JK.. to bind by an 
oath, to adjure. 



Vocabulary. 

^ J seven. 

oyyp sevent y- 

DM#5^' sevenfold. 

128^" to buy corn; 
2) to break, to de- 
stroy ; Ni. to be 
broken, contrite. 

*y2& destruction. 

JJQfj! inf. of 2$\ 

rtev? to rest - 

TfoVf Sabbath. 

T ~ 

]')F*)%0 a sabbath- 
keeping or sabbatism. 
11 W to destroy. 

- T 

11 ty a destroyer. 
*1B?" Almighty. 

Diltr on y x - 

fr*OJ£> vanity, false- 
hood, in vain. 

"y\$ to return , turn 
away ; Hi. to cause 
to return, to restore, 
to bring home; with 
151 to 'answer ; Pi. 

T T 

C5J to refresh. 
}1 W ! t° be equal; JBi*. 

T T 

to compare. 
£"){£? whip, scourge. 
J-JiW' a cry for help. 
1£it^" trumpet. 

T 

l 1 )^' an ox. 

1^ or *V^J3?.to sing. 



ronW 
rixifWte* tlily * 

1Hir a ^ibe. 

£DtW to slaughter. 

7(1^ roarer, lion. 

pf7^" small dust, a 
cloud. 

irW to pierce, break 
open; PL to seek 
early, to search for. 

jint^ &i- to become 
corrupt, act wickedly. 

nntr /• p^. 

1'#) 

ni^j asong v 

JTt^ to P ut > place, 

direct. 
53 £^' to lie down; Hi. 

to cause to lie, to 

lay down. 
li-Dt^ intoxicated, 

drunk. 
rDt^ to forget ; Pi. to 

- T 

cause to forget, to 
neglect. 

S"^, bytf tobe 

T " T 

bereaved ; Pi. to de- 
stroy, make childless. 
DDC ^- 1° rise early. 

- T 

JD^ to dwell, to rest. 
13 £> strong drink. 
J7gf snow. 

rorh® flame - 



t&tot 

Di 7t£f peace, welfare. 

fl 1$} to send , to put 
forth , stretch out, 
Pi. to send away, to 
cast out, forth. 

]tlb$ table. 

T7CP* to throw; Hi. 
to cast. 

Cb& P*. to pay, per- 
form, recompense. 

ED~?t2^ adj. perfect, 
honest, peaceable. 

D /$ peace-offering. 

titibvf Solomon. 
?y)$ to draw. 

nvbb'\ thiee - 

OVTHVf grand- 
children. 
CDC'> tl&Vf there; 

T . . T T 

DtS^'O fr° m there. 

T 

D^V-niftgOname; 
2) Sem. 

T - 

1ft& ^ destroy, cut 
JfE^ thither. toff - 

T T ■ 

7^05^ Samuel. 
ffii\0& report. 
D*Dt^' heaven. 

D D ££* to be astonished, 

confounded. 
FliySIP desolation, 

t t : _. 7 

waste. 



Vocabulary, 



oil. 
J?12$ 'to hear, listen, 

obey, to understand. 
]?!2# report. 
fU*/P^' Simeon. 
*iOS^ to keep, guard ; 

ifo". to beware of ; 

Pi. to regard. 

phDi? Samaria. 
t^'DjT c - g- sun. 
P'fi^D^ Samson. 

j# (du. QjupO «. ?. 

H^'to repeat. t tooth ' 

T T 

fWt^ year. 

T T 

H4 1? sleep. 

>J#, 03J^/ second. 

*y& scarlet color 

• T 

u\yp two. 

Yj{$ Pi. to sharpen, 

inculcate, teach dili- 
gently. 

DDSS^ to plunder. 

Sj^SjW'fox. 

r7## hollow of the 
hand. 

gate. 

y$lf$ to amus e one- 
self, to play, to caress. 
&)t&Z# deli g nt . 
Jl(liD^ f emale servant. 
l0£)2£* to judge. 
Bfitf judge. 



T[5^ to shed, to cast. 

7$& to be low; Hi. to 
make low, to humble. 
?£3fc^' coney or rabbit. 

1p£5>' to watch, to 

wake. 
np£T' to drink ; III. 

It t 

give to drink. 
T\0imp, ofpgfp, 

tOpfc^' to rest; JK. give 

Sp^' to weigh. ^ rest * 

7pg> a weight, shekel. 

Ipt^' P^ to lie. 

IpJ^ ^e, falsehood. 

[1H# a coat of mail. 

nnt?' to drink. 

T T 

ptritr'(c^tr)/.two. 

br\Q? to plant. 

- T 

ptyti to settle down^ 
to cease. 

^5^ and ^3^ to be 
satisfied , to have ab- 
undance ; Hi. to sat- 
isfy. 

^M Pi- to raise, ex- 

- T 

alt; JVt. to be ex- 
alted or sublime. 
H y '& to grow, increase. 

T T 

mk> field. 

V T 

tl& c ' 9- lamb, sheep. 



268 rD1B> 

roib' p- n - ° f a cit y- 

Q)p and Q^ to put, 
make, give; IK. with. 
<im ), to give, bestow. 

£Oi&>' enemy. 

D(lt^ to lau g n ; pi - to 
I - T 

rejoice, play, dance. 

pTVp laughter. 

Eft^ltohate, to be 
ftOJy J an adversary. 

TDt*^ an adversary. 

I T T 

j"HI}*£^ grayness or 

T 

hoarinessof hair, old 

age. 
fpp to meditate, to 

speak, talk. 
XV\ff sorrow. 
'fflp to rejoice. 
^Db* insight, mind. 
*V2& hireling. 

- T 

7^2^ Hi. to be wise, 

- T 

to act wisely ,to cause 
to prosper. 

hip ° r hyp *ntel- 

ligence, understand- 
ing. 

15& ■#*• to De hired ; 

— T 

Hit. to hire oneself 

out , to earn wages. 

*Dfc> a - ^'W reward, 

1 T 

wages. 
tlu?& garment. 

t : - 

Qitfpret. ofQ!|jy, 

T 

7X0 &♦ left hand. 



Vocabulary. 
rrOfe> a nd rofe> to 

- T ~ " T 

rejoice; Pi. to cheer, 
to gladden. 
nftt£> a$. joyful, glad. 

- •• T 

nnpb> j°y> rejoicing. 
n^Db' garment, 

T ; ' 

raiment. 
i^DO^/- spider, 

#)p K. Pi. to hate. 

t t ■ - t : 

lip, bank (of a river), 
pjjf sack-cloth. 

"lb> (jP*-DHb>) prince, 

• T 

chief. 
}— nb' princess; 2) 

TT 

Sarah. 
"!HtP a left > fugitive 

• T 

one, remnant, 
fllb' to burn. 



j-j}Nfl desire. 
TONA %-tree. 
HDD chest, vessel or 

T *• 

ark. 
n3 ! Ofi intelligence. 

t : 

Y2T\ straw. 

DiUri c. g. depth. 

JlvJin praise, object 

of praise, 
mill thanks, thanks- 

T 

giving. 



D /HiD n °pe, expect- 
ation. 

n^ c -n^ the middie > 

between, in. 
fifijijl a Pleading; 
2) correction, reproof. 
^7iJn ) a worm > esp* 

I ^ til P COC1L ? 

n^Pin abomination. 

goings out, issues, 
fountains, 

T 

n^rrfl beginning. 

t • : 

D^nfi (onlyjpZw.) 
entreaties, supplica- 
tions. 

Jinil under, instead ; 
iinriP under 

TT 

t^mri must, wine. 

pfl K. Pi. to weigh, 
prove, measure ; NL 
to be even, right. 

J"J7n to hang, to hang 

T T 

ftp) plain, perfect. ^ U P* 

T 

H^Dfl a f°rm, image. 

t : 

JTttDfi exchange. 

t : 

n^DIl continually, al- 

• T 

ways. 
D*Dfl righteous , up- 

' T 

right. 
T[Dn to hold, support, 
obtain. 






ffi> ~|fi, n^M imp. of 

fiDIJfi slumber. 
UJ^n to abhor. 

npSj^ri bidden 

thing," a secret. 
Jflir.fi good cheer, de 

light. 
*iyM sheath of a 

sword. 



Vocabulary. 

n^N?fi, n^^pii 

glory, beauty. 
tTVbft prayer. 

t • : 

b^/H to seize, to 

- T 

capture, catch. 
tl^t) hope. 

t|: * 

Jl^p/H circuit or 

round. 
J/pfi *° strike (hands 



Apparel 269 

in rejoicing, in pled- 
ging ; 2) to blow. 

J—q/nfi shouting, 
clang of trumpets. 

nj^-1 t^'fi help, victory, 
salvation. 

ny&n nine. 

nn> w - sw #. *nfi *»& 



II. ENGLISH AND HEBREW. 



A 

Abel S^i 
Abide, to 3^\ 

- T 

Able, to be ^}'y* 

T 

Abomination fi^Jhft 
Abraham DJ-fDN* 
Absalom 017 COX* 

t : - 

Abuse, to hi}} Hit. 

with 2, 
Accomplished , to be 

'• T 

According to 3, *£3, 

Acquire, to fifc^* 
Adam £ntf # 

T T 

Add, to FID* -H*. 
Adversary y\#, -ft t 



Afflict, to f-tfj; Pi ; 
After, afterwards^fj^, 

§ 75, 6. yp?2. 

After (== like) $ t 
After (= when) *sj>, *) 
w. wi/. co?wtf. § 106, 2. 
Again -fty, 
Against 7^ 4 

AH S3,-S3; we all, 

ye all, see § 98, 2. 
Almighty H£\ 

Also ai rjx; 

Always ^fl, 
Among ^in^, }>3, 

Amorite v-JON» 



And — see § 18; §33; 
§ 102. 

Angel rjN^D. 
Anger rj^ (*£)N my 

anger.) 
Animal ppjf, 

T - 

Anoint, to ^pft ^". &. 
iZ£. / to anoint for 

consecration fi^'ft. 

Anointed jf»#Q, 
Another (= different) 

IPIXi {One Another 

see § 97, 4). 
Answer, to fill^* 
Answer, «. fOJ^jg, 
Ant n^DJ /• (pfar. 

Any Ajfy gftg,.; 
Apparel #!Q7 # 



270 Appointment 

Appointment "lj^jft. 
Arise, to Q^p, 
Arm Jpr /. 

Array, to £07« 
Arrogancy pfi)?. 

as ->, n^p; T 

Ascent, s.rVjJflD. 
Asliamed, to be jJVi^l* 
Ashes *)£N» 
Ask, to ^NtP (rarely 
b#W) ; t( > ask for 

~ T 

Ass *TJJ0n 5 a she-ass 

At (=to) 1^ 
At (=through) *ty2, 
At (-from) Jjp, 
Athalia 1JT Sfltf. 

t : -*: 

Avenge, to GD3 > to 

I -T 

be avenged on QpJ 

m. w. ?p, 
B 

Baal 7^3, 
Babylon ^M/- 

V T 

Back, «. 1J 4 
Backbite, to ^Jjl, 

~ T 

Bad p^ (w. distinct. 

accent ty*)). 
Bake, to H5K. 

T, T 

Battle rrDn^mp. 

t t : • t): 

Be (=to exist) FPH; as 



Vocabulary. 

copula, see § 77, 1, 

2, 3. 
There is &\ -gf> 
There is not V$ § 75, 3. 

Bear, to (= carry) 
fr^fctt 5 /— to brin g 
forth)^* 

Bear ^H 

Beard JpJ 

Beast i-pn/nora 

t - t •• : 

Beat, to tl^'1 -S&. 
I - t 

Beauty Tin, *Qf (in 
Beautiful HD*, H5* /• 

V T T T 

nits 

Because W, >2, S# 
Bed j-|&0 

T 

Bed-chamber "*)1f7 

t : • 

Before, <wfr>. Q"){3 , 
Before, prepos. *}£ "™7 , 
Beg, to StftT 

- T 

Beget, to "p* £Ti. 

_ T 

Begin, to V^f"! -2*- 

— T 

Beginning j-flgftn/- 
Behold, to JJ^J EL, 

nrn 

T T 

Behold ! interj. Jp^ , 
r-|^p-|> behold I 

see § 75, 3. 



Bound 

Beloved -fi^ , H*"t' T 
Beseech, to H^H ■?*-, 

trpa P*. 

Besides *"D7J9 
Beside (=at, near) 

Between ?*3 
Belteshazzar 

Bind,to^p,^DN; 

- It - t 

to bind up or .to- 
gether yyf , 07K 

PS. 

Bird^n^ 
Birth-right ffltta * 

t : 

Bitter ^jj # 
Bless, to rp^ Pi. 
Blessed 7^3 
Blessed, to call *")£?X 

- T 
Pi. 

Blessing HD*D 

t t: 

Blind, adj. -^Jf, 

Blood Q% 

Boast, v. of 7/17 JH»*» 

- T 

w. ^} of the theme. 
Body^j^^, (=corpse) 

nSni T 

Bone O^j;, 

Book *")£p 

Born, to be f^ JV*. 

-T 

and Pw. 
Bosom ptft , pfl. 

Bound, to (= to leap) 



Bow 

Bow (v.) down £"|£0« 
Boy IJft, 
Branch fij^. 
Bray , to , to smash 

Bread D|-^, 

Breadth ^|-]h. 
Break, to "OE?\ 

- T 

Breath HD&O. 

t t : 

Breathe, to ("715 ^55* 
Brethren D^fl^, 

§ 73, A. 2. 
Bribe ^J^, 
Bride H^D. 

T - 

Bring, to ^13 M*. 
Bring back y\$ Hi. 
Bring down "pV 2Z2. 
Bring forth H[£W> 

- T T T 

Bring good news ^ J£^J 

Pi. 
Brother n&§ 73, A 2. 

T 

Bnild, to HJ2* 

T T 

Builder, s.J-qS. 
Burnt-offering H /J^ 

Bury, to -£jj% 

Bun >3,o*s->3, 
Buy, to rrip. 

By— pr«p. 3,^3, 



Vocabulary. 
C 

Call, to {s$*n > to c - 
upon fcOD to. ace. 

StJt 

camp rung. 

Can, to be able 73\ 

T 

Canaan JJjfcEj., fully 



Captain ^U , #tf% 

1 • T 

Carmel 7jg^3« 
Carry, to k \*£0, 

T T 

Cast, to 7f™"7ty J2*;, to 

be cast down (of the 
soul) nil C* -S** 

— T 

Castle j—H¥p and 

Catch, to j^£fl, to be 
caught, id. Ni. 

cattle r\)pn. 

Cedar HN* 
Certain (=one or our 
indef. article) "7(7^/- 

rirrN. 

Certainly ptf« 
Chaldean HgO # 
Chamber *)*1{"| (const- 

Champion *VJ3J|, 

child nS».,^3. 

Children Q^*, 

t : 

children of Israel 

SfiOSr >i3. 



Complaint 271 

Choose, to *7n3 *"• D» 
Circumspect, to be 

— T 

Cistern n^D/- 
City n^/.,'§ 74,2. 

Clean, adj. *7inO» 
Clear, to, ofstones^H^ 

I- r 
Pi. 

Cloth IJ3, 
Clothe, to go 1 ? -Hi'. 

- T 

Cloud fW, 

Cloud, thick Sfi^J?. 

Coat J""0J""O and 

n^h3» 
coid,s.^-in» 

Come, to J^*J3, 
Come forth, out J<¥\ 

T T 

Come over *1^}V» 
Come up H /If • 
Come, to, to pass £j*j7. 
Comfort, to QfO J ^ i - 
Comforter DH^p, 
Command, to J"|*|\f Pi. 

T T 

Commandment niVD» 
l^lpS » ill? , the ten 
commandments 

Compass, to 3DD -^* 

_ T 

and Pi. 
Compassion, to have 
QH*"I Pi- w - ace - 

~ T 

Complaint, s. |7^» 



272 Concerning 

Concerning, prep. *}♦ 
Confidence , to put 

Confined space 1VJD» 

Congregation "TTH, 
T ' T 
Consider, to ^{p -S^- 

Contention ^*1, 

copy rr^fi* 

Corn p r ^ 
Couch M^i 
Counsel, to VJJ\ 
Counsel jl^ ♦ 
Counselor PJ7\ 
Courageous, to be 

J>QN/**. A. 
Covenant /V)3» 
Create, to N*)!3» 

T T 

Crown JTjgy, 

Cry, to O^^pJ^, 

Cry, «. n^f, rij2#$ 

Curse, to Htf , to be 

-T 

cursed, Ho. 
Curse, 8. n77p» 

t t |: 

Cut,to,tocutoffJ"n3, 



Damsel IfWJ, 
Daniel %>$% 
Darius #VTU 



Vocabulary. 

Darkness IE! 

Daughter^ § 75, A.7. 
David in* 

• T 

Day ^Vt n i s <* a y* to 

day Di-^rr. 

Dead HD. 

Death ma *• nio. 

V T 

Death, to put to j"V|Q 
iZi. ; to be put to D. 

rfib J®. 

Deceit rr^PjQf. 
Deed jlg^bi 
Defence, OJB>&. 

t : 

Defend, to ?y 5?. 

Defile, to Xftft Pi. 

Defraud, to pfcty. 

Delight, s.p^n. 

Delight, to r^gn, de- 
light in f$n w. 5» 

Delighting, a$. f£n* 

Delilah H^St 

Deliver into *)jjp Hi. 

Deliver or rescue 7^^ 
Hi.; p^D -P*. and 

jb*. ; pSrf «.; bS| 

JP». and 5i*. 
Deliverer^ 75 jpar^. Pi. 
Deny, to JtfO, tfpD 

Pi. 
Depart, to {$% *V|D # 
Desert, *. 1*310, 



Dominion 
Desire, to J-fitf Pi. and 

Desire, s. V^tl* 
Despise, to fiji VfrO 
Pi. 

Destroy, to plfiD.^DJ^ 

Destruction Jil^N, 
Devise, to ^p?» DON 

~ T 

Dew 7J3, 
Die, to jyiO, 

r>ig, to ma, nan, 

T T - T 

Mr?. 

Dip, to Snco, 

_ T 

Discomfit, to 00,1 ♦ 

- r 

Discord, s. pjlQ 

(only pZw.) 
Disguise, to 2^£jf7, 

- T 

Dishonor, to U^, 

T T 

Distress, to p!)\f J7i. 
Distress, *. m¥# 

TT 

Do, to ntyy. 

Do good or evil 7OJ 
Do good 2ft» i7i. 

- T 

Do wrong p£^» 
Doings , deeds 

_ : _ 

Dominion u "7£>pjp, 



Door 

Door^l/. 
Double D>Sd3» 
Draw, to (water) 3tft^> 
(a sword) ?h$ t 

L 

Dream, to Q7H« 

Dream, s. Di 7H* 

Drink, to nntr; 

T T 

Drive out , away gj^J 

-T 
Pi. 

Dry up , to become 
dl 7 &y, to make 
dry, PL and #i'. 

Dry land il(£>3\ 

T T - 

Dust -jjy;. 

Dwell, to ^^>, J^jp*, 

- T I - T 

to cause to dwell, to 
let dwell Hi. 

E 

Each #>X, ^N; 

p^ci #$■, f-jg, 

^ §'98, 2. 

T 

Eagle *^, 
Earf^/.* 

Ear of corn J"H72^ 

Early adfo. MET"!, 

Earth p k \V- 

Eat, to 7^ k N* ; to cause 

- T 

to eat , to give to 
eat Hi. 
Eden 



Vocabulary. 
Edom QHN, QVjjjk 
Education ^O^tD. 

T 

Egypt onyp. 

Elder (alderman, Lat. 
senior) fpfj 

Eleven, see § 74. 

Elishah Jft^N. 

Elijah n^Nor!)n^N 

Encamp, to H^PT* 

T T 

End^rnrrN, wp. 

Endure, to "jpy, p^ 
Enemy yfog • [Hi. 
Enter, to Ki3. 
Entreat, to pj|£ w. 3, 

the person for whom 

w.S. 
Envy, to JQH W 

Envious pp p*) (p*<?p. 

an evil eye). 
Ephron fi^M 
Ephraim DH5K* 

Escape, to ftSft ifo* 

- T 

Establish, to (a coven- 
ant) Q%p m. 

Eternal E)7$#, e. ^. 
eternal God ^"7£s$ 
D7ly (y»P- the God 

of eternity, § 83, 6). 
Eternity Q^ty, -jjV 
Ethiopia £^3, 



False 273 
Ethiopian *K*|3 # 
Eunuch OHD. 

• T 

Evening 3^ 

Ever, for Q^^n^ 

Everlasting .—l^TiT?. 

everlasting kindness 

CD*7^ Ittn (see 

Eternal). 

Every wiw, see § 98, 2- 

Evil,«#.jH, fjynf. 

Excel, to Sj^-nSy. 

Exile , to carry into 

Expectation j"17tTJJn, 
Expiate, to *")£3 Pi., 

- T 

to be expiated id.Pu., 
to be e. of, w. ^ 

Extremity fTifp* 

Eye 0f. 



Face Q^5, see § 58, 9. 

• T 

From the face of ^£0. 
Fail, to (=desist)7-jf7 

- T 

Fail, to (== to pine 
away) H 1 "^, to cause 
to fail, id. PL, ftgr) 

T T 

Hi. 

Faithfulness il^DK. 
Fall, to ^. 

- T 

False XW (see §83,6.) 



274 Falsehood 
Falsehood 1pfi?\ 

Fame ygg% 
Far, «#. SfrH 

parbeitin^Srr. 

T • T 

Far away, to put f. a. 

pm a 

Fast, to Q!)¥ # 
Fat, «#. jpgf # 
Father^, §73, A. 1. 

T 

Father-in-law ffiin* 
Fatherless Cjjy, 
Favor pjn, 

Favored, to be ttfj JSa. 

Fear, to J$*l\ 

Fear, S .nN7,^ia 
Feast, «. Jin c )ft] 

T - 

Feast, to keep a J| j|f, 

- T 

Feign, to (=to pretend 

to be) see § 26, 6. 
Fellow tf% 
Fence, to p^ Pi. 

Field nnfcf/ 
Fig ruKn. 

t " : 

Fig-tree «?. 

Fig, green, unripe J£ # 

Fight, to tDtjfc? #?» 

Fill, to >*^70, to be 

Filled, M." r - 
Find,to^D. 

Fire $#/. 



Vocabulary. 
Firmament tt*|3*\ 
First p^*^, in speci- 
fying order of time 

nn^, as nn^3 

^"illS on the first 
of the month. 
First-born Tj^£l # 

Fish^ T ,n^ : 
Five vhnAn&nn 

" t t • -: 

m. 
Fle^torr-Q.D^/ 
Flesh n^/lN^\ 

t t •* : 

Flock fo^ 
Flourish fp^ M. 

- T 

Fold together pjft, 
Food .^0." 

Fool^p3,S^. 
Foolishness J")7!)K f 

Foot ^ dfc. 0^ 

(D>S:n'onlyfigur.= 

• t : 

times) 

ForS,S#. 
For (= because, for the 
sake of) V3, jjfi^, 

For (=in, during, 
within) 3, 

Forbid, to K^3» 

T T 

Forbid! God forbid! 

Force t^i 

Forever DSiy 1 ?, "1#S 

Forget, to rtDSS*. 



Girl 

Former state J7D"JP» 
Forsake, to 3t)?« 
Fortress fn^D* 

t : 

Found, to "|p\ 
Four fin**}., 

t t : - 

Free ^"fift, 

• : T 

Freely Q^CJ, 
FromjO,05P,^D, 

Fruit TJgL 
Fruitful, to make 

Full, to be Js&D K- 
Full, <*$. j^D* 

V T 

Fury HDn. 

. T " 

G 

Garden ?jj # 
Garment fOJ"H J , 

nzni */•> -1J3' 

t : ~ 

Gate *1^/. 
Gather, to J^p P£ 

DpS ». "UK. 
Gazelle Vj^. 
Generation *TJ*!|, *tj*^ # 
Get, to, out XV* ♦ 
Gihon prr»J T 
Girl H^, » 



Give 

Give, to pjjjfc 

Give in possession 
^ru K. a. Hi. 
Gladness ?7Hft^, 
Glance, to fp^' #2. 
Glean, to ftp*?, 

go, to rjSrr, 

Go over, to ^Jf ♦ 
Goup,tonSj;I 

t"t 

Go down, to (of the sun) 
Go out, to NV\ 

T T 

Go out, or be quenched, 
of fire , light JtD3. 

Go, to let (= to desist 
from, to cease from) 

rt£h. 

t r 

^d Sn, D^Stf* 

Gold ^ 

T T 

Good, a$. ^1^3, for 

good fpl0^ t 
Good, tobe^'j^,^^ 

— T 

Good, to do, to benefit 
;}£> Hi. 

- T 

Good tidings, to tell 
g. t., to bring good 
news -\&2 Pi - 

— T 

Goodness *Tbf"J« 
Gracious, to be fjjfj. 
Grape ^^, 
Wild Grapes D^JO* 
Grass J^y, Kg*}/ 

Grave ^|, ^jfl#. 
Great Slli, !H Opfar. 



Vocabulary. 

Great, to be 7-^ (jut. 
Great man 7"j-]Jj T , [A.) 
Ground J7£*7 k v£ 
Ground- corn, grits 
J115H (only plur.) 
Guile nbnO. 



Habitation |"j jjQJ; 
Haman jpjjft 
Hand "J* /. 

Handmaid HDNj se e 

§ 73, 9. 
Hang, to fiSri. 
Harp^pr 
Harvest T¥p. 
Haste, to ^fift Pi- 

- T 

Hate, to $}&, 
Hazael ^${(7. 

Head £>#*), 
Heal, to #£"-), 

T T 

Hebrew HD)/, 
Hear, to yfi$ t 
Hearken, to yffitf t 
Heart 3^—7 (w. sm^*. 

T " 

Heaven D*D8& 

• - T 

Heavy, to be *ft3 # 

" T 

Heavy, adj. 733, 
Hebron Jfj^ ■ 



Hope 275 

Help, to ^, to help 
against jj£ ^ t 

Herd -)prj „. ^ 

r 

Hew, to 7D5» 

- T 

Hezekiah JirpptfT* 
Hide, to ^K.a.Hi., 

.... _ T 

Hide oneself *")^p #&., 
Hid, to be tf^n -Efo 

T T 

High, to set on h. 

2M Pi. 
Most High H*7i?* 

Hiii nn (Kahrt), 

Hire, T to *OJp, 
Hire s. *)%$] 

T T 

Hireling, hired servant 

• T 

Hirom Q*)t|"J, 
Hither nlil. 

T " 

Hold fast 5 pff7. 

Holy ^'ilD > see § 83, 

6 b. T 

Honor, to *ft3, -ft^ 

Honor, «.1to3,-|p» # 

t It: 

Honorable *1D*» 

♦ Itt 

Hope, to 7(7' -B*Vw. 
S ^ S. w. S, 

- T • J 

Hope, s. rrnrfin, 
rnpn. 



276 Horse 

Horse Q!)Q, 
Horseback, to bring on 

Host^^nixn^) 

T T t : 

771. 

House j— v^j <?. /— v^ 

• T 

Household j"V^ 

How ? ! 7|>K, n^%, 

how long? ruany. 

Humble oneself, to^)D 
Hundred j"" 7J$£, dfwa£ 

DTINO. 

• - T 

Husband £?>N. 
Husbandman "OJ$» 



t * - : 

Image D7V* 
Images (= idols) 

• t : 

Imagine, to {£^|"f # 
Incline, to H^J -S*- 

T T 

Increase, to £"10* -S2* 

Inhabit, to ^J^\ to be 

inhabited w£. JVt. 
Inhabitant ^gfy, 
Inherit, to ~>fl3> to 

- T 

leave as heritage id. 
Si. 



Vocabulary. 

Inheritance r"PfT3» 

t -: - 

Iniquity $y-\, fitf, 

Inner part, middle, 
midst y)p t 

Innocent *n^» 

. -J -■» 
Inquire of, to £^1*^ 

- T 

30. occ. 
Instead of jinfl. 
Instruction "^D^lD* 

T 

Integrity D*pjfl. 

Intelligence ptfttJl* 

Intelligent p^Dir? 
Into J, S^^and 

see'§ 19, 6. 
Isaac pf7¥\ 

Israel SjO£». 

t : * 



Jacob 3frj?\ 
Jealousy HSOp. 
Jebus £}!Q*» 
Jehoshaphat^££Vjj'V 
Jerusalem Q'ScW. 
Jethro i^r)\ 

jew t-nrv. 

Joash ^1\ 

Job 3V|J t 

Jonathan [/""Oil"^ > 

Joseph ClpV« 
Joshua Jf J^tST* 



Kiss 
Judah JTWi, 

t : 

Judge, to ft£&\ 

- T 

Judge, s. tOgtr. 
Judgment tD3^D » 

• T 1 

Just p^V. 

Justify, to, or clear one- 
self n-f V -Hi'^', to b e 
justified, id. 



Keep, to (= to guard, 
watch) -^ -fflf 
w.^J^; (=to observe, 
to perform) "|ft£% 

- T 

Keep oneself from (=to 
beware of) lOgfJTi. 

Keep a feast ^jjf7 # 

_ T 

Keeper of sheep HJ^ 

Kill, to jinn, Stop. 

- T " |t 

Kindness IDCf* 

Kindred JTJ^©' 

King rj^p. 

To wiflfe a king t] /D 

Kingdom j-"VD^D> 

n;?Sp?. 

Kish {JMp, 

Kiss, to nj^'J jff". a. J2». 

1 - T 






Knit 

Knit, to ^'p, 
Know, to Jf"!*, to let 

know id. Hi. 
Knowledge H^T 
Known, to make yyi 

Hi. 



Labor, to ^gy, jy\ 
Laboring (= toiling) 

Lad ^|, 

Ladder Q70 ♦ 

T ■• 

Lame |^0C3 # 
Lamp^(_p?.f|^j)m. 
Land p£/., np-TN 
Large «po<& ^}fl^D» 

^st |tv?K. 

Laugh, to jpHtt, 

Law min. 

T 

Lay, to 3355? JK. 

- T 

Lay hold of, to \tf%£\ 

~ T 

w. ace., seldom w. *}, 
Lay up, to 7£y # 

Lead, to /j |^ Pi., 

T T 

Lean, ^j.nnnn/. 

, V T T T 

Leap, to jjStj Pi. 

— T 

Learning ftpS* 
Leave, to 3fJP« 
Leave off, to f)Dt^» 
Lebanon flJ^A 



Vocabulary. 

Left, atfj. ^K'D^i 
Length rpfc, 
Lentiles D*BH# ( onl y 

J*) /• 
Lest ?£), 

Letter ^gp, ]?$£/. 
Lie,to^p^Pi.,'^3 

Pi. 
Lie, ,. ^p^, ^3, 

I V V T T 

Lie down, to '£tftf t 

- T 

Life Q^n, $£}, 
Lift up, to Nfctt. 
Light TJN. 
Like 3, «J03, 1M. 

: : t 

Like, to be HDI* 
Lion v-jX» 

t t ■ - T : 

Little , small , to be 
Little, adj. jH-j, |fjp 
Live, to J-ppj; to keep 

T T 

alive, to save life 
w?. Hi. 

Living, «$. ^j-j, 

lo! behold ifanjn; 

Lo we are! behold 

™! ml, 

Lofty D"^ 

Look, to CO^DJ 5*. 

— T 

Look for (=*= to expect, 

hope) rnj3 i* 



Mercy 277 

Lord jVtN, rtjTj, 
Lost, to be "]!3tf» 

Loud on, Sm 

T T 

Love^o^NO/lN. 

" T - T 

Lovely %TW part. M. 

" T 

Lying ^p^', see §83,6. 

M 

Magnify, to ^-Jjj Pi. 

- T 

Maid-servant nnfitT* 
Maiden fiD^. 
Make, to ff&V, S^iD. 
Make a covenant, to 

" : - t 

Make a pit, to j"7")3 

T T 

Maker HCSty. 

Man Q-IX, WW, ^ 

Manoa 1fa t 

Many Q^H, 

Mart nnponp. 

Master fH^Q^-]^ 

§ 82, 4, b. T 
Meat *J5#3 # 

T T 

Meddle, to yr\ty Hit. 
Meditate, to tl}il* 

T T 

Meet, to Q"lp P*., 

- T 

Melt, to ODO ■#*• 

- T 

Mercy -jflpffc 

Mercy , to have M. on 
Opt*) Pi- w. ace. 



278 Messenger 



Messenger T]N7D» 
Midian pHp, 

Midst rjin «. tjfci 

Might jriha. 

t : 

Mighty 1^^ 
Mill-stone fl/iD» 
Mine (= to me) *7, 
Miriam D*1ft, 
Mischief JtlH* 

*? T 

Mock, to JJ^ w. *?, 

Moment J^f), 
Money £]D3. 
Month £>if7* 
Moon (T*|\ * 

- " T 

Mordechai ♦3!j^Q, 

_ : : t 

Morning *)p2, 
Morrow , to ^HO > 

mrro. 

t t: t 

Mortar t^HDD* 
Mother Otf, § 73. 
Moses n^O« 
Mountain ftfj, § 17, 5. 

Mourn, to ^§p, ^Jtf 
X a. J7&. 

Mourning ^^fcsj , 

"topp» 

Mouth ftQ, § 73, 11. 
Much , many , to be 

am. 



Vocabulary. 

Mule 35& 
Multiply , increase, to 

ron ^ a. m. 

T T 

Multitude fJOJl* 
Murmur, to p7 JVi. 
a. Hi. 



N 

Naked Ql^ (P lur - 

'msrygi. 

Name Og>\ (i>Zw. 

Nation ^J» 
Near, a$. Uhp, 
Needy pOtf, 
Neighbo ur Y^^f, 

Neither^* 
Never D^S.-KS. 
Nevertheless *3"Di3N 
Nigh ajfojj, 

Night rhh. 

t : - 

Noise Jjfejj^ 
NorK^» 
North rj£tf. 

Not kS, b$s, Sa, 

J*K;& not? ^Sn. 

Nothing HD^XP-.kS 
Nothing, for Q3H* 



Or 

Now nny. 

Number, to ^^O* 
Number, s. 1£DQ» 



O ! (vocative case) see 

§ 80, 5. 
Oh! woe I ho! vj;— J, 

Observe, to "O^. 
Of, see § 19, 5; 7 or 

Offer, to HDt. 

- T 

Offering, mist. n^T* 

nrop. 

Off, from fp, ^0» 

on jptr, iny, 

Old, s. a. a$. Jpf 4 
Old,tobejnj(/we.^.) 

On 5, S#, § *?> 6 - 
Once (= one time) 

One ni7N> § 74. 

T V 

One — the other £?>$* 
VHN> see § 97, 4. 

• T 

Only, adv. p^, t]K» 
Only, ad[;. (=only one) 

tit, htit /• 

• t t • : 

Open, to nniD* 

- T 

Oppress , to Vf7^7 » 
Or 1, IN, OH, DSO. 



Ordinance 

Ordinance nnO^'p/. 
Orphan OiJ")*, 

other irW 

Other (= the one — 
the other) HN> § 97, 4. 
Ont of |p # 

Outside, abroad V)tl* 
Oven ^j|; 
Over 5, ^pj § 75, 6. 
Over, to be (= to pass 
away) ^(7, 

Overthrow, to tl5n» 

- T 

OX ")«(# c. ?. 



Paint(Eye-Paint) ^3, 
Palm-tree "^fl, 
Panther ~|ftj, 

" T 

Pardoned, to be jf\f) 

m. 

Parted, to be 775 M. 

- T 

Pass over, to *)%$, 
Pass, to come to |"p j""|, 

Path mm 



Patience fppn, 
Peace Q^^ 

T 

Pen ft]/, 

People D r V CP*-D»ffljW> 

I Peradventure ♦S'lN* 



Vocabulary. 

Perceive, to p^j ift. 
Perish, to I^N* 
Persecute, to frt^ # 
Pestle )^y, 
Pharao fjjniS, 
Philistine *R6lj^|j« 
Pillar fcfltej 

T '• - 

Pious TDI7. 

■ T 

Pit 7J3 <$L flUjjjj W( 
Place QipO (j»W. 

Plant, to ^ftj, 
Plant, si HDy* 
Pleasant D*]7Ji 

• T t 

Pledge, take to P.^pj 

- T 

Plough, to 5^'nn. 

~ T 

Poor, to be made P., 
dispossessed {Jf *)♦ jy*. 

Poor, «. gj£ ffyj§ # 

Portion p^n. 

Possession , to give as 
a P. 9m ^B. 

~ T 

Potiphar hfl'tbiiD* 
Pottage "pfj, 

• T 

Poverty G?*O f 

Pour out, to rr££?', 

Power jy (with sw^. 
Praise, s. n^lfi. 

T • : 

Pray, I pray thee {< J, 



Put 279 

Prayer n^Sfl. 
Preach, to *^3 P*. 
Precept Tip*)/ 
Prepare njj^, to be 

T T 

prepared f.^ 2V». 
Preserve , to 10£% 

~ T 

Price, ODD, 
Pride pit, ' 
Priest JfJ2« 
Prince -)jp $6.DHC?) 

• T 

Proclaim, to K*)p # 

T|T 

Produce,*, *Y)3J?(only 

const.) 
Profane, to 77I7 P«*. 
Project, «. rj^O. 
Property nSn^. 
Prophesy, to $%) M. 

a. iZft. 

Prophet WZft; 
Prostrate oneself, to 

nti&zit. 

T T 

Prove, to p70J PI 

r T 

Province j"QH,2« 

t • : 

Publish, to yp£> Hi. 
Purify oneself, to ttf^T) 

Hit. 
Pursue, to tfri t 
Put, to p!)j^ jfe. 
Put forth, to n%^, 

(= to ripen) ftjpf. 
Put on, to (a garment) 



280 



Quarrel 

Q 



Quarrel, to ^*^ or ^If) 
Quarrel, s. *tf*) (plur. 

Queen HS^O. 

t : - 

Question , hard Q., 
riddle n"Wf. 

T * 

Quiet, to be ODC^. 
)- T 

R 

Rachel ^m, 

" T 

Rage, «. norr* 

T " 

Raiment "]JD» 

Rain, to *^£, to give 

— T 

or to send down rain 

id. Hi. 
Rain, s. ~tfgfi, ffjffr 
Raise, ^pj, Q!|p M. 
Raven ^TJJ^ 
Reach, to ytf Hi. 
Realm frpSo/- 

Reap, to -^p , 
- It 

Bea P OT,oyip,nyp. 

Reason, by R. of 1f2 ♦ 
Rebel, ».'ftjfef. 
Rebuke J33? IK. 

Receive, to np7»75(J 
Pi. 

Recompense, to D7^, 

, - T 

Redeem 7^, 



Vocabulary. 

'Redeemer 7^, 
Refine, to fpV. 
Refined ppf^, 
Refrain J^£ # 
Refuge, s. 3^0 (w. 

Refuse, to j^O Pi. 
Regard, to %&ff\, 
Reign, to T[Sd. 
Reject, to DKD. 
Rejoice, to fSjf. 

~ T 

Remain, to ^Wtf iVi. 



Remain all night, to 



rh 



Hi. 
Remember, to *)%U 

- T 

Remove, to pH*") Hi. 

I - T 
Rend , to (== to tear) 

Render, to ^!j{Jf JBB. 

Repair, to pIS* 
I - T 

Report, s. yiDg\ 
Reproach to v"|^|"|Pi. 
Reproach, s. tlQIH* 

t : v 

Reprobate, to pfcfjp, 

- T 

Request, to make R. 
Require, to 7N£** 

- T 

Require (the blood), to 
Requite, to 70J» 

- T 

Rest, to yy-) m. 

Rest, to give p|!|J) JR. 



Ruth 

Return, to 2}£\ 
Reward, to Q^* Pi. 
Riblah nS^TU 

t : 

Rich, to be or become 
rich **$&$ Hi. 

~ T 

Rich , to feign oneself 
rich ^£ty Hit. 

Richess 1gty, 

Riddle ftTH. 

T • 

Ride, to yys (fut.A.) 
Right, adj. |\p\ 
Righteous pH¥, 
Righteousness p*lif» 

Rise up, to Dip* 

River nm, niN\ 

T T * 

Rob, to ^j, 

-T 

Robe, s. ^0* 
Rock *Vl¥» 
Roll, to SS-U 

- T 

Root out, to W*\$ Pi. 

- T 

Round about ^*JD» 

• T • 

Ruby CW'Jfl (° nl y 

jjZwr.) 
Ruin, s. n^lll (i^r. 

ni:nn,Vni:nn) 

t t: :t 

Rule, to Wp. 
Ruler Sgfo n^ (J& 

• T 

Run, to pi. 

Ruth rm. 



Sacrifice 

s 

Sacrifice, to H3N 

_ T 

Sacrifice, s. |"ON 
Saint t^"i1p. 
Salt, s. rfafy 

Salvation nj/!)££/\ 
Samaria ?HD^» 
Samson ft&Q$ t 
Sanctuary ^""jp. 
Sand Sin. 
Sarah ff^' # 

TT 

Sarai ^jjf, 

Satisfied, to be J^j^ 
and ygj^ (/^. 4^ 
to satisfy id. Hi. 

Save, to ygA Hi. 

Say, to -)£2tf, 

~ T 

Saying (=* namely) 

iOfcXS, § 48, 6;) 
Saying, *. m^K. 

t : • 

Scabbard ^^), 
Scorn, to QNO, pS. 
Scorner t*7\ 

Scribe IfJD. 

Sea q» (>?. Q^). 

Search, to ^pH, "Nfl, 

totffH 

~ T 

Second »jg>, § 74, 3. 
: Secret, *. npSjtfl, 



Vocabulary. 

See, to Hfrn* 
Seed, «. j^jfi 
Seek, to £>-n, ^'p-j 

- T J- T 

Pi. 
Seer, «. j^J 
Seize, to &?)£), 

Sell, to *aa/ 

- # T 

Send, to nb^', to send 

- T 

away i^. Pi. 
Separate, to 7^3 , to 

- T 

to separate oneself 
id. m. , -pf) Jfi a. 

Servant *lj^, 
Serve, to -jgy, 

— T 

Set up, to 3^ J3». 

Set or placed, to be 

id. Ni, 
Settle, to fygfi Hi. 
Shade, shadow, s. 7^ 

(w. sutf..^). 

Shame,s. n0?,p^p 
Shatter, to 13$ Pi. 
Sheaf tlt2bt< (Pi™. 

Shed, to ^£gf, to be 
shed, of blood, id.Pu. 

Shine *VJ5s$, make to 
shine id. Hi. 

ShipfTW. 

t • t: 

Shiver, to V\£*) t 
Shoe 7 £j/, 



Slaughter 281 

Shoot forth, to 7£fi, 

Shore fi-jn. 

Short J^p, ^p 

Shut, to -^p, 

_ T 

Side npTlV, two s. 

sigh, s. fTfia»i, 

t t _ : . 

Sight , in the sight of 

\)$& ofQJ^). 
Sign, 5. ;-TJK (pfor. 

Silence, put to s. Q7K 
JBTi. 

Silver f 



Sin, to ^tOH» to sin 
against 7 KDIl« 

sin, s . ^prr, pj/, 

T - T T - 

Sinai ***Q # 
Sing, to *V)£> J3i\, 
(== to sing praises) 

nor -w. 

~ T 

Singer (singing man) 

Sisera NID'D. 
Sisternin^§73,A3. 

T 

Sit, to y&\ 

skuii n^/- 

Slander, to rg^ JK. 
Slaughter |13tD. 



282 



Slave 



Vocabulary. 



Tent 



Slave -q#. 

Slay, to 'jnn, DTO> 

Sleep, to *£*♦ (fut. 

Sluggard $$jfc 
Smite, to j-JDJ JK. 

T T 

So, ada. JJ» 

Solomon rigjijg^; 
Son J*}, § 73, A. b. 
Song, s. n^\ 
Sorrow, *. 31*00. 

fa* 

Soul {jfcy, mostly/. 

south Dinn, ^* 

Spare, to ^f2tl* 

- T 

Speak, to n?n -?*• 
Spear nO(l/ 

spmtnn^nimn, 
nirin) £ ?. 

Spirt, to, to be sprink- 

iedn?i 

TT 

Spring up, to (-?£?¥♦ 
Spy out, to 7^n Pi-> 

nin. 
staff n^pc^ni&D) 

Stand, to nDJp, D^lD. 
Stand upright, to ^^ 

m. 

Star ^13, 

T 

State, former s. nonp 



Statute pn (plur. 

Stay overnight, to 7?) 7 
Steal, to ^J # 

_ T 

Still, to (TQ^* Hi. 

- T 

Stone p^ (plur. 

stop, to Dtptf . 

Strange, to make one- 
self s. nDJ Hit. 

- T 

Strangeness , foreign- 
ness nD^. 

T " 

StrangernDrf3,§83, 

6. a. §89,4.nji,nr. 

T 

Street ^, Jfofl*) /• 

strength n'3, niv. 

Strengthen, to pfff -^** 
I - T 

Stretch out, to J^'nB, 

rrW. 

- T 

Strip off, to fflffQ 5?., 

- T 

w. two ace. § 85, 2, b. 
Stripe oneself, to id.Hit. 
Stripes ( = beatings) 

Strong, to be pj|f 
(fut.A),-m(fut.A). 

- T 

Strong, adj. pffj, ^ 

subdue, to nnn. 
subtlety mono. 

t : • 

Suddenly DKH3. 



Suffer , to (== to per. 
mit, to let) H?|3 Hi. 

Sun U?12W\ 

Surely p^;'£j>, Inf. 

dbs. § 105, 1. 
Surround, to ^}D» 

- T 

Sustain, to n^D (f ut - 

A.) 
Swear, to yytf M. 
Swift , to be s. nTO 

sword Dnn/. 

Syria Dn^» 



Table, tablet pR*"7 

(^ mrnS) *». 

Tabor niDH, 

Take away, to np7« 

Take up, to #&}, 

T T 

Take from, off, to n^D 
Hi. 

Take, to (capture in 

war) n37. 

- T 

Tarshish tJ^'nfl. 
Teach, to np^ pi -> 

TT ^ ~T 

Tell, to njj Hi. 

- T 

Tender, adj. TH (jP^ 

D^n). 

TentSnK (p*D*S?$ 
and D^HN)- 



Testimony - 

Testimony jTHJ/ /• 
Thanksgiving firtffi, 

T 

That (re^r.) 7£\X. 
That, conj. (in obj. 

sentences ) "")£>£%$ , 

'?, § HI, 1, 2.' 
That, so that 7 w. inf. 

const. § 106', 2 and 

§ 113, b; ng>JS*, 
V 1, § lil,a, 



That not, lest ?£) , 

^5S,§ii2,b. v 

O that ?)7 (negatively 

n*S6), \rv >p, 
,§ no, 1, 2. 

Then V ftf. 

: t 

Thence Q^*, from 

thence Qt^'p* 
Therefore fj"")^, ^, 

Therein nnp^Tjin? 
Thing *)$%" 

Thither H^% 

Though DX 4 

Thought, *. nn^'rro, 
nasi 

t • : 

Throne fr^p? (plur. 

niNp?)^ 

Through J. 

Throw down, to (= to 

cast out) J0p£\ 
Thrust down, to jflfl 

T T 

Thrust through , to, 

m 



Vocabulary. 
Thus rto. n:D:j , p : 

T T J •■ 

Tie, to -)£>>), 

- It 

Tiller "QJ\ 

Time fig (pi QtjT)j; 

or nij^j c. (7. 

Time (= once) Q^£)/ 

Time to come(=future) 

T7ft or IHft D1\ 

T T T T 

Tire, to (= dress the 
head) %Qi Hi. 

- T 

To, unto -[£, § 19, 6. 
To (= D^.) ^ 
Together 117*0. 

t v : 

Tongue '$$'/. 'fljjjjp 

t°p^*o(^d^>o) 

Torch "V£)S. 
Totter, to ft!|ft ^C 
Touch, to Jftj, 

Towards^, Si §19,6. 
Tower 9lJlH # 

t; • 

Transgress, to *"Ot\ 
Traveller fflk* 
Tread (under foot), to 

DEH. 

- T 

Tree Vj;, 
Trouble mtf ♦ 

TT 

Trust, to fihfi HDS 

T T " T 

Truth rip fc Nt/. 

Try, to jra, naj m 

Tumult pOT. 



Violence 283 

Turn, to -flD, 

Turn graciously , to 

ros*. 

T T 

Tyre %, 



Uncircumcised 71^, 
Uncle 7«jL 
Under fifjjfi, § 75, 6. 
Until -jy, 

unto Sn, S. hy> 1& 

§ 19, 6. 
Uphold, to 7ftD. 
Upon Sp, §75, 6. 
Upper-mill-stone ^"l 
Upright 7^\ 0^ * 

T T • T 

Uzziah *Jrtf£$ 

V 

Vain, in V. Ipfc'W 
Vain, to be in V. "OX 
Valley ,^73. 
Vanity N1E>\ 

: t 

Vengeance f >pj r 

Very -|fcp # 
Viairj^/ 
Vine j||, 

Vine-dresser 075 ♦ 
Vinegar ^£(7, 

Vineyard D*D» 
Violence DDI7. 



284 Virtuous 

Virtuous ^J"7 (prop. 

Virtue , accord, to 

§ 83, 6. 
Virtuously , to do v. 

T *T 

Vision Jirn* 

voice SipV-rhSip, 
hiVp) ™. 

Vow, to nil 

vow, s. -n j, 
w 

Wait upon, to 7 0£*1 
Walk, to iSjli 
Walk with, to ?pj-~| 

Wall, s. ")r) (pZwr. 

Want, «. IIDIID. 

Warfare £3^, 
Warn, to ^J #i. 
Wash, to p^S. 
Water, to Hpti? -Ht- 
Water, s. && 
Wave S| (^. S%H 
WaxJJ^^ 
Way rjll ft gr. 

weak n£n, nan /• 
wealth ngfy, §>j^ 

Weep, to H^, 

T T| 

Weeping ^*}> i 11 P- 

Weigh, to Sp^\ 

Welfare y\ft, * 

Well »|JK| /., *Hfof. 



Vocabulary. 

what ftp. (to* rip, 

§ 24, 1. 

wheat n&n. 

T " 

When *3, 3 or ^ w. 

in/, const., § 106, 2. 
Whence 7*Kp, 
Where ft»& 
Wherefore njTTS)^ 
Wherein npi" 
Wherewith h^B« 
Whether Q^/ 
While ^ w. the wi/1 

«rorf.,'§ 106, 2. 
While, all the W. 

Whisper, to ^"nS Eft- 
Whither ?rttt*/ 

T T 

Whither , adv. rel. 

Who%p, §2*4.' 
Whole 73 , whole of 

■fat 

T 

Whose (= to whom) ? 

why nsV, pyb\ 

Wicked $&% 
Wickedness 'Jf$p?\ t 

Widow n^Sk/ 

Wifen^I§ :, f3, B2. 

Willing , T to be ftg&Nt, 
or by the /ttf. § 32, 
1, 2 and § 101, I a. 

Window p^fT 

Winter Vfip. 

wisdom nbDfi* 



Zion 

Wise , to be CDDtT 

( fut. A.) 
Wise, adj. Q3C7, 

T T 

Wisely (■= in wisdom) 

npini. 
with i : n^ criK), 

D^.npy (onlyw. 

within rpro* ^.p? 

Without (= outwards) 

pro, njpnriji 

Witness -JJ^, 

Woman n^'^S' § 73, 

B2. 
Wood Vy. 
Word 131» 
Work, to ijy, S^» 

work^jte, nniDj? 
world Snn, oSiy. 

Worn out, adj. TYTZb 

Would God that ! ^» 

Wrath ftfr< (w. sw^T. 

Wrest, to nt03 -Hi*. 
Write, to nn3. 
Wrong, to do pfcty,- 
Wrong, s. nSiy. T 

Y 

Year fjjffi 

Yet ni# jjg; 

Young man *y^5» 

z 

Zionp^, 



CONTENTS. 



JPART I. 

OF THE ELEMENTS. 



§ i. 

" 2. 
4 3. 

" 4. 
"5. 
" 6. 
" 7. 
" 8. 
" 9. 
" 10. 

" 11. 



CHAPTER I. 

Page. 

TheAlphabet 1 

Division of Letters 3 

Vowel-Letters and Vowel- 
Signs 3 

Sh'va 7 

Composite Sh'va 8 

Patach Furtive . 8 

Dagesh and Mappik 9 

Syllables 10 

Accents, Metheg, Makkef.. 11 
Distinction of Kamets and 

Kamets-Chatuph 18 

Distinction of Vocal and 
Silent Sh'va 19 



CHAPTER II. 

Peculiarities and Changes of 
Letters and Vowels. 

§12. Changes of Consonants 20 

" 13. Peculiarities of the Gut- 
turals., 23 

" 14. Vowel Changes. 23 

CHAPTER III. 

§15. Servile Letters 26 

" 16. The Prefixes nt^D •• 27 

" 17. The Article 28 

"18. The Prefixes ^DV 29 

u 19. Cases of Nouns and Pro- 
nouns 32 



CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronoun. 

Page. 

§20. The Personal Pronoun 34 

"21. Nominal Suffixes 36 

"22, Demonstrative Pronoun.... 38 

"23. The Relative 40 

"24. The Interrogative Pronoun 41 

CHAPTER v. 

Of the Verb. 

§25. General View 44 

" 26. Signification and Charac- 
teristics of the Conjugations 45 

"27. Inflection 47 

"28. Classes 47 

CHAPTER VI. 

The Regular Verb. Explanation of 
the Second Paradigm. 

§ 29. The Preterite 48 

" 30. The Infinitive 51 

"31. TheFuture 52 

" 82. The Lengthened Future or 

. Optative 54 

"33. Vav Conversive 55 

"34. The Imperative 67 

"35. The Participle... 59 

"36. Niphal : 61 

" 37. Piel andPual 64 

" 38. Hiphil and Hophal 67 

"39. Hithpael 70 

CHAPTER VII. 

The Gutturals. 
§40. Verbs Pe Guttural 73 



286 



Contents. 



Page. 

§ 41. Verbs Ayin Guttural 74 

" 42. Verbs Lamed Guttural .... 76 

CHAPTER VIII. 

The Suffixes of the Verb. 

In General 78 

§ 48. The Preterite with Suf- 
fixes...". 79 

" 44. The Future with Suffixes 80 
"45. The Infinitive with Suf- 
fixes 82 

" 46. The Imperative with Suf- 
fixes 83 

" 47. The Participle with Suf- 
fixes 84 



CJ1APTER IX. 

Irregular Verbs. 

Verbs ^"J 86 

Verbstf''^ 87 

Verbs |"£ 89 

Verbs **£) 91 

Verbs yy 94 

Verbs yy and V'jf 98 

Verbs f}"S 101 

Verbs Doubly Anomalous 105 

CHAPTER X, 

Nouns. 

In General. Formation and 

Inflection..., 108 

The Gender 113 

The Plural and Dual 116 

The Construct State 119 

Rules for the Inflection of 

Masculine Nouns 121 

Declension of Masculine 

Nouns 122 

First Declension 123 

Second Declension 124 



§48. 
"49. 
"50. 
" 51. 
" 52. 
" 53. 
" 54. 
" 65. 



§56. 

" 57. 

" 58. 
" 59. 
" 60. 

" 61. 

" 62. 
V. 63. 



Page. 

§ 64. Third Declension 128 

"65. Fourth Declension 130 

" 66. Fifth Declension 133 

" 67. The Formation of Femi- 
nine Nouns 138 

" 68. Declension of Feminine 

Nouns 138 

"69. First Declension 139 

" 70. Second Declension 140 

"71. Third Declension 143 

" 72. Fourth Declension 144 

" 73. Irregular Nouns 147 

"74. The Numerals 149 

CHAPTER XI. 

Particles. 
§75. In General 153 



i*-ajr,t ii. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER T. 

The Essential Parts of a Sentence. 

§76. The Subject 157 

"77. The Copula 158 

" 78. The Predicate and its 
Agreement with the Sub- 
ject 159 

"79. Verbal Arrangement 161 

CHAPTER II. 

Syntax of the Parts of Speech. 

\ 80. The Article 162 

The Noun 

§81. Gender 164 

< 82. Number 164 

' 83. The Cases. ConstructState 

and the Genitive 166 

'84. Dative 168 



Contents 



§85. 
"86. 
"87. 
"88. 
"89. 

"90. 
" 91. 
" 92. 



§93. 
" 94. 
" 95. 
"96. 
" 97. 
"98. 



Page. 

Accusative 168 

The Absolute Case 170 

Apposition 171 

Duplication of Nouns .... 171 
Substantives used in the 

place of Adjectives 171 

Adjectives 172 

Comparison 172 

Numerals 173 

Pronouns. 

Personal Pronoun 174 " 113. 

Demonstrative 175 

Interrogative 177 "114 

Relative 177 

Reflexive and Reciprocal 178 " 
Other Pronouns 179 



§ 108 



109 



110 



111 



112. 



The Verb. 

§ 99. In General 180 

" 100. The Preterite 180 

" 101. The Future 182 

" 102. The Conversive Yav 183 

" 103. Paragogic and Apoco- 
pated Future 184 

"104. The Imperative 184 

" 105. Infinitive Absolute 185 

" 106. Infinitive Construct 186 

" 107. The Participle 1891 



" 116. 
"117. 

" 118. 

" 119. 



287 
Particles. 

Page. 

. Particles of NegativeSen- 

tences 190 

. Particles of Interrogative 

Sentences 192 

. Particles of OptativeSen- 

tences 192 

Particles of Objective 

Sentences 193 

Particles of Final Sen- 
tences 193 

Particles of Inferential 

Sentences 194 

Particles of Temporal 

Sentences 194 

Particles of Causal Sen- 
tences 194 

Particles of Conditional 

Sentences 194 

Particles of Disjunctive 

Sentences 196 

Particles of Adversative 
Sentences 196 

Interjections 196 

Paradigms 197 

Chrestomathy 220 

Vocabulary I. 243 

Vocabulary II. 269 



288 



Abbreviations and Corrections. 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



abs. — absolute 
dbstr. — abstract. 
ace. — accusative 
act. — active 
adj. — adjective 
adv. — adverb 
apocop. — apocopated 
art. — article 
const, st. ) construct 
c. st. \ state 
comm. — common 
comp. — compare 
conj . — conj unction 

) exempli gratia, 
'*' ) for example 

y ' y feminine 

fr, b. — from bottom 
fr. U— from top 



fut. — future 

gen. — genitive 

gen. — generally 

Hi.— Hiphil 

Ho. — Hophal 

Hit. — Hithpael 

i. e. — id est 

ib. — ibidem 

imp. — imperative 

inf. — infinitive 

inter j. - interjection 

masc. ) ,. 

y masculine 

Ni. — Niphal 
N.— Note 

n. p. — proper name 
obj. — object 
orig. — originally 
p.— page 



^'[person 

part. — participle 
pass. — passive 
in p. — in pause 
Pi.— Piel 

$• | plural 

prob. — probable 
prop. — properly 
Pu.— Pual 
reflex. — reflexive 
9c. — scilicet 

J^'j singular 

f^' X substantive 

suff. — suffix 
tr. — transitive 



CORRECTIONS, 



Page. 

7, 
12, 
14, 
15, 

17, 2, 
27, 
31, 
51, 
53, 
56, 

59, 
U 

61. 



65, 
66, 



Line. 

1, fr. b. 

1, fr. b. 

7, fr. t. 

13, fr. b. 

5, fr. t. 

13, fr. b. 
3, fr. b. 

3, fr. b. 
1, fr. b. 
7, fr. b. 

14, fr. b. 
13, fr. b. 

4, fr. b. 

6, fr. b. 



h^Tti 



Read. 



1, 14 • ' 

afformativea 

~T 

for larger type, 
read : asterisk!. 



nSnin 



2, fr. t. t 



M 



Page. 

69, 

73, 

85, 

96, 

97, 

116, 

119, 

120, 

127, 

141, 

147, 



Line. 

2, fr. b. 

16, fr. b. 
12, fr. t. 

3, fr. t. 
9, fr. t. 

4, fr. b. 
6, fr.b. 

10, fr. t. 

4, fr. t. 

14, fr. t. 

17, fr. t. 



Read. 



18, 
167, 9, fr. b. 
169, 2, fr. t. 
180, 10,fr.t. nXt^D 



nk,"rivjan 
nmhb 

t •• : - 

for step-father, 
read: father-in-law 
mother-in-law 
§96, 4 






A NEW PRACTICAL HEBREW GRAMMAR 

BY 

Solomon Deutsch, A. M., Ph. D. 



8vo. Price $2.50. 



•Henry Halt & Co., New York. 



From Prof. A. P. Peahody, Acting President of Harvard University. 

I cannot express myself too warmly as to its surpassing excellence. My 
belief is that, with the sole use of your Grammar a student could become a 
more accurate Hebrew scholar, than by reading half the Old Testament with 
the use of any other Hebrew Grammar with which I am acquainted. 

Dr. Ezra Allot, of Harvard University. 

says of the work : 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar will be the means of imparting a more 
thorough knowledge of Hebrew than is gained by the study of the ordinary 
Grammars in the ordinary way. 

From B. L. Gildersleeve, D.D., Prof, in the University of Virginia. 

I have introduced the work as a text-book into the University course and I 
should be glad to see it.generally introduced into our Theological Seminaries. 

From the Bight Rev. W. R. Whittingham, D.D., LL.D., P. E. Bishop 
of the Diocese of Maryland. 

I find Dr. Deutsch's Grammar in many respects much better adapted to 
the use of beginners than any similar work in the English language with 
which I am acquainted. 

From Rev. E. P. Barrows, D.D., Professor at Andover 
Theological School. 

Conciseness and comprehensiveness are the qualities that mark this 
Grammar. The rules are expressed with neatness, brevity, and clearness. 

Thus he has been able to compress into 219 octavo pages (not reckoning 
the Chrestomathy at the end) a great amount of matter. The author is 
evidently a thorough master of his subject, and his statements are accurate. 

From Prof. Geo. E. Day, D.D., Prof, of Hebrew in Yale College. 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar has some decided advantages over the 
larger Hebrew Grammars in common use. 



From Rev. Dr. S. Adler, Rabbi of the Temple "Emanuel" New York. 

The undersigned has subjected different portions of Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew 
Grammar to a close and careful examination, and has everywhere recog- 
nized the hand of a master — of a man uniting a thorough knowledge of his 
subject, with the skill and experience of a teacher. The work is both con- 
cise and comprehensive, combining thoroughness of treatment and fullness of 
matter with brevity and precision ; and it will prove a valuable auxiliary 
alike to teacher and scholar, and in the schoolroom as well as in the closet. 

The Nation. 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar is evidently the product not only of 
conscientious, but also of long and assiduous labor, as well as of extensive 
knowledge ; and as regards the method, we can say without hesitation, that 
we have never yet met with a manual, so pleasantly paving the way to the 
literary treasures of an ancient language. It fully deserves to be ranked 
among the foremost productions of its kind, whether in America or in Europe. 

The Catholic World 

says, that it is " beyond doubt the best school-book of its kind that has 
appeared from the American Press." 

The Southern Review, 

Dr. Deutsch's Hebrew Grammar is indeed an admirable manual for 
theological students, far superior, as such, to the Grammar of Gesenius. 

The Israelite. 

Tt is nearer approaching our idea of a practical Hebrew Grammar than 
any other book known to us. It contains all that is necessary to know of 
the Hebrew to read the Bible in their original, and it contains all that in a 
pleasant and practical form. 

The Jewish Messenger. 

Dr. Deutsch of Baltimore is known as a thorough Hebraist, and has evi- 
dently enjoyed valuable experience as a teacher. He has solved the problem 
of presenting a Hebrew Ollendorf. The work is eminently practical and, as 
we have said, should be promptly introduced into our schools. 

The New Jerusalem Messenger. 

We cordially unite with Rev. A. P. Peabody in his commendation of the 
book, and hope it may be speedily introduced into all our theological schools. 

In the Journal and Messenger, A Baptist Family News-Paper, 

Rev. Geo. Varden, Ph. D., says : Everything that facilitates the knowledge 
of the Hebrew Scriptures we hail with unusual delight. Such a work is 
this Grammar by Dr. Deutsch. After a year's acquaintance we unhesi- 
tatingly proclaim its merits. A beautiful simplicity holds sway throughout 
this entire book. The syntax is a model of scholarly condensation. 



A KEY TO THE PENTATEUCH, 

Explanatory of 

THE TEXT AND THE GRAMMATICAL FORMS, 

By Solomon Deutsch, A. M., Ph. D. 

Author of " A New Practical Hebrew Grammar." 



8vo. Price $1.50. 



Henry Holt & Co., New York. 



Part I. Genesis. 



From Prof. A. P. Peabody, Late Acting President of Harvard 

University. 

I have examined with care and with great pleasure the First Part of 
your Key to the Pentateuch. It seems to me conformed to the only true 
method of teaching Hebrew. In order to use it, the pupil would need to 
commit to memory, at the outset, very few and simple forms and principles, 
and would acquire his knowledge of the grammar in detail, in immediate 
connection with the word of the sacred text. When I taught Hebrew, I was 
accustomed to do in manuscript for my pupils the very work — as far as I 
was able — which you have done in your Key. Your book has an ulterior 
value as a commentary on Genesis, and in that respect it seems to me pre- 
eminently sound and richly instructive. 

From Dr. B. L. Gildersleeve, 

Prof, in the University of Virginia. 

Dr. Deutsch's Key to the Pentateuch is a valuable addition to the 
apparatus of the teacher and of the student of Hebrew. 

From Dr. Geo. E. Day, 

Prof, of Hebrew in Yale College. 

The student of Hebrew who has not the help of a living instructor will 
here find the solution of the more important difficulties and references to 
the proper sections in the Grammar. By using it, after his own efforts have 
been unsuccessful, it will become to him a true " Key " to unlock difficulties. 

From Rev. J. Packard, D.D., 

Prof, of Hebrew in the Theological Seminary of Va. 

1 The plan on which it is constructed is an admirable one, and exactly 
adapted to the wants of students. 



From Rev. F. S. Hoyt, 

Prof, of Hebrew in the Ohio Wesleyan University. 

The work seems to me to be admirably executed, and the more fre- 
quently I examine it, the more favorably it impresses me with its accuracy, 
and its utility. Students will find it an admirable help in their preparation 
for the recitation-room, and those who have not the aid of a living teacher, 
will find it invaluable. 

From Prof. Howard Osgood, Chester, Pa. 

Your work supplies a want deeply felt by students, and I am sure will 
be hailed with delight not only by students but by a larger class of ministers 
who — by it — will be enabled to keep up and add to their knowledge of 
Hebrew. 

From the Nation. 

The work is to be " the means of introducing the student to a full and 
thorough understanding of the Hebrew text of the Bible," being chiefly cal- 
culated to spare such beginners as have acquired some grammatical knowl- 
edge of Hebrew the trouble of hunting up roots, forms, and exceptions in 
dictionaries and grammars, and to enable them to study the Hebrew text 
without a teacher, or fully to prepare at home for every school lesson. The 
work is very elaborate and very carefully done. It will thus undoubtedly 
be found an excellent help and guide both by students and teachers. 

From the Jewish Times. 
1871. No. 23. 

The learned and indefatigable author has presented a manual, which 
greatly facilitates the labor of the teacher, and is of incalculable benefit to 
the student of Hebrew. It is concise, scientific, and practical, and, hence, a 
worthy successor to the author's previous production of " A New Practical 
Hebrew Grammar." Besides the definition and derivation of every word in 
Genesis, there are added the paradigms, and valuable historical, geographi- 
cal, and archaeological explanations, which are remarkable for their concise- 
ness and perspicuity. The execution betrays the hand of a master. The 
work of Dr. Deutsch surpasses all similar school-books, and deserves to be 
introduced into every school and institution where the Hebrew language is 
cultivated. 

From the Jewish Messenger. 

August 4, 1871. Vol. 30— No. 5. 

A work which students and teachers will cherish, is emphatically our 
opinion of Dr. Deutsch's latest addition to Hebrew Literature. Simple as 
is its plan, it is one which might well be adopted with other languages, and 
thus prove a boon to the hard worked student. The author has thus fur- 
nished ample evidence of his desire to popularize the sacred language, and 
to remove many of the impediments under which the student was wont to 
labor. We cordially commend the work to the public, and trust that Dr. 
Deutsch will be so liberally encouraged that he will not hesitate to produce 
at an early day the remaining volumes of his series. * ' 



* 






"^v* 








"00^ 



h o <S' ,vV 

J K V* von '/- V ' . V «, * * T 



* 







<* ■' „ k * A 







•o, ** , s - ,0 <r y . * i 

''o V iv ■■■" ' " * ^> 



>i?°* 






"p. 









""o tf 



I 




o 



•to 


./ 




















V 


-cr 


'"»« ' 


^ 

"? 


^ 


^ 







LIBRARY OF CONGRESS . £ 

022 204 780 8 



